Conversational Automatic Programming Function Ii For Lathe Operator's Manual (B-61804e-2 - 05) PDF

Convertional Automatic Programming
Function II for Lathe
Operator's Manual
B-61804E-2/05
B–61804E–2/05 Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
I. GENERAL
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
II. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

1. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN FAPT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3. SOFT KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT

1. SYMBOLIC FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2. START OF SYMBOLIC FAPT PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3. EXECUTION OF SYMBOLIC FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3.1 BLANK AND DRAWING (DRAWING AND BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2 BLANK AND PART (PART FIGURE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.2.1 Drawing of Program Coordinate System and Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2.2 Part Figure Input (Input Method of with Figure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2.3 Input and Modification of Part Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.2.4 Blank Figure Input of Special Figure Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.2.5 Part Figure Input (Directory Input System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.2.6 Batch Input Functions for Chamfering and Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.2.7 Pattern Figure Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.2.8 Function for Defining the Center of an Arc According to a Given Single Coordinate . . . . . . . . 80
3.3 MACHINE ZERO POINT AND TURRET POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.4 MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.4.1 Selection of Kinds of Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.4.2 Process Change and Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.4.3 Output of Only Single Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
c–1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–61804E–2/05
3.4.4 Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

3.4.5 Machining Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.4.6 Passing Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.4.7 Specifying the Direction and Area of Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.4.8 Function for Automatically Setting Area Division Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.4.9 Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.4.10 Setting the Tool Data and Tooling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.4.11 Drawing a Cutting Area and Painting a Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.5 NC DATA PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3.5.1 Preparations of NC Data and Registrations of Machining Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3.5.2 Precautions to be Taken with Background Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.5.3 Display of Machining Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.5.4 Process Editing Function (Only with 2–path Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.5.5 Special Block Output to both Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.5.6 Outputting the NC Data of a Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.6 CHECKING NC DATA (ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3.6.1 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3.6.2 Flow of Animation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
3.6.3 Starting an Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
3.6.4 Setting of Parameters for Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3.6.5 Setting of Chuck Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.6.6 Setting of Tailstock Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3.6.7 Setting of Tool Holder Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.6.8 Enlargement and Reduction in the Animated Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.6.9 Related System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
3.6.10 Input/Output of Graphic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

4.1 SETTING OF SUB CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.2 INPUT/OUTPUT OF SUB CYCLE FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.3 DEFINITION OF “SUB CYCLE” PROCESS IN DEFINITION OF MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.4 PROCESS EDITING OF SUB CYCLE (2–PATH LATHE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
4.5 OUTPUT OF NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.6 CAUTIONS AND NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION (2–PATH LATHE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

5.1 BALANCE CUTTING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.2 SPECIFICATION METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.3 USING THE AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.4 PROCESS EDITING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.5 NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
5.6 RELATED PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.7 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL FOR BALANCE CUT B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.8 CAUTION AND NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
c–2
B–61804E–2/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS
6. AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15–TTFB ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

6.1 EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6.2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
6.3 SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
6.4 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
IV. VARIOUS FILE AND DATA

1. MEMORY COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
1.1 MAIN MEMORY AND SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
1.1.1 Submemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
1.1.2 Main Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
1.2 DISPLAY OF SUBMEMORY FILE NAME AND FILE DELETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
1.3 ADDITIONAL PARAMETER OF SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
1.4 NO. OF FILES REGISTERABLE IN SUB–MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT WITH SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.1.1 System Parameter, MTF, Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.1.2 Family Program, Material Data, Tooling Information Sub Cycle File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.1.3 File Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
2.1.4 Function For Automatically Registering Parameters and Data in Submemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
2.2 COLLATION AND INPUT/OUTPUT WITH FLOPPY CASSETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
2.2.1 System Parameter, MTF, Tool Data, Setting Data, Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
2.2.2 Family Program, Material Data, Tooling Information, Sub Cycle File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2.2.3 Handling of Floppy Cassette and Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2.3 FAPT I/O INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2.4 REGISTRATION OF FILE NAME ONTO FLOPPY CASSETTE, HANDY FILE (OPTION) . . . . 228
2.5 FILE DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
2.5.1 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
2.5.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
2.5.3 Input/Output Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
2.5.4 File Name Registration in the Floppy Cassette or Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
V. SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA

1. MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
1.1 MATERIAL DATA AND MATERIAL FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
1.2 SETTING AND DATA WHICH CAN DISPLAYED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
1.3 OPERATION METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
1.3.1 Method of Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
1.3.2 Method of Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
1.3.3 Method of Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
1.4 INPUT/OUTPUT OF MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
1.5 NOTES ON MATERIAL FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
c–3
2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

2.1 TOOL DATA, TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
2.2 TOOL DATA DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
2.3 INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
2.3.1 Tool Data Input/Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
2.4 TOOLING INFORMATION DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
2.5 INITIALIZATION OF TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
2.6 TOOL FIGURE DATA AND SETTING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
2.6.1 General Lathe Setting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
2.6.2 Vertical Lathe Setting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
3. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

3.1 DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
3.2 OUTPUT/INPUT AND COLLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
3.3 FORMAT OF PARAMETER TAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
3.4 ERROR DISPLAY MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
VI. AUXILIARY JOBS

1. SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2. CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT (MM/INCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
3. CHANGING THE NUMBER OF REGISTERED TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
VII. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT

1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
1.1 SKIP FUNCTION OF PAGE AND QUESTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
1.2 INCREMENTAL DESIGNATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
1.3 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
1.3.1 Designation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
1.4 NC DATA OUTPUT BY SINGLE STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
1.4.1 Single Step of Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
1.4.2 Single Step of Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
1.5 RE–OUTPUT OF NC DATA BY EACH PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
1.6 OUTPUT IN MAIN PROGRAM AND SUBPROGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
1.7 S CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
1.8 SIMULTANEOUS 1 AXIS MOVEMENT IN APPROACH AND RETURN RELIEF . . . . . . . . . . . 322
1.8.1 Setting of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
1.8.2 NC Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
1.9 UTILIZATION OF DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
1.10 APPLICATION FOR NC CHASER LATHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
c–4
1.11 INTERFERENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

1.11.1 Interference Check by Tool Shape and Machining Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
1.11.2 Interference Check in Approach and Return relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
1.11.3 Grooving when the Tool Width and Groove Width are the Same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
1.11.4 Approach and Relief to Inner Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
1.12 INITIAL SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
1.12.1 Screen Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
1.12.2 Setting Initial Screen Display Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
1.12.3 Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
1.12.4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
1.12.5 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
1.13 OUTPUTTING NC DATA IN THE FS15T/16T FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
1.13.1 MTF Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
1.13.2 Supplementary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
1.14 FUNCTION FOR PREPARING THE NEXT TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
1.15 OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR INTERPOLATION RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
2. CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

2.1 TOOL FIGURE AND SETTING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
2.2 CUTTING DIRECTION AND CUTTING EDGE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
2.3 ROUGH CUTTING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
2.4 JUDGEMENT OF POCKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
2.5 DIVISION OF MACHINING AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
2.6 SURPLUS THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
2.6.1 Finish Allowance and Surplus Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
2.6.2 Surplus Thickness and Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
2.6.3 Closed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
2.6.4 Definition of Optional Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
2.7 GROOVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
2.7.1 Tool Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
2.7.2 Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
2.7.3 Blank Figure in Grooving Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
2.7.4 Groove Bottom Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
2.7.5 Concaved Parts in Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
2.8 DEPTH OF CUT (D) IN DRILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
2.9 THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
2.9.1 Threading Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
2.9.2 Threading Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
2.9.3 Depth of Screw Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
2.10 CUTTING OVERHUNG PORTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
2.11 ERROR WHEN NC DATA IS PREPARED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
2.12 OTHER PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
2.12.1 Chucking Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
2.12.2 Cutting Start Position and Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
2.12.3 Method of Stopping the Tool on Z Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
2.12.4 Tool Path in Finish Cutting and Semi–finish Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
c–5
VIII. C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION

1. PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
1.1 KIND OF MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
1.2 SPECIFICATION OF C–AXIS MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
1.3 DESIGNATION OF C–AXIS FIGURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
1.3.1 Inserting or Deleting C–axis Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
1.3.2 Details of C–axis Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
1.4 MILLING IN MULTIPLE PLANES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
1.5 C–AXIS MACHINING WITH A MACHINING PLANE SPECIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
2. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

2.1 SPECIFICATION OF C–AXIS MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
2.1.1 Kind of C–axis Machining Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
2.1.2 Tool Data for C–axis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
2.1.3 Machining Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
2.1.4 Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
2.1.5 Specifying the Cutting Position for C–axis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
2.2 BLIND HOLE AND THROUGH HOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION (MENU 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

3.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
3.2 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
3.2.1 C–axis FAPT Animated Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
3.2.2 Parameter Screen for Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
4. MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

4.1 MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
4.2 TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
4.2.1 Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
4.2.2 Input and Output of the Tool Data and Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
4.2.3 Displaying and Setting of Tooling Informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
5. MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
5.1 MTF SETTING WHEN C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION IS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
5.2 NC DATA OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
5.3 RIGID TAPPING NC DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
5.4 FACE MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
5.5 SIDE MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
5.6 G85/G89 BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
6. CAUTIONS ON C–AXIS FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

6.1 SIMULTANEOUS AXIS MOVE CONTROL OF APPROACH AND RETURN RELIEF . . . . . . . 472
6.1.1 Setting of Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
6.1.2 Specification of Move Order at the Time of the Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
6.1.3 Type of NC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
6.2 SPINDLE POSITIONING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
c–6
7. IN–FEED MACHINING IN C–AXIS FACE MILLING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

7.1 FIGURE DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
7.2 MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
7.3 SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
7.4 MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
7.5 TOOL PATH DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
IX. Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION

1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
1.1 DRILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
1.2 MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
1.3 ROTATING THE MACHINING PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
2. PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

2.1 SPECIFYING A Y–AXIS MACHINING PROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
2.2 SPECIFYING THE Y–AXIS FIGURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
3. SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS (MENU 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
4. DEFINING MACHINING (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

4.1 MACHINING DEFINITION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
4.2 TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
4.3 CUTTING AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
4.4 CUTTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
5. ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
7. NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

7.1 SETTING MTF PARAMETERS WHEN THE Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION IS SUPPORTED . . . . 554
8. NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
X. BACK MACHINING FAPT

1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
2. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
2.1 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
2.1.1 Material Data Input (Menu No.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
2.1.2 Part Figure Input (Menu No.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
2.1.3 Home Position and Turret Index Position (Menu No.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
2.1.4 Machining Definition (Menu No.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
2.1.5 NC Data Preparation (Menu No.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
2.1.6 Animation Drawing (Menu No.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
c–7
2.2 PARAMETERS, ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

2.2.1 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
2.2.2 MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
2.2.3 Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
2.3 WARNINGS AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
3. EXAMPLE OF NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
XI. AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION

1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

2.1 DEFINING A NEW PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
2.2 MODIFYING A DEFINED PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
3. SETTING THE MACHINING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION AND

NOTES ON ITS USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
4.1 AUTOMATIC SELECTION OF A TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
4.2 DETERMINING INVERSE PROCESSES
(AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION B OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
4.3 CUTTING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
4.4 AREA DIVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
4.5 RESIDUAL MACHINING AND THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
4.6 CENTER DRILLING AND BAR FEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
4.7 MULTITIER DRILLING
(B OPTION FOR THE AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . 602
4.8 AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FOR A CLOSED FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
4.9 MACHINING FOR WHICH AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION
CANNOT BE USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
5. SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING

1. SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
2. DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
3. DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
4. HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
c–8
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

5.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
5.2 DEFINITION BY MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
5.2.1 Tool Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
5.2.2 Cutting Area Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
5.2.3 Cutting Condition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
5.3 AUTOMATIC PROCESSING DECISION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
5.3.1 Processing Area Division Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
5.3.2 Process Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
5.3.3 Automatic Processing Decision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
5.3.4 Process Area Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
6. NC DATA PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
7. MACHINING TIME DISPLAY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
8. SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
9. NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
9.1 TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
9.2 TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
9.3 RELATION WITH BACK–SIDE MACHINING FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
9.4 RELATION WITH 4–AXIS LATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
XIII. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II

1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
2. FLOW OF ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
3. OPERATION PROCEDURE FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

4.1 ANIMATED SIMULATION OF TURNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
4.2 ANIMATED SIMULATION WITH GRADATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
4.3 C–AXIS ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
4.4 Y–AXIS ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
4.5 INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
4.6 ANIMATED SIMULATION FOR TWO–PATH LATHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
4.7 SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
5. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
6. SUPPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
c–9
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
A.1 SETTING DATA TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
A.2 SYSTEM PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
A.3 MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF) TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
A.4 FUNCTION TABLE (MTF 2000S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
A.4.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
A.4.2 Function Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
A.4.3 Size of Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
A.4.4 Reference of Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
A.4.5 Referencing an Optional Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
A.5 ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
A.5.1 Errors Common to All Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
A.5.2 Errors at Defining Figures (Menu 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
A.5.3 Errors at Machining Definition (Menu 4) and NC Data Preparation (Menu 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
A.5.4 Errors at Animation Drawing (Menu 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
A.5.5 Errors at Accessing the Sub–memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
A.5.6 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

B.1 MACHINING DEFINITION FOR 5700 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
B.1.1 Machining Definition of Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
B.1.1.1 Selection of kinds of machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
B.1.1.2 Process change and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
B.1.1.3 Output of only single process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
B.1.1.4 Tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
B.1.1.5 Machining start position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
B.1.1.6 Passing point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
B.1.1.7 Cutting direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
B.1.1.8 Cutting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
B.1.1.9 Cutting area definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
B.1.2 Cut off Machining, Bar Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
B.1.2.1 Cut off machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
B.1.2.2 Bar feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
B.1.3 Machining Definition of C–axis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
B.1.3.1 Specification of C–axis machining definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
B.1.3.2 Explanatory drawing of cutting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
B.1.3.3 Blind hole and through hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
B.2 AUTOMATIC PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR 5700 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
B.2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
B.2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
B.2.3 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
B.2.3.1 Setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
B.2.3.2 Tool data and tooling information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
B.2.4 Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
c–10
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration).
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the operation
of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.
s–1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–61804E–2/05
1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
D Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–2
B–61804E–2/05 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2 GENERAL WARNINGS
WARNING
1. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data on the screen. Operating the
machine with incorrect data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
2. When the tool offset function is used, before activating the machine, check the direction and
value of the offset to ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. Any
collision may cause damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user.
3. Before starting the NC program prepared using the conversational function, thoroughly check
the contents of the NC data to ensure that the tool path and machining processes are set correctly,
and that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and
tailstock). Before starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that the tool will not
collide with the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and tailstock). For example, start
the machining program without mounting a workpiece on the machine. Any collision may cause
damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user.
4. Before using the conversational function to prepare a machining program, determine whether
the tool data, material data, setting data, system parameters, and MTF data are set as specified
by the machine tool builder. If these data values are not set appropriately, the cutting conditions
necessary for machining may not be set properly, possibly causing damage to the tool, or injury
to the user.
s–3
I. GENERAL
B–61804E–2/05 GENERAL 1. GENERAL
1 GENERAL
This manual is for conversational automatic programming function.

The conversational automatic programming function II is software in
which functions of an epoch–making automatic programming system
“Symbolic FAPT” are assembled, and this “Symbolic FAPT” allows even
unexperienced NC programmers to produce NC data for machining at
once simply by depressing buttons according to the instructions on the
graphic display CRT. The CNC can execute machining according to a
program soon after programming it at a site, or it can execute another
programming during machining.
The Symbolic FAPT produces NC data and loads them into built–in
memory (machining memory). Machining is made according to the NC
data in memory (also called NC program).
During machining, another program can also be produced by using
Symbolic FAPT function. When the machining memory has been
unloaded after machining, another program being prepared at the
automatic programming section is registered to the machining memory.
Since NC data loaded in machining memory are prepared in standard NC
language, an operator who knows the standard NC language can directly
check or modify NC data of standard NC language in machining memory
by using the CRT.
(Since NC data can be registered again to machining memory after
modifying NC data at the automatic programming section without any
need of modifying machining memory data, it is not necessary to modify
machining memory data usually.)
3
1. GENERAL GENERAL B–61804E–2/05
Chapter III describes the programming and operation by Symbolic FAPT.

After understanding these description, you can start machining at once,
referring to the machine tool builder’s manual.
4
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
B–61804E–2/05 GENERAL PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
2 CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
(1) The NC data thus produced automatically by Symbolic FAPT are not
directly used for machining, but they are once loaded to the machining
memory.
(2) The automatic programming unit is not capable of storing various
information of machine tools and machine control unit.
Note that control information of machine tools can be processed only
in machine control unit.
(3) The machining information can be input to CNC by the following two
methods.
(a) Method of loading automatic programming results into the
machining memory after automatic programming has been made
by using the Symbolic FAPT. This is a standard method, which can
be used without any knowledge on NC tape format.
(b) Method of inputting the machining information into the machining
memory of the machine control unit by MDI operation.
Since this operation is the same as in NC unit for ordinary MDI
input, you are requested to be familiar with NC tape format, etc.
5
3. NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL GENERAL B–61804E–2/05
3 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are:

Name of product Abbreviation
FANUC Series 15–TFB 15–TFB

15–TFB
FANUC Series 15–TTFB 15–TTFB
FANUC Series 16–TA (CAP II) 16–TA CAP II
FANUC Series 16/18–TB (CAP II) 16–TB CAP II
FANUC Series 16/18–TC (CAP II) 16–TC CAP II
FANUC Series 16i/18i–TA (CAP–II) 16i–TA CAP–II
FANUC Series 16–TTA (CAP–II) 16–TTA CAP–II

16–T CAP II
FANUC Series 16/18–TB 16–TB CAP II
(2–path lathe, CAP II)
FANUC Series 16/18–TC 16–TC CAP II

FANUC Series 16i/18i–TA 16i–TA CAP II

(1) This manual does not cover the functions on the NC side.
(2) The function of an NC machine tool system does not depend only on
the NC, but on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic
cabinet, servo system, the NC, operator’s panels, etc. It is too difficult
to describe the function, programming, and operation in various
combinations of them. This manual generally describes them from the
standpoint of the NC. So, for a particular NC machine tool, refer to
the manual issued by the machine tool builder, which should take
precedence over this manual.
(3) Notes refer to detailed and specific items. So, when a note will be
encountered, terms used in it sometimes will not have been explained
it. In such a case, first skip the note, then return to it after having read
the manual in outline for details.
(4) For 16–T CAP II, the manual covers only the 5710 system and the
5800 system series and later. The earlier series may not support some
functions described in the manual. See Appendix 2 for the
unsupported functions.
6
II. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
1. EXPLANATION FOR
B–61804E–2/05 EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL CRT/MDI PANEL
1 EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL
CRT/MDI panel is composed of a 14–inch CRT or 10.4–inch LCD color

graphic display and keys which consist of alphabet, numerics, and the
others. It is as shown below.
MDI panel for 15–TFB/15–TTFB
9
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL B–61804E–2/05
MDI panel for 16–T/16–TT CAP II
10
1. EXPLANATION FOR
Text type Symbol type
MDI panel for 16–TC/16i–TA CAP II (10.4–inch horizontal type LCD/MDI unit)
11
1. EXPLANATION FOR
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16–TC/16i–TA CAP II (10.4–inch vertical type LCD/MDI unit)
12
1. EXPLANATION FOR
MDI panel for 16–TC/16i–TA CAP II (14–inch horizontal type CRT/MDI unit)
13
1. EXPLANATION FOR
MDI panel for 16i–TA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: text type)
MDI panel for 16i–TA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: symbol type)
14
1. EXPLANATION FOR
Fig. 1 14–inch color CRT/MDI panel external view
The mode in which the CRT/MDI unit is used for the creation of CNC data
with the Symbolic FAPT is called FAPT mode. The mode in which the
CRT/MDI is used for operations related to the CNC functions, such as
editing of created data, setting and check of various parameters for CNC
machining and tool offset amounts, and check of travel during CNC
machining, is called CNC mode.
To change the mode of the CRT/MDI unit between FAPT and CNC/PMC,
press the mode selector keys with lamps as shown below.
D For 15–TFB
When MMC/
FAPT is pressed, FAPT screen is displayed.
When PMC/
CNC is pressed, CNC screen is displayed.
D For 16–T CAP II
When FAPT is pressed, the FAPT screen is displayed.
To display the CNC screen, press one of the other function keys.
15
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL B–61804E–2/05
2 KEYS EFFECTIVE IN FAPT MODE
The diagram at under shows only the keys used in the Symbolic FAPT.
The symbols omitted are not used in FAPT mode.
16
B–61804E–2/05 EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL FAPT MODE
Fig. 2 (a) 15TFB/TTFB
17
Fig. 2 (b) 16T/TT CAP II
18
MDI panel for 16–TC/16i–TA CAP II (10.4–inch horizontal type LCD/MDI unit)
19
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16–TC/16i–TA CAP II (10.4–inch vertical type LCD/MDI unit)
20
MDI panel for 16–TC/16i–TA CAP II (14–inch horizontal type CRT/MDI unit)
21
MDI panel for 16i–TA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: text type)
MDI panel for 16i–TA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: symbol type)
22
(1) Keys for parts figure input
Used for increment amount input. (See CHAPTER III,

3.2.3) Can also be used for inputting the alphabet I.
Used when commanding thread. Can also be used for

inputting the alphabet T.
Used when commanding chamfer. Can also be used for

inputting the alphabet C.
Used when commanding rounding. Can also be used

for inputting the alphabet R.
Used when commanding grooving. Can also be used

for inputting the alphabet G.
Used when commanding neck. Can also be used for in-

putting the alphabet N.
Called ‘delete key’. This key is used to set undefined

data.
Called the cancel key. Only 1 character is

erased if this key is proceed after inputting
data and before pressing the INPUT key.
To cancel all the data input so far, press
SHIFT , CAN .
Arithmetical function keys (The – can also

be used as minus signs).
23
(2) Other keys
Used when inputting the alphabet at the right bot-

tom of the key.
All the data in the key–in buffer line is cancelled
if CAN is pressed after pressing this key.
Used to input space.
At–mark key. Pressed before writing the file

name, to display a @, when storing or calling fam-
ily programs and material files in the sub memory.
Input key. This key is used to write the entered

data into memory.
24
B–61804E–2/05 EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL 3. SOFT KEY
3 SOFT KEY
The 12 keys under the CRT are called soft keys. The function of the keys
change according to the screen displayed. The function for each screen
are framed at the bottom of the screen.
25
III. PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B–61804E–2/05 OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT 1. SYMBOLIC FAPT
1 SYMBOLIC FAPT
The Symbolic FAPT is an epoch making NC automatic programming

system which enables even unexperienced NC operators to prepare NC
tape immediately according to the instructions on the graphic display
CRT.
Each process from design drawings to NC tape preparation is entirely
advanced by the conversational operation with the graphic display CRT.
For (1) selection of coordinate system by drawing methods (2) selection
of figures of blank and input of dimensions (3) input of parts figures and
dimensions, and (4) selection of machining process and decision or
cutting conditions etc., the operator has only to answer questions from the
CRT.
The parts figure can be input simply by depressing corresponding symbol
keys on the operator’s panel according to the profiles of a workpiece
described on design drawings.
When dimensions and various data are input, various pieces of reference
information are illustrated on the CRT from time to time, and questions
are given to the operator using daily language.
When data are input, the figure of blank and parts profile are drawn
immediately, and automatic calculations of NC command data are started.
The tool path is concurrently displayed as figures.
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the screens of the 15–TFB
or 16–T CAP II to describe functions.
29
2. START OF SYMBOLIC PROGRAMMING AND
FAPT PROGRAMMING OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT B–61804E–2/05
2 START OF SYMBOLIC FAPT PROGRAMMING
CAUTION
After turning on the power, do not touch the keyboard until
the initial FAPT screen is displayed. Some keys are
specifically designed for maintenance or other special
operations; if any of these keys is pressed before the initial
screen is displayed, the machine may behave
unexpectedly.
The programming by Symbolic FAPT can be started by turning on the

power.
The initial screen is displayed 20 seconds after turning power on.
Symbolic FAPT
side initial screen
(16–T CAP II).
After the “SYSTEM EDITION,” the series/version number will be displayed.

Immediately after the series/version number, the language of the message
currently being displayed will be indicated in English.
Various jobs are selectable by depressing soft keys, while the initial pat-
tern appears on CRT screen.
[FAPT EXEC] . . . . . Depress this key for NC programming, while

monitoring the CRT screen.
[FAMILY PROGRAM] . . . For calling a family program from
submemory, floppy cassette or paper tape,
depress this key.
For using the memory cassette, the memory
cassette adapter is necessary.
For using the paper tape, FANUC PPR is
necessary.
30
PROGRAMMING AND 2. START OF SYMBOLIC
B–61804E–2/05 OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT FAPT PROGRAMMING
[DATA SET] . . . . . . This key is used for input/output and setting of

system parameter, machine tool file (MTF),
setting data, material file and tooling data. For
storage of material files and tooling files,the
submemory, the memory cassette or paper tape is
used.
[AUXILIARY] . . . . This key is used to initialize sub memory
“FAPT execution”
Press the “FAPT execution” on the initial screen to allow the FAPT
execution procedures menu to be displayed, By pressing the Software key
“Execution”, programming is initiated according to the procedures.
Correction can be easily made by directly selecting any menu on
correcting programs. For example, press the Software key “2” for
selecting input of final parts figure. Press the “5” for creating the NC data.
However, it is not possible to execute programming in the reverse order,
namely from larger memory number to smaller one.
Press the “End” when the above screen is being displayed to return to the
initial screen.
31
3. EXECUTION OF PROGRAMMING AND
SYMBOLIC FAPT OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT B–61804E–2/05
3 EXECUTION OF SYMBOLIC FAPT
It is possible to perform NC programming, monitoring the drawing in the

“FAPT” screen. Proceed with programming, monitoring the CRT screen
according to the following procedures:
32
PROGRAMMING AND 3. EXECUTION OF
B–61804E–2/05 OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.1
BLANK AND
WARNING
DRAWING (DRAWING 1 Select the same material as that of the workpiece to be
AND BLANK) machined. If a desired material option is not displayed on
the material menu, cancel the machining of the workpiece.
Failure to select the correct material may result in the
machining being performed under incorrect cutting
conditions, or the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or
machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
tool itself, or injury to the user.
2 Select the blank figure corresponding to that of workpiece
to be machined. Failure to select the correct figure may
result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or
3 Enter the correct blank dimensional data for the workpiece
to be machined. Failure to enter the correct data may result
in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
Soft key “1”
Go to the screen for the above processes. The meaning of each question
is as follows:
(a) MATERIAL NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MN =
This is a question for selecting the material of blank. Input the number
corresponding to the material NO. For example, key in 4 when
selecting aluminum.
33
(b) STANDARD SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . NR =

(1. , 2. , 3. , 4. )
This is a question used to select the surface roughness. Input the
number of marks on the machining drawing. For example, key in
“2” if nearly all areas of machining drawing have . It is possible
to skip this question using system parameter No.10.
(c) DRAWING FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DF =
This question is used to select the drawing format.
When the horizontal figure drawing is performed:
1. 2.
When the vertical figure drawing is performed:
In the case of horizontal drawing, select the drawing format 1 or 3 and

2 or 4 to easily input the dimension data on programming while the
dimension value of drawing is written based on the left and right sides,
respectively. This question can be skipped by setting of the system
parameter No.9.
34
(d) BLANK FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF =

(1. Cylinder 2. Hollow cylinder 3. Special blank)
This question is used to select the blank figure. Input the number
corresponding to the blank figure. For example, key in 1 to select the
cylinder.
BLANK SIZE
DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D =
INNER DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D0=
LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L =
The diameter (D) and length of blank (L) are indicated.
In the case of hollow cylinder, the inner diameter (D0) is also
displayed.
BASE LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZP =
It is used to specify at which part of blank the coordinate system (X
axis) to be programmed exists.
SURPLUS THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX =
TZ =
If a special blank is selected as blank figure, the X and Y components
of surplus thickness are displayed.
When data is input to the TX and TZ, it is assumed that the blank has
a constant surplus thickness. When nothing is input to the TX and TZ,
it is possible to define a free blank figure. The definition method is
described in the following item of Blank and Part (Part Figure).
DEPTH OF CHUNKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZC =
Input the data to determine the drawing position of chuck when the
animation drawing function option is provided. See “Chapter 3
Section 3.6 Check of NC data (animation drawing function)” for
details.
Insert the “, ” mark between data on inputting data to allow plural
number of data to be input simultaneously.
Example)
Input as in the following to to allow several data to be input
simultaneously when BF=1, L=100, D=150, and ZP=5 are input:
BF=1, 100, 150, 5 “INPUT”
Meaning of software key
[ESCAPE] . . It is used to return to the menu screen.
[HELP] . . . . . It is displayed when each question regarding the
drawing format, blank figure, blank size, position of
base line is asked.
Press this key when the meaning of each question is
unknown.
Then the following screen appears:
35
When it is pressed in the case of drawing format question:
In the case of horizontal drawing:
In the case of vertical drawing:
When it is pressed in the case of question for blank format, blank size, or
position of base line:
In the case of horizontal drawing:
36
In the case of vertical drawing:
[MAT.NAME] . . Press this software key to see the name of 18th

material or thereafter while 18 or more blank
materials are registered.
[CURSOR ±] . . . The cursor moves in forward direction.
[CURSOR ´] . . . The cursor moves in backward direction.
[NEXT PAGE] . . The next screen appears. If the input data contradicts
or there PAGE are undefined data, the following
message is displayed and it is not possible to move to
the next page: “KEY IN AGAIN”
NOTE
Normally, the next screen is automatically displayed when
all questions are answered on one screen. Press the
“NEXT PAGE” if it is not required to answer all questions or
data has been input to all questions. Also, it is possible to
allow the screen to keep being displayed for several
seconds after answering all questions or to disable
advancing to the next screen.
When the standard surface roughness or drawing format is
fixed, it is possible to skip these questions. See “Chapter
7 section 1.1” for the method of skipping the questions.
Set the system parameter No.19 to determine either of
horizontal or vertical drawing.
37
3.2
BLANK AND PART
WARNING
(PART FIGURE) 1 After entering part figure data, check the entered data.
Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding
with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining
occurring, possibly causing damage to the workpiece,
machine, and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
2 For a conversational program for which machining process
data has been prepared, if part figure data is modified, the
cutting area specified in the machining definition may be
changed. Operating the machine based on NC data in
memory, with an incorrect cutting area specified, may result
CAUTION
1 When entering threading data, check the data that is
automatically calculated by pressing the [OUTER
THREAD], [INNER THREAD], or [SQUARE THREAD] soft
key. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot be
machined properly.
2 Check the figure data that is automatically inserted by the
batch input function for chamfering/corner R. If this data is
incorrect, the workpiece cannot be machined properly.
3 Check the figure data that is automatically created by the
pattern figure input function. If this data is incorrect, the
workpiece cannot be machined properly.
4 Check the data that is automatically set by the neck corner
input function. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot
be machined properly.
38
3.2.1 The coordinate axis and blank figure matching the drawing format
Drawing of Program previously selected are drawn on the screen.
Coordinate System and
Blank Figure
D The blank is plotted by a dotted line.

D The left end of the blank is plotted by a solid line to indicate the chuck
side.
D The blank is automatically scaled so that it is accommodated with the
screen, irrespective of its dimensions.
The system requests you to input the part figure by the following display
in conversational area on the CRT screen.
ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES =
D If the blank is long laterally, the conversational area is provided on the
lower side of the CRT screen, and if it is long longitudionally, the
conversational area is provided on the right side of the CRT screen.
This decision is automatically done according to the dimensions of
input blanks.
3.2.2 The part figure can be input by depressing the figure symbol keys
Part Figure Input (Input sequentially along the profile of a part. Ten keys for numerical input and
alphabetic keys indicating the chamfering, rounding, threading,
Method of with Figure) grooving, and necking are employed as figure symbol keys.
39
(Example)
Start / End
point point
For a figure illustrated above, input the following keys along the drawing.
´ C ³ G ³ R ¿ G ³ T C ±
C ² G ± T C ² G ± C ²
The system will ask you necessary dimension, each time these figure
symbol keys are depressed.
(1) Contents of the question and the meaning of symbolic key.
Surface roughness
The system asks you the “surface roughness”, each time the figure
element symbol like a circle, a straight line, etc. is inputted. The
already designated “standard surface roughness” is automatically
displayed on the CRT screen at this time. If this value is allowable,
depress INPUT key only.
If you desire to change the surface roughness at that place only, select
the number of symbols 1, 2, 3, or 4.
NOTE
By parameter setting on parameter No.0010, the question
on the surface roughness can be skipped. When this
question is skipped, the standard surface roughness is
employed.
Start point
The system asks you the start point at the first step of figure input only.
SDX . . . . . Diameter value at start point
SZ . . . . . . . Z value at start point
PE . . . . . . . Whether a part exists on the left side or on right side along
a series of a figure profile to be inputted, is selected by
1 or 0.
The questions are made for the first figure element only, when a part
figure is inputted.
40
Straight line ¾ ´ ½ ² ³ ¼ ± ¿
(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . ES =

Input an arrow along the profile figure when the system asks you
the above question.
For example, input ¾ INPUT .
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . . . . SR =

Input the number of marks indicating the surface roughness
when the system asks you the surface roughness.
(c) The system will ask you the following items sequentially, starting
with the top item by displaying these items on the CRT screen.
END POINT . . . . . . . . DX = Diameter value at end point
Z = Z value at end point
TANGENT LAST . . . . TL = Whether the profile touches
the last figure or not.
TANGENT NEXT . . . . TN = Whether the profile touches
the next figure or not.
ANGLE FROM Z . . . . A = Angle from Z axis
You have to input only the dimensions described on the drawing.
Depress INPUT key only, if a dimension is not found on the drawing.
The system does not always ask all the above items, depending
upon the input arrow directions, but it ask you necessary numerical
values only, and you have to input only those described on the
drawing.
(d) If data are insufficient, “KEY IN AGAIN” is displayed.
Circle
(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES =

Input either or key along the progressive direction of
the circle when the system asks you the above question.
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . . . . . . SR =
when the system asks you the above question.
(c) END POINT . . . . . . . . DX = Diameter value at end point
Z = Z value at end point
TANGENT LAST . . . . TL = Whether the profile touches
the last arrow figure or not.
TANGENT NEXT . . . . TN = Whether the profile touches
the next arrow figure or not.
RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . R = Radius value of circle
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . CDX = X value at circle center
(diameter coordinate value)
CZ = Z value at circle center
41
The system asks you the above questions sequentially by

displaying these items on the CRT screen. Input only such
dimensions as are known from the drawing. Depress INPUT key
only, if a corresponding dimension is not found on the drawing.
(d) If data are insufficient or if an invalid numerical value was input,
KEY IN AGAIN is displayed.
(e) The system asks you the following question when a profile figure
transfers from a straight line to circular arc or from a circular arc
to a circular arc.
SELECT START POINT or END POINT
(³: RIGHT ²: LEFT ´: ABOVE ±: BELOW)
The parts figure input comprises two methods when a profile figure
transfers from a straight line or a circular arc.
When ½ keys were depressed;
The start point is either “left side” The start point is either “right side”
or “lower side”. or “upper side”.
When keys were depressed;
The start point is either “right The start point is either “left
side” or “lower side”. side” or “upper side”.
When the system asks you “SELECT START POINT” to identify the
following two possible methods from each other, you have to select
the right side (³), left side (²), above (´) or below (±) by the
³ , ² , ´ , or ± key.
Chamfering C
Chamfering is designated by C , which indicates the capital of

chamfer.
Answer C when the system asks you the above question.
42

(c) CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C =
Input the chamfering amount for the above question.
(d) The chamfering amount is figured as shown below.
Straight line and straight line
Straight line and circular arc
Circular arc and circular arc
C
C C
Straight line and straight line Straight line and circular arc Circular arc and circular arc
(e) The chamfering is displayed on CRT screen as shown below.
½ C ³ ½ C C
Rounding R
Rounding is designated by R , which indicates capital of rounding.

Input R when the system asks you the above question.
Input the number of marks indicating the surface roughness when
the system asks you the above question.
(c) RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R =
Input the radius value for rounding when the system asks you the
above question.
43
(d) Rounding is done as follows.
Straight line and straight line Straight line and circular arc Circular arc and circular arc
(e) Rounding is displayed as a figure on the CRT screen as shown

below.
½ R ¼ ½ R R
CAUTION
Keys , and R should be selectively used for
specifying a circular arc as described below.
D (1) A tangential circule being caught by 2 straight lines, (2) a

tangential circule being caught by a straight line and a circular
arc, and (3) a tangential circle being caught by circular arcs can
be specified by R key as a figure element key, if their
radiuses are known, as illustrated above.
D If the coordinate values of a circular arc center, a start point and
an end point are written on a drawing, the rounding can be
specified by using or key.
44
Threading T
Threading is designated by T , which indicates the capital of thread.

Input T when the system asks you the above question.
(b) ON WHICH ELEMENT? . . . . EE = On which element is
(0: LAST 1: NEXT) threading done?
LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT = Length of thread
LEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD = Lead of thread
MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NT = Number of threads of screw
The system asks you these questions, starting with the top item by
displaying them on CRT screen.
(c) “ON NEXT ELEMENT” or “ON LAST ELEMENT”?
T is input before and after arrows, in general.
It indicates whether threading is made on a figure element to be
input or on the last figure element already input.
“ON NEXT ELEMENT” . . . . . . . Input “1”.
“ON LAST ELEMENT” . . . . . . . Input “0”.
Identify “ON NEXT ELEMENT” and “ON LAST ELEMENT”
from each other in the following illustration.
In case of the next element In case of the next element
´ ¾ T ² ´ T ¾ ²
In case of the last element In case of the last element
´ ¾ ² T ´ ¾ T ²
45
Reversing screws can be machined by selectively specifying either

“on the next element” or “on the last element”. If the rotating direction
of the blank is the same and the cutting direction is reversed in the
previous figure, screws are threaded reversely.
CAUTION
When chamfering was made by C , the length of thread
can be calculated from the intersection of linear element
before chamfering.
(d) Lead length, pitch, and number of thread

The lead is defined as the Z–axis direction length when a screw
returns to the original angle after turning once.
In case of a one–thread screw, the pitch coincides with the lead.
In case of a three–thread screw, 1/3 of lead corresponds to the pitch.
The lead of a taper screw is also calculated in the Z–axis direction.
(e) Depth of thread

Together with the prompt on the depth of thread DT, the following
soft keys are displayed on the screen:
DT=_
ESCAPE BACK OUTER INNER SQUARE CURSOR CURSOR NEXT

PAGE THREAD THREAD THREAD PAGE
If one of the soft keys is pressed, the depth of thread DT is

automatically calculated. The calculation is defined as follows:
Pitch = LD (lead)/NT (number of threads)
OUTER THREAD: Pitch Constant (system parameter
No.174), initial value 0.7578
INNER THREAD: Pitch Constant (system parameter
No.125), initial value 0.6495
SQUARE THREAD: Pitch/(2 NT (number of threads))
If the value obtained by automatic calculation is unsatisfactory,
modify the data manually. For a trapezoidal thread, enter the data
manually. After the depth of thread (DT) has been automatically
calculated and specified, the cursor is repositioned to the first
prompt.
46
Grooving G
Grooving is designated by G , which indicates the capital of groove.
(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . ES =

Input G when the system asks you the above question.
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . SR =

(c) ON WHICH ELEMENT? . . . . EE = On which element is
grooving made?
DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DN = Grooving direction
WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = Grooving width
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Grooving depth
R/C OF CORNER (ALONG ELEMENT)
1’ST . . . . . . . . KC = CV =
2’ND . . . . . . . KC = CV = Designation of groove
3’RD . . . . . . . KC = CV = shape
4’TH . . . . . . . KC = CV =
The system asks you these questions sequentially, starting with the
top question by displaying them on the CRT screen.
Input a numerical value for each question.
(d) “ON NEXT ELEMENT” or “ON LAST ELEMENT”?
G is input before and after arrows, in general.
It indicates whether threading is made on a figure element to be
input or on the last figure element already input.
“ON NEXT ELEMENT” . . . . . . . Input “1”.
“ON LAST ELEMENT” . . . . . . . Input “0”.
Identify “ON NEXT ELEMENT” and “ON LAST ELEMENT”
from each other in the following illustration.
² G ² ¿ G ³ ³ G ½
47
(e) DIRECTION . . . . . . DN =
(³: RIGHT ²: LEFT ´: ABOVE ±: BELOW)
Designate the grooving direction by the arrow such as right (³),
left (²), above (´) or below (±) when the system asks you the above
question.
² ± ±
(f) After inputting the width and depth, the system asks you the figure
at groove corners. Numbers 1 to 4 area allocated to the corners of
each groove in the sequence of figure input.
(Example)
² G ² ³ G ³
Designate whether the figures of respective corners 1 to 4 are “round

(R)”, “chamfered (C)” or “left unmachined” according to the
following questions being displayed on the CRT screen.
R/C OF CORNER (ALONG ELEMENT)
1’ST . . . . . KC = CV = Figure at the 1’st corner
2’ND . . . . . KC = CV = Figure at the 2’nd corner
3’RD . . . . . KC = CV = Figure at the 3’rd corner
4’TH . . . . . KC = CV = Figure at the 4’th corner
D For rounding, depress R for “KC =” question, and input a radius
value for “CV =” question.
D For chamfering, depress C for “KC =” question, and input a
chamfering amount for “CV =” question.
D If a corner is neither rounded or chamfered, and it is left undone as
it is, depress INPUT key only, or depress [NEXT PAGE] key to
proceed to the next CRT screen when the system asks you the
question.
Trapezoid grooving (Automatic process determination function B is
required.)
As with grooving, to select trapezoid grooving, specify G.
(a) ON WHICH ELEMENT . . EE = Element on which a trapezoid
groove is made
(0: Last element, 1: Next element)
48
(b) DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . DN = Direction of grooving

Press the corresponding element
symbol key (´ ± ³ ²).
(c) WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = Distance between the
shoulders of the groove
(d) DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Depth of the groove
CAUTION
If the line along which the width or depth of the groove is
measured is parallel to the X–axis (´ or ±), specify the width
or depth with a radius.
(e) R/C OF CORNER

1–ST . . . . KC = CV =
2–ND . . . . KC = CV =
3–RD . . . . KC = CV =
4–TH . . . . KC = CV =
Specify the figures of the groove corners in the order in which they
are defined.
49
When the above data is specified, a square groove is defined.

To define a trapezoid groove, specify the following data. To define a
conventional square groove, ignore the prompt and press the NEXT
PAGE soft key.
(f) WIDTH OF B. (1) . . . . W1 = Bottom width 1 of the groove

(This need not be specified if
bottom angle 1 of the groove is
specified.)
(g) WIDTH OF B. (2) . . . . W2 = Bottom width 2 of the groove
bottom angle 2 of the groove is
specified.)
(h) ANGLE OF B. (1) . . . . A1 = Bottom angle 1 of the groove
bottom width 1 of the groove is
specified.)
(i) ANGLE OF B. (2) . . . . A2 = Bottom angle 2 of the groove
bottom width 2 of the groove is
specified.)
In figure definition, the system does not check the validity of the
specified bottom width (W*) and bottom angle (A*) of the groove.
The operator must carefully observe the figure drawn after the figure
is defined.
The positions of bottom widths 1 and 2 and angles 1 and 2 of the
groove depend on the direction of figure definition in the same way as
they do for R/C OF CORNER.
50
² G ²
³ G ³
[Reference]
1) Trapezoid grooving can be defined in the same way as conventional
grooving. (Automatic process determination is also allowed.)
2) If bottom width 1 (W1), bottom width 2 (W2), bottom angle 1 (A1),
and bottom angle 2 (A2) of a groove are specified, the width data has
priority over the angle data. The system ignores the angle data.
3) To specify a trapezoid groove as shown in Fig. 3.2.2, do not define the
bottom width and bottom angle on the side of the groove having a
perpendicular wall.

Fig. 3.2.2 Defining a special trapezoid groove

Enter the bottom width or angle.
Leave the bottom width and bottom angle of the
perpendicular wall undefined.
51
4) It is recommended to specify the bottom widths when defining the

shape of a trapezoid groove. The trapezoid groove can be defined with
bottom angles, however, this definition may cause a small calculation
error.
5) The figure element copy function is convenient for defining two or
more identical trapezoid grooves.
Necking N
Necking is designated by N , which indicates the capital of necking.
(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . ES =

Answer N when the system asks you the above question.
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . SR =
(c) WIDTH . . . . . . . WT = Necking width
DEPTH . . . . . . . DT = Necking depth
Input the necking width and depth for the above questions. The
necking direction is always 45° with reference to Z–axis.
The necking width and depth are as illustrated below.
(2) End of figure input

Key in the software key “END” or “INPUT” only for the following
question after ending the input of all machined figures:
ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . ES =
52
Machine figure input before is drawn again on the CRT screen and the
message “SELECT SOFT KEY” is displayed at the lower side of
screen.
Check to see if there is any mistake in the input of figure by comparing
the drawing figure with that drawn on the screen. Press a software key
depending on the status at that time.
Meaning of software keys
[ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . . . It is used to return to the menu screen.
[BACK PAGE] . . . . . . . It is used to return to the previous screen
(drawing and blank screen).
[CORR.&ERASE] . . . . It is used to delete the machined figure
drawn on the screen and ERASE to modify
the machined figure. The modification
method is described below.
[CORRECTION] . . . . . It is used to modify the machined figure
based on the machined figure drawn on the
screen. The modification method is the
same as “CORR. & ERASE”.
[NEW] . . . . . . . . . . . . . It is used to delete the machined figure on
the screen and to input the figure again. All
elements input previously are deleted.
[LIST MODE] . . . . . . . It is used to display all data previously
input. Modification can be performed
similarly as in “CORRECTION”.
[DRAWNG RANGE] . . It is used to perform enlargement and
reduction of drawing. See “Chapter 3 1–3”
for the details.
[CHAMFER] . . . . . . . . It is used to insert the chamfer figure into all
of angles of machined figure drawn on the
screen. The details are described in the
following.
[C–AXIS MENU] . . . . . It is displayed when the C axis FAPT
function option is available.
[Y–AXIS MENU] . . . . Displayed when the Y–axis FAPT function
is provided.
[NEXT PAGE] . . . . . . . It is used to move to the next page if there
is no part modified.
[CORNERR] . . . . . . . . It is used to insert the corner R figure into
all of corners of machined figure drawn on
the screen.
53
When bit 1 of system parameter 19 is set to 1, the figure is displayed

vertically.
(3) Changing the color of a part figure or blank figure when it is modified
When a part figure or blank figure is modified (or created), the
elements before and after the element on which the cursor is placed are
displayed in different colors. As a result, the operator can easily tell
which element is currently being modified on the drawing.
System parameter 552 specifies the color of elements already
determined and system parameter 586 specifies the color of elements
to be determined.
Parameter No. Value Color Description
552 1 Red Specifies color of elements already

determined
586 3 Yellow Specifies color of elements to be

determined
Light
Color Red Green Yellow Blue Purple White
blue
Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NOTE
1 If the GRAPH MODE soft key is pressed after modification
of an original figure has been started by pressing the
CORRECTION soft key, the original figure cannot be
re–drawn.
2 If the ELEMENT BACK soft key is pressed in a definition
mode in which the end point of the previous element is
determined by the current element, the element before
these two elements is also drawn in the color of the
elements to be determined.
54
3.2.3 (1) Arithmetic operation and function calculation

Input and Modification
The arithmetic operation (addition, subtraction, multiplication,
of Part Figure Data division) and optional function calculations can also be executed when
inputting dimensions.
Arithmetic
Symbol Examples Remarks
contents
+ Addition 15 + 27.75 + 4.8
* Subtraction 178.5 * 25.25
* Multiplication 57.5 * 81.3 57.5 * 81.3 * indicates x.
/ indicates B.
/ Division 128 / 3.5
tangent The unit of angle is degree.

T T 23 Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
T ( 23 )
sine The unit of angle is degree.
S S 15 Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
S ( 15 )
cosine The unit of angle is degree.

C C 35
Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
C ( 35 )
arc sine The unit of angle is degree.

A S A S 0.25 Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
A S ( 0.25 )
arc cosine The unit of angle is degree.

A C A C 0.37 Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
A S ( 0.37 )
arc tangent Parentheses are required without fail. A T

A T A T ( 3, 5 ) (numerator and denominator).
square root Optional arithmetic expressions are employable

R R 177 inside parentheses, if any.
R ( 177 )
square root These examples mean 1.54 and 325, respectively.

P P ( 1.5, 4 )
P ( 3, 25 )
55
D Parentheses ( and ) are employable quadruply or less.

D Arithmetic symbols are employable whenever a dimension is
asked.
They are employable by an optional number, until one line is fully
filed.
D An arithmetic expression may be used conveniently when a cutting
condition is changed, for example. For setting the feedrate to 75%,
multiply the displayed numerical value by 0.75.
D It is recommended for using Symbolic FAPT to avoid mental
calculation as much as possible, but use this arithmetic function.
(2) Input of incremental value
If the system asks you a dimension and you want to input an

incremental value from the present position, press I key after an
incremental value as shown below. I indicates the capital of

incremental.
(Example) 50.45 “I” “INPUT”
With I specification, the data in X–axis direction is radius value.
(3) Change of figure element symbols
Depress soft key when the system asks you the following question.
ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . ES =
ELEMENT FORWRD . . . . . . . . . . . . Element advances
ELEMENT BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . Element retreats
ELEMENT DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . Element on the cursor is deleted.
The question place can be confirmed by a flickering figure element
symbol at the upper part of the CRT screen.
(Insertion example)
When depressing R with ½ ³

Flickering
.... ½ R ³
When depressing C with ½ G ³ ±

Flickering
.... ½ G ³ C ±
56
(Deletion example) Depress DEL key
When depressing DEL with ½ ³ ... ½ ³

Flickering
When depressing DEL with ½ G ³ ± ... G ³ ±

Flickering
(Exchange)
For exchanging figure symbols, (1) delete old one after inserting new one,
or (2) insert new one after deleting old one.
(4) Change of numerical value
The system will ask you necessary numerical values after figure
element symbols have been input. If a numerical value was input by
mistake, a correct numerical value can be input again after moving the
question place by depressing [CURSOR ±] or [CURSOR ´] CURSOR
key.
Select an optional question, and input a correct numerical value again.
[CURSOR ±] . . . Element advances
[CURSOR ´] . . . Element retreats
NOTE
If a figure element of data was corrected, press the software
key “END”.
3.2.4 (1) Input of blank figure

Blank Figure Input of If a special figure is selected as the blank figure (BF = 3) and surplus
Special Figure Blank thicknesses (TX, TZ) are not defined as shown below, the blank figure
input screen is displayed after the data of the machining profile is
entered.
57
On the blank figure input screen, the machining profile is initially

drawn as the blank figure.
Select the software key “CORRECTION” or “LIST MODE” and

“NEW” to prepare the blank figure referring to the machined figure
and to prepare it newly, respectively.
Similar to input of parts figure data, use a symbolic key for entry of
blank figure. In this case, however, “G”, “T” and “N” keys cannot be
used for parts figure difinition.
Input a blank figure according to any one of the following three
formats.
(a) Start or end point is on the coordinate axis.
(Example 1) (Example 2)
(Example 3)
58
(b) Z axis coordinate values of start and end point are same.
(Example)
(c) Start and end point are same.
(Example)
(2) End of blank figure input

When all of blank figure has been input, key in the software key
“END” or “INPUT” if there is a question as shown below:
ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . ES =
The element figure created so far is redrawn and the following message
is displayed: “Select software key”
Press the “NEXT PAGE” if there are no areas modified and when
proceeding to the next process.
59
3.2.5 The parts figure input system includes the system of entering the
Part Figure Input definition data with displaying a defined figure, and the method of
entering the definition data while displaying in the table format. The
(Directory Input former is called “Graphic input system” (refer to para. 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 II)
System) and the latter is called “Directory input system”. The “Directory input
system” will be described here.
(1) In the screen of the graphic input system, press the soft key “LIST
MODE”.
[LIST MODE] . . . . The figure element input screen of the
directory input system is selected.
In this screen, select the element to be modified, using ELEMENT

FORWARD and ELEMENT BACK soft keys. (when the element is
inserted, it is inserted before the element is selected.)
Next, press “INPUT” when changing the figure data.
When it is desired to insert the element, key in the element symbol and
press “INPUT”. When only checking the data without modifying it,
check the objective element data, using ELEMENT FORWARD and
ELEMENT BACK soft keys.
(2) When the element is changed or inserted, the figure data input screen
is selected. The inquiry is displayed under the figure data list display.
60
In this screen, all data on the figure data are inquired. Adjust the cursor
to the data to be entered and input the data. Upon completion of
keying–in operation, press “NEXT PAGE” soft key.
(3) [NEXT PAGE] . . . . Again, the figure element input screen is
selected.
At this time, the modified data is registered on
the list screen.
[END] . . . . If END is pressed when the data input or modification is
completed, the display returns to the screen that the
figure data input is completed.
However, when an error is produced in the parts figure
data, it will not return to that screen 1 but will become
figure element input screen and the “Key in Again”
message is displayed.
In this case, modify the figure data of this element.
[GRAPH MODE] . . Press GRAPHIC MODE soft key to return to
the graphic input screen from the directory
input screen. At this time the position of the
element shown by the cursor will become the
same position with the elements where the
cursor was blinking in the directory input
system.
Drawing is also carried out up to its position
from the beginning.
3.2.6 (1) Chamfering

Batch Input Functions Normally, it is customary practice to chamfer a corner unless
otherwise specified for the machined parts in the drawing. Unlike the
for Chamfering and
specified chamfer, this chamfering is not described in the drawing, the
Corner R chamfering amount is constant and many in most cases.
Consequently, when the machined figure is prepared, it may be
troublesome to enter many chamfering elements. This function inputs
a given amount of chamfer exclusively to all corners to which no
chamfer (element symbol C) is input yet after all machined figures are
completely entered.
After the machined figure for turning is entered, the following screen
is displayed.
61
When the rightmost soft key [ ] is pressed,

the following soft keys are displayed:
If the CHAMFER soft key is pressed, the yellow cursor blinks at a

corner of the machining profile whose chamfering data has not yet
been specified.
[CHAMFER]
At the same time, the question for the chamfering amount C and
surface roughness SR is displayed.
C = Input the chamfering amount.
SR = Input the number of marks showing the surface
roughness.
When the control asks, input the chamfering amount and surface
roughness.
After keying in a required numeral, press [EXEC] soft key. Then,
chamfering is applied to the lighting corner, and the initial screen is
selected.
62
When no corner is present for the machined figure or chamfering is

applied to all corners or no section to designate chamfering is present,
the chamfering screen is not selected even when the soft key
“CHAMFER” is depressed. For the machined figure composed of
many elements, even when the soft key “CHAMFER” is depressed,
the chamfer may not be entered.
(2) Corner R
The batch input function for corner R is similar to the batch input
function for chamfering. The function specifies identical corner R
data for corners whose chamfering data is left unspecified after the
entire machining profile is specified.
The batch input function for corner R cannot be used for 5700 series
of 16–T CAP II.
After entering the turning figure, press the rightmost soft key [
].
Then, press the CORNER R key.
The yellow cursor lights at the corner whose chamfering data has not
yet been specified.
After entering the required data, press the EXEC soft key. The corner
R data is specified for the lighted corner. Then, the original screen is
displayed again.
63
NOTE
1 As a standard for a corner to be chamfered, set the
maximum angle to system parameter No.756. (Setting
range 0° t Angle x 180°) For example, if the angle is
set to 100, the cursor lights up as a chamfering corner with
100° or less angle. No cursor lights up for the portion more
than 100° angle.
Example) when setting system parameter No.756 as 100:
NOTE
2 The initial value of Corner R amount can be set to system
parameter No.755. For example, if 0.2 is set to system
parameter No.755, when the control asks the chamfering
amount, the numeral 0.2 is entered as the initial value.
The inquiry for “SURFACE ROUGHNESS” can be omitted.
(System parameter No.0010) When omitted, “Standard
Surface Roughness” is adopted for surface roughness.
Related system parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
010
Bit 0 All surface roughness

Bit 1 Surface roughness for corner C
Bit 4 Surface roughness for corner R
0 : The inquiry is not omitted.
1 : The inquiry is omitted.
NOTE
3 No neck or groove portion is chamfered.
The corner for which thread cutting is designated is
chamfered.
64
Example) . .³G³. . . .³T±. .
3.2.7 “Pattern Figure” refers to a given shape or specified shape. This is a

Pattern Figure Input convenient input method: a figure consisting of several elements can be
defined promptly by just answering the minimum question required for
Function its figure.
When the system asks “ELEMENTS SYMBOL – – – ES = ”, press

“PATTERN FIGURE”: the screen display changes to the soft key layout
showing the pattern figure input.
65
(1) Input of equal pitch/continuous groove

This input function is used for defining a figure in which a plurality
of grooves are arranged at an equal pitch. Press ”REPEAT
GROOVE”: the display as shown below will appear.
The meaning of each question is as follows.

(a) END POINT . . . . . . . . EDX =
EZ =
Input the end point of a straight line subsequent to a continuous
groove.
When defining the groove arranged in parallel to the Z–axis, it is
not necessary to input the end point value of X.
In contrast to the above, when defining a groove arranged in
parallel to the X–axis, it is not necessary to input the Z end point
value.
(b) QUANTITY . . . . . . . . N =
Input the number of grooves.
(c) PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
Input the space from the groove entrance to the next groove
entrance.
The following question is the same as in element G.
(d) DIRECTION . . . . . . . . DN =
WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . WT =
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . DT =
Input the groove direction, width and depth.
(e) R/C OF CORNER
K1 = V1 =
K2 = V2 =
K3 = V3 =
K4 = V4 =
Designate each corner figure.
66
(f) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . SR =

Input the number of marks indicating the surface roughness.
This surface roughness is applied to all elements forming this
figure. Further, it is also possible to skip this question by system
parameter No.0010 bit 2 (surface roughness to G). When skipped,
“Standard Surface Roughness” is adopted for the surface
roughness.
Meaning of a software key
[ESCAPE] . . . . . The menu screen returns.
[BACK PAGE] . . The screen, called by the sign ES = , returns. When
this software key is pressed, the input data will
become invalid.
[CURSOR ´] [CURSOR ±] . . The cursor goes up and down.
[EXEC] . . . . . . . . A shape is formed in accordance with the set data.
Example)
Method of defining a figure as shown above.

a) For normal figure input:
1) Definition from the origin direction . . . ´²G²G²G²´²
2) Definition from the chuck direction . . . ³±³G³G³G³±
Each element is defined.
b) When the pattern figure input function is used:
1) Definition from the origin direction . . . ´²
2) efinition from the chuck direction . . . . . ³±³
After defining the above so far, press “REPEAT & GROOVE”.
The setting of 1) above is as follows.
End point value of previous element DX = 40, Z = 8
END POINT . . . . . . EDX = R/C OF CORNER
EZ = 36.0 K1 = C V1 = 0.5
QUANTITY . . . . . . . N = 3 K2 = V2 =
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . PT = 10.0 K3 = V3 =
DIRECTION . . . . . . DN = ± K4 = C V4 = 0.5
WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . WT = 4.0
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 5.0
67
Press “EXEC”
Thus, based on the preset data, a figure is defined and drawn.

The setting of 2) above is as follows.
End point value of previous element DX = 40, Z = 32
END POINT . . . . . . EDX = R/C OF CORNER
EZ = 0.0 K1 = C V1 = 0.5
QUANTITY . . . . . . . N = 3 K2 = V2 =
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . PT = 10.0 K3 = V3 =
DIRECTION . . . . . . DN = K4 = C V4 = 0.5
WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . WT = 4.0
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 5.0
Press “EXEC”
Thus, based on the preset data, a figure is defined and drawn.
68
i) The figure defined by “REPEAT GROOVE” is defined as an

element by the arrow and G element row.
ii) Correct for each element. This is the same for the deletion.
iii) The relation between the pitch and groove is as shown below.
When DN = ± When DN = ²
NOTE
For pattern figure input, the end point value of the previous
element should already be fixed.
(2) Neck corner input

It is possible to define 3 types of DIN Standard neck corners. If
“NECK CORNER” is pressed, the display changes on the next screen.
³ “NECK CORNER”
In response to the question “TYPE =”, enter the neck figure type
number (1–3) for the type to be set.
The meaning of soft keys
“ESCAPE” . . . . . . . . . Returns to the menu screen.
“BACK PAGE” . . . . . . Returns to the “ES =” question screen.
69
1) Type 1: Neck grinding

a) DEFINE DERECTION . . . DD = (0: PV PH, 1: PH PV)
Specifies the direction that defines the element. If the current point
is PV and the PH direction is to be defined (vertical plane
horizontal plane), input 0. Conversely, if the current point is PH
and the PV direction is to be defined (horizontal plane vertical
plane) input 1.
b) END POINT P* . . . . . . . . . EDX =
EZ =
Inputting the end point value. If the define direction DD is 0, input
the PH point. If the define direction is 1, input the PV point.
c) WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . WT = (automatic setting) input neck width.
d) DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . DT = (automatic setting) input neck depth.
e) CORNER R . . . . . . . R = (automatic setting) input the corner
radius value.
The standard values of width, depth and corner R are set
automatically according to the diameter of the neck (PH point DX
value). To change these to other values, place the cursor on the
question and input the number.
f) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . SR =
Inputting the number of the mark that displays surface
roughness. This surface roughness is appropriate to all the
elements that shape this figure. The standard setting value (value
of system parameter No.205) is set at the beginning automatically.
It is also possible to change to other values. By setting bit 1 of
system parameter No.10 to 1, it is possible to skip this question.
When it is skipped, the standard surface roughness setting value is
used.
70

“ESCAPE” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the menu screen.
“BACK PAGE” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the neck type
number selection screen.
“CURSOR ´” “CURSOR ±” . . . . Moves cursor up and down.
“EXEC” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creates the figure based on the
data set.
2) Type 2: Neck grinding (with side depth)

a) SIDE DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . W1 = inputs the depth of side depth.
The meaning of all other questions are the same as for Type 1.
3) Type 3: Neck threading
71
The meanings of the inquiries are:

(a) LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT = Thread length
(b) LEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD = Lead
(c) MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . NT = Number of threads
(d) THREADING DEPTH . . . D1 = Threading depth
For the meanings of the other inquiries, see the description of type 1.
When the threading depth (D1) is entered, the following soft keys are
displayed on the screen:
D1= METRIC
ESCAPE BACK OUTER INNER SQUARE CURSOR CURSOR EXEC

PAGE THREAD THREAD THREAD ° ±
If the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or SQUARE THREAD soft

key is pressed, the system automatically specifies the value of D1
(threading depth). The value is calculated using the following expression:
Pitch = LD (LEAD) B NT (MULTIPLE)
OUTER THREAD: Pitch (P) Constant
(system parameter 174, initial value 0.7578)
INNER THREAD: Pitch (P) Constant
(system parameter 125, initial value 0.6495)
SQUARE THREAD: Pitch (P) B (2 NT (MULTIPLE))
System parameters 125 and 174 specify the constants to be used when the
elements of threading are manually defined.
If the automatically specified value is not suitable, change it manually.
To define a trapezoid thread, manually enter the data.
After the value of D1 is entered, the system automatically specifies the
values of WIDTH (WT), DEPTH (DT), and CORNER R (R). The values
are calculated as shown below:
WIDTH (WT): WT = 3.5 (constant) Pitch (P)
DEPTH (DT): DT = 1.2 (constant) Threading depth (D1)
CORNER R (R): R = 0.5 (constant) Pitch (P)
NOTE
1 The threading depth (D1) can be automatically determined
by pressing the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or
SQUARE THREAD soft key only when the values of LD
(LEAD) and NT (MULTIPLE) are specified.
2 If the value of LD (LEAD) or NT (MULTIPLE) is changed, the
D1 (threading depth) and DT (depth) must be calculated
again. Press the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or
SQUARE THREAD soft key to have the system
automatically specify suitable values.
72
4) Neck diameter (PH point DX value) and width, side depth, depth,
corner R (DIN Standards)
Diameter (X axis) Depth Corner R Width Side depth
(DT) (R) (WT) (W1)
Under 18 mm .25 mm .6 mm 2.0 mm .1 mm

Under 0.7087 inch .0098 inch .0236 inch .0787 inch .0039 inch
Above 18 mm below 80 mm .35 mm .6 mm 2.5 mm .2 mm

0.7087 to 3.15 inch .0138 inch .0236 inch .0984 inch .0079 inch
Above 80 mm .45 mm 1.0 mm 4.0 mm .3 mm

Above 3.15 inch .0177 inch .0394 inch .1575 inch .0118 inch
Example
Method of definition when defining the figure of this illustration.

a) Defining the figure by the existing method without using the
pattern figure input method
(1) Definition from zero point direction . . . ´²¼R²R´²
(2) Definition from chuck direction . . . . . . . ³±R³R½³±
In this way, each element is defined one at a time.
b) Defining the figure using pattern figure input
(1) Definition from zero point direction . . . ´ (End point PH)
(2) Definition from check direction . . . . . . . ³ (End point PV)
Inputting elements in this way, after keying in the end point value (PH or
PV), press “neck corner”.
Input the following data with regard to each question for (1).
NECK TYPE . . . . . . . . P = 1
Questions and illustrations explaining neck type 1 are displayed here and
therefore the following data should be input.
Define direction . . . . . . . . DD =1 (0: PV³ PH, 1: PH ³ PV)
End point PV . . . . . . . . . . EDX = 60.
EZ = 20.
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = 2.5 (Automatic setting)
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 0.35 (Automatic setting)
Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = 0.6 (Automatic setting)
Surface roughness . . . . . . . SR = 2 (Automatic setting)
73
When “EXEC” is pressed the figure based on the data set is drawn.
Input the following data with regard to each question for 2.
NECK TYPE . . . . . . . . . . P = 1
Questions and illustrations explaining neck type 1 are displayed here and
therefore the following data should be input.
Define direction . . . . . . . . DD =0 (0: PV PH, 1: PH PV)
End point PH . . . . . . . . . . EDX = 40.
EZ = 0.
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = 2.5 (Automatic setting)
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 0.35 (Automatic setting)
Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = 0.6 (Automatic setting)
Surface roughness . . . . . . . SR = 2 (Automatic setting)
When “EXEC” is pressed the figure based on the data set is drawn.
i) The figure defined at neck corner input is separated and defined
into direction arrow elements and R.
ii) Carry out corrections and deletions one element at a time.
NOTE
1 Definition is possible if the element directly in front of corner
R is an element other than G/N/T, but the end point value
directly in front must be decided. Furthermore, it is not
possible to create it as the first element.
2 The neck is created in the corner of the vertical and
horizontal plane.
It is possible in the taper plane.
3 If define direction DD = 0 is input, the next end point symbol
is displayed as PH. Conversely, if define direction DD = 1
is input, the next end point symbol is displayed as PV.
Furthermore, the neck direction is decided automatically by
the define direction and end point value.
Examples Illustrations type 2 for horizontal figures

a) When define direction is 0 (PV: vertical plane PH: horizontal plane)
End point PH is upper left with regard to PV End point PH is upper right with regard to PV
End point PH is lower left with regard to PV End point PH is lower right with regard to PV
74
b) When define direction is 1 (PH: horizontal plane PV: vertical plane)
End point PV is upper left with regard to PV End point PV is upper right with regard to PV
End point PV is lower left with regard to PH End point PV is lower right with regard to PH
NOTE
4 As for the end point value, input the absolute values only.
It is not possible to input the incremental value.
5 Input positive neck, depth and side depth values.
6 Input values smaller than the difference between the Z
values of PV point and PH point for neck width. An alarm
(END POINT OR NECK WIDTH IS NOT CORRECT) is
displayed if a bigger value is input.
Note that if a bigger depth or side depth value is input, it is
possible that a figure other than a neck figure will be
created.
75
3) Figure element copy function

Having specified the start and end points of the figure to be copied,
once the number of copies has been keyed in, it is possible to define
the same figure repeatedly. This is useful when repeatedly inputting
special groove figures and complicated circular figures.
In the case illustrated above, when the soft key “PATTRN INPUT” is
pressed followed by “FIGURE COPY”, the following copy area
specification screen appears. Note however that when the “PATTRN
INPUT” key is pressed, the cursor must be next to the very last element,
as illustrated above.When the cursor has been moved by corrections to
element data etc., press the “FIGURE COPY” only after having made sure
to move the cursor next to the very last element. If the “FIGURE COPY”
key is pressed when the cursor is at an element other than the final one,
an error message will be displayed saying “CAN NOT USE THIS
FUNCTION” and the copy area specification screen will not appear.
76
a) The figure to be copied and the number of copies is specified in the

copy area specification screen.
Questions are as follows.
REPEAT NO. . . . . . . . . N = Specifies the number of repeat copies.
When the “NUMBER INPUT” is keyed in, the data is set for the
number of repeats.
When only “INPUT” is keyed in, the cursor point alternates between
the copy start and copy end point.
“ESCAPE”. . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the main menu screen.
“STOP” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the ES = question screen.
If this key is pressed, the copy area and
number of copies specified up until then
will be invalidated.
“CURSOR BACK”. . . . . . The flashing cursor moves in the reverse
direction.
“CURSOR FORWARD” . The flashing cursor moves in the regular
direction.
“EXEC” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creates the figure based on the specified
copy area and the number of repeats.
b) To specify the copy start point, align the cursor to the copy start point
with the “CURSOR FORWRD”, “CURSOR BACK” key and press
the INPUT key.
When the copy start point has been specified, the message “SPECIFY
THE COPY END POINT” will appear.
c) To specify the copy end point, align the cursor to the copy and point
with the “CURSOR FORWRD”, “CURSOR BACK” key and press
the INPUT key.
When the copy end point has been specified, the message “SPECIFY
THE COPY START POINT” will appear.
d) When the soft key “EXEC” is pressed, the figure element will be
copied repeatedly within the range specified by the copy start point and
copy end point. Note however that when the number of repeats has not
been defined, the message “KEY IN REPEAT NO.” will appear and
the “EXEC” key should be pressed after having entered the number of
repeats.
Example) Illustration type = 2
Blank figure BF = 1
Blank dimensions
Diameter D = 100
Length L = 105
Position of reference line ZP = 5
77
Number 1 element ± SDX = 0 SZ = 0 PE =1

DX = 20
Number 2 element ² Z = 10
Number 3 element ¾ DX = Undefined Z = Undefined TN = 0
A = 45
Number 4 element ² Z = 30 Z = 20 TN = 0
Number 5 element ± DX = 20
Number 7 element ´ DX = 40
Number 9 element
The following explanation is based on an example where the above
mentioned data has been defined and one copy is required from No.3
element to No.8 element.
By pressing the soft key “ELEMENT COPY”, the copy area specification
screen will be displayed, set the repeat number to 1 and specify the No.3
element at copy start point and No.8 element at the copy end point.
78
Press the soft key “EXEC”.
One copy will be made from No.3 element to No.8 element based on the
data set.
When the figure that has been copied is to be corrected, change the data
element by element as with previous corrections.
NOTE
1 The final element of the figure must be a direction arrow and
the end point defined, before pressing the “FIGURE COPY”
key.
Examples
Figure element number . . . . . . . . . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure configuration element . . . . ´ ² ¾ ² ± ² ´ ² j
´
The element here must be an direction
arrow and the end point defined.
a) When the element in front is not a direction arrow, if the soft key
“FIGURE COPY” is pressed, the error message “LAST END
POINT IS ARROW” will be displayed and the copy specification
screen will not appear.
b) When the end point of the element is not defined, if the soft key
“FIGURE COPY” is pressed, the error message “LAST END
POINT IS UNDEFINED” will be displayed and the copy
specification screen will not appear.
79
NOTE
2 Input a positive whole number between 1 and 10 in the
repeat number. If any other data is keyed in the message
“KEY IN AGAIN” will appear.
3 When there is incremental type data in the copy area, it will
change to absolute type data when copied.
4 When the general element number has been exceeded
during execution of figure copy, as many copies as is
possible will be created. An error message indicating that
“the number of element is excessive” will appear on the
screen.
3.2.8 In part figure definition, the system can define the center of an arc even
Function for Defining if only one of the coordinates (X or Z) is given. This feature eliminates
the need for manual calculation.
the Center of an Arc
(1) Operation
According to a Given
As an example, consider the figure shown in Fig.1 (the drawing format
Single Coordinate is FANUC standard 2), which is defined as described below:
1) Specifying the material
MATERIAL NO.: MN = 1
STANDARD SURFACE ROUGHNESS: NR = 2
BLANK FIGURE: BF = 1 (Cylinder)
BLANK SIZE, DIAMETER: D = 100
BLANK SIZE, LENGTH: L = 105
BASE LINE: ZP = 5
80
2) Defining a figure (entering a part figure)

The four points of the figure are defined in the following order: A
(start point), B, C, and D (end point).
The figure can be defined only by entering the following data in the
command specifying the arc from point A to C.
Figure element 1) SR = 2
SDX = 20
SZ = 0
PE = 1
DX = jjj R = 26
Z = jjj CDX = jjj
TL = jjj CZ = 18
TN = jjj
After the data is entered, the system can calculate the center of the arc.
The system prompts the operator to select a desired center.
On the screen, calculated centers are automatically scaled and
indicated by graphic cursors.
The system temporarily scales the centers so that the operator can
easily select one of the centers. After the operator specifies the desired
center, the original scale is restored.
Selecting a center . . PC = j (³: Right, ²: Left, ´: Up, ±: Down)
The desired center is the intersection of auxiliary circle A (center (20,
0) and radius (R) 26) and the straight line of Z = 18. Since the circle
and line intersect at two points (PC1 and PC2), the operator must
specify either of them. (See the figure below.)
81
In response to the PC = j prompt, key in ± (INPUT). PC2 is selected.

(³: Right, ²: Left, ´: Up, ±: Down)
Figure element 2) DX = jjj R = 70
Z = jjj CDX = jjj
TL = jj1 CZ = jjj
TN = jj1
Figure element 3) DX = 70 R = 15
Z = jjj CDX = 80
TN = jjj CZ = 33
As two end points are possible (PE1 and PE2), the operator must specify
either of them. (See Fig.3.2.8.)
On the screen, calculated end points are automatically scaled and
indicated by graphic cursors.
The system temporarily scales the two end points so that the operator can
easily select one of them. After the operator specifies a desired end point,
the original scale is restored.
82

Fig.3.2.8 Selecting an End Point

In response to the PE = j prompt, key in ² (INPUT). PE1 is selected.
(³: Right, ²: Left, ´: Up, ±: Down)
After all the above data is specified, the arc is defined and the part figure
is drawn on the screen.
83
(2) Notes
NOTE
1 The system can define the center of an arc according to a
given single coordinate when either of the following
conditions is satisfied:
– The end point of the previous element is determined.
– The next element is known and the arc contacts the
element.
2 The system can define the center of an arc according to a
given single coordinate only when the coordinate (CDX or
CZ) is specified with an absolute value.
84
3.3
MACHINE ZERO
WARNING
POINT AND TURRET After entering machine zero point or turret position data,
POSITION check the entered data. Failure to enter correct data may
result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or
When the figure has been defined, the screen asks about the “Home
position” and “Index position”.
The meaning of questions is as follows:
HOME POSITION
DXH =
ZH =
Input the coordinate value of home position of NC lathe.
If a data has already been input properly, press the “Cursor”. Do not
input data and leave it undefined when not starting from the home
position.
INDEX POSITION
DXI =
ZI =
Input the coordinate value of turret revolution center position.
If a data has already been input properly, press the “NEXT PAGE”.
In the case of 15–TTFB, 16–TT CAP II, the question for home position
and index position at the No.2 also appears.
WARNING
Input the distance from the programmed coordinate axis for
both home position and index position. Let the sign of Z to
positive whichever direction the Z axis of coordinate axis
programmed faces. The home position is used to indicate
the relationship between the program coordinate system
and machine coordinate system.
When the home position and index position is determined
and it is troublesome to input these data every time, it is
possible to set initial values to the system parameters 206
– 213. Also, it is possible to skip questions. For details, see
Chapter 8 1–1. This screen does not appear when skipping
the questions of home position and index position.
85
3.4 Following is the configuration which defines the machining process.

MACHINING Start machining
DEFINITION definition
Yes
New definition?
No
Select a mode
(modify, create, etc.)
Select a process
Is automatic process Yes

determination executed?
No
Yes Is machining
Execute automatic
definition
process determination
completed?
End
No
Define a tool, machining start
position, and passing point
Cutting off Center drilling, bar feed

Outer surface machining, inner surface
machining, grooving, residual machin-
ing, threading, C-axis machining Y-axis
machining
Is grooving, residual machining,

C-axis/Y-axis machining executed?
Yes
Is there only one
definition point?
No
Specify the cutting Specify the cutting area and the
start position direction or position of cutting
Define cutting Define cutting conditions

conditions
Is machining of another area Yes

defined with the same tool?
No
NOTE
The previous screen can be displayed by pressing the [BACK PAGE] key. When a subprocess
is defined, however, the [BACK PAGE] key is disabled.
86
3.4.1
Selection of Kinds of
Machining WARNING
No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made.
Therefore, even when a machining sequence specified in
the machining definition includes any invalid process steps
(inner surface machining without drilling, or finishing before
roughing, for example), the entire machining sequence is
reflected on the prepared NC data. When defining
machining, check the specified machining sequence.
Failure to specify a valid machining sequence may result in
the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or
forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to
the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
When the machining definition soft key (No.4) is pressed on the

initial screen, the following screen appears. On this screen, the manual
machining definition item and the automatic process determination
function can be selected.
Fig. 3.4.1 (a)

To select a machining type, press the soft key corresponding to a desired
major category. The detailed machining menu is then displayed. From
the menu, select the desired machining type.
On this screen, the following functions can be used:
– Automatic process determination function
– Function for setting the tool data and tooling data
87
Soft keys for selecting major categories of machining types

CENTER HOLE . . . . . . Displays the center drilling menu.
TURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the turning menu.
GROOV. THREAD . . . Displays the grooving and threading menu.
MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the C–axis/Y–axis milling
machining menu.
Other soft keys
ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the execution procedure menu.
PROC. DELETE . . . . . Deletes the process selected by the cursor.
CURSOR ´, CURSOR ± . . . . Move the cursor in the process list.
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executes automatic process determination.
AUTO PROC . . . . . . . . Specifies the machining procedure for
automatic process determination.
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . Displays the screen on which the tool data
can be specified, modified, and deleted.
TOOLING INFOR. . . . Displays the screen on which the tooling
data can be specified, modified, and
deleted.
NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the next page.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the soft keys on the next page.
88
When the CENTER HOLE soft key is pressed
Fig. 3.4.1 (b)

[CENTER DRILL] . . . Press this key for center drilling
[DRILLING] . . . . . . . . Press this key for drilling
[REAMER] . . . . . . . . . Select to perform reaming
[TAP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select to perform tapping
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . . Press this key for sub cycle
89
Fig. 3.4.1 (c)

[ROUGH O.D.] . . . . Press this key for roughing of outer figure
[S–FIN O.D.] . . . . . . Press this key for semi–finishing of outer figure
[FIN O.D.] . . . . . . . . Press this key for finishing of outer figure
[ROUGH I.D.] . . . . . Press this key for roughing of inner figure
[S–FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . Press this key for semi–finishing of inner figure
[FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . . . Press this key for finishing of inner figure
[BAR FEED] . . . . . . Press this key for bar feed machining.
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . Press this key for sub cycle
Fig. 3.4.1 (d)

[GROOV. NECK] . . . . . . . Press this key for grooving (rough grooving
or rough grooving and finishing are carried
out by a single tool) or necking.
[ROUGH. GROOVE] . . . . Press this key for rough grooving
[FIN. GROOVE] . . . . . . . . Press this key for grooving finishing
[CUT OFF] . . . . . . . . . . . . Press this key for corner cutting (When the
system parameter No.140 is 0, this soft key
is not displayed.)
[THREADING] . . . . . . . . . Press this key for thread cutting
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . . . . . Press this key for sub cycle
For example, press “Rough O.D.” when the soft key in Fig.3.4.1(c) is
displayed; “Roughing of outer figure” will have been selected in process
No.1.
NOTE
1 The CUT OFF soft key is not displayed if system parameter
140 is set to 0.
2 For the automatic tool determination function, see Section
10. For setting the tool data and tooling data, see Chapter
V.
90
3.4.2
Process Change and
Correction
Fig. 3.4.2 (a)
When Menu No.4 is selected again after completion of machining

definition, the screen shown above will appear.
[CORR.&OUT] . . . . Press this key to correct a selected process and
create the NC data of the corrected process.
[CORRECTION] . . . Press this key to modify or change part of the
process.
[NEW] . . . . . . . . . . . Press this key when re–instructing the process
from the start after all processes are cancelled.
When “CORRECTION” is depressed, following screen appears.
Fig. 3.4.2 (b)
91
Each time “Cursor ±” or “Cursor ´” is depressed when the above screen

appears, the position of the cursor of the process No. on the process table
moves up and down.
Press “Cursor ±” or “Cursor ´” to select an arbitrary Process No., and
correct the machining contents.
Also in this screen, the process can be inserted, deleted and replaced.
1) Sample Insertion
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 02: ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE
PROC 03: FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
PROC 04:
To insert roughing of inner figure between processes 02 and 03, follow
this procedure:
1 Press the CURSOR ± or CURSOR ´ key to select the position of
insertion (in this example, process 03). A specified process will be
inserted immediately before the position selected by the cursor.
2 Press soft keys to select desired machining (for this example, press
the TURN key, then press the ROUGH. I.D. key) and define the
machining.
The results are as follows.
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 03: ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE ² (INSERTION)
PROC 05:
2) Sample Deletion
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 04:
1 Press “CURSOR ±” or “CURSOR ´” to select the process no. to
be deleted (PROC. 02)
2 Press “PROC DELETE”.
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 03:
PROC 04:
3) Replacement
1 Insert a new machining process, then delete the old one.
2 Delete the old one, then insert a new machining process.
3.4.3 Only one process can be corrected if required after all processes are
Output of Only Single prepared, and only NC data of its process can be output.
Press “CORR. & OUT” when the screen in Fig.3.4.2(a) appears: the
Process screen as shown in Fig.3.4.2(b) will appear.
Select the process to be output independently as NC data, using “Cursor
*” or “Cursor *”, and press “NEXT PAGE”. After the process is
corrected, the NC data creation screen appears. This screen shows the NC
data of the corrected process.
92
3.4.4
Tool Data
WARNING
After entering tool data, check the entered data. Failure to
enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
If the working process is specified on the process chart screen, the screen
changes and the tool information required for working definition is
prompted.
Soft keys
ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the menu screen.
BACK PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the previous page.
TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skips the system inquiry for the tool data
and displays that for the machining start
position.
NEXT TOOL . . . . . . . . Selects the ID of the next tool whose
machining process type (KP) is specified.
(The automatic process determination
function is required.)
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . Displays the tool data list. The data can be
specified and corrected.
TOOLING INFOR . . . . Displays the tooling information list.
The data can be specified and corrected.
CURSOR ´, CURSOR ± . . . . Moves the cursor to a prompt.
CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . Draws the tool figure. (The animated
simulation function is required.)
P.PNT SET . . . . . . . . . . Displays the section in which a passing
point can be specified.
NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the next page.
The system prompts the operator to specify the following tool data:
1 Tool number data
2 Tool figure data
3 Tool setting data
93
(1) Tool number data

The system prompt the user to specify the following:
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . TL =J
TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . . . TN =JJ
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . TM =JJ
TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . . . TM2 =JJ
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . ID =JJ
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . TL = Turret number

The system prompts the operator to specify a turret number if the
machine has two or more turrets.
Specify the number of turrets in the following MTF:
Number of turrets (1 or 2)
1: Two–axis lathe (one turret)
2: four–axis lathe (one spindle/two turrets)
TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . . . . TN = Tool selection number

To use a tool whose tooling data is registered, enter the corresponding
tool selection number.The other data is then automatically displayed.
To enter a tool selection number greater than 99, modify the following
MTF. An integer of up to 654 can be specified.
No.1104: Number of digits of the T–code tool selection number (up to 3)
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM = Tool offset number

To enter a tool offset number greater than 99, modify the following
MTF. An integer of up to 654 can be specified.
No.1105: Number of digits of the T–code tool offset number (up to 3)
A tool offset number can be specified for each cutting area. To perform
individual tool offset for each of the specified cutting areas, specify the
value for switching the offset numbers in the following system parameter:
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool

offset is:
= 0: Not output.
= 1: output.
If the parameter is set to a value for outputting the T code specifying tool
offset for each cutting area, this prompt is made when the cutting
condition data is entered. (For details, see Section 3.4.8.)
TOOL OFFSET NO.2: TM2 = Specifies the tool offset number for the
minor cutting edge of a grooving tool.
If a grooving tool is used, a tool offset number can be specified for the
minor cutting edge. To specify the tool offset number for the minor
cutting edge, set the following system parameter (Warning):
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Before cutting with the minor cutting edge is started in

grooving, the T code of the secondary tool offset is:
= 0: Not output.
= 1: output.
94
TOOL ID NO. . . . . ID = Tool identification number

When a tool identification number is entered, the registered tool figure
data and tool setting data are displayed.
To use a tool whose tool data is not registered, do not define the tool
identification number.
If the entered tool identification number is not registered, the NOT
FOUND TOOL ID. NO. message is displayed.
If the tool type corresponding to the selected tool identification
number is not suitable for the current process, the TOOL TYPE
DON’T FIT THIS PROCESS message is displayed.
WARNING
If TOOL OFFSET NO.2 is specified, the T code of the
secondary tool offset number is output before the minor
cutting edge is moved for grooving.
TOOL SELECT NO. = 01

TOOL OFFSET NO. = 01
TOOL OFFSET NO.2 = 02
95
(2) Tool figure data

The tool figure data is shown below.
For details of the tool figure data, see Section 2 in Chapter V.
[Turning tools]
Tool for grooving and residual
Center drill, drill machining
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . AN = NOSE RADIUS . . . . . . . . . RN =
DRILL DIAMETER . . . . DD = CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . . AC =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . AN =
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . . XN =
ZN =
Tool for threading General–purpose tool

CUTTING EDGE . . . . . AC = NOSE RADIUS . . . . . . . . . RN =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . AN = CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . . AC =
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. XN = NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . AN =
ZN = PROTECTION ANGLE . . . AP =
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . . XN =
ZN =
Reamer Tap
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . DT = TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . LT = CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . LT =
PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . LE = PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LE =
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
Finger
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. XN =
As the XN value of a finger bit, enter the dimensions shown below:
96
NOTE
The system can be set so that it displays the tool figure data
and does not allow modification. To do this, change the
following system parameter:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Specifies whether the tool figure data can be

specified in machining definition.
= 0: Cannot be specified. (The data is just displayed.)
= 1: Can be specified.
(3) Tool setting data

[Setting data of a turning tool]
SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . . AS =JJJJ. JJJ
SETTING POSITION . . . . XS =JJJJ. JJJ
ZS =JJJJ. JJJ
SPINDLE DIRECTION . . . SD =J
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . HL =JJ
SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . . . AS = Setting angle

Enter the setting angle according to the drawing format. This line is
not displayed when a center drill, drill, or finger bit is selected.
SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS = Setting position along the X–axis,
ZS = Setting position along the Z–axis
SPINDLE DIRECTION . . . . SD = Direction of spindle rotation
0: Clockwise
1: Counterclockwise
The following system parameter specifies whether the spindle
direction can be specified for each tool:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Specifies whether the spindle direction can be

specified for each tool.
= 0: Cannot be specified.
= 1: Can be specified.
HOLDER NO. . . . . HL = Holder number for animated simulation

The system prompts the operator to enter the holder number if the
animated simulation function is provided. If the specified holder is not
defined, it is not drawn.
* Warning and Note on tool data
WARNING
After the NC data is created, the tool data is first checked to
see whether the figure is creates causes interference and
then the offset data is calculated. The output NC data is
correct only when the entered tool data is correct.
97
NOTE
If the NEXT PAGE soft key is pressed to display the next
screen when a tool with registered tool data is selected, the
set data is registered as the tooling data.
For milling tools, see Chapter VIII.

(4) When the machine has two turrets (TT model)
When the machine has two turrets, a change in the turret number
inverts the drawing of the tool figure.
Example of tool figures displayed when tools having

an identical figure on different turrets are changed
NOTE
1 If the tool holder is not defined, only the tip is displayed.
2 The scale of the tip and holder cannot be changed.
3.4.5
Machining Start
Position WARNING
After entering machining start point data, check the entered
data. Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced
machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the
When all tool data is entered, the system prompts the operator to enter the
data of the machining start position.
MACHINING START POSITION:
DXO = JJJJ. JJJ ZO = JJJJ. JJJ
DXO = X coordinate of the machining start position

ZO = Z coordinate of the machining start position
The machining start position can be automatically determined according
to the turret turning position and tool setting position.
DXO = DXI (turret turning position) – XS (setting position) 2
ZO = ZI (turret turning position) – ZS (setting position)
98
The following system parameter specifies whether the operator is

prompted to enter the machining start position:
No.009: 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0
Specifies whether the operator is prompted to

enter the machining start position.
= 0: Prompted.
= 1: Not prompted.
3.4.6
Passing Point
WARNING
After entering passing point data, check the entered data.
occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
(1) This function designates the passing point of a tool when approaching
to the work from the machining start position, and the passing point
of a tool when returning to the next machining start position after
completion of the machining.
When the rightmost soft key [ ] is pressed on the tool data screen, the
following soft keys are displayed:
When the P.PNT SET soft key is pressed, the system prompts the operator
to enter the data of the passing point.
Fig. 3.4.6 (a)
99
PASSING POINT FOR APPROACH:

1’ST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XA1 =
ZA1 =
2’ND POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XA2 =
ZA2 =
Designate the passing point of tool when approaching to the work from
the machining start position at the time of machining start.
PASSING POINT FOR ESCAPE:
1’ST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XE1 =
ZE1 =
2’ND POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XE2 =
ZE2 =
Designate the passing point of tool when escaping from the work up to
the next machining start position upon completion of machining.
WARNING
The following system parameter specifies whether the
operator is prompted to enter a passing point for each
machining type:
Nos.105 to 115, 300 to 305: x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Specifies whether the operator is

prompted to enter a passing point for
each machining type.
= 0: Not prompted.
= 1: Prompted.
When no data is defined, the axis in question does not move.

For example, in the absence of input on Z–axis coordinate value after
inputting some data to X–axis coordinate value, the tool moves to the
specified position only for X–axis, and Z–axis does not move.
Fig. 3.4.6 (b) Designation pf passing point
100
Set the number of simultaneous moving axes in a motion from the

machining start position to (XA1, ZA1) and the number of simultaneous
moving axes in a motion from (XE2, ZE2) to the next machining start
position using the following system parameters.
[Turning]
Nos.105 to 115: 0 0 0 x x 0 0 0
Specifies the number of axes along which the

tool approaches simultaneously.
tool retracts simultaneously.
= 0: Two axes
= 1: One axis
[C–axis machining]
Nos.300 to 305: 0 0 x x x 0 0 0

tool approaches simultaneously.
= 00: One axis
= 01: Two axes
= 10 or 11: Three axes
tool retracts simultaneously.
(Z–axis and X–axis)
= 0: Two axes
= 1: One axis
3.4.7 (1) Outer surface machining and inner surface machining

Specifying the
Direction and Area of
Cutting
The following soft keys are displayed when the operator is prompted to
specify a dividing direction:
101
Functions of the soft keys

BACK PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the previous page.
´/ ±/ ²/ ³ . . . . . . . . . Enter the cutting direction.
CURSOR BACK/CURSOR FORWRD . . . Move the graphic
cursor indicating the
dividing point.
CURSOR ´/ CURSOR ± . . . . . . . Move the cursor in the data
setting area.
DRAWING RANGE . . Enlarges or reduces the size of the
drawing.
NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the next page
(tool definition screen).
1) Specifying the cutting direction
When outer surface machining or inner surface machining is selected,
the operator is prompted to enter a cutting direction.
In response to the prompt, enter a desired direction. The direction can
be entered by pressing a key on the numeric keypad or a soft key.
The following soft keys are displayed when the operator is prompted
to enter the cutting direction:
NOTE
The operator is prompted to enter the cutting direction only
when outer surface machining or inner surface machining
is selected. If cutting off, grooving, threading, C–axis
machining or Y–axis machining is selected, the operator is
prompted to enter different data.
2) Specifying the cutting area

The cutting area can be specified by graphic cursors (J) which are
displayed on the machining profile.
The screen displays the figure of the workpiece to be cut (broken line)
and the machining profile (solid line). The operator is prompted to
enter the dividing direction.
On the screen, specify the machining start point and end point of the
part figure, using the blinking graphic cursors. One cursor indicates
the start point of the cutting area and the other cursor indicates the end
point.
102
To select the start or end point, move the cursor along the part figure.
Each time the CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK key is
pressed, the cursor moves forward or backward along the part figure.
After entering the start and end points, specify a cutting area by
pressing arrow keys corresponding to desired dividing directions in
the blank figure.
Specify the following directions by pressing the corresponding arrow
keys:
DIVIDING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . Dividing direction from the start point
DIVIDING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . Dividing direction from the end point
Any one of the following eight directions can be selected:

[´] [±] [³] [²] [¾] [¼] [½] [¿]
3) Sample divisions
When an arrow key is pressed, an imaginary line is drawn from the
position of the blinking cursor in the direction of the arrow. The
cutting area is an area enclosed with the imaginary lines drawn by the
arrow keys and the lines of blank figure and part figure (shaded area
in figures below).
103
The cutting area can be displayed on this screen so that the operator
can check the area specified by entering the dividing directions. Set
the following system parameters so that the cutting area can be
displayed:
No.670: Color in which the blank figure is filled in on the machining definition
screen
No.671: Color in which the cutting area is displayed on the machining
definition screen
No.704: x x 0 0 0 0 0 0
Specifies whether the cutting area is displayed on the

machining definition screen.
Specifies whether the blank figure is filled in on the machining
definition screen.
The figure of the workpiece is still displayed on the screen after the
specified area is cut off. Symbolic FAPT simulates all stages of
machining on the screen. The operator can easily check whether the
area to be cut remains.
The shape of the tool determines the area it can cut. The system
automatically checks the relationship between the tool shape and part
figure and displays the area which the tool cannot cut. Specify another
tool to cut the uncut area.
104
4) Specifying cutting of the remaining area
The above figure shows an example of an uncut area that results

because of the relationship between the part figure and tool shape. To
cut the uncut area, specify a tool having an inverted tool tip.
If an attempt is made to specify cutting of the uncut area with a tool

having the wrong tip or wrong figure data, the system may not accept
the area data.
Once the area has been specified, the screen for specifying the cutting
conditions for that area is displayed.
105
(2) Cutting off
Specify the start point of cutting off by pressing the CURSOR

FORWRD or CURSOR BACK soft key.
The tool path for cutting off is illustrated below.
Fig. 3.4.7 (a)

If the cursor is moved to specify the previous figure element as the start
point, the tool path becomes as shown in Fig. 3.4.7 (b).
106
Fig. 3.4.7 (b)

System parameter 144 specifies whether the outer corner of the
workpiece is chamfered.
If chamfering of the workpiece is specified, the workpiece is
chamfered after the cut off operation (Fig. 3.4.7 (c)).
Fig. 3.4.7 (c)
107
(3) Threading
Specify the position of threading. If the blinking cursor indicates the

desired threading position, enter 1. To specify another threading
position, enter 0.
The threading position can also be entered by pressing the CURSOR
FORWRD or CURSOR BACK soft key.
(4) Residual machining
Specify the position of residual machining. If the blinking cursor

indicates the desired position of residual machining, enter 1. To
specify another position of residual machining, enter 0.
The position of residual machining can also be specified by pressing
the CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK soft key.
108
3.4.8 (1) Overview

Function for Using the optional automatic process determination function enables
Automatically Setting the positions of area division cursors to be automatically set according
to the cutting direction. The area division cursors are used to specify
Area Division Points cutting areas for outer machining, inner machining, and grooving.
This automatic setting function can reduce a considerable number of
operations for moving the area division cursors, thus allowing more
efficient definition of cutting areas.
The automatic setting of the area division cursors is based on the area
division method used by the automatic process determination
function. For details, see Section 4.4, “Area Division” in Part XI,
“AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION.”
The area division cursors are graphic cursors that move along a
machining profile to specify a cutting area.
(2) Execution conditions
The area division cursors are automatically set under the following
conditions.
1) When any of the following machining processes is newly defined,
the area division cursors are automatically set on the cutting area
definition screen.
a) Outer roughing
b) Outer semifinish machining
c) Outer finishing
d) Inner roughing
e) Inner semifinish machining
f) Inner finishing
g) Grooving (including roughing and finishing)
For grooving, if no G elements are included in the parts figure, the
area division cursors are initialized to the start and end points.
2) Once the cutting direction (CD) is changed on the cutting area
definition screen, the area division cursors are automatically reset.
(3) Warning and Notes
WARNING
For some machining profiles, the automatic setting function
may not position the area division cursors correctly. If this
occurs, use the [CURSOR FORWARD] or [CURSOR
BACK] soft key to modify the area division cursor positions.
NOTE
1 For outer or inner machining, if an inverse process tool is
set, the area division cursors are not set automatically.
2 The automatic setting of the area division cursors is applied
to the entire machining profile.
3 To use this automatic setting function, the optional
automatic process determination function must be used.
109
3.4.9
Cutting Conditions
WARNING
The cutting conditions are automatically set according to the
selected machining type. Check the set conditions. If the
conditions are incorrect, the tool may collide with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur,
Input the data of CUTTING CONDITION.

(Example : ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE)
The cutting conditions are automatically set and displayed according to

the kinds of selected materials. Change only the desired items, while
monitoring the CRT screen. To display the next page, press the NEXT
PAGE soft key. To use the tool to cut another area, display the area
definition screen. Unless the tool is used to cut another area, display the
tool list screen.
If you want to change the feedrate to 75% of the displayed value, for
example, multiply the displayed value by 0.75 as follows.
(Example) F1 = 3 * 0 . 7 5 INPUT
* Outputting the T code specifying the tool offset for each cutting area
The T code of the tool offset number, output for each process, can be
output for each of the specified cutting areas.
110
Specify the value for switching the offset numbers in the following
system parameter:
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool

offset is:
= 0: Not output.
= 1: Output.
If the parameter is set to a value for outputting the T code specifying the
tool offset for each cutting area, the following prompt is displayed:
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM = Tool offset number for each
cutting area
The cutting conditions and meanings of the system questions are
described below according to machining data.
(1) Center drilling
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
number for each cutting area)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance quantity (mm)
(Default value is system parameter
No.180)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm)
SPINDLE SPEED . . . . N = Spindle speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev)
111
(2) Drilling
Cutting conditions for drilling comprise type 1, 2 and 3 according to
the movement of a drill.
CUTTING CONDITIONS 1
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (Tool offset
CLEARANCE. . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
No.181)
CUT POINT. . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
No.702 is 1)
or
DEPTH OF CUT. . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
No.702 is 0)
SPINDLE ROTATION . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
No.702 is 1)
or
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
No.702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch)
No.121)
RETURN AMOUNT . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
112
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Secondary drilling dearance
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
No.702 is 1)
or
No.702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch)
No.121)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D2 = Secondary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
No.122)
RETURN AMOUNT . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feed rate for second pass
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
113
WARNING
D1 and D2 in Machining method 2 and Machining method
3
As shown in figure 7 and figure 8, “D1” and “D2” in
machining method 2 and machining method 3 are input as
positive values.
Associated parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
702
Bit 7 Specification of depth of cut

0 : Specifies with an incremental value
1 : Specifies with an absolute value
114
(3) Reaming
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Amount of clearance
(mm or inches)
181 [same as drilling])
CUTTING POINT . . . . Z = Cutting endpoint coordinate
(Warning)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feed rate (mm/rev)
Workpiece face
Where LE value is either 0

or underfined
F2=F1(value contained in system parameter No.196)
Where LE value is significant
(4) Tapping
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Speed of rotation (rpm)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Amount of clearance
(mm or inches)
196)
(Warning)
Workpiece face
Threading part
115
WARNING
A value is assigned to Z in accordance with the system of
coordinates on this screen. Where the Z axis is plotted as
shown in the figure on the right the value of Z will always be
negative.
Whatever the drawing format the right hand end of the Z axis
is always positive on the “Machining definition” screen of
menu No.4.
Specifications of the machining start points and
intermediate points are all made in accordance with this
system of coordinates. The cutting points are also therefore
specified in accordance with the same coordinate system.
(5) Roughing of outer figure

(6) Roughing of inner figure
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM= Tool offset number (Tool offset
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . CX = Clearance quantity in X–axis
(mm or inch)
(Default value is system
parameter No.183)
CZ = Clearance quantity in Z–axis
(mm or inch)
parameter No.184)
CZ2= Second clearance along the
Z–axis (mm or inch)
(The initial value is set in system
parameter No.194) (Warning)
FINISH ALLOWANCE . . TX = Finish allowance in X–axis
(mm or inch)
parameter No.117)
TZ = Finish allowance in Z–axis
(mm or inch)
parameter No.172)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Return amount quantity
(mm or inch)
116
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed

(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
F2 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
1ST OVERRIDE . . . . . . . % = Displayed in case of outside
diameter roughing.
Refer to the item (11).
* First override in outer surface roughing
In outer surface roughing, the depth and feedrate of the first cut can be
overridden. To specify the override, set bit 7 of system parameter
No.104 to 1
No.104: 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0
Specifies whether the operator is prompted to

enter an override value.
= 0: Not prompted.
= 1: Prompted.
Even if the operator is not prompted to specify the override, the data can
be overridden by the value set in system parameter No.711.
No.711: Override value for the first cut in outer surface roughing
(10% to 100%)
Not defined: 100%
n: n%
117
(7) Semi–finishing of outer figure

(8) Semi–finishing of inner figure
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
(mm or inch)
parameter No.185)
(mm or inch)
parameter No.186)
parameter No.194) (Warning)
(mm or inch)
parameter No.118)
(mm or inch)
parameter No.173)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
MAXIMUM RPM . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed
(Warning) (P.NO TAG)
118
(9) Finishing of outer figure

(10) Finishing of inner figure
(mm or inch)
parameter No.187)
(mm or inch)
parameter No.188)
parameter No.194)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or
feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate for (mm/rev or inch/rev)
F2 = Feedrate for (mm/rev or inch/rev)
WARNING
The prompt on the second clearance along the Z–axis can
be displayed.
The clearance becomes valid when the tool approaches the
workpiece during a process for inner surface machining. To
display the prompt, set the following system parameter:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The second clearance specified for inner surface

machining becomes:
= 0: Invalid.
= 1: Valid.
119

(11) Grooving/necking machining
[GROOVING/NECKING]
When a grooving tool is selected (TP = 3) (roughing type is 1)
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM = Tool offset number (tool offset
TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . TM2=Tool offset number 2 (tool offset
number 2 for each cutting area)
FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1 or 2)
PECKING ON/OFF . . . . . PE = Pecking
(0: Not executed, 1: Executed)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of each cut in pecking
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Distance of each retraction in
pecking (mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
FINISH. ALLOWANCE . TW = Finishing allowance for width
(mm or inch)
TB = Finishing allowance for depth
(mm or inch)
120

(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate in roughing
F2 = Feedrate in finishing
MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (rpm)
NOTE
If necking is specified, the operator is not prompted to enter
TW, TB, and F2.
When a versatile tool is selected (TP = 11)

TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
ROUGH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP1 =Type of roughing (1, 2, or 3)
FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1, 2, or 3)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Horizontal feedrate in roughing
F2 = Approach feedrate in roughing
F3 = Feedrate in finishing
[ROUGHING OF GROOVE]
When a grooving tool is selected (roughing type is 1)
PECKING ON/OFF . . . . . PE = Pecking
(0: Not executed, 1: Executed)
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Distance of each retraction in
pecking (mm or inch)
121

(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Approach feedrate in roughing
When a versatile tool is selected
ROUGH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP1 =Type of roughing (1, 2, or 3)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Horizontal feedrate in roughing
F2 = Approach feedrate in roughing
[FINISHING OF GROOVE]
When a grooving tool is selected
FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1 or 2)
feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feedrate in finishing
When a versatile tool is selected
FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1, 2, or 3)
122

feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F3 = Feedrate in finishing
The following figure shows the relationship between the clearance and
finishing allowance in grooving.
Roughing can be executed in the following three ways:
Finishing can be executed in the following three ways:
123
When pecking is executed in roughing of a groove, the tool is moved as

shown below:
NOTE
The operator is not prompted to enter the data of pecking
if finishing of a groove or necking is selected.
In roughing and finishing, the first cut is made from the virtual tool tip
side of the tool.
The position of the virtual tool tip is determined by AC and AN of the tool
data.
If AC is set to 90 and AN is set to –90 for a tool for outer surface
machining, the virtual tool tip is on the left side of the tool. Therefore,
the first cut is made from the left side.
124
If AC is set to –90 and AN is set to 90, the virtual tool tip is on the right
side of the tool.
A specified cutting area must not contain two or more grooves or cuts.
Divide the cutting area so that a single cutting area contains only one
groove or cut.
(12) Threading
CUTTING METHOD . TP = 1 : Single–edge thread cutting with
constant cutting amount
2 : Both–edge zigzag thread cutting
with constant cutting amount
3 : Single–edge thread cutting with
constant cutting depth
4 : Both–edge zigzag thread cutting
with constant cutting depth
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . CT = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
No.190)
CS = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
No.191)
CE = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
No.192)
DL = Final depth of cut (mm or inch)
No.119)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min)
125
WARNING
The prompt to ask the maximum spindle speed is selected
by system parameter No.702 bit 0.
0: No prompt.
(The maximum spindle speed is set by system parameter
No.128.)
1: The prompt for the maximum spindle speed is displayed
on each stage of machining process.
(Ignore the value of system parameter No.128.)
However, the prompt is not displayed at the process
where the constant tangential speed control is not used
set in system parameter Nos.107 to 115.
The value set in system parameter No.128 is output at
these processes.
If the same tool is used for more than one process, the
prompt is not displayed.
(13) Cutting off

If system parameter 140 is specified so that cutting off is defined, CUT
OFF is displayed on the screen which defines the type of machining.
On this screen, the cutting off data can be specified.
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = (mm or inch)
Specify the clearance from the
blank figure along the X–axis.
parameter 193.)
FINISH. ALLOWANCE . TZ = (mm or inch)
Specify the finishing allowance
for the workpiece subjected to
cutting off.
126
CUT OFF POS. . . . . . . . . CO = (mm or inch)

Specify the distance between the
cut off point and the inner surface
or center of the workpiece.
parameter 141.)
COND. RESET POS. . . . . CR = (mm or inch)
Specify the distance between the
point at which the cutting
conditions are changed and the
cut off point. (The initial value is
set in system parameter 142.)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . RA = (mm or inch)
Specify the retraction distance
along the X–axis of the tool from
the point at which the cutting
conditions are changed.
parameter 143.)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V1 = (m/min or feet/min)
V2 = (m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = (mm/rev or inch/rev)
F2 = (mm/rev or inch/rev)
For the example of cutting off shown in Fig. 3.4.9 (a), specify the
cutting speed and feedrate from a to b and b to c with V1 and F1,
respectively. Then specify the cutting speed and feedrate from c to d
with V2 and F2 respectively.
Fig. 3.4.9 (a)
127
(14) BAR FEED

The bar feed is the distance from the end of the workpiece after cutting
off to the end of the workpiece defined by the blank figure. The system
automatically calculates the bar feed.
Fig. 3.4.9 (b)

On the cutting conditions screen, the operator is first prompted to enter
the machining type.
TYPE . . . . . . BT =
Type 1: Pull–out mode 1
Type 2: Pull–out mode 2
Type 3: Slide–stop mode 1
Type 4: Slide–stop mode 2
The subsequent inquiries depend on the machining type specified.
128
1) Pull–out mode 1
CLEARANCE . . . . CAZ=Approach clearance (mm)
parameter 153.)
GRIP POS. . . . . . . . WG = Workpiece gripping position (mm)
parameter 154.)
ESCAPE VALUE . . CEZ= Distance the tool is retracted (mm)
parameter 155.)
FEED RATE . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (in gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = Feedrate (in pulling and positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = Feedrate (in retraction) (mm/min)
2) Pull–out mode 2
CLEARANCE . . . . CAX=Approach clearance (mm)
parameter 152.)
GRIP POS. . . . . . . . WG = Workpiece gripping position (mm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (in gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = Feedrate (in pulling and positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = Feedrate (in retraction) (mm/min)
129
3) Slide–stop mode 1
CLEARANCE . . . . CAZ=Approach clearance (mm or inch)
ESCAPE VALUE . . CEZ= Distance the tool is retracted
(mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . S1 = Spindle speed (rpm)
parameter 156.)
FEED RATE . . . . . . F2 = Feedrate (for sliding) (mm/min)
130
4) Slide–stop mode 2
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S1 = Spindle speed (rpm)
(15) Cutting another area

To cut another area with the current tool, input a value in response to
the following prompt:
ANOTHER AREA? . . . CN = (1: CUTTING 0: NON)

Enter either of the following:
1 INPUT: Yes (The tool is used to cut another area.)
0 INPUT: No (The tool is not used to cut another area.)
If 1 is entered, the CUTTING AREA screen is displayed to enable
specification of the desired area. If 0 is entered, the process directory
screen displaying prompts relating to the next machining is displayed.
131
3.4.10 The tool data and tooling information can be set and all the tooling
Setting the Tool Data information can be deleted on the machining process list (shown in
machining definition) or the tool data setting screen of a process.
and Tooling
Information [Machining process list]
To set the tool data and tooling information on the machining process list,
press the rightmost soft key [ ]. The following soft keys are then
displayed.
If either of the following soft keys is pressed, the corresponding data list
screen is displayed:
TOOL DATA : The tool data list is displayed.
TOLING INFOR. : The tooling information list is displayed.
[Tool data setting screen]
If either of the following soft keys is pressed, the corresponding data list
screen is displayed:
TOOL DATA : The tool data list is displayed.
TOLING INFOR. : The tooling information list is displayed.
132
(1) Setting the tool data

Press the TOOL DATA soft key.
TOOL TOLING
DATA INFOR.
List screen on which the tool data can be set
When the TOOL DATA soft key is pressed, the tool data list is
displayed. On the list screen, the tool data can be set, modified, or
deleted.
NOTE
When the tool DATA soft key is pressed on the machining
process list screen, the tool list screen shows the data of
turning tools. To set the data of a milling machining tool,
press the MILLING TOOL soft key.
When the TOOL DATA soft key is pressed on the tool data
setting screen of a process, the data of tools of the current
process is displayed.
If the current process is turning, the list of turning tools is
displayed. If the current process is C–axis machining or
Y–axis machining, the list of milling machining tools is
displayed.
133
(2) Setting the tooling information

Press the TOLING INFOR. soft key.
TOOL TOLING
DATA INFOR.
List screen on which the tooling information can be set
When the TOLING INFOR. soft key is pressed, the tooling

information list is displayed. On the list screen, the tooling data can
be set, modified, or deleted.
For the TT model, the data of each turret is displayed.
134
(3) Initializing the tooling information

To initialize the tooling information, press the rightmost soft key [ ].
Different soft keys are then displayed.
NOTE
The TURRET 1 DEL. and TURRET 2 DEL. soft keys are
displayed only for the TT model.
If the ALL DELETE, TURRET 1 DEL., or TURRET 2 DEL. soft key is

pressed, the operator is prompted to specify whether to delete the data.
To delete the data, enter 1 INPUT. To not delete the data, enter 0 INPUT.
The soft keys have the following functions:
ALL DELETE: Deletes all tooling information cataloged in main
memory.
TURRET 1 DEL.: Deletes all TL1 tooling information cataloged in
main memory. (Only for the TT model)
TURRET 2 DEL.: Deletes all TL2 tooling information cataloged in
main memory. (Only for the TT model)
[ ]: Displays the next group of soft keys.
135
3.4.11 In machining definition, a blank figure can be painted and a cutting area
Drawing a Cutting Area can be drawn (line drawing) on the screen for setting an area or machining
conditions. Set the following system parameters as shown below:
and Painting a Blank
Figure No.704: x x 0 0 0 0 0 0
0: The blank figure is not painted.

1: The blank figure is painted.
0: The cutting area is not drawn.
1: The cutting area is drawn.
No.670: Color in which the blank figure is filled in (0 to 7)
No.671: Color of the line which draws the cutting area (0 to 7)
NOTE
The system parameters are valid only for turning.
(1) Drawing a cutting area (line drawing)

When bit 7 of system parameter 704 is set to 1, the cutting area is drawn
on the cutting area definition screen and cutting condition setting
screen, as shown below:
1) Drawing the area on the cutting area screen

D Each time the start point, end point, or dividing direction is
changed, the drawing is changed accordingly.
D The area for which the tool angle is not checked is drawn.
2) Drawing the area on the cutting condition screen
D Each time the finishing allowance is changed, the drawing is
changed accordingly.
D The area for which the tool angle is checked is drawn.
136
(2) Painting the blank figure

When bit 6 of parameter 704 is set to 1, the blank figure is filled in on
the cutting area definition screen and cutting condition setting screen
as shown below:
NOTE
In 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II, a blank figure cannot
be Painted on the cutting area definition screen or cutting
condition screen.
137
3.5
NC DATA
PREPARATION
3.5.1
Preparations of NC
Data and Registrations WARNING
of Machining Memory Even when the tool path and machining processes
specified in NC data are verified by machining simulation or
tool path check, if the data relating to the actual tool offset
and workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Before
starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that
the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. For
example, specify a low feedrate, then start the NC program
without mounting a workpiece on the machine.
Select 5 on the menu screen to display the NC data generation screen.
Horizontal lathe
Vertical lathe
138
Soft keys are displayed as shown below.

(1) Setting of 1–path lathe (MTF1050=1) with the animated simulation
option
ESCAPE PROC. REGIS– NC PROC. SINGLE TOOL ANIMA– DRAWNG START

LIST TER DATA STOP STEP PATH TION RANGE
(2) Setting of 2–path lathe (MTF1050=2) without the animated

simulation option or Series 16–TTA
ESCAPE PROC. REGIS– NC PROC. SINGLE DRAWNG START

LIST TER DATA STOP STEP RANGE
The above soft keys are displayed, and the following message prompts
you to input a program No. and comment.
PROGRAM No. . . . . . . . . Input 0 = program No.
COMMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . Input CM = comment.
Comments are specified in alphanumerics or symbols of 16 characters or
less.
If 17 or more characters are input, only the first 16 will be valid. All keys
other than round brackets, inverted commas and commas (“,”) can be
used.
Example) When 0 = 1234, CM = ABCD is input,
0 1 2 3 4 (ABCD);
is registered in the machining memory.
If system parameter No.708 bit 2 is set to 1, the process name comment
will be added automatically and output to the head of each process.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
708
Bit 2 Process name comment during NC format output:

0 : not output
1 : automatically output
Example) The OD roughing process head NC format when system
parameter No.708 bit 2 =1 is:
(ROUGH. OF. OUT.)
N002 GOTO202;
...
...
139
Automatically entered comments are as follows. Each type of machining

has characteristic contents.
Machining type Output comment
Center drilling CENTER DRIL.
Drilling DRIL.
OD roughing ROUGH. OF OUT.
ID roughing ROUGH. OF IN.
OD semi–roughing S–FIN. OF OUT.
ID semi–roughing S–FIN. OF IN.
OD finishing FIN. OF OUT.
ID finishing FIN. OF IN.
Grooving/necking GROV. OR NECK.
Threading THREAD.
Groove roughing ROUGH. OF GROOVE
Groove finishing FIN. OF GROOVE
Reamer REAMER
Tap TAP
Machining type Output comment
C axis center drilling C–CENTER DRILL.
C axis drilling C–DRILLING
C axis tapping C–TAPPING
C axis grooving C–GROOVING
Face milling C–FACE MILLING
Side milling C–SIDE MILLING
Y axis center drilling Y–CENTER DRILL.
Y axis drilling Y–DRILLING
Y axis tapping Y–TAPPING
Y axis pattern Y–PATTERN
Y axis contouring Y–CONTOUR
Sub cycle SUB CYCLE
Cut off CUT OFF
Bar feed BAR FEED
NOTE
It is not possible to output the process name comment when
NC format is outputted in main/sub format.
140
Program
No. INPUT
[ANIMATION] or [ANIMATION]
This key determines whether or not to perform background animated
simulation while NC data are being generated.
Each time this key is touched, the setting alternates between
[ANIMATION] and [ANIMATION].
Blank figures and part figures are drawn in the [ANIMATION] state.
Blank figures are drawn in colored backgrounds. Machining is
simulated during NC data preparation.
Animated simulation performed in this state is called
[BACKGROUND ANIMATION] and is distinguished from animated
simulation specified on Menu No.6.
(Animated simulation Specified on Menu No.6 is called
[FOREGROUND ANIMATION].)
Part figures alone are drawn in the [ANIMATION] state.
Tool paths are displayed during NC data preparation.
[TOOL PATH] or [TOOL PATH]
This key appears only in the [ANIMATION] state.
Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between
[TOOL PATH] and [TOOL PATH].
In the [TOOL PATH] state, the path of the virtual tool position is
always displayed in purple.
No path is displayed in the [TOOL PATH] state.
[SINGLE STEP] or [SINGLE STEP]
[SINGLE STEP] and [SINGLE STEP].
NC data is output continuously in the [SINGLE STEP] state. (Refer
to Chapter VIII 1.4 “NC Data Output by Single Step”.)
[PROC. STOP] or [PROC. STOP]
[PROC. STOP] and [PROC. STOP].
In the [PROC. STOP] state, NC data output is suspended
temporarily at the specified position of each process.
The half position is set by system parameters No.49 to No.57 and
No.310 to No.314. (Refer to Chapter VIII 1.4 Single Step Output.)
[NC DATA] or [NC DATA]
[NC DATA] and [NC DATA].
NC data is displayed in the [NC DATA] state.
No NC data is displayed in the [NC DATA] state.
141
[START]
Press this key to check the family program prepared anew.
In the [ANIMATION] state, you can simulate machining while
generating NC data preparation in the sequence of specification on the
process list.
Tool figures appear on the display, and you can visually check how
blank figures are cut.
Simulation by animation is not performed in the [ANIMATION] state.
NC data is generated in the sequence of specification on the process
list, and tool paths are displayed on the screen.
[REGISTER]
Press this key to register NC data in the machining memory while
checking the family program prepared anew.
In the [ANIMATION] state, you can simulate NC data while
generating the data in the sequence of specification on the process list.
Tool figures appear on the display, and you can visually check how
blank figures are cut.
In the [ANIMATION] state, NC data is prepared in the sequence of
specification on the process list, and tool paths are displayed on the
screen.
[DRAWNG RANGE]
Press this key to enlarge or scale down figures.
[PROC. LIST]
Press this key to display a list of machining periods and general
machining periods of each process.
[ESCAPE]
Press this key to return to Main Menu.
3.5.2 (1) Background animated simulation is supported only by the 1–path

Precautions to be lathe, not by the 2–path lathe.
Taken with Background (2) Background animation drawing is valid only when the animated
simulation function (option) is provided.
Animated Simulation
(3) Chucks and tail stocks are not displayed.
(4) Only linear interpolation, arc interpolation, and threading are
simulated.
(5) Background animated simulation is not performed with the vertical
lathe.
(6) Background animated simulation is not performed when single
process output is selected.
(7) Blanks are not cut in the bar feed process, threading process, and
C–axis/Y–axis machining process.
(8) Tool pictures do not appear in the bar feed process.
(9) In the sub–cycle process, blank cutting, tool pictures, and tool paths
are not drawn on the screen.
142
3.5.3 After NC data is automatically created, “***PRESS SOFT KEY***” is

Display of Machining displayed at the screen bottom.
Time When “PROCESS LIST” is pressed then, a list indecating the machine
time for each process and the total machining time is displayed.
“PROCESS LIST”
These machining time are the theoretical values figured out when NC data
was automatically created. The machining time is of course changed if
feed rate override is effected in actual machining.
NOTE
When over 20 processes are defined, a bar graph is not
displayed.
3.5.4
Process Editing
Function (Only with WARNING
2–path Control) After process editing, check the editing results. If edits are
made incorrectly, the tool may collide with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece, machine and/or tool
itself, or injury to the user.
(1) Summary
In the initial screen of Menu 5, “NC DATA PREPARATION”, the
operation sequence defined in Menu 4, “MACHINING DEFINITION”
is displayed for each turret. Further it is possible to edit the S Code and
operation sequence on this screen.
In editing the S code, a surface speed defined with “MACHINING
DEFINITION” can be reindicated with an other value.
143
In editing the operation sequence, each operation can be arranged by

shifting up or down the operation sequence independently for each turret
and a simultaneous operation by using both turrets is possible. When this
function is used, M code for waiting is output automatically for use in
preparation of the NC program.
In Menu 4, “MACHINING DEFINITION” suppose we define the
following operation sequence,
Process No. Kind of Machining Turret No.
1 Drilling 1
2 Roughing of outer figure 1
3 Roughing of inner figure 2
4 Finishing of outer figure 1
5 Finishing of inner figure 2
6 Grooving (External) 1
7 Grooving (Internal) 2
8 Threading (External) 1
9 Threading (Internal) 2
Namely, suppose we define the cutting operation sequence:

1. Drilling with a tool on the turret 1
2. Roughing of outer figure with a tool on the turret 1
3. Roughing of inner figure with a tool on the turret 2
4. Finishing of outer figure with a tool on the turret 1
5. Finishing of inner figure with a tool on the turret 2
6. Grooving with a tool on the turret 1 (External)
7. Grooving with a tool on the turret 2 (Internal)
8. Threading with a tool on the turret 1 (External)
9. Threading with a tool on the turret 2 (Internal)
in order.
When such cutting definition is executed, the following operation
procedure in displayed on the initial screen of Menu 5, NC DATA
PREPARATION.
144
Thus, cutting operations for each turret are displayed. For the section on
spindle speed, “N” means spindle speed, “V” means cutting speed. For
simultaneous operation; No.2 and 3, “ROUGHING OF OUTER
FIGURE” and “ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE”, operation No.8 and
9, “THREADING” and “DOWN” (or set the cursor to No.3 and depress
“HEAD 2 UP”), and then set the cursor to No.8 and depress the soft key,
“HEAD 1 DOWN” (or set the cursor to No.9 and depress “HEAD 2 UP”)
continuously. For changing the cutting speed of operation No.6,
“GROOVING”, 125 m/min for instance, set the cursor to No.6 and input
125 through keys for the question, V (N) =. When performing such
operations, the operation procedure is displayed as follows.
As for S code, an A code is output from either turret 1 or turret 2 when

a simultaneous operation is executed. Which turret is used can be
recognized by the speed indication on the upper screen. Whenever the
soft key, “S CODE SELECT” is depressed the value of turret 1 and 2 is
alternately displayed.
(2) SOFT KEY
The meaning of soft keys is as follows:
[ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . . . Processing of this screen is discontinued.
[HEAD 1 UP] . . . . . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret
1 located with the cursor to go up by one
step.
[HEAD 1 DOWN] . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret
1 located with the cursor to go down by one
step.
[HEAD 2 UP] . . . . . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret
2 located with the cursor to go up by one
step.
[HEAD 2 DOWN] . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret
2 located with the cursor to go down by one
step.
[S CODE SELECT] . . . When under simultaneous operation, select
the turret for which the S Code has priority.
[CURSOR ´] . . . . . . . . Move the cursor position backward.
[CURSOR ±] . . . . . . . . Move the cursor position forward.
[NEXT PAGE] . . . . . . . Advance to the next screen (screen inquires
details of the program number.)
145
(3) Edition of the operation sequence

As explained in paragraph “Soft key”, the operation sequence can be
shifted upward or downward by depressing “HEAD 1 UP”, “HEAD
1 DOWN”, “HEAD 2 UP” and “HEAD 2 DOWN”, however, to shift
the operation sequence by this handling is possible during only one
step per operation. Shifting for two steps is not possible. The
operation sequence of turret 1 cannot be transferred to turret 2.
CAUTION
1 When G96 mode process and G97 mode process are
simultaneously instructed, G97 mode process has priority.
2 If two G96 modes are simultaneously specified, the control
changes to the G97 mode process.
The spindle is controlled by the turret 1 side, but it is
controlled by the turret 2 side when the “S CODE SELECT”
soft key is pressed.
(Example)
NO HEAD 1 HEAD 2 SPEED
ROUGHING OF G96V145M03 (1)

1
OUTER FIGURE.
ROUGHING OF G96V150M03 (2)

2
INNER FIGURE.
FINISHING OF G96V200M03 (1)

3
OUTER FIGURE.
4 GROOVING G96V100M03 (1)
5 GROOVING G96V120M03 (2)
If the process editing is executed for the simultaneous

operation of processes 1 and 2, and 4 and 5 the operation is
performed as follows:
NO HEAD 1 HEAD 2 SPEED
ROUGHING OF ROUGHING OF G97V145M03 (1)

1 OUTER FIGURE. INNER FIGURE.
FINISHING OF G97V200M03 (1)

3
OUTER FIGURE.
4 GROOVING GROOVING G97V120M03 (2)
146
(4) Changing of the operation sequence and correction

After compelting to editing of the operation sequence, when
performing correcting operations by selecting Menu 4,
“DEFINITION OF MACHINING” and “2. CORRECTION” due to
addition of new operation sequence or partial correction of data of the
operation sequence which is already defined, the editing results of the
operation sequence performed up to this point are all reset to the state
before editing.
(5) S Code
When both turrets are moved because of the state of simultaneous
operation, select the soft key, “S CODE SELECT” and indicate
whether which turret’s S Code has priority. Concerning the indication
on the display, when drilling or center drilling, the spindle speed, “N”
is displayed and cutting speed, “V” is indicated for other cutting. The
spindle speed, “N” and cutting speed, “V” can be input up to 5 digits.
(6) M Code for waiting
M code for waiting is output according to the following standard
conditions.
(a) When the current operation and the next operation are done with
the same turret, M Code for waiting is not output.
(b) When the current operation and the next operation are done with
the different turrets, the same M Code for waiting is output at the
end of the current operation sequence and the head part (next to the
T Code command for tool exchange) for the next operation.
(c) In simultaneous operation of both heads, a waiting M code is
output at the head of both processes and at the block immediately
before the T code cancel of one process near the end of a program.
(Example)
N***G50X– – –Z– – –;
G00 T0303; T code selection
M105; Waiting M code
G96 S– –M03;
X– – – Z– – –; Approach
.
. Cutting
.
G00 X– – –; Return relief
X– – – Z– – –;
M106; Waiting M code
T0300;
M01;
Whether a waiting M code is output before T code cancellation or
not is switched by system parameter (No.704 bit 0).
(d) Output at the operation ending part for each turret (after returning
to the machine zero position.)
The initial value of M Code for waiting can be set in 730 of a system
parameter.
In the NC program shown in Fig. below, M code for waiting are
output as follows: (When the value of system parameter 730 is
100).
147
(e) NC data output for a single turret

When outer surface roughing is defined for turret 1 only, for
example, the NC data is output as shown below.
A waiting M code is output immediately before the program end
(MTF function table No. 2001).
In this case, the value of system parameter No. 730 (initial value
of the waiting M code) is output as a waiting M code.
Turret 1 NC data Turret 2 NC data
OXXXX ; O**** ;
NC data for outer surface roughing
TXX00 ;
M01 ;
M100 ; ²Waiting M code output ³ M100 ;
M05 ; ²Program end (MTF2001) ³ M05 ;
M30 ; M30 ;
% %
148
3.5.5 (1) Overview

Special Block Output When a model having two turrets is used, the program of turret 1 or
to both Programs 2 contains only the NC data of processes which corresponds to the
turret specified in machining definition. If outer surface roughing is
programmed for turret 1 and inner surface roughing is programmed for
turret 2, for example, the programs are output as shown below:
Turret 1 Turret 2
O0001; O0002;
NC data of
outer surface
roughing
M100; M100;
NC data of
inner surface
roughing
M101; M101;
M05; M05;
M30; M30;
% %
The program for turret 2 does not contain the block corresponding to outer
surface roughing of turret 1.
The program for turret 1 does not contain the block corresponding to inner
surface roughing of turret 2.
A machine may require that the programs of the two turrets share NC data
(such as M01) as shown below.
Turret 1 Turret 2
O0001; O0002;
NC data of
outer surface
roughing
M01; M01;
M100; M100;
NC data of
inner surface
roughing
M01; M01;
M101; M101;
M05; M05;
M30; M30;
% %
This can be done by setting a function code to output M01; in MTF2045.

MTF2045 specifies the special block to be output to the programs of both
turrets at the end of each process.
149
(2) Examples of setting and output

When the following machining is programmed, the programs are
output as shown below:
Turret 1 Turret 2
Outer surface
Process 1 roughing . . . . . . . . . Turret 1 only
Inner surface
Process 2 roughing . . . . . . . . . Turret 2 only
Outer surface Inner surface

Process 3 finishing finishing . . . . . . . . . Simultaneous
operation of
turrets 1 and 2
1) Example 1 for setting MTF

MTF2011 (End of roughing process)
MTF2013 (End of finishing process)
0003, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
Txx00 ;
MTF2045 (Special block)
0605, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
M01 ;
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
150
NC data output
After the end of each process (MTF2011, MTF2013), the special block
(MTF2045) is output.
O0001 ; O0002 ;
N1 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF OUT);
N2 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ; . . . MTF2011
M1 ; . . . MTF2045 . . . . M1 ;
M100 ; M100 ;
N2 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
N3 ; (ROUGH OF INNER) ;
N3 G50 X_ Z_ ;
MTF2011 . . . Txx00 ;
M1 ; . . . MTF2045 . . . . M1 ;
M101 ; M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER) ; (FIN OF INNER);
N4 G50 X_ Z_ ; N4 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ; . . . MTF2013 . . . Txx00 ;

M1 ; . . . MTF2013 . . . . M1 ;
X_ Z_ ; X_ Z_ ;
M102 ; M102 ;
M5 ; M5 ;
M30 ; M30 ;
% %
2) Example 2 for setting MTF

MTF2011 (End of roughing process)
MTF2013 (End of finishing process)
0003, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
Txx00 ;
MTF2045 (Special block)
Specify 0000 only.
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
151
NC data output
Since 0000 is specified in MTF2045, no special block are output.
O0001 ; O0002 ;
N1 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF OUT) ;
N2 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ; . . . MTF2011
M100 ; M100 ;
N1 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF INNER) ;
N3 G50 X_ Z_ ;
MTF2011 . . . . Txx00 ;
M101 ; M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER) ; (FIN OF INNER);
N3 G50 X_ Z_ ; N4 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ; . . . MTF2013 . . . . Txx00 ;
X_ Z_ ; X_ Z_ ;
M102 ; M102 ;
M5 ; M5 ;
M30 ; M30 ;
% %
152
(3) Warning and Notes
WARNING
1 The special code of an auxiliary machining process is not
output to the programs of the two turrets.
The first sequence number of a process is output to the
program of the turret on which the corresponding process
is not executed.
2 In the programs of the two turrets, identical processes may
have different sequence numbers at the beginning.
For example, while the sequence number at the beginning
of process 1 is N2 in the program of turret 1, the
corresponding sequence number may be N1 in the program
of turret 2.
3 If processes are edited on the process edit screen so that
auxiliary machining and other processes are
simultaneously executed on the two turrets, the total
number of special codes in the NC data of the two turrets
may differ.
NOTE
The function to output the MTF2045 block is provided only
for a lathe having two turrets. When MTF1050 is set to 1 (a
lathe having only one turret is used), the block is not output.
3.5.6 1. Overview
Outputting the NC Data If the NC data for threading are created on a 15–TFB or 16–T CAP II,
of a Multiple Thread the threading path is generally created with G92. Depending on the
setting of MTF, the NC data for G76 (multiple thread cutting cycle)
Cutting Cycle can also be created.
Fig. 3.5.6 Cutting condition screen
153
If the multiple thread cutting cycle is used, the 16–T CAP II dis-
plays a prompt relating to the depth of cut (DL). The 15–TFB dis-
plays no prompts about DL.
Soft keys
[ESCAPE]: Returns to the FAPT menu screen.
[BACK PAGE]: Returns to the previous page.
[CURSOR ´] or [CURSOR ±]: Moves the cursor up or down through the
prompts.
[DRAWING RANGE]: Enlarges or reduces the drawing.
[NEXT PAGE]: Displays the next page.
Threading methods
Threading method 1: Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant
cutting amount
Threading method 2: Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and
a constant cutting amount
Threading method 3: Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant
depth of cut
Threading method 4: Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and
a constant depth of cut
If the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is used with the 16–T
CAP II, the prompt relating to the threading method is not dis-
played.
[Conventional NC data]
.
.
(THREAD.)
N002G50X100.Z100.;
G0T0101;
G97S0474M3;
Z2.71;
X64.;
G92X59.45Z–22.F2.;
G0Z2.645;
The threading path is repeated.
G92X54.222Z–22.;
G0Z2.594;
.
.
154
[NC data of the multiple thread cutting cycle]

Sample output by the FANUC Series 15–TFB
.
. *** NC data format ***
(THREAD.) G76 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ I (i)
N002G50X100.Z100.; K (k) D ( d)
G0T0101; F_ _ _ A (a)
G97S0474M3; P_ _ ;
Z2.71;
X64.; I: Thread radius (i)
G76X56.968Z–22.K1516D0228F2.A60P1; K: Thread height (k)
G0X100.; D: Depth of the first cut ( d)
. A: Tool angle (a)
. (included angle of thread)
. F: Lead
P: Specified cut method
Simple NC data can be created.
Sample output by the 16–T CAP II
.
. *** NC data format ***
(THREAD.) G76 PmmrraaR (d)
N002G50X100.Z100.; G76 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ R (i)
G0T0101; P (k) Q ( d)
G97S0474M3; F_ _ ;
Z2.71;
X64.; P:
G76P010060R0.2; mm: Number of times final finishing is
G76X56.968Z–22.P1516Q0228F2.; repeated
G0X100.; rr: Coefficient of incomplete thread
. aa: Tool angle
. R: Finishing allowance (d)
. R: Thread radius (i)
P: Thread height (k)
Q: Depth of the first cut ( d)
F: Lead
Simple NC data can be created.
155
2. Setting
(1) Setting the MTF parameter
The MTF1060 parameter determines whether the conventional
threading cycle (G92) or multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is
used.
No. Format Initial value Description
1060 0, 1 10000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Specify 0 0 0
(eight bits)
Bit 0 At the machine zero point, G50 is:
0: Output.
1: Not output.
Bit 1 Movement from the machine zero point to the turret turning
position is:
0: Output.
1: Not output.
Bit 2 Movement from the turret turning position to the machine zero
point is:
0: Output.
1: Not output.
Bit 6 For threading, the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
Bit 7 For tapping by turning, the G code of a canned cycle is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
(2) Setting an MTF parameter with a number ranging from 1000 to

1999 (15–TFB)
1392 Character II Address specifying the difference in the

radius of the thread
1393 Character KK Address specifying the thread height
1394 Character DD Address specifying the depth of first cut
1395 Character AA Address specifying the tool angle
1396 Character PP Address specifying the cut method
1397 Character RR Address specifying the finishing allowance

(Not specified for the FANUC Series 15)
156
(3) Setting an MTF parameter with a number ranging from 1000 to

1999 (16–T CAP II)
1392 Character RR Address specifying the difference in the

radius of the thread
1393 Character PP Address specifying the thread height
1394 Character QQ Address specifying the depth of first cut
1395 Character PP Address specifying the tool angle

(Pmmrraa)
1396 Character PP Address specifying the cut method (Not

specified for the FANUC Series 16)
1397 Character RR Address specifying the finishing allowance
(4) Setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999
(Function table, 15TFB)
No. Description Remarks
2060 Block 1 specifying the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76)
Detail 2060 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, Multiple thread
cutting cycle
2061= 4B02, 1101, 0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0D03, 0F03, 0004
G76 X Z I K D F A P ;
(5) Setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999
(Function table, 16–T CAP II)
No. Description Remarks
Detail 2060 = 4B02, 0E03, E401, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, Multiple thread
cutting cycle
2061= 4B02, 1101, 0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0004, 0000, 0000
G76 X Z R P Q F ;
157
(6) Setting function codes

Low–order
High–order
three digits,
three digits, Function
general
detail
category
E 1 0 1 Outputs the address specified in MTF1392.

Thread radius (15–TFB: I code)
Thread radius (16–T CAP II: R code)

Thread height (15–TFB: K code)
Thread height (16–T CAP II: P code)

Depth of the first cut (15–TFB: D code)
Depth of the first cut (16–T CAP II: Q code)

Finishing allowance (15–TFB: Invalid)
Finishing allowance (16–T CAP II: R code)
E D 0 3 Outputs the address specified in MTF1395.

Tool angle (15–TFB: A code)
Tool angle (16–T CAP II: Invalid)
E E 0 3 Outputs the address specified in MTF1395.

Tool angle (15–TFB: Invalid)
Tool angle + multiple parameters
(16–T CAP II: P code)
E F 0 3 Outputs the address specified in MTF1396.

Specified cut method (15–TFB: P code)
Specified cut method (16–T CAP II: Invalid)
(7) Setting system parameters

Initial
No. Format Description Remarks
value
230 Integer 1 Number of times final Valid only for the

finishing is repeated (1 to 99) FANUC Series 16
231 Integer 0 Coefficient of incomplete Valid only for the

thread (00 to 99) FANUC Series 16
158
(8) Setting other data

This function causes no addition to, or modification of, the setting of
the material data and tooling information.
*** The threading methods that can be used depend on the NC
specifications. ***
15–TFB 16–T CAP II
(Threading method 1)
Cutting using one cutting edge and a f f
Alternate cutting using two cutting edges f f
and a constant cutting amount
G92
G32 (Threading method 3)
constant depth of cut
Alternate cutting using two cutting edges f f
and a constant depth of cut
Alternate cutting using two cutting edges f
and a constant cutting amount
G76
Cutting using one cutting edge and a f
constant depth of cut
Alternate cutting using two cutting edges f
and a constant depth of cut
159
3. Warning and Notes
WARNING
1 To use the multiple thread cutting cycle with the FANUC
Series 15–TFB, create the corresponding NC data after
setting identical values for the final depth of cut for threading
in system parameter No.119 of FAPT and the finishing
allowance in parameter No.6219 of the NC.
2 If the FANUC Series 16–T is being used, restrictions are
imposed on the tool angle that can be specified. (If an angle
other than 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, or 80 degrees is specified, P/S
alarm 62 is output.) If the FANUC Series 15–TFB is being
used, the tool angle can be specified within a range of 0 to
120 degrees, in 1–degree increments.
3 The thread radius, thread height, depth of first cut, and
finishing allowance (in the format for the FANUC Series 16)
are referenced with MTF1021 (X–axis least input
increment) and MTF1031 (number of decimal places of the
X–axis least input increment).
The thread height and depth of first cut cannot be output
with decimal places.
NOTE
1 To enable execution of the multiple thread cutting cycle
(G76), the complex turning cycle function of the NC must be
supported.
2 Face threading cannot be executed with the multiple thread
cutting cycle (G76). For face threading, G32 is output as
before, even if the multiple thread cutting cycle is selected.
160
3.6
CHECKING NC DATA
WARNING
(ANIMATED Even when the tool path and machining processes
SIMULATION specified in NC data are verified by the NC data check
FUNCTION) function, if the data relating to the actual tool offset and
workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the
In 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II, the animated simulation function
has been improved.
When using the above CAP II models, see Part XIII, “ANIMATED
SIMULATION FUNCTION II.”
The function which allows a practical cutting simulation to take place by
displaying the blank, chuck, tailstock and tool configuration is called an
Animated Simulation Function.
The manner in which a blank is being cut can be monitored by
1) selecting the screen on which animated simulation is done and
2) executing cycle operation under the machine lock condition and each
time a T code is specified, the tool drawing changes.
3.6.1 (1) Prepare NC data by using the symbolic FAPT function, and enter it
Operating Instructions into the NC memory.
(2) Set the coordinate system so that work coordinates of the tool may
meet when a program is started. Alternatively move the tool manually
or automatically until it is in the correct position.
(3) Select Menu 6, “CHECKING OF NC DATA” and depress the soft key
“CHECK START”.
(4) Execute the NC program in Machine Lock Mode. The tool drawing
moves according to the given commands and the manner in which the
blank is cut can be monitored.
161
3.6.2
Flow of Animation
Main menu screen
Screen
6 “INPUT”
Animation screen
Setting of parameter
Setting of parameter
for
animated simulation
“CHUCK” “TAILSTOCK” “TOOL HOLDER”
Standard chuck data Standard tail–stock Tool holder

setting screen data setting screen number list
Number input Number input “DATA SET”
Special chuck data Special tail–stock Tool holder data

setting screen data setting screen setting screen
D Press the software key “END” on each screen to return to the previous
screen.
D Press the “Menu screen” software key to return to the main menu
screen from any screen.
3.6.3 Select Menu 6 on the main menu screen.

Starting an Animated Blank figure is displayed.
Simulation
The blank drawing is automatically proportionally scaled to a size that

may be contained within the screen.
162
NOTE
When the value of system parameter 750 is 1, the blank
drawing will be scaled to a magnification so that it will cover
nearly all of the display. If this scale needs to be changed,
it can be changed to various sizes of the drawing.
For data of the blank drawing, use data of L and D input with the key of
Menu 1, “BLANK & PART (DRAWING & BLANK)”.
The following procedure is used for the animated simulation:
(1) Prepare conditions on the machine side
1) Set the coordinate system so that the work coordinates of the tool
may meet its current coordinates at the start of the program or move
the tool to the starting point of a program.
2) Execute the heading of the NC program.
3) Set to Machine Lock Mode.
(2) Press the “CHECK START” key among the soft keys. “START” will
then be indicated in the lower right section of the screen.
(3) Put the machine in NC operation
When a T Code is given, the tool drawing is represented and the
situation of the blank being cut can be visually observed.
In the case of clash between tool and chuck, or tool and tailstock the
interference check functions as an alarm, and then the situation is
displayed on the screen. For 2–path lathe the interference alarm is
generated in the case of clash between tool and tool.
163
NOTE
The interference check is performed only within the screen.
Meaning of SOFT KEY

[CHECK START] . . . . . Depress with the start of the animated
drawing function.
[ORIGINAL] . . . . . . . . Exit to a blank drawing before cutting.
[ACA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To use the function for automatically
avoiding collisions (option supported only
by 15–TTFB), press the [ACA] soft key to
highlight it. Once the [CHECK START]
soft key is pressed. the [ACA] soft key is
disabled.
[TOOL PATH] . . . . . . . When TOOL PATH is displayed in reverse
video, the tool path is displayed.
[PARAMETER] . . . . . . Depress when setting parameters on
animated drawings.
[DRAWNG RANGE] . . Depress to enlarge or reduce shape.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit to a Main Menu screen.
When bit 0 or 1 of system parameter 19 is set on, the operation of a vertical
lathe is simulated on the screen.
164
When the vertical lathe is selected, turret 1 is shown to the right of the
workpiece.
3.6.4 Press [PARAMETER]

Setting of Parameters
for Animated
Simulation
(1) CHUCK NO.

Up to 21 chuck figures can be registered (No.1–16 is the standard
figure, No.21–25 is the special figure). This item select which chuck
of them is drawn.
(2) DEPTH OF CHUCKING, X–POSITION OF CHUCK
This data is for fixing the chuck drawing position. When the chuck
is an outer or inner claw one, and the blank figure is a round rod or
hollow round rod, the chuck drawing position is determined only by
“DEPTH OF CHUCKING”. In other cases (When the chuck is a
special one or the blank figure is special), the chuck drawing position
is determined by both “DEPTH OF CHUCKING” and
“X–POSITION OF CHUCK”.
165
Example 1) For outer claw check and round rod
Example 2) For special chuck
(3) TAILSTOCK NO.

Up to 7 types of tailstocks can be registered (1 and 2 indicate the
standard figures, while 11 to 15 indicate special figures). This is used
to indicate which tailstock is drawn.
(4) POSITION OF TAILSTOCK
This data is used to set the drawing position of tailstock. Input the
distance from the work zero point.
a) In the case of standard tailstock:
b) In the case of special tailstock:

The figure is specified by point data. Drawing is made so that the
distance between the point data “0” and work zero point is equal
to ZT.
NOTE
Be careful since simulation of the machining state may not
be conducted accurately if an excessively wide scale is
adoped.
166
[MENU SCREEN] . . . . Return to the main menu screen.

[CHUCK] . . . . . . . . . . . Screen for setting chuck figure appears.
[TAILSTOCK] . . . . . . . Screen for setting tailstock figure appears.
[TOOL HOLDER] . . . . Screen for setting tool holder figure
appears.
[CURSOR ´] [CURSOR ±] . . Press this to select the question
items.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to the previous screen (animation
drawing screen here).
3.6.5 [CHUCK]
Setting of Chuck
Figure
There are two types of chuck figures, namely standard figure and special
figure.
Up to 16 standard figures and up to 5 special figures can be registered.
The numbers 1–16 and 21–25 are assigned to the standard figure and
special figure, respectively.
(1) Setting of standard figure
Set the data L, W, L1, and W1 by referring to the illustration diagram
on the screen.
When the cursor is at the “TYPE” position, either “OUT” or “IN” is
displayed.
Press either software key to select type.
[UNDEFINE] . . . . . . . . Let the data where a cursor exists to an
undefined one.
[NO. ±] . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves to the start of next line.
167
(2) Setting of special figure

When either value of 21–25 is input while the cursor is at the “NO”
position, the screen for setting the chuck data of special figure appears.
Designate the special chuck figure with 16 points. With P1 as the starting
point, connect the values set to P2, P3 – – – in sequence, using a line for
drawing. When the control asks “End Point P =”, input the final point of
the figure data. The point data after the end point number is not regarded
as the figure forming data.
[CHECK] . . . Draws a pattern, based on the input figure data.
[ERASE] . . . . Erases the drawn pattern.
3.6.6 At the parameter setting screen for animated simulation

Setting of Tailstock [TAILSTOCK]
Figure
There are two types of tailstocks as in chuck, namely standard and special
figures. Up to 2 special figures and up to 5 special figures can be
registered.
The numbers 1–2 and 11–15 are assigned to the standard figure and
special figure, respectively.
168
1) Setting of standard figure

Set the data D, D1, D2, D3, L, L1, and L2 by referring to the
illustration diagram on the screen.
[UNDEFINE] . . . . . . . . Let the data where a cursor exists to an
undefined one.
[NO. ±] . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves to the start of next line.
2) Setting of special figure
When either value of 11–15 is input while the cursor is at the “NO”
position, the screen for setting the tailstock figure of special figure
appears.
As with special chuck profile designation, the profile is determined by
the point indication to within 16 points. Set P1 as the starting point
and set points P2, P3, ... in order and the profile is connected by lines
to these points.
Concerning the question, “END POINT P =” input the final point of
the profile data. Point data described in the following numbers are not
regarded as profile data.
[CHECK] . . . A figure is drawn based on the input profile data.
[ERASE] . . . . A drawn figure is erased.
3.6.7 In the parameter setting screen for animated simulation

Setting of Tool Holder [TOOL HOLDER]
Figure
The tool holder number directry screen appears. Up to 32 tool holders can
be set.
[SET DATA] . . . . . . . . . This is a software key for setting figure data.
Move the cursor to the number to be set and
then press this key.
[CURSOR ´] [CURSOR ±] . . Press this key to select the number to
be set.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to the previous screen (parameter
screen for animated simulation).
169
[SET DATA]
The tool profile is divided into the tip section and holder section. Input
the holder profile data onto this screen. The setting procedure is
performed with the point indication the same as for chuck and tailstock.
Up to a maximum points of 16 points and used.
(Example) Data in order to draw the holder profile as shown in the
following figure is:
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
X=0 X = 10. X = 200. X = 200. X = 30.
Z=0 Z = 5. Z = 5. Z = 200. Z = 200.
P6 P7 P8 to P16
X = 30 X = 10. No relation
Z = 30 Z = 50.
END POINT P = 7
Press [CHECK]
170
3.6.8 The enlargement and the reduction of the screen can be specified in the
Enlargement and animated screen of the sixth menu (Check of NC data) by the cursor.
Reduction in the (1) Operation
Animated Screen 1) When the sixth menu is selected, it becomes the animated screen.
Push the soft key “DRAWING RANGE” in this screen.
2) In the screen, the cursor appears and the following questions is
asked.
The drawing range is specified MAX (100/100)
MAXX = MIN (–100/–100)
3) Move the cursor by pressing the soft key [CURSOR ±] or
[CURSOR ´] and press INPUT key in this question, or set coordinate
value directly and press INPUT key.

4) Next, answer the question of ‘MAXZ =’ like 3).
5) Next, answer ‘MINX =,’ ‘MINZ =’ similarly.
6) When the setting is ended, push the soft key ‘EXEC’.
The screen which was enlarged or reduced after this operation, is
displayed,
7) To display the original size screen, press DEL and INPUT keys in
the question screen.
(2) Notes on enlargement and reduction
1) Leave the center line of the material profile in the screen if the
material is cylinder. If the center line is extended beyond the screen
for enlargement, the material profile can not be painted out.
2) If the material is hollow cylinder, leave the upper half of the
material profile in the screen.
If extended beyond the screen for enlargement, the material profile
can not be painted out.
3) Leave a part of outline of the material profile in the screen after
enlargement. If the outline of the material profile is beyond the
screen, the material profile can not be painted out.
4) Designate the drawing range before soft key “CHECK START” is
pushed. After the software key “CHECK START” is pushed, the
screen can not be enlarged or reduced.
5) On C–axis FAPT animation screen, the screen can not be enlarged
or reduced by the software key “DRAWING RANGE”.
171
3.6.9
Related System
Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
701
Bit 2 In case of 1, continue drawing even if an interference alarm occurs.

Bit 3 In case of 1, animated drawing cutting simulation will operate even in
Manual Mode.
Bit 4 In case of 1, a center line is not drawn.
Bit 5 In case of 1, the interference check is not executed.
Bit 6 In case of 1, blank figure is redrawn when M30 is executed.
Bit 7 In case of 1, setting the parameter for animation drawing is prohibited.
750 Drawing scale factor

When the value is 1, the blank drawing is enlarged so that it will
almost completely cover the CRT display.
Numbers, 751 through 754 are the parameters which indicate the size of
the tool tip when drawn on. (L: parameter value)
751 Parameter for Drill Tools
In case of the tip angle is 180°

752 Parameter for Grooving and Side Tools
753 Parameter for Thread–cutting Tools
172
754 Parameter for General Purpose Tools
3.6.10 This section covers the input/output procedure of graphic data (chuck
Input/Output of data, tail stock data, and tool holder data) for animation drawing function.
These data can be input to or output from a PPR and a bubble cassette in
Graphic Data the same way as in other data.
(1) Operation
1 Press “DATA SET” on the initial screen.
2 For the system asks you “NO =”, key–in 1 “INPUT”.
3 A menu of “input/output for system data and setting” is displayed.
For outputting graphic data, select No.15. For inputting graphic
data, select No.16. For collating graphic data, select No.17.
(Example 1) For outputting graphic data to PPR, key in
NO. = 15, P INPUT .
(Example 2) For inputting graphic data from a bubble cassette, key in
NO. = 16, B INPUT .
(Example 3) For collation between the graphic data and paper tape,
key in NO. = 17, P INPUT .
(2) Tape format
(a) Standard chuck
N6001 L1*** P L ; P W ; P L1 ; P W1 ;
No.
1: Outer claw
2: Inner claw
(b) Standard stock
N6001 L21** P D ;
P D1 ;
No. P D2 ;
P D3 ;
P L ;
P L1 ;
P L2 ;
173
(c) Special chuck, special tool stock, special holder

N6001 L*0** E ; P X1 ; P Z1 ; .............
No. End point
1:
2: Tailstock
3: Holder
(3) Error message
(a) I/O NOT READY
This message is displayed when an input or output device is not
ready for operation.
(b) TV ERROR INCLUDING
When a block, in which the number of characters is an add, is used,
this message is displayed.
(c) ILLEGAL FORMAT DATA DETECTED
When a block other than a format described in (2), is used or when
a block other than that to be expected is used, this message is
displayed.
NOTE
1 When the chuck data is input, data is notreplaced. But,
chuck data now being registered is initialized and input data
is newly registered.
2 Data are not output at points larger than end data in the I/O
of special chuck, special tail stock and holder data.
Even if a block number exceeding the maximum point data
is entered, the data is neglected without processing it as an
alarm.
174
PROGRAMMING AND
B–61804E–2/05 OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT 4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION
4 SUB CYCLE FUNCTION
In the “MACHINE DEFINITION” screen of menu 4, by selecting “SUB

CYCLE”, it is possible to create an NC message to call the macro body
which haspreviously been created on the NC side.
175
PROGRAMMING AND
4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT B–61804E–2/05
4.1 To prepare the “sub cycle” process in the definition of the machining, it
is necessary to previously set the sub cycle pattern. In the definition of
SETTING OF SUB the machining, it is selected from among the sub cycle patterns set here.
CYCLE Sub cycle patterns are called sub cycle file. The flowchart below outlines
the method of file preparation.
Initial
screen
Depress [FAMILY PROGRAM]
Family program
screen
5 INPUT
Sub cycle name

setting screen
Sub cycle
name input
Sub cycle detail

setting screen
Data input
Depress [END]
176
PROGRAMMING AND
(1) Family program screen

“3. SUB CYCLE SETTING”, “4. SUB CYCLE OUTPUT”, and “5.
SUB CYCLE INPUT” are displayed on the “family program” screen
menu.
The display shifts to the “SUB CYCLE SETTING” screen when the
following is input.
No. = 5 INPUT
(2) “Sub cycle setting”

5 INPUT
The sub cycle name is set on this screen.

The sub cycle name is set when the following is input, and the display
shifts to the “sub cycle detail setting screen”
Sub cycle name INPUT
The sub cycle name is to be set in up to 10 characters.

A new sub cycle is inserted if the sub cycle name is input by bringing
the cursor to an already set menu number.
To delete a certain sub cycle pattern, bring the cursor to that menu
number, and key–in as follows:
DEL INPUT
177
PROGRAMMING AND
(Soft keys)
[CURSOR ´] [CURSOR ±] . . These keys are used to select the
menu number.
[END] . . . . This key is depressed when the sub cycle file has been
created. The display returns to the “family program”
screen.
(3) “Sub cycle detail setting” pattern
The display shifts to the following screen when the sub cycle name is
set.
Set the calling G code, the program number, the address and the
comment of the required argument on this screen.
The G code must always be set. “KEY–IN AGAIN” is displayed if it
is tried to return to the menu screen without defining G code.
The program number should be left undefined if the correspondence
between the calling G code and the called program number is set by
a parameter on the NC side.
Up to 10 arguments are settable. Also the comment is settable in up
to 6 characters. The arguments can be programmed by any addresses
excluding G, L, N, O, and P. For I, J, and K only, they must be
programmed in alphabetical order.
(Soft keys)
[CURSOR ´] [CURSOR ±] . . These keys are used to select the
question to be set. Such a method of
feeding as to leave the address
undefined and to define the comment
only is impossible.
[END] . . . . This key is depressed when all the settings are over. The
display returns to the preceding “sub cycle menu” screen.
178
PROGRAMMING AND
4.2 (1) Sub–memory/PPR/Memory cassette

INPUT/OUTPUT OF Input/output with the sub–memory/PPR/Memory cassette is possible
by treating several sub cycle patterns that have been created as one file.
SUB CYCLE FILE The method of operation is totally the same as the input/output of the
family program.
(a) Input/output with sub–memory
Family program screen
Registering Calling from

to sub-memory to sub-memory
INPUT INPUT
6, C 7, C
or or
6 INPUT 7 INPUT
1, @File name INPUT 1, @File name INPUT
or
1, R, @File name INPUT
(b) Input/output with PPR
Output Input
6, P INPUT 7, P INPUT
179
PROGRAMMING AND
(c) Input/output with Floppy cassette, Handy File

Output Input
6, B INPUT 7, B INPUT
or or
6 INPUT 7 INPUT
1, I INPUT 1, I INPUT
1 INPUT 1, @n INPUT
1, A INPUT 1, N INPUT
1, @n INPUT
The input/output with the BC is the same as that of the family

program.
Refer to chapter V.
(2) Automatic loading of sub cycle file
If a sub cycle file exists in the sub–memory, it is possible to
automatically load the sub cycle file into the main memory at power
on by previously setting that file name in system parameter NO.770.
180
PROGRAMMING AND
4.3
DEFINITION OF “SUB
CYCLE” PROCESS IN WARNING
DEFINITION OF No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made.
MACHINING the machining definition includes any invalid process steps,
the entire machining sequence is reflected on the prepared
NC data. When defining machining, check the specified
machining sequence. Failure to specify a valid machining
sequence may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly
causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury
to the user.
“Sub cycle” is displayed in soft key on the menu 4 “MACHINING

DEFINITION (kind of machining)” screen when the following
conditions are satisfied:
D The sub cycle option is selected.
D MTF NO.1080 is not in the main and sub format.
The method of operation is as follows.
“Kind of machining”
screen
Bring the cursor to the

process number, and depress
the soft key “sub cycle”
“Sub cycle menu select”

screen
Menu number INPUT
“Sub cycle data”

pattern
Key-in at
each question
Depress [NEXT PAGE]
181
PROGRAMMING AND
(1) “MACHINING DEFINITION (kind of machining)” screen
If any of “CENTER HOLE”, “TURN”, “GROOVE. THREAD”, or

“MILLING” in the machining definition is depressed, the soft key
“SUB CYCLE” will be displayed.
The sub cycle process will be selected by depressing “SUB CYCLE”.
(2) “Sub cycle menu select” pattern
The list of the sub cycle names that have been set is displayed.
The display shifts to the “sub cycle data” screen if the following is
input in response to the question NO. = _ :
Menu number INPUT .
To correct the “sub cycle” process that has already been defined,
depress the soft key “NEXT PAGE”, since the menu number is
displayed in the NO. = column, and the display will shift to the “sub
cycle data” pattern.
(Soft keys)
[PAGE EJECT] . . . . This key is depressed to see the menu which could
not be displayed in one screen.
[NEXT PAGE] . . . . . This key is depressed to go to the “sub cycle data”
screen while the menu number has already been
set.
[ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . This key is depressed to return to the first menu
screen.
182
PROGRAMMING AND
(3) “Sub cycle data” screen
The repetition count and the other questions are asked on this screen.
The inputtable values are within the ranges of 0 to 9999 for the
repetition count, of –9999. to 9999. for the arguments and of 1 to 2 for
Turret No.
If the data is left undefined here, the NC data of that address is not
output.
(Soft keys)
[CURSOR ´] [CURSOR ±] . . These keys are depressed to select the
question to be set.
[NEXT PAGE] . . This key is depressed when the data setting is all
over. The display returns to the “MACHINING
DEFINITION (kind of machining)” screen.
[ESCAPE] . . . . . The display returns to the first menu pattern.
183
PROGRAMMING AND
4.4
PROCESS EDITING
WARNING
OF SUB CYCLE After process editing, check the editing results. If edits are
(2–PATH LATHE) made incorrectly, the tool may collide with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly
to the user.
The auxiliary machining process is also edited as well as other machining

process. However, when an auxiliary machining is selected by S CODE
SELECT, no data is displayed under spindle speed column.
Actually control of the S code depends on the auxiliary machining macro
prepared by MTB.
184
PROGRAMMING AND
4.5 If the “sub cycle” process is defined in menu 4 “Definition of machining”,

NC data in the following format is output to turret side in menu 5 “NC
OUTPUT OF NC DATA DATA PREPARATION”:
G (Calling G code) P (Program number)
L (Repetition count) [Argument assignment];
This is explained below by examples. Suppose the following three
patterns are set in the sub cycle file:
1 ROUGHCYCLE G=65 0=1000 A=LENGTH B=DIA. C=WIDTH
2 G66ROUGH G=66 0=1000 A=LENGTH B=WIDTH
3 G67 G=67
(Example 1)
The sub cycle only is defined in the definition of the cycle. If pattern
number 1 (ROUGHCYCLE) is selected and it is set that TL=1, L=2
A=25.65 B=12.5 C=8.23, the NC data is output to turret 1 side as
follows.
%
O0001;
N0001 G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23;
M05;
M30;
%
(Example 2)
If the same sub cycle as in Example 1 is defined in the following order
of processes:
Process 01 Roughing of outer figure (TL=1)

Process 02 Sub cycle (TL=1)
the NC data is output as follows:
%
O0001;
N0001 G50 X200. Z380.;
G00 X0. Z180.;
.
. Roughing of outer figure
.
T0100;
M01;
G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23;
M05;
M30;
%
185
PROGRAMMING AND
(Example 3)
If the same sub cycle as in Example 1 is defined in the following order
of processes:
Process 01 Sub cycle
Process 02 Roughing of outer figure
the following NC data is output:
%
O0001;
N0003 G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23;
N0002 G50 X0. Z180. S2000;
G00 T0101;
.
. Roughing of outer figure
.
T0100;
M01;
X200. Z380.;
M05;
M30;
%
(Example 4)
The modal call should be made in the following order:
1) Define the sub cycle in the definition of machining, and select
pattern number 2 (G66ROUGH).
2) Then define the sub cycle in the next process, and select pattern
number 3 (G67). The repetition count is asked in the sub cycle data
screen. Depress the soft key “NEXT PAGE” by leaving the asked
repetition count undefined.
3) Insert movement statements by outputting menu 5 “NC DATA
PREPARATION” in a single step.
%
O0001;
N0001 G66 P2000 A__ B__ ;
Z100.;
X100.;
.
. Insert movement statements
.
Z200.;
G67;
M05;
M03;
%
186
PROGRAMMING AND
4.6
CAUTIONS AND
CAUTION
NOTES 1 This function involves the creation of a macro call message.
It is a precondition, therefore, that the macro body has
previously been created on the NC side.
2 If the sub cycle process is to be corrected in the definition
of machining, a sub cycle file which is completely identical
to that during new creation must be existing in the main
memory.
3 The family program does not include the sub cycle file which
has been set. To correct the sub cycle process by inputting
a family program including the sub cycle into the process,
therefore, a sub cycle file which is completely identical to
that during new creation must also be input.
NOTE
1 The tool locus is not drawn during the NC data preparation.
2 M01 is not output when the sub cycle ends even if “1” is set
to MTF NO.1136 (to output M01 when the process ends).
3 The sub cycle does not stop in the single step of the
process.
4 It is impossible to create NC data for the 4–axis lathe or NC
data in the main and sub format if the process includes a sub
cycle.
187
5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING AND
(2–PATH LATHE ONLY) OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT B–61804E–2/05
5 BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION (2–PATH LATHE ONLY)
WARNING
No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made.
the machining definition includes any invalid process steps,
the entire machining sequence is reflected on the prepared
NC data. When defining machining, check the specified
machining sequence. Failure to specify a valid machining
sequence may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly
to the user.
Machining conducted in one process by the tools of both head 1 and head
2 is called balance cut. The balance cut FAPT function automatically
generates NC data for balance cut. There are the following two types of
balance–cut machining.
Type A: This type aims at machining thin and long works with a high
precision. The two tools move in perfect synchronization with
each other.
Type B: This type aims at machining works more efficiently. After the
tool on head 1 cuts the work, the tool on head 2 cuts it deeper,
following the movement of the tool on head 1.
188
PROGRAMMING AND 5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION
B–61804E–2/05 OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT (2–PATH LATHE ONLY)
189
5.1 Balance cut can be used in the following processes.

BALANCE CUTTING Type A: (1) Roughing of outer diameter (not edges)
(2) Semi–finishing of outer diameter (not edges)
PROCESS (3) Finishing of outer diameter (not edges)
Type B: (1) Roughing of outer diameter
Type A and Type B are distinguished by the value that is set for “DELAY
AMOUNT” on the data screen. The delay amount determines how much
the head 2 tool lags behind the head 1 tool during machining. Type A is
selected by setting.
DELAY AMOUNT to 0 (no delay), and type B by setting it to a positive
value.
When type B is selected, the tool of turret 2 follows the tool of turret 1
while maintaining the delay specified in revolving speed. (The S code is
output to the program of turret 1.)
System parameter No.707 specifies which process should be a balance
cutting process and whether the machining type should initially be type
A or type B.
System parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
707
Bit 0 Roughing of outer diameter

Bit 1 Semi–finishing of outer diameter
Bit 2 Finishing of outer diameter
0 : Not a balance cutting process
1 : Can be a balance cutting process when conditions are met
Bit 7 Roughing of outer diameter by balance cutting
0 : Sets the value of system parameter No.757 as the initial value of the
DELAY AMOUNT prompt on the tool data screen. This selects type
B.
1 : Sets 0 as the initial value of the DELAY AMOUNT prompt on the tool
data screen. This selects type A.
System parameter
757
Initial value of DELAY AMOUNT on the tool data screen

[Unit] rev
190
5.2 (1) If system parameter 707 is set to 1 for a process, the BC = prompt
appears on the corresponding TOOL DATA setting screen displayed
SPECIFICATION by selecting 4 or machining definition from the menu.
METHOD
If 1 is entered in response to the BC = prompt, the screen on which a tool

of the second turret can be set for balance cutting appears.
If 0 is entered in response to the BC = prompt, or if the tool of the second

turret is left undefined, balance cutting is not executed for the process.
191
CAUTION
1 Set the same tool tip radius (RN) for both tools. The system
does not check the data other than the radius of the tool tip.
It is recommended to use tools having an identical tip figure.
If tools having different tip figures are used, the workpiece
may vibrated during actual machining and the tool tip may
interfere with the workpiece.
2 A negative value cannot be specified as the delay (DA). The
operator is prompted to specify the delay only when outer
surface roughing is selected. The system accepts 0 or a
positive integer. If 0 is specified, type A is selected. If a
positive integer is specified, type B is selected.
3 The turret numbers (TL) of the two tools must be different.
Specify turret 1 (TL = 1) for the first tool and turret 2 (TL =
2) for the second tool.
4 Select tools having an identical direction of spindle rotation
(SD).
Unless the above instructions are observed, the system gives a warning
and prohibits display of the next screen.
(2) On the machining process list screen which is the first screen of Menu
No.4 (MACHINING DEFINITION), the balance cutting process is
represented by (B) following the T code.
PROC. 01 ROUGH. OF CUT. T0909 (B) X200. Z200.
When the process is not a balance cutting process, (1) or (2) is

displayed after the T code. (1) means cutting by head 1 while (2)
means cutting by head 2.
(3) In the balance cutting process, points whose X coordinate value is 0
must not be specified as the start or end point of the cutting area.
192
5.3 (1) In a process where system parameter No.707 is set to 1 (balance cutting
is possible), the system tries to select appropriate tools from both
USING THE heads.
AUTOMATIC Only when tools suited to this process are found in both heads, the
PROCESS system designates the process as a balance cutting process. When two
or more tools are available, the system does not try to select the
DETERMINATION
optimum one. It searches the tooling file from the top and uses the one
FUNCTION it finds first.
(2) The cursor always stops at the DELAY AMOUNT prompt, so you can
change it to any desired value.
(3) When an appropriate tool is found only in either head, the concerned
process becomes a normal process, not a balance cutting process.
(4) When the X coordinate value of the start or end point of the cutting area
is 0, the concerned process cannot be a balance cutting process.
5.4 Suppose the following process is defined.

PROCESS EDITING NO. KIND OF MACHINING HEAD NO.
SCREEN 1 ROUGH. OF CUT. 1, 2 (BALANCE CUT TYPE B)
2 FIN. OF CUT. 1, 2 (BALANCE CUT TYPE A)
3 GROOVING 1
4 THREADING 2
At this time, the following data appears on the process editing screen.
NO. (HEAD 1) (HEAD 2) SPINDLE SPEED

1 ROUGH. OF CUT. BALANCE CUT G97 V120 M03 (1)
2 FIN. OF CUT. BALANCE CUT G96 V115 M03 (1)
3 GROOVING G96 V90 M03 (1)
4 THREADING G96 V130 M03 (2)
The soft keys for moving up and down the process (“HEAD 1 UP”, etc.)
are not valid in the balance cutting process.
193
5.5
NC DATA The following NC command data is output.
194
NOTE
1 When type B is selected, the M code set at MTF1040
(override cancel ON) is output.
2 When type B is selected, the M code set at MTF1041
(override cancel OFF) is output.
3 When type B is selected, the initial value of a waiting M code
is set using system parameter No. 735.
4 The delay time of the tool on head 2 is calculated based
upon the delay amount (DA) and the surface speed.
5 Balance cut (type A) start G code.
6 Balance cut (type A) end G code.
195
5.6 (1) System parameter

No.707, 735, and No.757 are related. Refer to the concerned sections
RELATED for the meaning of these parameters.
PARAMETERS (2) MTF
(1) No.1140: M code for turning on override cancel (for type B)
This code is not output when –1 is set.
(2) No.1141: M code for turning off override cancel (for type B)
This code is not output when –1 is set.
5.7 Whether to exercise constant surface speed control for the balance cut B
function depends on the setting made for system parameter No. 707.
CONSTANT
When constant surface speed control is exercised, a waiting M code is
SURFACE SPEED output at the cut point; in addition, a turret waiting M code is output at the
CONTROL FOR position to which the tool is retracted, by the return escape amount, from
BALANCE CUT B the end point of the cutting path.
196
5.8 Be careful of the following when using type B balance cut.

CAUTION AND
CAUTION
NOTES When the delay amount (DA) is too large, machining of the
second tool may not complete while the first tool is moving
to the next machining position (indicated by the dotted line
in the figure below). In this case, a new S code is output for
the next machining of the first tool.
This may affect the machining of the second tool.
New S code output
Path of the first tool

Path of the second tool
NOTE
1 When there are two or more pocket areas, balance cutting
is not performed from the second pocket.
Balance cutting is performed by head 1 and 2 tools in the
first pocket.
In the second pocket and after, only the tool on head 1 is
used for machining.
Balance cut of type B is Balance cut of type B is
not performed. performed.
2 During pocket machining, the second tool may follow the

path of the first tool.
Path of the first tool

Path of the second tool
197
6. AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE PROGRAMMING AND
FUNCTION (15–TTFB ONLY) OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT B–61804E–2/05
6 AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15–TTFB ONLY)
The auto collision avoidance function makes use of the interference check
according to animated simulation function.
The auto collision avoidance function is a function to automatically alter
the program which can evade that interference if the turrets interfere each
other in the simulation according to the animation drawing.
Basically, this function automatically edits the NC program which is
programmed at FAPT side to evade the interference of the turrets. Refer
to the next explanation at the time of the use actually because it happens
that it is not possible to edit correctly in some case.
198
PROGRAMMING AND 6.AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE
B–61804E–2/05 OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT FUNCTION (15–TTFB ONLY)
6.1 (1) General

EXPLANATION OF This function can edit the program to prevent the interference around
the same position by inserting the waiting M code automatically to the
FUNCTIONS executing program when the two turrets interfere with each other.
Algorithms of the insertion of the waiting M code is as follows.
(a) The operator decides which of the turret is prior when the
interference occurs. (A turret of either one side can be always made
to take priority according to the setting of the system parameter.)
(b) The program which the turret has priority inserts the waiting M
code next to the executing block (which executes when the
interference occurs). The program which the turret has no priority
inserts the waiting M code before the executing block.
(c) When the executing block is the waiting M code at the side of the
posterior program, it is invalid to insert the waiting M code before
the executing block as two waiting M codes continue.
(d) Two waiting M codes continue as a result of the insertion of the
waiting M code, the first waiting M code is deleted to simplify the
program. After deletion, the waiting M code of the same number
is searched and deleted in another turret program.
However, the actual machining does not have quite the effect if the
waiting M code is not deleted and continue.
(2) Example
The following programs are thought.
Program for the turret 1 Program for the turret 2
. .
. .
N100 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N200 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
. .
. .
Fig. 6.1 (a)
199

Fig. 6.1 (b)
(a) When the turret 1 executes the N102 block, the turret 2 executes the
N202 block, suppose that the interference occurs. At this time, the
animation drawing screen becomes as Fig.6.1(b). When the turret
1 is prior to the turret2 (the priority is specified at FAPT side
screen), the waiting M code is automatically inserted next to the
N102 block and before the N202 block. The program is edited as
follows. In the following example, the initial value of the waiting
M code is set to M500.
. .
. .
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 500 ; Insertion
M 500 ; Insertion N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
. .
(b) Opposite to (a), when the turret 2 is prior to 1, the waiting M code
is automatically inserted before the N102 block and next to the
N202 block.
. .
. .
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Insertion N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 500 ; Insertion
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
. .
The interference occurs at once as this, M code is automatically
inserted. However, NC operation cannot be continued. At the time
of when M code is inserted, the program is rewound automatically
and executes from the lead again.
200
(c) After inserting M500 to (a), as a result of execution from the

beginning of the program again, suppose that the interference
occurred while executing N103 and N202 blocks.
When the turret 1 is prior to 2, the waiting M code M501 is inserted
next to the N103 block at the side of the turret 1. M501 is inserted
before the N202 block at the side of the turret 2. However, M500
is deleted because M500 and M501 continue. M500 is deleted
from the program for the turret 1 if M500 is deleted in the program
for the turret 2 and becomes in the following.
. .
. .
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 500 ; Deletion
M 500 ; Deletion M 501 ; Insertion
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 501 ; Insertion N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
. .
(d) After inserting M500 to (a), as a result of executing from the
beginning of the program again, suppose that the interference
occurred because the turret 1 is moved by M102 block to the turret
2 which stops according to the waiting M code M500. When the
turret 1 is prior to the 2, the waiting M code (M501) is inserted next
to the N102 block at the side of the turret 1.
M501 is inserted before N201 block at the side of turret 2 according
to algorithms of item (1) (c). Consequently, M500 is deleted
because M500 is deleted from program for the turret 2 if M500 is
deleted in program for the turret 1 and becomes in the following.
. .
. .
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 501 ; Insertion
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 501 ; Insertion M 500 ; Deletion
M 500 ; Deletion N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
. .

Fig. 6.1 (c)

(3) Completion condition of the auto collision avoidance function
201
(a) Normal end

(i) When the execution of M02 or M30 of both programs is ended,
judge the interference does not occur and end the program
normally.
(ii)In the case of the setting that the use of this function is only once,
end normally at the time of the occurrence of the interference in
the tools each other.
(b) Abnormal end
(i) The end by the alarm
There is possibility that the alarm occurs by the reason
described as follows while executing this function. The
processing of this function is interrupted at the time of the alarm
occurrence.
1) In the case that the error in the editing occurs.
When the waiting M code continues, an old waiting M code
is deleted and the corresponding M code does not exist in the
program of other turret side.
2) In the case that the interference occurs while executing
subprogram or custom macro statement.
3) In the case that after the program of one side executing M02
or M30, the interference occurred.
The alarm display “PS000: SEARCHED DATA NOT
FOUND” is done in the above cases.
(ii)The end except the alarm
During the execution of this function, the process is interrupted
by the next operations.
1) In the case of switching from the memory mode to other
mode.
2) When the cycle is started, one side of turret select signal
(IHEAD 1 and IHEAD 2) is not HIGH.
(Make both turret selected signal HIGH when the auto
collision avoidance function is used.)
3) In the case of the resetting state.
202
6.2 (1) Confirm the setting of the parameter of the auto collision avoidance
function correctly.
OPERATION
(2) Make or read the program to be checked.
(3) Set the memory mode.
(This function is not used by the manual mode, by the automatic mode
except the memory mode. Set the memory mode without fail.)
(4) Suit the operating condition to the real processing as possible.
However, make machine lock signal turning.
(5) Display the screen of animated simulation press the software key
(ACA ON/OFF) and make the state of “Turning of ACA”.
(6) Press the soft key “CHECK START”.
(7) Simulation of the real processing is started by turn on/turn off of the
cycle start signal.
(8) If the interference of the tools occurs, it works by the setting of the
system parameter in the following.
1 When No.710 is 0, the question of the priority turret is displayed
in the screen. Input 1 or 2.
2 When the No.710 is 1 or 2, the turret which is set is treated as the
priority turret.
(9) The waiting M code is inserted automatically to a desired position if
the priority turret is decided.
(10) In the case that the system parameter No.704#2 is 0, the beginning of
the program is executed again.
In the case that the system parameter No.704#2 is 1, the program is
rewound and performed.
203
6.3 A parameter, necessary for the auto collision avoidance function is as

follows. Both of these are set on FAPT screen.
SYSTEM
(1) Specification of the priority turret
PARAMETER
System parameter No.710 (An initial value 0)
0: At the time of the occurrence of the interference, the operator sets.
1: The turret 1 takes priority.
2: The turret 2 takes priority.
(2) An initial value of the waiting M code which is inserted automatically
System parameter No.731 (An initial value 200)
Setting range: 100 – 999
(3) Setting whether the auto collision avoidance function is used
repeatedly until the interference does not occur.
System parameter No.704#2 (An initial value 0)
0: Repeatedly the auto collision avoidance function is used.
If the interference occurs, the waiting M code is inserted, and
executed from the beginning of the program again.
1: the auto collision avoidance function is used only once.
Once the interference occurs, the waiting M code is inserted, the
program is rewound and ended.
204
6.4
NOTES
NOTE
1 During executing under–mentioned NC program, this
function does not work correctly.
(1)Continuous thread cutting
(2)Multiple repetitive cannot cycle
(3)Balanced cutting
(4)High–speed machining
(5)Macro statement
(6)Sub–program
If the interference occurs when (1) – (4) is being executed,
the waiting M code is inserted near of that block
unconditionally.
If it occurs when (5), (6) is being executed, it becomes the
error as described at item 6.1 (3) (b).
2 At the time of the occurrence of the interference, the
resetting signal is output from NC side.
3 After “CHECK START” of the soft key is pressed, the soft
key of “ACA ON/OFF” is invalid. Press the software key of
“ACA ON/OFF” after “ORIGINAL” if alter the state from
“ACA ON” to “ACA OFF” after “CHECK START” is pressed
or are oppsite state of that.
4 If any interference already occurs at the time of the press of
“CHECK START” of the soft key, this function is invalid.
5 If animation drawing was discontinued by pressing
“ORIGINAL” of the soft key etc. in FAPT screen after the
cycle start, this function is ended at atheat time. However,
the memory operation is continued.
6 If the interference except tool 1 and tool 2 occurs, this
function is ended at that time. However, the memory
operation is continued.
7 When the operator specifies the priority turret, specify the
same side turret in the program which the interference
occurs around the same place. If not, there is the possibility
that the program is not edited correctly.
8 The program of the same program number can not be
executed by both turrets. The interference of the tools with
each other occurs if executed, but the waiting M code is not
inserted.
205
IV. VARIOUS FILE AND DATA
B–61804E–2/05 VARIOUS FILE AND DATA 1. MEMORY COMPOSITION
1 MEMORY COMPOSITION
209
1. MEMORY COMPOSITION VARIOUS FILE AND DATA B–61804E–2/05
1.1
MAIN MEMORY AND
SUBMEMORY
The external input/output device means the Handy File, for instance.
The term “input/output” (registering, calling) of files is used with
reference to the main memory. Namely, “input of ***” (registering)
means the input from submemories or external I/O device to the main
memory. “Output of ***” (calling) means the output from the main
memory to the submemory or the external I/O device.
Data cannot be directly be transferred among an submemory or an
external I/O Device. For example, to enter data of the external I/O device
to the submemory, data must pass through the main memory. Work of this
type can be done as follows:
(1) Input (call data of the external I/O device to the system memory.
(2) Output (Register) the data from the system memory to the file area.
1.1.1 The submemory is divided into the following:

Submemory 1) System area
2) File area
In the system area, system parameters, machine tool files (MTF) setting
data, tool data and animation drawing data resident. The file area can be
used freely by the user to store some files, such as family program,
material file, tooling file, and sub cycle file.
Since the contents of the submemory are retained even when the power
is off, they can be input (called) to the main memory immediately after
the power is turned on.
210
1.1.2
Main Memory
Multiple family programs, material files, and sub cycle files can be
written and stored in the file area.
If specific file names are set in the following system parameters, they are
loaded from the file area to main memory automatically when the power
is turned on:
System parameter No.16: Material data file name
System parameter No.17: Tooling information file name
System parameter No.770: Sub cycle file name
211
1. MEMORY COMPOSITION VARIOUS FILE AND DATA B–61804E–2/05
1.2 The family program, material data, and tooling information and sub cycle
file can be stored with file names in the submemory. The name of the file
DISPLAY OF stored can be displayed on the CRT or a file can be deleted by the operation
SUBMEMORY FILE described below.
NAME AND FILE
DELETION Initial screen
Press [FAMILY Press [DATA SET] key.

PROGRAM] key.
** FAMILY PROGRAM ** ** PARAMETER&DATASET **

Menu screen Menu screen
Press [FILE NAME]

key.
Not only the file names of the family

File name list stored programs, but also the file names of
in submemory material datas, tooling informations
and sub cycle files are displayed.
NO
File to be deleted?
YES
Search number Press [END] key.

by [CURSOR ±]
or [CURSOR ´] several times.
DEL INPUT
YES (delete)
NO (do not delete)
Delete that file really?
1 INPUT 0 INPUT
212
1.3 File area capacity is 64 k bytes (standard).

If additional submemory option is provided, the capacity is extended up
ADDITIONAL to 128 k bytes.
PARAMETER OF If option parameter was changed, turn off the power once, turn on power
SUBMEMORY again, and initialize the submemory. To initialize the submemory, select
[AUXILIARY] in the initial screen, input CFINT “INPUT”
to the question, “REQUEST = ”.
For details, see CHAPTER VII “AUXILIARY JOB”.
1.4 The standard values for the number of files able to be registered in
sub–memory are:
NO. OF FILES When there are no additional sub–memory: 30
REGISTERABLE IN When there are additional sub–memory: 40
SUB–MEMORY However, it is possible to change these values when initializing
sub–memory, after pressing the “CFINT” to initialize sub–memory.
After pressing the “CFINT” to initialize sub–memory, the following
message will appear on the screen:
KEY IN “OK” OR “NO”
EXECUTION = OK <,NUMBER OF
MEMBER >
EXECUTION =
Usually “1” only is typed, however by using the EXECUTION = 1,
numeral , it is possible to register up to 99 files in sub–memory, as long
as the space remaining in the sub–memory is sufficient. The amount of
space in the sub–memory can be determined by displaying a list of stored
file names.
213
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA VARIOUS FILE AND DATA B–61804E–2/05
2 INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA
CAUTION
Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the
entered commands on the screen. Operating the machine
using an invalid command may result in a loss of data.
214
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
B–61804E–2/05 VARIOUS FILE AND DATA COLLATION OF DATA
2.1
INPUT/OUTPUT WITH
SUBMEMORY
2.1.1 The above data are output (registered) to the submemory by displaying
System Parameter, the setting screen of each data and pressing the [SAVE END] soft key.
MTF, Setting Data Input from the submemory is done without any operation, because it is
automatically load to the main memory when power is turned on.
NOTE
How to display the setting screen of each data is explained
later.
2.1.2 In the screen displaying “xxx INPUT” (calling) or “xxx OUTPUT”,

Family Program, registering key in,
Material Data, Tooling No. = Numeral, C INPUT
Information Sub Cycle

to the question “NO. =”.
File (The “, C” can be omitted. See (Note 1).)
“EF = ” will be questioned for input or output to/from the prescribed file,
so specify the file name, and perform the input/output. When inputting,
take out file from the specified submemory, and input (call) in to the main
memory. When outputting, add the specified file name, and output
(register) it to the submemory.
215
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
For example, when inputting (calling), family program from the

submemory, input as following.
2, C INPUT or 4, C INPUT (Photo A)
When outputting (registering) material file to the submemory, input as
following.
4, C INPUT . (Photo B)
(1) Output to the submemory (registering)
The following question will be displayed.
EF = OK < , REP > , @ File name

EF = _ (1 : OK, 0 : NO, R : REP)
Input as following for this message.
1, @ File name INPUT . . . . . . . Write in the file next to the last file of
the submemory.
1, R, @ File name INPUT . . . . If the file specified here is already in
the submemory, delete the file, and
write it newly. If the file name is not
in the memory, simply add the file.
(2) Input from the submemory (calling)
The following question will be displayed.
EF = PK < , File name or NXT >

EF = _ (1 : OK, 0 : NO, N : NXT)
Input as following for this message.
1 INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read the head file of the submemory.
1, @ File name INPUT . . . . Read the file with specified file name.
216
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
NOTE
1 Submemory or memory cassettes are used for storage of
the family program, material file and tooling file, sub cycle
file. Use of the submemory or the memory cassette can be
designated with system parameter No.0015.
System parametre
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0015 0 0 0 0 0 0
Input device
0: External
I/O device
Output device 1: File area
0: External I/O device
1: File area
In both input and output devices, the initial value is 1 (sub
memory).
In general, the input/output device is selected by changing
the setting of parameter No.0015. However, it is also
possible to use the other device without changing the
parameter.
Instead of keying in 1 INPUT, key in 1, B INPUT to set
input/output with respect to the memory cassette, or key in
1, C INPUT to set input/output to the submemory. (When
“, B” or “, C” is omitted, the device set at parameter No.15
is applied.)
2 Each file name must be put when entering family program,
material data, tooling information or sub cycle file to
submemory.
The file name may be either numeric or alphanumeric, but
must be within 15–character long.
3 You may have “family program”, “material data”, “tooling
information” and “sub cycle file” entered in a file area at the
same time.
If this case, however, it is impossible to mistake, for example
“tooling file” for “family program”. The same is true to the
procedure of memory cassette.
(3) Replacing files

1) Key in the following when replacing the file registered on the sub
memory by the data on the main memory as described in (1):
1, R, @ file name “INPUT”
2) Then, the following question appears, meaning “Is replacing
actually performed ?”:
REPLACE OK “searched file name” (1: OK 0: NO)
REP =
3) Key in 1 INPUT and 0 INPUT when performing replacement
with the searched file name or when not performing it for this
question, respectively.
217
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
It is possible to specify a file name in abbreviated from on

replacement.
Even if it is specified in abbreviated form, the actually replaced file
name becomes that searched.
Example 1)
Suppose there are two files within the sub memory, namely “ABC”
and “XYZ”. At this time, it is possible to specify either ‘1, R, @A’ or
‘1, R, @AB’ INPUT when performing replacement with the “ABC”
file.
If there are plural number of file names corresponding to the file name
(character string) keyed in on replacement, a message for “Perform
keying in again” is output and no replacement processing is carried out.
Example 2)
Suppose there are three files within the sub memory, namely “ABC”,
“A2”, and “XYZ”.
At this time, if the 1, R, @A “INPUT” is specified, the “perform
keying in again” message is displayed and no replacement processing
is performed since there are two file names corresponding to A
(character string) and it is not possible to distinguish which was
specified.
Specify 1, R, @A2 “INPUT” in full name when performing
replacement of file, namely A2.
(4) Recording and reading family data automatically
With this function, family data can be retained when the power is
turned off while the user is programming. As a result, the user can
continue programming after turning on the power again.
Family data is a collection of data that makes up a family program.
The following data is recorded automatically as it is input during
programming:
Blank figure data Cutting condition data Material data
Part figure data Machining data Tooling information
C–axis figure data Y–axis figure data Process editing data etc.
When the power is turned on, the recorded family data is arranged in
order and restored. Note that, however, the family data is not read
when the power is turned on while one of the following keys is being
pressed:
1) When the power is turned on while the SP key is being pressed
2) When the power is turned on while the I key is being pressed
(In this case, all family data is cleared.)
3) When family data is not recorded correctly
218
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
NOTE
1 When a figure is defined, the warning message “WARNING
CHECK INPUT DATA” may be displayed. If this message
appears turn off the power, then turn on the power again
while holding down the I key.
This warning message is generated when approximately 50
elements are entered successively in incremental mode.
2 When a software edition has been upgraded, turn on the
power while holding down the I key.
3 When the power is turned on, the system reads family data,
then loads specific files automatically.
This means that the automatically loaded data takes
precedence over the other data.
4 When the power is turned on, the system reads family data,
then system parameters.
If the program contents differ from the system parameter
settings, care must be taken. For example, if the initial
values for the drawing format and part direction specified in
the program are different from the values of the
corresponding system parameter Nos.200 and 240,
respectively, the original system parameter values are used
immediately after the power is turned on.
5 Immediately after the power is turned on, the priority of the
common data varies depending on bit 0 of system
parameter No.708.
2.1.3 When a file is registered in submemory, the file can be protected so it is

File Protection not deleted by mistake. (Provide protection for those files that should not
be deleted, such as files to be loaded automatically.)
1. A password is used for protection. Before protection can be provided,
a password must be set in system parameter No.739.
System parameter No.739 = DDD
Example : System parameter 739 = 123
(Set the file protection password, using a 3–digit number.)
2. Creating a file
Select “1. FAMILY PROGRAM OUTPUT” on the family program
input/output screen.
Then, the following prompt is appears on the screen. (No guidance
message about protection appears on the screen.)
EF WRITING. KEY IN ‘OK’ OR ‘NO’

EF = OK <, REP>, @FILE NAME
EF = (1: OK 0: NO R: REP)
219
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
In response to this message, enter one of the following:

1, @file name . . . . . . . . . . Writes the file immediately after the last
file in submemory.
1, R, @file name . . . . . . . . If the specified file name is already
present in submemory, the existing file
is erased, and the new file is written
without protection. If the specified file
name is not present in submemory, the
file is just added to submemory.
1, P, @file name . . . . . . . . Provides protection for the specified
file, and writes the file immediately after
the last file in submemory.
1, R, P, @file name . . . . . . If the specified file name is already
or
1, P, R, @file name . . . . present in submemory, the existing file
is erased,and the new file is written with
protection.
If the specified file name is not present
in submemory, the file is just added to
submemory.
3. When a file is registered with protection, a list of submemory
capacities appears as follows:
*** REGISTERED FILE NAME *** (MAX 128KB)

NO. FILE NAME USED MEMORY
1 P AUTO–MAT 1.25 %
2 ASAHI–KOGYO 5.32 %
3 P TOOLING–DATA 3.14%
4 FUJIYAMA–KIKAI 8.08 %
5 WORK–DATA 1.02 %
.
.
. The files marked with “P” are being protected.
.
.
.
4. Deleting a protected file

(1) On the submemory file directory screen, move the cursor to the
number of the file you want to delete, then enter “DEL” (INPUT).
(2) The following message is displayed for confirmation:
FILE NO. (1: OK 0: NO)
DEL = _
Enter 1 (INPUT). The specified file is then deleted.
(3) If the file to be deleted is protected, the following message appears:
THIS FILE IS PROTECTED
IF YOU WANT TO DELETE THIS FILE, KEY IN PASSWORD
PLEASE
PW = _
Enter the three–digit number set in system parameter No.739 (123
in example 1.).
220
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
To cancel the deletion of the file, just enter (INPUT). Then, the
previous submemory file directory screen is redisplayed.
If an incorrect password is entered, the deletion is canceled, and the
previous submemory file directory screen is redisplayed.
If the correct password is entered, the file is deleted.
5. Replacing a protected file
(1) When replacement is specified, the following message apperas:
REPLACE OK? [file name searched for] (1: OK 0: NO)
REP = _
Enter 1 (INPUT). Then, the file is replaced with the data in main
memory.
(2) If the file to be replaced is protected, the following message
appears:
THIS FILE IS PROTECTED
IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE THIS FILE, KEY IN PASSWORD
PLEASE
PW = _
Enter the three–digit number set in system parameter No.739 (123
in the example 1.).
To cancel the replacement, just enter (INPUT). Then, the previous
submemory input/output screen is redisplayed.
If an incorrect password is entered, the replacement is canceled,
and the previous submemory input/output screen is redisplayed.
If the correct password is entered, the file is replaced.
NOTE
1 If the auxiliary operation, SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION,
is executed, all files including protected files are deleted.
2 If no password is defined (system parameter No.739) or if
the password does not consist of three digits, protected files
cannot be deleted.
221
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
2.1.4 System parameters, MTF data, and setting data read from an external
Function For storage device can be registered in submemory, without having to press
the [REGST.] soft key on each setting screen.
Automatically
For example, in case that calling a system parameter from the FANUC
Registering
Floppy Cassette adapter.
Parameters and Data in
Submemory
(1) 3, B, S (INPUT)
Submemory registration command

(2) 1, @5 (INPUT)
By entering the above text, the fifth file on the Floppy Cassette is
called as a system parameter and stored into main memory, then
automatically registered in submemory.
222
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
2.2
COLLATION AND
INPUT/OUTPUT WITH
FLOPPY CASSETTE
2.2.1 In the screen displayed with “*** INPUT” (calling), “*** OUTPUT”
System Parameter, (registering), or “*** COLLATING”, key in,
MTF, Tool Data, Setting No. = Numeral, B INPUT
Data, Drawing Data

to the question “NO. =”.
For example, when inputting (calling) system parameter from the floppy
cassette or the Handy File, key in,
No. = 3, B INPUT
When outputting MTF to the floppy cassette or the handy file, key in,
No. = 6, B INPUT
A question, “BC =” will be given to perform data input/output or

collation, so answer must be given.
(1) Output to the floppy cassette, the handy file
The following question will be given.
Set BC, and key in “OK” or “NO”.
BC = OK < , INT OR ADD OR @ FILE NO. >

BC = _ (1 : OK 0 : NO A : ADD)
For the above message, specify where data is to be stored in the floppy
cassette from the keyboard.
223
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
1, I INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . Writes data to the cassette from the head

of the volume.
1 INPUT or 1, A INPUT . . Writes data to the cassette from the end
of the last file.
1, @ n INPUT . . . . . . . . Writes data to the cassette from file n.
Thus, file n and subsequent files are
replaced by the new file.
(n is positive integer such as 1, 2, ...)
(a) 1, I INPUT
(b) 1 INPUT or 1, A INPUT
New file (No. 4)
(c) 1, @ n INPUT
INPUT
The yellow LED of floppy cassette adapter lights alternately during

writing data.
(2) Input (call) from the floppy cassette, the handy file and collation
The following question will be given.
Set BC, and key in “OK” or “NO”.
BC = OK < , @ FILE NO. OR NXT >
BC = _ (1 : OK 0 : NO N : NXT)
For the above message, specify which file is to be read from the floppy
cassette.
224
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
1 NL . . . . . . Reads the first file on the volume.
1, @ n NL . . Reads file n. (n is positive integer such as 1, 2, ...)
1, N NL . . . . Reads the file next to the one previously read.

The green LED of adapter lights alternately during reading data.
(3) Note
NOTE
When the handy file is used, it must be controlled by
following the operations explained in (1) and (2) above.
Do not operate the handy file directly.
2.2.2 In the screen displaying “*** INPUT” (calling) or “*** OUTPUT”

Family Program, (registering), key in,
Material Data, Tooling No. = Numeral, B INPUT
Information, Sub Cycle

to the question, “NO. =”. (, B can be omitted. See (Note 1) of item 2.1.2.)
File
Operations hereafter will be done in the same method as shown in the
previous section.
The files cannot be collated.
2.2.3 (1) Contents and status of floppy cassette

Handling of Floppy A unit of input/output data for a floppy cassette is called a “file”.
Cassette and Adapter
More than one file can be stored on one cassette volume, and a single
file can extend over more than one cassette, as shown in the above
figure.
225
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
(a) File number

Files stored on a floppy cassette are numbered sequentially starting
from file number 1. Thus, files are numbered in sequence of
storage in the cassette. That is, file 3 is the third file stored if the
beginning of a cassette is the beginning of a file like the cassette 1
case. When file number k+1 is specified for the volume 1, file
numbers are extended to volume 2 in which the file k+1 is searched,
judging that file k+1 is not on volume 1 or the remaining data in
the last file on the volume 1 is continued to on volume 2.
In this case, the system notifies to the operator to replace volume
1 with volume 2 by flickering the red and green light emitting
diodes (LEDs) alternately. However, if volume 2 where the
beginning of a cassette is not the beginning of a file is mounted
first, the first file on the volume (in this case, the remaining data
for file k on volume 2) is ignored if a file is searched. If file number
1 is specified, for example, file k+1 on volume 2 is searched. If
volume 1 is replaced by volume 2 during the file search and a new
file number i is specified, the i–th file from the file positioned next
to the remaining data file is searched.
(b) Status of floppy cassette
When a floppy cassette is ready for operation, the operator is
notified by the display LEDs on the floppy cassette adaptor.
(2) Notes for family program input
Each file is initialized when data are read from the floppy cassette after
specifying the family program input. Accordingly, if the floppy
cassette is disconnected during read or if a data other than family
program is read (No data is read as a result.), the file contents in the
15–TF main memory are broken. Particularly be careful with the
selection of input/output, accordingly.
(3) When floppy cassette was fully loaded
If the floppy cassette was fully occupied with data during data loading,
the red and green lamps alternately flicker in the memory cassette
adapter. Set a new memory cassette.
(4) Mixing of files
The family programs, material files, tooling files, and “sub cycle files”
can be mixedly loaded into the same floppy cassette. In this case, a
tooling file cannot be read being regarded as family program, for
example.
(5) Document
For operation of the floppy cassette/adapter, refer to the operator’s
manual for FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE (B–66040E).
226
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
2.3 Three reader/puncher interfaces can be used at symbolic FAPT side,

which interface is used is determined by the value of setting data No.900.
FAPT I/O INTERFACE Baud rate and stop bit values can be changed by setting data No.901 and
902.
No.900 The reader/puncher interface number (1 – 3)
No.901 Setting of baud rate
Setting value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Baud rate 50 100 110 150 200 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600
No.902 Setting of stop bit

=1: Stop bit 1 (FANUC unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . DC code is used.
=2: Stop bit 2 (FANUC unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . DC code is used.
=5: Stop bit 1 (Other than FANUC Unit) . . No DC code is used.
=6: Stop bit 2 (Other than FANUC Unit) . . No DC code is used.
NOTE
1 In FANUC units, DC code is always used. In other than
FANUC units, DC code cannot be used.
2 When inputting and outputting various data, using I/O
devices other than a FANUC unit, key in “ , P “INPUT”.
Example:
When outputting a family program:
When the system asks “No. = 0” on the family program I/O screen, key
in as follows:
NO. = 1. P INPUT
When the baud rate and stop bit setting are not adequate, the baud rate,
stop bit value and the use of DC code are set automatically to the
following values. The preset value on the CRT display screen remains
unchanged.
Baud rate= 4800 bauds
Stop bit = 2 bits
DC code = Used
NOTE
1 The NC control side is also provided with an Interface No.
and a parameter for setting the baud rate and stop bit, but
since NC control and FAPT control are of independent
processing, it is not necessary to set these values to the
same level in particular. However, when using the same
interface number part for both NC data I/O and FAPT data
I/O, using the same equipment, set the same value for baud
rate and stop bit.
2 NC data I/O and FAPT data I/O cannot be executed at the
same time.
227
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
2.4 (1) Method

REGISTRATION OF 1) When outputting data onto a floppy cassette it is normal to respond
to the question “NO =” by inputting a numeral followed by “B”.
FILE NAME ONTO When naming a file, however, “F” should be entered in place of
FLOPPY CASSETTE, “B”.
HANDY FILE (Example)
(OPTION) In order to output a system parameter with a file name key in:
NO = 2, F
2) Responses to the following questions remain unchanged:
SET BC, AND KEY IN “OK” OR “NO”.
BC = OK <, INT OR ADD OR @ FILE NO.>
BC = (1:OK, 0:NO, I:INT, A:ADD)
3) Now specify file name
STANDARD FILE NAME: FAPT–SYS.PARAM.
KEY IN THE FILE NAME.
PRESS ‘INPUT’ KEY ONLY, IF YOU ACCEPT STANDARD
FILE NAME
FILE NAME = _
The following files names will first be displayed automatically
depending on the data to be output:
a) System parameter . . . . . FAPT–SYS.PARAM.
b) MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAPT–MTF
c) Setting data . . . . . . . . . . FAPT–SETTING
d) Tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . FAPT–TOOL
e) Graphic data . . . . . . . . . FAPT–GRAPHIC
f) Family program . . . . . . FAPT–FAMILY
g) Material data . . . . . . . . FAPT–MATERIAL
h) Sub cycle file . . . . . . . . FAPT–SUB.CYCLE
i) Tooling information . . . FAPT–TOOLING
If the standard file name is acceptable then press the “INPUT” key.
If you wish to register an alternative file name then specify your
preferred name up to a maximum of 17 characters. “@” cannot be
used in a file name.
(2) Method of displaying file names
Refer to OPERATOR’S MANUAL for CNC 15–T or 16–T.
(3) File input
When reading in a file which has been output in this way the correct
response to the question “BC =” is to key in a numeral and then “B”
as before.
(4) Limitations
1) Two files with the same name cannot be registered on the same
cassette.
2) When specifying a file name:
a) If 18 or more characters are keyed in, only the first 17 characters
of the name specified will be registered as the file name.
b) If “@” is used for part or all of a file name then the error message
“key in again” will be displayed on the monitor screen.
Since “File name =” has not yet disappeared from the screen it
is still possible to specify and register a correct file name.
228
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
2.5 Tooling information and material data can be punched out from the
external equipment in a specific format using ISO/EIA code. In addition,
FILE DATA data which is created on the computer beforehand can be read.
INPUT/OUTPUT This function cannot be used for 5700 series of 16–T CAPII.
FUNCTION
NOTE
With the 16–T CAP II, EIA code cannot be input/output.
2.5.1 (1) The file data input/output function is enabled only when bit 4 of
Parameter system parameter No.708 is on.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
708
Bit 4 0 : Tooling information and material data are input/output in binary form
(conventional specification).
1: Tooling information and material data are input/output using the ISO
or EIA code (new specification).
(2) Whether the ISO code or EIA code is used depends on the setting in
system parameter No.1.
NOTE
In the 16–T CAP II, the ISO code is always set for
input/output.
2.5.2 The conventional screen display for input/outout has not been changed.
Screen If bit 4 of system parameter No.708 is 1, however, a comment is added
as follows:
Initial screen
DATA
SET
=*= PARAMETER & DATA SET =*=

1. SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT
2. SETTING DATA CORRECTION
3. MATERIAL DATA CORRECTION
4. MATERIAL DATA OUTPUT
5. MATERIAL DATA INPUT
6. TOOLING INFORMATION CORRECTION
7. TOOLING INFORMATION OUTPUT
8. TOOLING INFORMATION INPUT
For example, to punch material data on the external equipment, enter the
following in response to “NO =”:
NO = 4, B (For the floppy cassette or handy file), or
NO = 4, P (for PPR or input/output equipment manufactured by
someone other than FANUC)
229
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
2.5.3 (1) Material data

Input/Output Data M01S45C; Name of the first material
Format T1; CCD for the turn process
N11VvFf1; (Center drilling)
N12VvFf1; (Drilling)
N13VvFf1; (Reaming)
N14Vv; (Tapping)
N21VvFf1Af2Bf3Dd; (Face rough cutting)
N22VvFf1Af2Bf3Dd; (Outer rough cutting)
N23VvFf1Af2Bf3Dd; (Inner rough cutting)
N31VvFf1; (Face semi finishing)
N32VvFf1; (Outer semi finishing)
N33VvFf1; (Inner semi finishing)
N41VvFf1Af2Bf3Cf4; (Face finishing)
N42VvFf1Af2Bf3Cf4; (Outer finishing)
N43VvFf1Af2Bf3Cf4; (Inner finishing)
N51VvFf1Af2; (Face grooving)
N52VvFf1Af2; (Outer grooving)
N53VvFf1Af2; (Inner grooving)
N54VvFf1Af2; (Necking)
N55VvFf1Af2Bf3Cd; (Face grooving 2)
N56VvFf1Af2Bf3Cd; (Outer grooving 2)
N57VvFf1Af2Bf3Cd; (Inner grooving 2)
N61VvDd; (Face threading)
N62VvDd; (Outer threading)
N63VvDd; (Inner threading)
N71UvVv2Ff1Af2; (Cutting off)
C1; CCD for the C–axis Process, Y–axis
Process (High Speed Tool)
N1VvTft; (Center drilling)
N2VvTft; (Drilling)
N3Vv; (Tapping)
N4VvRfrTft; (End milling)
C2; CCD for the C–axis Process, Y–axis
Process (Carbide Tool)
N1VvTft; (Center drilling)
N2VvTft; (Drilling)
N3Vv; (Tapping)
N4VvRfrTft; (End milling)
M02SCM; Name of the second material
T1; CCD for the turn process
.
.
(same as above)
230
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
(2) Tooling information

Tooling information has the same format as tool data.
(3) Notes
NOTE
1 When undefined data is to be punched out, only its address
is output, and no data is output.
2 When data is read, all data on memory is replaced by the
new data.
3 If an invalid address is read during the data read operation,
no error occurs, and the address is ignored.
4 If the same address appears twice consecutively in the
same block when data is read, the second data is regarded
as valid.
2.5.4 If bit 4 of system parameter No.708 is on, the following standard file
File Name Registration names are used when file names are registered in the floppy cassette:
in the Floppy Cassette Material data . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIAL
Tooling information . . . . . TOOLING
or Handy File
231
V. SETTING AND DISPLAY OF
DATA
B–61804E–2/05 SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA 1. MATERIAL DATA
1 MATERIAL DATA
WARNING
Material data, described below, varies with the machine.
For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder. If material data values are not set appropriately for
the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be
prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may cause
damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user may
result.
235
1. MATERIAL DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA B–61804E–2/05
1.1 When the power supply was input, 17 kinds of materials and machining
conditions, which are being preset in the system, are loaded together, so
MATERIAL DATA that the machining conditions are automatically determined by specifying
AND MATERIAL FILE materials.
However, it may be desiredto store additional machining conditions
according to the circumstances of works, machines, and machining
methods.
In such a case, the entire data on all 17 kinds of materials and machining
conditions can be named collectively and registered into an external file.
This file is called material file.
Since this material file can store many files, various machining conditions
data can be called simply by specifying the name of required material file.
Preparation of material files results in the accumulation of know how
data.
236
1.2 1) Cutting condition for turning

SETTING AND DATA Cutting
Feed rate
Cutting
speed depth
WHICH CAN Division
DISPLAYED V F1 F2 F3 F4 D
CENTER DRILLING D D – – – –
DRILLING D D – – – –
REAMING D D – – – –
TAPPING D – – – – –
ROUGH FACING
ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE D D D D – D
ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE
SEMI–FINISHING FACING
SEMI–FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE D D – – – –
SEMI–FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
FINISHING FACING
FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE D D D D D –
FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
GROOVING FACING
GROOVING OF OUTER FIGURE D D D – – –
GROOVING OF INNER FIGURE
THREADING FACING
THREADING OF OUTER FIGURE D – – – – D
THREADING OF INNER FIGURE
CUT OFF D
D D – – –
(2 kinds)
2) Cutting condition with high speed tool in milling machining

Cutting Feed amount (*)
speed
Division
FR (Diameter FT (Axis
V direction) direction)
Center drill D – D
Drill D – D
Tap D – –
End mill (*) D D D
(*) Set the feed amount per one blade in case of end mill.
3) Cutting condition with the carbide tool in milling machining.
It is the same as (2).
CAUTION
The increment system of the cutting speed is m/min or
feet/min.
The increment system of the feed rate is mm/rev or inch/rev.
The increment system of the infeed amount is mm or inch.
237
1.3
OPERATION
METHOD
1.3.1
Method of Registration Initial screen
DATA
SET
=0= PARAMETER & DATA SET =0=

Menu screen
3 INPUT
*** PARAMETER & DATA SET *** MATERIAL
NO. SAMPLE OF MATERIAL Directory of registered

1 S45C
2 SCM material name
3 FC
4 AL
5 SUS
Register the number by CURSOR or CURSOR ±
Material name to be registered INPUT (Note 1)
(1) Cutting condition page for turning (No. 1)

“End” Set various conditions on questions.
“BACK PAGE” ± “NEXT PAGE”
(2) Cutting condition page for turning (No. 2)

“End”
(3) Cutting condition page with high speed tool for C–axis
machining
“End”
(4) Cutting condition page with carbide tool for C–axis

machining
“End”
NOTE
Material name shall be within 10 characters. If a material name is already registered at the
position shown by the cursor, the material name newly input is inserted to the cursor position.
Then the material name at the cursor position or subsequent shifts lower one by one.
238
1.3.2 Modification method of the material data is almost the same as the method
Method of Modification of the registration. It is possible to do by the next procedure.
The page can be selected from (1), (2), (3), (4) to (1) of the next material
when “NEXT PAGE” is pushed. The page can be selected for (4), (3), (2),
(1) to (4) of the pressed, the same page of the next material can be selected.
When the LAST MATERIAL is pressed, the same page of the previous
material is selected.
239
1.3.3 The deletion method of the material data is almost the same as registration
Method of Deletion and modification. Only input “DEL” “INPUT” in place of entering new
name or pressing DATA SET.
240
1.4
INPUT/OUTPUT OF
MATERIAL DATA
For details on operation, see CHAPTER IV.
1.5 (1) When the power is turned off after data is modified, the data is erased.
So before turning off the power, be sure to register the data in
NOTES ON submemory.
MATERIAL FILES (2) To perform automatic loading of a material file, set the name of the file
in system parameter No.16.
241
2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING
INFORMATION SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA B–61804E–2/05
2 TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION
242
B–61804E–2/05 SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA INFORMATION
2.1 “Tool data” corresponds to the tool ledger. All the information about tools
is registered in it. Only 1 tool data is held in the submemory (involatile
TOOL DATA, memory).
TOOLING As the tool data, it is possible to store tool configuration data and setting
INFORMATION data for copying to the tooling information and each tool is assigned the
tool management number (ID). Up to 200 turning tools and up to 100
milling tools are registerable.
“Tooling information” specifies at which position of the turret and in
which manner to set the tool according to the working process to be
executed. Registration of the tool from tool data to tooling information
is called “tooling”. The tooling information is held as part of the family
program.
At the beginning of the tooling information is the tool selection number
(TN) implying the turret position. And the tool management number
(ID), setting data, etc. are stored. It is possible to register tools of the same
tool management number (ID) at the positions of more than 1 tool
selection numbers (TN).
In the Symbolic FAPT execution, the working program is created based
on the setting data registered in the tooling information.
TOOLING INFORMATION and TOOL DATA
(1) Tool Data Creation

Correction and new setting are performed on the tool data setting
screen. The new tool data created here is written directly in the
submemory, so the data is held even if the power is switched off and
then on.
Also it is possible to register tool data in the external memory by an
input/output device such as the FANUC cassette, etc. and to call it any
time.
(2) Tooling Information Creation
Normally tooling information is automatically created as Item 4
“Working Definition” is followed in the FAPT execution. Creation
and correction are also possible on the tooling information setting
screen. AS tooling information is part of the family program, the
tooling information is also replaced as the family program is called to
the main memory.
243
2.2
TOOL DATA DISPLAY
WARNING
AND SETTING The tool data, described below, varies with the machine.
For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder. If tool data values are not set appropriately for the
actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be
prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in
the tool colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining
occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
1) Press the “DATA SET” soft key on the initial screen. The parameter
and data setting menu screen will be displayed.
2) ‘NO =’ will be prompted, so key in “1”, “INPUT”, and the system data
setting menu screen will be displayed.
3) ‘NO =’ will be prompted, so key in “9”, “INPUT”, and the tool data
list screen will be displayed.
On the tool data list screen, the tool management number and the tool type
are shown per list number.
Meaning of Soft Keys
“MILLING TOOL” . . . . . . The milling tool list screen is displayed.
“SEARCH NO” . . . . . . . . . Used to search for a list number.
In response to the prompt ’NO =’ in the
lower part of the screen, input the value of
the list number of the tool to be searched for
and then press “SEARCH NO”, and the
cursor will move to that number.
“DATA SET” . . . . . . . . . . . The tool data detail setting screen is
displayed.
“CURSOR ” . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor indicating the list number
“CURSOR ” moves up/down.
“END” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The system data
setting screen is returned to.
Press the “SET DATA” soft key. Then, the tool data detail setting screen
appears.
244
On the tool data detail setting screen, tool configuration data and setting
data prompts are displayed.
Also an automatic process decision function data (KP) prompt is
displayed.
The tool figure is not displayed for 5700 series of 16–T CAP II.
(1) Turning tools
245
Tool management number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID =

Tool type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TP = 1: center drill; 2: drill;
Process type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KP = 3: grooving/necking;
Tool tip radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RN = 4: thread; 5: general;
Cutter angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC = 8: finger; 9: reamer; 10: tap
Tool tip angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AN = Automatic process decision
function prompt
Pitch it tap
Tool tip width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WN/DD = Tool tip width if grooving tool
Drill diameter drill
Virtual tool tip position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XN = Tool diameter if reamer, tap
ZN = Cutter length if reamer, tap
Cutter protective angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP = Biting length if reamer, tap
Setting prompts below
Setting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS =
Setting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
X–mirror image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XM = Tool rest type
XM = 0 ordinary lathe
XM = 1 X–axis reversible
lathe (chasing tool rest, etc.)
Spindle rotating direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SD =
Holder number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = Animation–drawing function
prompt
CAUTION
The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter No.200
drawing format.
(2) In case of the milling tool

See the chapter about the C–axis FAPT function in Part VIII.
(Functions of the soft keys)
[COPY ID.No.] . Used when copying contents of tool data already
set.
First set the tool identification number of the data
to be copied. Check that the tool identification
number is correctly set, and press this soft key.
[UNDEFINE] . . . Used to delete all tool data already set.
When data must be partially undefined, key in
DEL INPUT .
If this soft key was pressed by mistake, set the
former tool identification number only, and press
the COPY (ID. NO.) soft key.
[LAST TOOL] [NEXT TOOL] . . The screen changes to the data
setting screen of the tool
preceding the current tool ID
number or of the tool following
the current tool ID number.
246
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . . . . Used to select question of the

setting tool data.
[CHECK] . . . . . . Displayed when the animated simulation function
option is provided. A tool picture is displayed
based on the currently displayed data.
[END] . . . . . . . . . Used when all setting has ended.
When pressed, it returnes to the list of tool data
screen.
247
2.3 As mentioned in the previous section, the tool data can be set and
corrected via the MDI & CRT keys. They can also be input/output or
INPUT/OUTPUT AND collated with the floppy cassette or FA card.
COLLATION OF TOOL
DATA (Operation)
Initial screen
DATA
SET
... PARAMETER & DATA SET

Menu screen
1 INPUT
*** SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT ***
1. SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING

2. SYSTEM PARAMETER OUTPUT
3. SYSTEM PARAMETER INPUT
4. SYSTEM PARAMETER COLLATING
5. MTF SETTING
6. MTF OUTPUT 13. SETTING DATA OUTPUT
7. MTF INPUT 14. SETTING DATA INPUT
8. MTF COLLATING 15. GRAPHIC DATA OUTPUT
9. TQOL DATA SETTING 16. GRAPHIC DATA INPUT
10. TQOL DATA OUTPUT
11. TQOL DATA INPUT
12. TQOL DATA COLLATING 0. END
Output Input Collation
10, B INPUT
11, B INPUT 12, B INPUT
or
10, F INPUT
For details of operation, see CHAPTER IV.
248
2.3.1
Tool Data Input/Output
Format
(Turning tools)
NDDDP__ ; tool management number (ID)

NDDDP__ ; tool type (TP)
NDDDP__ ; tool tip radius/pitch (RN/PT)
NDDDP__ ; cutter angle (AC)
NDDDP__ ; tool tip angle (AN)
NDDDP__ ; tool tip width or drill diameter/tool diameter (WN/DD/DT)
NDDDP__ ; virtual tool tip position (Z–axis)/biting length (ZN/LE)
NDDDP__ ; virtual tool tip position (X–axis)/cutter length (XN/LT)
NDDDP__ ; setting angle (AS)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Z–axis) (ZS)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (X–axis) (XS)
NDDDP__ ; cutter protective angle (AP)
NDDDP ;
NDDDP ;
NDDDP__ ; working process type 1 (KP1)
NDDDP__ ; tool information (FLAG)
NDDDP__ ; holder number (HL)
Meaning of Tool Information (FLAG)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 Tool rest type

0 : ordinaly lathe
1 : X–axis reversible lathe
Bit 3 Spindle rotating direction
0 : forward
1 : reverse
249
(Turning tools)
NDDDP__ ; tool management number (ID)

NDDDP__ ; tool type (TP)
NDDDP__ ; cutting diameter (DS)
NDDDP__ ; cutter length (LT)
NDDDP__ ; tool tip angle (AT)
NDDDP__ ; tool diameter (DT)
NDDDP__ ; biting length (LE)
NDDDP__ ; pitch (PT)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Y–axis) (YS)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Z–axis) (ZS)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (X–axis) (XS)
NDDDP__ ; number of tools (NT)
NDDDP__ ; tool material (MT)
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ; holder number (HL)
NDDDP__ ; tool information 2 (FLAG2)
Meaning of Tool Information (FLAG2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 Rotating direction (TR)

0 : forward
1 : reverse
Bit 3 Spindle direction (CP)
0 : side working
1 : end working
250
2.4
TOOLING
WARNING
INFORMATION After setting tooling information, check the data relating to
DISPLAY AND the actual tool number, tool offset number, and tool figure.
SETTING Failure to set correct tooling information may result in the
tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced
1) Press the “DATA SET” soft key on the initial screen. The parameter
and data setting menu screen will be displayed.
2) ‘NO =’ will be prompted, so key in “6”, “INPUT”, and the tooling
information list screen will be displayed.
On the tooling information list screen, such typical setting data as the tool
management number (ID), the tool type (TP), the setting angle (AS) (the
setting direction (CP) if the milling tool), the setting position (XS, ZS),
the tool rotating direction (SD/TR), the holder number (HL), etc. is
displayed per tool selection number (TN) and it is possible to change data.
If the tool management number (ID) is input in response to ’ID =’, the tool
registered in the tool data is tooled. Setting data is copied from the tool
data. As the tool offset number (TM), the same number as the tool
selection number (TN) is automatically set.
If the input tool management number (ID) is not registered in the tool data,
n message ”This ID is not registered in tool data.” is displayed.
It is also possible to set/correct other data by moving the cursor.
“DATA SET” . . . . . . . . . . . Used to display the detailed data setting
screen for the tool indicated by the cursor.
“DELETE” . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to delete the tool management number
(ID) indicated by the cursor from the
tooling information.
“PAGE ” “PAGE ” . . . . . Displays the next page or previous page.
“TN NUMBER X” . . . . . . The cursor moves the tool management
“TN NUMBER Y” number (ID) up/down.
251
“CURSOR ” . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves the setting data to the

“CURSOR ” right/left.
“NEXT TURRET” . . . . . . Displayed if there are more than 1 tool rests.
Displays the tooling information of the next
tool rests.
“END” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The parameter and
data setting screen is returned to.
When the “SET DATA” soft key is pressed, the tooling information detail
setting screen appears.
As the tool configuration data, the data in the tool data is displayed from
the input tool management number (ID).
Also the content of the displayed data differs according to the tool type.
Tool offset number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM =
Tool management number . . . . . . . . ID = (Note)
NOTE
The tool management number (ID) to be input must have
been registered in the tool data. If a number not registered
in the tool data is input, a message “This ID is not registered
in tool data.” is displayed. Also the registered ID is deleted
from the tooling information if “DEL”, “INPUT” are keyed in.
Input TM within 2 digits and ID within 3 digits.
If the tool management number (ID) is input, the tool registered in the tool
data is tooled and tool configuration data and setting data are set.
The tool figure as shown below is not displayed for 5700 series of 16–T
CAP II.
(1) Turning Tools
(Center drill)
Tool type TP; center drill
Tool tip angle AN;
Drill diameter DD;
252
(Drill)
Tool type TP; drill
Tool tip angle AN;
Drill diameter DD;
(Reamer)
Tool type TP; reamer
Tool diameter DT;
Cutter length LT;
Biting length LE;
(Tap)
Tool type TP; tap
Tool diameter DT;
Cutter length LT;
Biting length LE;
Pitch PT;
(Groove/Neck)
Tool type TP; grooving/necking
Tool tip radius RN;
Cutter angle AC;
Tool tip angle AN;
Tool tip width WN;
Virtual tool tip position XN;
ZN;
(Thread)
Tool type TP; thread
Cutter angle AC;
Tool tip angle AN;
ZN;
(General)
Tool type TP; general
Tool tip radius RN;
Cutter angle AC;
Tool tip angle AN;
Cutter protective angle AP;
ZN;
(Finger)
Tool type TP; finger
253
Setting Data Prompts (Common to all tool types)

Setting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS = (Caution)
Setting position . . . . . . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
X–mirror image . . . . . . . . . . . XM= Tool resEt type
XM=0 ordinary lathe
=1 X–axis reversible lathe
(chasing tool rest, etc.)
Spindle rotating direction . . . . SD =
Holder number . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (Note)
CAUTION
The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter
No.200 drawing format. Not displayed if the center drill, drill,
finger tool.
NOTE
The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
animation–drawing function is available.
Tool figure of reamer tool, tap tool
(2) Milling tools

See the chapter about the C–axis FAPT function in Part VIII.
“LAST TOOL” . . . . Used to display the data setting screen of the last
“NEXT TOOL” tool management number (TN) or the next tool
management number to the current display.
“CURSOR ” . . . . . . Used to move the prompt cursor up/down.
“CURSOR ”
“END” . . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The tool data list screen
is returned to.
254
2.5 Tooling information can be initialized on the tooling information list

screen.
INITIALIZATION OF
TOOLING
INFORMATION
When the [ ] soft key at the right on the tooling information list screen
is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed:
When the “ALL DELETE” soft key is pressed, the system prompts the
user to confirm whether the data is to be deleted.
When 1 is entered, all the tooling information in main memory is deleted.

Meanings of the soft keys
“ALL DELETE” . . . . . . . . Deletes all the tooling information
registered in main memory.
“TURRET 1 DEL.” . . . . . . Deletes all the TL1 tooling information
registered in main memory (only for the TT
specifications).
“TURRET 2 DEL.” . . . . . . Deletes all the TL2 tooling information
registered in main memory (only for the TT
specifications).
“” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The displayed soft key menu changes
cyclically.
255
2.6
TOOL FIGURE DATA
AND SETTING
METHOD
2.6.1 (1) When the turret is set at the rear side.

General Lathe Setting In this case, select or as the drawing format in order to clearly
Method identify positive and negative value of tool data.
(a) Tool figure

Input the dimensions, referring to the following tool figures,
irrespective of whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter
cutting is done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its
setting face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front
face or rear face of the cutting tool.
The “AC” plus direction is counterclockwise around the major
cutting edge as the center, while the “AN” plus direction is
clockwise around the major cutting edge as the center. (The bold
line in the figure shows the major cutting edge.)
256
257
258
259
260
CAUTION
For the button tool, as shown in the example below, specify
a sufficiently smaller nose angle.
CAUTION
The display is made up to the second place past the decimal
point.
261
(b) Setting method

“AS”, “ZS” and “XS” indicate the setting direction and setting
position of the cutting tool defined by the previous method.
Determine the “AS” value and sign by turning the cutting tool
figure in an optional direction as it is.
The ”AS” angle is minus in the clockwise direction.
(2) When the turret is set at the front side.

In this case, select or as the drawing format in order to clearly
identify positive and negative value of tool data.
(a) Tool figure

Input dimensions, referring to the following figures, irrespective of
whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter cutting is
done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its mounting
face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front face or
rear face of the cutting tool.
262

263
264
AN’: for threading along center of thread. AN’: for threading along center of thread.
265
266
CAUTION
For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle,
sufficiently small as shown in the following examples.
CAUTION
Display is done down to two places of decimals.
267
(b) Setting method

figure in an arbitrary direction as it is. The “AS” angle is minus in
the clockwise direction.
268
2.6.2 (1) When drawing format is 1 or 2.

Vertical Lathe Setting
Method
(a) Tool figure

Input the dimensions, referring to the following tool figures,
irrespective of whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter
cutting is done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its
setting face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front
face or rear face of the cutting tool.
269
270
271
272
AN’: for threading along center of groove. AN’: for threading along center of groove.
273
274
CAUTION
For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle,
sufficiently small as shown in the following examples.
275
CAUTION
276
(b) Setting method

Determine the “AS” value and sign by turning the cutting tool in
an optional direction as it is. “AS” angle is minus in the clockwise
direction.
(2) When drawing format is 3 or 4.
277
(a) Tool figure

Input dimensions, referring to the following figures, irrespective of
whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter cutting is
done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its mounting
face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front face or
rear face of the cutting tool.
278
Facing Facing
279
OD button tool cutting OD button tool cutting
OD threading OD threading (reverse)
280
ID cutting ID grooving
ID button tool cutting ID button tool cutting
281
ID threading ID threading (reverse)
282
ID facing (reverse) Grooving
283
Threading Threading (reverse)
CAUTION
For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle
sufficiently small as show in the following examples.
CAUTION
284
(b) Setting method

figure in an optional direction as it is.
The “AS” angle is minus in the clockwise direction.
285
3. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA B–61804E–2/05
3 SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
WARNING
System parameters, setting data, and the MTF data,
described below, vary with the machine. For details, refer
to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these
data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared.
Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring,
286
3. SETTING DATA,
B–61804E–2/05 SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
3.1 (1) Press the “DATA SET” soft key on the initial screen. The screen of
parameter and data setting will appear.
DISPLAY AND
(2) To the question, “NO. = ”, key in,
SETTING
NO. = 2 INPUT
and the setting data list screen will appear.

For system parameter and MTF, key in,
NO. = 1 INPUT
in this screen.
(3) The screen will change, and another “NO. =” will be questioned, so
key in,
NO. = 1 INPUT (System parameter)
or
NO. = 5 INPUT (MTF)
and the screen with a list of system parameter or MTF will appear.
(Function of the soft keys)
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . The cursor proceeds or retreats.
[SEARCH NO.] . . . . Used to select the setting number.
Key in the searching number and press this soft
key without pressing INPUT, to the question, and
the cursor moves to the number of the input
number.
If INPUT is pressed then, the data will be replaced.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . Pressed when all setting has ended.
[SAVE END] . . . . . . Press “SAVE END” to save the data in the
submemory.
287
3. SETTING DATA,
3.2
OUTPUT/INPUT AND
COLLATION
For details of operation, see CHAPTER IV.
288
3. SETTING DATA,
B–61804E–2/05 SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
3.3
FORMAT OF
PARAMETER TAPE
(1) Punch %, LF for the ISO code or ER, CR for the EIA code at the
beginning of the tape.
(2) After the End of Block code (LF for ISO code, CR for EIA code),
designate address N followed by a data number within 4 digits.
(3) Punch the data to be set following address P. The data must, of course,
correspond to the parameter number punched with address N.
When many pieces of data are set for machine tool file parameter,
divide the data by “,”.
Example: N2000 P0300, 0104, ...
(4) Punch the End of Block code.
Repeat (b), (c) and (d) as required. The head of one block must be the
data number following address N.
(5) Finally, punch LF, % for the ISO code or CR, ER, for the EIA code.
When this code is read, data input from the tape is finished.
Parameters undesignated on the tape do not change even when the
parameter setting tape is read.
289
3. SETTING DATA,
3.4 (1) Data format error

ERROR DISPLAY The data format error is displayed when a parameter tape with an
erroneous format is read.
MESSAGE
(2) Collate error

When an error occurs in parameter collation, the data in the main
memory and the input data are displayed.
NOTE
When a data format error or the collate error occurs, the
system stops as shown above. Press the software key
“END” to interrupt processing, and the software key
“CONTINUE” to continue processing.
When a data format error occurs, the corresponding block
is ignored.
(3) TV error
After reading a tape completely, the following error is displayed if
there is TV error on that tape.
TV ERROR INCLUDING
290
VI. AUXILIARY JOBS
B–61804E–2/05 AUXILIARY JOBS
Press the “AUXILIARY” soft key in the initial screen, and the following
special process is performed.
(1) Submemory initialization
(2) Conversion of unit systems
(3) Changing the number of registered tools
113
1. SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION AUXILIARY JOBS B–61804E–2/05
1 SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION
To the question, “REQUEST =”, key in:
REQUEST = CFINT INPUT
To the question;
EXECUTION = OK <, NO OF REGISTERABLE FILES>

EXECUTION =
Key in,
EXECUTION = 1 INPUT
and the submemory can be initialized.

(1) The system parameters, MTF, and setting data on main memory are
registered in the system area.
(2) The FANUC standard data is registered in the system area.
(3) Drawing data and initial screen data are cleared.
(4) The file area is cleared.
When the power is turned on while the SP key is held down, the following
processing is performed to initialize submemory:
(1) The FANUC standard system parameters, MTF, tool data, and setting
data are registered in the system area.
(2) Drawing data and initial screen data are cleared.
(3) The file area is cleared.
Submemory must be initialized when:
(1) Submemory has been replaced
(2) Submemory has been added
(3) The submemory backup battery is replaced while the NC’s power is
off.
114
2. CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT
B–61804E–2/05 AUXILIARY JOBS (MM/INCH)
2 CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT (MM/INCH)
WARNING
When the system of units is changed, the system
parameters and MTF data may also be changed. If these
In Symbolic FAPT, the input data unit is coincide with the output NC tape
unit. If a blank dimension or a parts figure was input in the mm unit, for
example, all other data should be input in the mm unit. Also, an NC tape
is output in the mm unit.
However, if a drawing is written in the inch unit and employed in a mm
system machine tool, you can prepare an inch unit NC tape by the
Symbolic FAPT function and operate the machine tool by the inch/metric
conversion function of the NC machine tool.
When the metric system is converted to the inch system or the opposite
conversion is done, answer to request of “REQUEST =” as follows.
REQUEST = UNIT _T _M “INPUT”
The command in can be omitted.
1) REQUEST = UNIT “INPUT”
When entering like the above–mentioned, the unit system of
system parameter and MTF changes. (As the present
specification).
For details, see (e) in (2) “Notes on conversion of unit.”
2) REQUEST = UNIT_T “INPUT”
When entering like the above–mentioned, as the system supposes
that the unit system of the current tooling information is different
from the current unit system, it is converted to the current unit
system.
3) REQUEST = UNIT_M “INPUT”
When entering like the above–mentioned, as the system supposes
that the unit system of the current material data is different from the
current unit system, it is converted to the current unit system.
4) REQUEST = UNIT_T_M “INPUT”
When entering like the above–mentioned, tooling information and
material data are converted.
115
(MM/INCH) AUXILIARY JOBS B–61804E–2/05
(1) Data to be converted

The object of the conversion is data on the main memory. Transfer the
data stored in sub–memory to main memory, convert and restore in
sub–memory.
(a) System parameters
Description data separated miri specification from inch
specification in “System parameter list.”
(b) MTF
Description data separated miri specification from inch
specification in “Machine file list.”
(c) Tooling information
List of converted data
Drilling tool
1. Drill diameter DD (mm) ´ (inch)
2. Fixing position XS (mm) ´ (inch)
ZS (mm) ´ (inch)
General purpose tool
1. Nose radius RN (mm) ´ (inch)
2. Imaginary tool nose position XN (mm) ´ (inch)
ZN (mm) ´ (inch)
3. Tool nose width WN (mm) ´ (inch)
4. Fixing position XS (mm) ´ (inch)
ZS (mm) ´ (inch)
In the case of milling tool
1. Tool diameter DT (mm) ´ (inch)
2. Cutting diameter DS (mm) ´ (inch)
3. Cutter length LT (mm) ´ (inch)
4. Bite length LE (mm) ´ (inch)
5. Pitch PT (mm) ´ (inch)
6. Installation position XS (mm) ´ (inch)
ZS (mm) ´ (inch)
(d) Material data
List of converted data
In the case of turning condition
1. Center drill Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
Feed amount 1 (mm/rev)´ (inch/rev)
2. Drill Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
3. Rough machining Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
Cutting depth (mm) ´ (inch)
4. Semi–finish Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
116
5. Finish Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)

6. Grooving Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
7. Threading Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
Cutting depth (mm) ´ (inch)
In the case of conditions for milling machining
1. Center drill Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
Feed amount FT (mm/rev)´ (inch/rev)
2. Drill Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
3. Tap Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
4. End mill Cutting speed (m/min) ´ (feet/min)
Feed amount FR (mm/rev)´ (inch/rev)
(2) Cautions regarding to system changing
(a) Whenever a family program is input, the system unit system must
be set to the unit system at the output time without fail before
executing the program input.
(b) If the NC machine tool does not provide the inch/metric conversion
function, enter dimensional values by utilizing the arithmetic
function of Symbolic FAPT.
For processing a drawing in the inch unit by using a metric system
output NC tape, for example, enter data as follows.
d * 25.4 “INPUT” (d: Dimension described in drawing)
(c) For the surface speed in the inch system, give data in the feet/min
unit.
(d) There is no method to know in which unit system the data in the
main memory was prepared. Therefore, operator must manage the
unit system responsibly. For instance, when the tooling
information and the material data made in the metric system are
converted to the inch system, do as follows after setting system
parameter and MTF to the inch system.
Furthermore, be careful when instructing repeatedly as follows
because the data changed in inch unit is converted to the data in inch
unit repeatedly.
Moreover, display, confirm and modify correctly the data after
conversion because the error accumulates if the data converted
repeatedly.
Besides, output to the sub–memory or external devices the data of
which the unit system converted. When the power supply is cut,
the data on the main memory disappears.
117
(e) To convert the input units of the system parameters and MTF
parameters, select the special data for metric input or inch input in
sub–memory.
The details of the data conversion depend on the operation, as

described below:
(1) Normal power–on
118
(2) Registration (SAVE)
(3) UNIT command
119
(4) Power–on by pressing the BS key
(5) Specifying CFINT
If metric input is currently selected, the operation indicated by the

unbroken lines is executed.
If inch input is currently selected, the operation indicated by the dotted
lines is executed.
120
3. CHANGING THE NUMBER OF
B–61804E–2/05 AUXILIARY JOBS REISTERED TOOLS
3 CHANGING THE NUMBER OF REGISTERED TOOLS
When the C–axis option or Y–axis option is provided, the ratio of the
registered number of turning tools to milling tools can be changed.
(1) Changing the number of tools
In response to “REQUEST =”, enter TFING “INPUT.”
Then, enter the ratio of turning tools to C–axis tools. The current ratio
is displayed. To leave it unchanged, enter 0. In response to
“EXECUTION =”, enter a value from 0 to 4. (If only INPUT is
entered, the system does not accept it.)
INITIALIZE TOOL DATA
CURRENT TOOL MAP: 1 (200–100)
EXECUTION = (1:200–100 2:150–150 3:100–200 4:50–250 0:NO)
If 0 is entered, the current setting is left unchanged.
If 1 is entered, 200 turning tools and 100 milling tools are registered (2:1).
The number of turning tools and the number of milling tools in both
main memory and submemory are initialized to the standard data of
the new ratio.
In each case above the total number of registered tools is 300.
(2) Tool data compatibility
Tool data tape punched out before the tool ratio is changed can be read
after the tool ratio is changed. In this case, however, the data for the
turning tools and milling tools is read starting at the beginning of the
respective data. So, note that some data in ignored.
Example :
When tool data is output, data for any tool is not ignored, as usual.
121
VII. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND
PRECAUTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND 1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
B–61804E–2/05 PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT Symbolic FAPT
1 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT
19
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND
Symbolic FAPT PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT B–61804E–2/05
1.1 When the same data like standard surface roughness, for example, is input
in the FAPT execution process, you can preset these data and execute
SKIP FUNCTION OF FAPT, while skipping these preset pages during practical execution stage
PAGE AND of FAPT.
QUESTION You can skip the following questions.
(a) Question of standard surface roughness
(b) Question in drawing format
(c) Question of home position
(d) Question of index position
(e) Question of machining start position
(f) Question of surface roughness
These pages can be set by system parameter. (To act (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) use
parameter No.9, for (f) use parameter No.10).
For skipping the page, observe the following procedure.
(1) Data setting of system parameter
Set the data for the pictures to be skipped to system parameters No.200
and Nos.205 to 213.
No.200: Drawing format
No.205: Standard surface roughness
Nos.206 to 209: Home position
Nos.210 to 213: Index position
(2) Designation of skip page (System parameter No.0009)
Respective bits of system parameter No.0009 correspond to the pages
to be skipped as follows.
If you want to skip a certain page, set “1” to the corresponding bit. Set
“0” to the corresponding bit, if you don’t want to skip the page.
Be sure to set “0” to the bits which don’t correspond to pages to be
skipped. Details of system parameter No.9.
0 0 0
Question of the index position

Vacant Vacant
(Caution 1) Question of the home position
Question of the machining start position
(Caution 2) (Caution 3)
Prompt relating to the Y–axis turret turning
position and machine zero point (Note)
Question of the drawing format
Question of the standard surface roughness
“1”: Corresponding page is skipped.

“0”: Corresponding page is not skipped.
20
CAUTION
1 This bit corresponds to the question for selecting materials,
but you cannot select the material in advance.
By setting “1” to this bit, you can skip this page while keeping
the material undefined.
2 When skipping the question of machining start position,
skipping is performed at every specified page of machining
start position.
Since the machining start point is determined by the turret
turning position and the tool mounting position, all data
about the turning position of turret and tool mounting
position must be set for skipping the page.
3 If the value of MTF parameter No.1055 (setting of turret
type) is set to 1 (X–axis reversible lathe), the page of the
machining start point is not skipped, because the system
asks you whether you want to reverse the X–axis sign on the
page of the machining start point in addition to the
machining start point, and you have to answer the question.
NOTE
This bit is effective if the Y–axis function is supported.
(3) Designation of skip (system parameter number 10)

It is required to input “Surface roughness” every time the figure
element symbol ( ´ ± etc.) is input in inputting the machining figure.
This question can be skipped partly or entirely.
Description of system parameter number 10
0 0 0
Entire surface roughness

Vacant
Vacant Surface roughness for C
Vacant Surface roughness for G
Surface roughness for N
Surface roughness for R
1: Skip the corresponding question
0: Do not skip the corresponding question
When the “Entire surface roughness” is set to 1, the setting of skip of

other surface roughness does not have any meaning. The standard
setting value is “00011110”. The question of surface roughness for
C/G/N/R is skipped.
21
1.2 The incremental designation becomes effective for part figure data input
such as the end point of a figure element and the center of a circular arc.
INCREMENTAL The start point of the figure element must be defined in any case.
DESIGNATION (1) Straight line
When the end point of a straight line having a definite start point is
input by the incremental value, you have only to input an increment
without any need of taking its sign into consideration, since the system
judges the arrow direction.
(Example)
End point DX = 10I

Z = 30I
or
End point DX = 30
Z = 30I
Assume that a lower rightward arrow was inserted at point A in the above
figure.
End point B is located in the minus (–) direction with reference to the start
point in both X and Z directions. Also, the radius value is input to X.
NOTE
It is rather troublesome to input an X value by the
incremental value in a case as shown in the above figure.
In such a case, the Z value only can be input by the
incremental value.
(2) Circular arc

The incremental value can be specified for inputting the end point and
center of the circular arc.
Unlike in a straight line, the end point direction as viewed from the
start point changes according to the length of circular arc, and its
direction cannot be determined automatically.
Accordingly, a signed numerical value must be input.
The sign is taken into consideration in the defined coordinate system.
(Example) (Example)
End point DX = 10I or 100 Center CDX = 13I

Z = –10I CZ = 17I
22
A signed numerical value must be input, unlike in the incremental

designation to a straight line.
(3) Incremental designation in continuous groove input
It is possible to perform incremental designation for both X and Z
directions. However, since the direction marked by an arrow is not
determined, it is necessary to consider the symbol.
(Example)
23
1.3 The input parts figure or tool path can be expanded or contracted in
display.
EXPANSION AND
CONTRACTION OF
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
1.3.1 The expansion or contraction question appears on CRT when the

Designation Method [DRAWNG RANGE] softkey is depressed.
For expanding or contracting a graphic display, specify two diagonal
corners of a desired display area by shifting the flickering cursor. It is also
possible to directly specify the area by coordinate value. This method will
be illustrated below.
The shadowed area in the left figure specified by the cursor is displayed
to meet the graphic display area (frame bounded by an dotted line in the
right figure specified on the CRT).
To restore original size, press the soft key [ORIGINAL] at the request for
expansion or contraction.
(1) Operation method
The operating method will be described, referring to the input of parts
figure (menu No.2).
(a) Depress [DRAWNG RANGE] key in the following graphic display
appearing when the entry of parts figure was completed.
24
(b) The question appearing at the lower part of CRT is replaced with
the following expansion/contraction question.
DESIGNATE THE DRAWING RANGE
MAXX = MAX (123.45/67.89)
MIN (0.0/0.0)
The cursor flickers at the coordinate position indicated by MAX on
the CRT concurrently with the above question.
By depressing the [CURSOR FORWRD] or [CURSOR BACK]
key, this cursor shifts in the X–axis direction.
[CURSOR FORWRD] . . . Upward
[CURSOR BACK] . . . . . . Downward
Depress INPUT key when the cursor has reached the specified
position on the X–axis.
(c) The question at the lower part of the CRT is replaced with “MAXZ
=”, and the cursor shifts in the Z–axis direction.
[CURSOR FORWRD] . . . Rightward
[CURSOR BACK] . . . . . . Leftward
The Z–axis position is determined by depressing the INPUT key.
(d) The question at the lower part of the CRT is replaced with “MINX
=”, and the cursor flickers at the coordinate position indicated by
MIN. (The cursor corresponding to MAX disappears.) Determine
the X–axis position by shifting the cursor in the same manner as in
step (b).
(e) The question is replaced with “MINZ =”. Determine the Z–axis
position by the same operation as in (c).
(f) The question is reset to “MAXX =” in (b), and the cursor flickers
at the coordinate position indicated by MAX. Shift the cursor, if
correction of the cursor position is necessary.
(g) When the [EXEC] key is depressed, the question returns to the
original “NO =”, and an expanded or contracted graphic display
appears in the graphic display area specified by the cursor
positions. The [EXEC] key is effective for all questions in (b) to
(e).
25
(2) Cautions on operation

(a) Calculate the magnification for expansion or contraction so that the
area specified by the cursor is limited within the following range.
When the figure of blank When the figure of blank

is long in the lateral direc- is long in the longitudinal
tion; direction.
A tool path exceeding the above frame is not erased in case of

expansion. Accordingly, the question may overlap a figure as the
case may be.
(b) If the cursor overshoots one end of the CRT when it is shifted, it
appears again from the opposite side.
(c) The coordinate values can be directly specified when the system
asks a question. The cursor shifts to the position corresponding to
the input coordinate values.
(The X coordinate value indicates a diameter value, while the Z
coordinate value is always positive in the right direction.)
(d) If you want to return an expanded or contracted graphic display to
its original size, depress ORIGINAL key.
(e) Since the tool path outside the graphic display area of CRT is also
processed in the expansion mode, it takes a long display time, if a
narrow areas is specified aimlessly. When KILL is depressed,
display operation is stopped.
(f) The cursor shifts 6.4 mm (standard), each time the cursor key is
depressed once. This move amount is changeable by using system
parameter No.0014.
The assignable is a multiplier of 1.6 mm inclusive.
26
1.4 By this function, the calculation of NC data can be stopped each block or
each process and the output data can be confirmed or an optional NC data
NC DATA OUTPUT BY can be inserted from the keyboard.
SINGLE STEP
WARNING
Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data,
thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
1.4.1 If the [SINGLE ON] is displayed when producing NC data, processing

Single Step of Block is stopped before outputting one block of NC data.
The contents of the block to be output are displayed in the second line as
viewed from the bottom of CRT screen.
The [SINGLE OFF] is displayed by depressing [SINGLE ON].
Also, the tool path is displayed when the block concerns the movement.
The following CRT screen shows the stopping state in the single step.
In this case, the following operation can be done.

(1) If the INPUT key only is depressed, data being displayed in the second
line as viewed from the bottom of CRT screen is output, and the
Symbolic FAPT returns to the execution to be ready for the next block.
(2) NC data can be output from the keyboard by optional blocks under this
condition. When the INPUT key only is depressed finally, the display
data in the second line as viewed from the bottom of CRT screen is
output.
(3) When DEL and INPUT keys are input, displayed data output can be
deleted.
(4) Input SP SP, INPUT keys for outputting EOB code only.
AS a result, a space and EOB are output.
27
1.4.2 When [PROC. ON] is displayed during the preparation of NC data, the
Single Step of Process NC data output can be stopped every machining process.
An optional data can be entered from the keyboard in the same manner
as in the single step of block. The [PROC. ON] and [SINGLE ON] are
different from each other as specified below.
[PROC. ON] . . . Single step in each process.
System parameter setting is required.
[SINGLE ON] . . Single step in each NC data block.
This key is always effective.
The operation after stop is identical in respective cases.
Parameter setting method
Set the stop position in each process to system parameter No.0049 to
No.0057, No.0310 to No.0314, and No.0410 to No.0414.
0 0 0 0 0
Process start
Just before approach
Just before return relief
When the value is 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC data output is not stopped.

When the value is 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC data output is stopped.
The stop position corresponds to the above setting as follows.
Start of process . . . . . . . . . NC data output is stopped after displaying

the first data (coordinate system setting G50
block usually) in the process.
Just before approach . . . . . NC data output is stopped after displaying
the first movement from the turret turning
position to the workpiece. A tool number
(T code) and spindle rotation command are
normally output before this block.
Just before return relief . . . NC data output is stopped just before the
tool returns to the turret turning position
after machining ends in the process.
28
Parameter numbers in each process are as specified below.

Parameter No. Process
0049 Bar feed process
0050 Center drill process
0051 Drill process
0052 Rough cutting process
0053 Semi–finish cutting process
0054 Finish cutting process
0055 Grooving process
0056 Threading process
0057 Cut off process
310 C–axis center drilling process
311 C–axis drilling process
312 C–axis tapping process
313 C–axis grooving process
314 C–axis cut off machining process
410 Y–axis center drilling process
411 Y–axis drilling process
412 Y–axis tapping process
413 Y–axis pattern process
414 Y–axis contouring process
29
1.5
RE–OUTPUT OF NC
WARNING
DATA BY EACH Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data,
PROCESS thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining
This function is provided to correct one process only (if required) and
output to NC data of the process only after preparing all processes.
(1) Specification method
(a) Selection of functions
Select menu No.4 “MACHINING DEFINITION” and the
following message will be displayed on the soft key.
NEW
CORRECTION
CORRECTION & OUTPUT
This function is selected by pressing “correction and output”.
(b) Selection of process
All processes already defined are displayed in the page next to the
specification of [correction and output]. Select a desired process
by cursor key, and depress [NEXT PAGE] or [INPUT] key.
(2) Processing
The system sequentially asks questions about the specified process
preparation processing by the above specification. The process
preparation is completed after corresponding correction as required.
After this process preparation, processing automatically proceeds to
prepare NC data normally.
30
(3) Warnings
WARNING
1 If NC requires a program number (by MTF setting,
No.1080), the program number in the output process is
displayed by the program number + corresponding process
number value. If a change of this number is desired, specify
a new number.
However, this number is not stored. It is, therefore,
necessary for correcting and outputting the same process
again to input a new number each time. If this function is
employed when NC data have not been prepared at all in
all processes, the program number always remains
undefined. Specify program No. each time in such a case.
2 Data in the preparation process being with the turret turning
position, and returns to the turning position.
3 If the subprogram format is used together, the subprogram
part only is output.
4 When using this function, must define the machining start
point.
31
1.6
OUTPUT IN MAIN
PROGRAM AND WARNING
SUBPROGRAM thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining
FORMAT with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
Output data from Symbolic FAPT can be output in main program and
subprogram formats by setting 2 to MTF No.1080.
(1) Output format
A main program is output first, and then, a subprogram called by the
main program is output. Subprograms are formed every input process,
and the main program sequentially calls these subprograms. Program
numbers with address 0 at the start of subprograms are sequentially
output one by one from main program number (operator input).
(Examples)
%
O0123
N0001M98P0124
M98P0125 Main program
M98P0126
M30
O0124
N0002G50X200000Z200000S20000
.
.
. First process subprogram
.
M01
M05
/M99
M30
O0125
N0003G50X200000Z200000S2000
.
. Second process subprogram
.
.
M30
O0126
N0004G50X200000Z200000S2000
.
.
.
. Third process subprogram
T0100
M01
M05
/M99
M30
%
32
(2) No.2000’s parameters referred

2100: Referred at the start of main program
2101: Referred at the end of main program
2102: Referred at the start of subprogram
FEED, 0_, etc.
2103: Referred at the end of subprogram
M99, M30, FEED, etc.
2104: Subprogram call block
M98P_
Initialization of above parameters.
2100: 0603 0004

program ;
number
2101: 0703 0004 0505 0004
Final Program
T code ; end M30 ;
output
2102: 0100 0603 0004
1x20: Program ;
feed number
2103: 0205 0004 0805 0204 0505 0004 0100
Spindle Sub– Block M30 1*20:
stop ; program end ; feed
M50 return with/
M code (optional
skip)
2104: 0705 0803 0004

Sub– P code
program ;
call
(3) No.2000’s parameters to be changed resultantly

Parameter
Difference between new setting and standard setting
No.
0300 0104 0004 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
2000
Program number is not output (Program start).
0104 0004 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
2001
M05, final T code, M30, and feed output are discontinued, and %* only is output (at the end of program).
2002 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

to
2008 Feed output is discontinued (at the start of process).
2009 0003 0004 0000 0000 0000 0000

to
2015 M01 output is discontinued (at the end of process).
In the case of 4–axis lathe specification, NC data of main

program/sub–program format can not be created.
33
1.7
S CODE OUTPUT
WARNING
When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining
(1) Setting of parameters

It is required to set the following parameters for outputting the S code.
1) MTF
Parameter
Description
number
Processing method for constant surface speed control

1 or 0: NC unit without constant surface speed control function
1085 1 or 3: NC unit with constant surface speed control function
See the following “System parameters” for the difference between
1 and 3.
1102 Number of S code digits
1110 Range selection M code

to Set it as needed.
1113
1114 Spindle maximum/minimum speed Set it as needed. However,

to always set it if data is set to 1110 – 1113.
1121
Change rate of S code output

Change rate = (S code output this time – S code output last
1122 time)/S code output last time
If the change rate calculated within the system exceeds the value
of parameter number 1122, the obtained S code is output.
2) System parameters
Parameter
Description
number
Bit 0 = 0: Constant surface speed control function is not used

1: Constant surface speed control function is used
Relationship with the MTF 1085:
(1) When bit 0 is equal to 0:
0107 The G97 is output if the parameter number 1085 is equal to 1
to or 3.
0115 (2) When bit 0 is equal to 1:
The G96 is output if the parameter number 1085 is equal to 1.
The G97 is output if the parameter number 1085 is equal to 3.
This parameter is valid only when the MTF 1085 is equal to 1
or 3.
Spindle maximum speed

0128 If the S code value calculated by the system exceeds the value of
parameter number 128, it is clamped by this value.
34
(2) Calculation of S code

The speed calculated by the system is set as follows:
S =[Smin + Smax]/2
= KV = KV
= + /2
= 2πXmax = 2πXmin
In the case of mm system: K = 1000

In the case of inch system: K = 12
V: cutting speed
X max, X min: radius value
35
1.8
SIMULTANEOUS 1
WARNING
AXIS MOVEMENT IN When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
APPROACH AND value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining
RETURN RELIEF with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
The tool can be moved simultaneously 1 axis in approach and return relief
by parameter setting for machine tool file (MTF). (In general, it is
simultaneous 2 axis movement.) And, the moving sequence can be set
when the simultaneous 1 axis movement in approach and return relief is
specified.
1.8.1 (1) Specification of simultaneous 1 axis movement

Setting of Parameters Set “1” to the parameter No.0107 to 0115 corresponding to each
process.
(2) Specification of moving sequence
If the simultaneous 1 axis movement is specified in the parameter
No.0107 to 0115, the MTF No.1084 is referred. The moving sequence
can be set to the MTF No.1084.
Parameter
Description
No.
1084 Moving sequence of simultaneous one axis

(Effective when the simultaneous one axis is specified by system
parameters No.0107 to 0115.)
0: X–axis always moves first during approach.
Z–axis always moves first during return relief
1: Inner diameter, and face
Approach . . . . . . . . Z–axis X–axis
Return relief . . . . . . X–axis Z–axis
Outer diameter
Approach . . . . . . . . X–axis Z–axis
Return relief . . . . . . Z–axis X–axis
2: Reverse sequence as compared with set value 1
(standard setting)
3: Z–axis always moves first during approach.
36
1.8.2 For the NC data format in simultaneous 1 axis movement such as M code,
NC Data Format the parameters with parameter No.2000’s are referred.
Approach
First motion (Motion to X or Z axis) . . . . . . . . . . . 2031
Second motion (Motion to Z or X axis) . . . . . . . . . 2032
Return relief
First motion (Motion to X or Z axis) . . . . . . . . . . . 2033
Second motion (Motion to Z or X axis) . . . . . . . . . 2034
WARNING
1 Parameter 2018 (approach) or 2019 (return relief) is
referred to when 2 axes at a time control is specified.
2 Initialize parameter for 2031 and 2032 is equal to the
parameter for 2018.
Initialize parameter for 2033 and 2034 is equal to the
parameter for 2019.
3 An axis, to which data are output, is determined by MTF
1084 parameter.
The following figure shows the reference timing of each parameter.
Approach
Relief
As the result of decomposing the moving of approach or return relief, if

there is no movement X or Z axis (that is, tool changing point and one axis
coordinate value of approach point is corresponding), the NC data output
to the axis movement depends on parameter No.1002.
Parameter Standard
Meaning
No. value
1002 0: MTF 2000’s numbers are not referred 0

to when no movement is made for
approach or return relief.
1: MTF 2000’s numbers are referred to
even if no movement is done.
37
Example:
If the axes are decomposed in the order of X axis and Z axis in one axis
at a time control when the X axis only moves for return relief, the X
axis does not move in the 2nd motion, but it moves in the 1st motion
only.
When MTF 1002 = 0
Tool If MTF 2033 and 2034 are set as shown

changing in example below:
point G28.00; is output
MTF 2033
When MTF 1002 = 1
Tool
changing
point
MTF 2034
MTF 2033
MTF
parameter Setting value
No.
4102 DD01 CC01 0004

2033
G28 U0 W0 EOB
4102 DD01 CC01 0004

2034
G28 U0 W0 EOB
When the axes were decomposed in the order of X axis and Z axis in one
axis at a time, the G code and setting values are output as follows.
G28 U0;
G28 W0;
When the axes are decomposed in the order of Z axis and X axis in one
axis at a time, the G code and setting values are output as follows.
G28 W0;
G28 U0;
38
1.9
UTILIZATION OF
WARNING
DIRECT INPUT OF When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
TOOL OFFSET value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining
VALUE with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
The NC data, which are fitted for operation utilizing the direct input of
tool offset value, can be output.
In this case, the coordinates of home position must be set. If this is not
set, the block for positioning to the index position will not be output.
(1) NC Tape format
The following NC data for direct input of tool offset value is available,
if “00000101” is set to MTF 1060 and settings of MTF 2000s is changed.
However, if reference point return is not required, the data correction for
MTF 2000 and 2001 is not necessary.
O1234
G28U0 }Reference point return
G28W0
G50S2000 Coordinate system setting is not output.
G00T0100 }Turret
G00X200Z200T010M08 }Approach, Tool offset start, Coolant on
.
.
.
.
G00X200Z200T0100M09 }Return, relief, Tool offset cancel,
Coolant off
G28U0W0 }Reference point return
M30
39
(2) Setting of parameters (example)

Setting of MTF No.2000, 2001, 2016, 2018 and 2019 is changed as
follows.
Number Set value
0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 4102, 1107, 0004, 4107, 0107, 0004
2000 (“EOR EOB O EOB G28 U0 EOB G28 W0 EOB” is output at
reader part of NC data.)
0205, 0004, 4102, 1107, 0107, 0004, 0505, 0004, 0104, 0004
2001 (“M05 EOB G28 U0 W0 EOB M30 EOB EOR EOB” is output at the
trailer part of NC data.)
4402, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000

(“G50 s EOB G00 T EOB” is output at the start of process. In
2016 standard setting, G50X Z is output. In this setting, the
independent G50 block is output at the start of a process which
does not employ any constant surface speed control.
5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0103, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
2018 (“G90 G00 X Z T0101 M08 EOB” is output at the time of
Approach.)
5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0003, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
2019
(“G90 G00 X Z T0100 M09 EOB” is output at return relief.)
(3) Warnings
WARNING
1 For MTF No.2000 and 2001, maximum 10 parameters only
can be set, respectively. In case of a setting sample in (2),
neither feed at the start and end of a program not T code
(MTF No.1106) at the end of the program is output, although
these feed and code are output in standard setting.
2 If the setting is changed as the following example, the
approach and return relief should be specified
simultaneous two axes. And the system parameter
No.0107 to 0115 should be set so as to output tool offset
cancel.
System parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0107 to 0115 0 0 1
Bit 2 Tool offset cancel is output.

Bit 3, 4 Approach and return relief should be specified simultaneous 2 axes.
40
1.10
APPLICATION FOR
WARNING
NC CHASER LATHE When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
The functions for preparing NC tape for chaser lathe are provided. The
major functions are as follows.
1) It is no longer necessary to define the tool by reversing it, if the tool
is at the rear side.
2) The tool can be replaced by drawing the Z axis only to the specified
position. The above functions will be detailed below.
(1) Setting of parameters
Set the following MTF parameters
No.1051 (Turret position) . . . . . . . Set whether the standard tool is
positioned on this side or on the
counter side.
No.1055 (Turret type) = 1
No.1084 (Moving sequence of simultaneous one axis)
. . . . . . . Set the moving sequence of return
relief and approach.
No.1105 (Number of digits of T code and offset number)
. . . . . . . Set 0 if T code is not divided into
tool number and offset number.
Others, the MTF and system parameter is set according to the needs.
(2) Specifications of index position
The X value is not specified, but the Z axis only is specified at the index
position. The tool can be retracted only in Z axis at tool change, by
this specification.
(3) Setting of tool data
The specification method of data differs according to whether 1 or 2
is specified or 3 or 4 is specified as the drawing format. This concept
is the same as in ordinary turret lathes.
(i) When 1 or 2 is specified;
The drawing format is the same as in the case that the opposite side
is specified as +X. This will be explained, referring to the outer
diameter cutting, as an example.
41
Assuming that cutting edge angle (AC), tool nose angle (AN), mounting
angle (AS), and reference point are determined out of tool data as shown
in the above figure, the mounting position (XS, ZS) is as shown in the
following table.
(Example)
AC AN AS XS ZS
T01 –85 80 180 + +
T02 85 –80 180 – +
(ii)When 3 or 4 is specified;
42
The following table shows the same example.

AC AN AS XS ZS
T01 85 –80 180 – +
T02 –85 80 180 + +
(4) Question about cutting start position

The cutting start position is automatically calculated from the index
position, XS and ZS values are displayed. Since the X value at the
index position is undefined, the X value at the cutting start position
also remains undefined. Specify the cutting start position X in the first
process without fail. The cutting start position X in the second and
higher processes are kept undefined. Thus, the tool is replaced by
pulling the Z axis only to the index position without returning the tool
to the index position.
(5) Inversion of X coordinate signs
The system asks whether the X coordinate signs are inverted or not in
the same way as in setting the cutting start position. Input 1 for the tool
which cuts on the –X side. In the example shown in the above figure,
T02 corresponds to drawing format 1 or 2, while T01 corresponds to
drawing format 3 or 4.
(6) Explanation by definite example
The execution method will be described definitely, referring to an
example.
43
(a) Define the parts figure on the X–axis plus side.

(b) Set the turret position to (ZI) when T01 is the reference tool.
(Undefined for value of X axis).
(c) Define the rough cutting process of outer diameter (Tool: T01)
Input INPUT only when the system asks you the following question
after setting the machining start position in X and Z axis direction.
INVERT X COORDINATE?
INVX =_ (1: YES 0: NO)
Define the machining area of outer diameter.
(d) Roughly cut the inner diameter on the X–axis minus side by using
T02 tool. Don’t set the value to the question for X–axis machining
start position.
Input 1 INPUT to indicate that the workpiece is cut on the X–axis
minus side during this process to the question as same as (c).
Define the machining area of inner diameter.
(e) Prepare NC data.
(7) Warnings and Notes
WARNING
1 Be careful with the setting of the spindle rotating directions
of system parameters No.0107 to 0115.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
not used 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
Spindle rotating direction when cutting is done

on X–axis plus side
Spindle rotating direction when cutting is made

on X–axis minus side
Set values mean as follows.
0 : M code No.MTF1130 (standard M03)
1 : M code No.MTF1131 (standard M04)
2 The results of answering the system question about the

X–axis inversion are as specified below according to the
setting of MTF No.1051 (turret position).
MTF No.1051 should be interpreted ”whether the reference
tool is positioned on the X–axis plus side or on the X–axis
minus side”.
Answer to question of X–axis inversion

MTF No.1051
setting
0: No 1: Yes
Output on X–axis plus Output on X–axis minus

1
(+) side (–) side
Output on X–axis minus Output on X–axis plus

–1
(–) side (+) side
44
NOTE
1 If, on the tool data setting screen for machining definition,
the answer to the prompt asking whether to invert the
X–axis is set to 1 (yes), a machining area is not
automatically set, even when the automatic process
determination option is enabled. The cutting direction and
dividing direction should be defined manually.
2 The automatic process determination function cannot be
used to define a process in which the X–axis is to be
inverted. (Using the automatic process determination
function generates those processes in which the X–axis is
not to be inverted.)
3 On menu 5, the [ANIMATION] soft key does not appear.
When an NC data is prepared, only those machining
operations indicated by line drawing are shown.
4 In 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II, gradation display is
disabled for animated simulation on menu 6.
5 In the following cases, the prompt asking whether to invert
the X–axis does not appear on the tool data setting screen
for machining definition.
(1)When C– or Y–axis machining is specified
(2)When the back machining function is set
(3)When the workpiece inversion function is set
45
1.11 The interference check between tool shape and machining shape or
between tool path and machining shape is strengthened in Symbolic
INTERFERENCE FAPT TURN.
CHECK
1.11.1
Interference Check by
Tool Shape and
Machining Shape
A pocket may be produced, depending upon parts figure and tool figure
as illustrated above. In such a case, designate the area to cut such a pocket
only by using a reversible tool.
NOTE
For actual operations, refer to item 3.4.7 of chapter III.
1.11.2 A function of checking the interference of tool and blank in approach and
Interference Check in return relief movement during cutting process of workpieces is provided.
The interference is basically examined according to whether the straight
Approach and Return line connecting from the present position to the next position intersects
relief the blank or not during the approach or return relief movement.
For cutting the area (B) in the above figure, convexed part (A) must be
avoided, otherwise the interference occurs. Accordingly, the return relief
movement is done to the position were a clearance margin is added to the
blank as illustrated.
46
If the tool moves outside the blank like in the return motion to the turret
position, the system examines the interference up to the position of the
maximum blank size before moving the tool. Then, the movement of the
turret position is output.

If the tool directly moves to the turret position from point (A), the tool
interferes with the convexed part.
In such a case, the tool moves to the turret position after it has retreated
up to point (B) at the blank end.
Whether the “return relief” movement is done on the simultaneous two
axes or one axis only is determined by system parameters No.0107 to
0115.
It should be carefully noted that the tool referred to here is defined as nose
R (nose circle) only, and it does not include any other tools.
In other words, the system checks the tool nose angle, but it does not check
such an interference as the blank touches a shank or other part other than
specified above in the following figure, for example.
Such a conditions as
illustrated here is not
checked.
(The nose angle
and nose R are set
to a correct cutting
position.)
WARNING
In case of threading tool the system checks the interference
by the nose R specified by the virtual tool position.
If an undesirable tool path is output, specify the opposite
nose R by the virtual tool position.
47
1.11.3 (1) Definition of grooving tool

Grooving when the The grooving tool is checked to see if twice the tool nose radius R is
Tool Width and Groove not more than the tool width. If RN x 2 WN, it is treated as an error.
Width are the Same
(2) Interference check during approach

If a wall of a groove is extended when tool width = groove width, the
specification of cutting area is the same in the following examples
(part (A) and (B)).
48
(3) Dimensional check of the tool width and groove width at groove inlet
The tool width and groove width are checked at the groove inlet to see
if groove inlet width > tool width. If this relation is not satisfied, an
alarm is issued as an error. This dimensional check does not apply to
the innermost of the groove.
The dimensional check as illustrated here is not done.

Be careful since the opposite side of the cutting edge
causes interference.
1.11.4 If an inner diameter contains a convexed part halfway, it cannot be

Approach and Relief to machined because of the interference with the convexed part during
approach and return relief.
Inner Diameter It is possible to solve the interference by the simultaneous 1 axis
movement. (For details, refer to Sec. 1.8.)
49
1.12 The user–specific figures and characters can be displayed on the initial
screen. In addition, the region within a closed curve can be filled in.
INITIAL SCREEN This function is enabled when bit 3 of system parameter No.708 is 1.
DISPLAY FUNCTION
System parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
708
Bit 3 0 : This function is not used.

1 : This function is used.
1.12.1
Screen Flow
50
1.12.2 Enter 18 “INPUT” on the SYSTEM DATA SETTING &

Setting Initial Screen OUTPUT/INPUT screen. Then, the screen for setting initial screen
display data appears. On this screen, set screen display data using
Display Data appropriate G codes.
Up to 432 lines can be set. If an attempt is made to set data beyond 432
lines, an alarm is issued.
(1) Coordinates
Coordinates are represented in two ways: Dot–based representation,
and character–based representation.
D Dot–based Character–based
When characters are displayed, they are input at coordinates

corresponding to the character positions on the 14–inch CRT (screen)
(27 lines by 74 columns) (figure above). Characters can be
displayed anywhere within the screen area (24 lines by 64 columns)
except in the right NC display area and soft key display area at the
bottom. Thus, characters can be displayed at the following
coordinates:
First line: Character addresses 0 to 63
Second line: Character addresses 74 to 137
Third line: Character addresses 148 to 211
Fourth line: Character addresses 222 to 285
Fifth line: Character addresses 296 to 359
Sixth line: Character addresses 370 to 433
Seventh line: Character addresses 444 to 507
Eighth line: Character addresses 518 to 581
Ninth line: Character addresses 592 to 655
10th line: Character addresses 666 to 729
21st line: Character addresses 1480 to 1543
51
22nd line: Character addresses 1554 to 1617

23rd line: Character addresses 1628 to 1691
(2) G codes for displaying figures
G code Function Argument G code type
G01 Draws a straight line. X, Y Continuous–state
G02 Draws an arc clockwise. X, Y, I, J Continuous–state
G03 Draws an arc X, Y, I, J Continuous–state

counterclockwise.
G204 Displays a rectangular frame. X, Y Single–shot
G206 Fill command. X, Y Single–shot
G240 Specifies a color. P Single–shot
G242 Sets a drawing start point. X, Y Single–shot
G243 Displays a character string. P, Character string Single–shot
G244 Specifies a line type. P Single–shot
G245 Character string display P, Character string Continuous–state

mode.
G246 Cancels the character string Single–shot

display mode.
When these G codes and arguments are specified, no space must be

inserted.
1) G01 Draws a straight line.
G01X_Y_;
(Specify X and Y in incremental mode.)
X: –512 to 512, dot–based
Y: –384 to 384, dot–based
NOTE
An argument can be omitted. If an argument is omitted, it
is assumed to be 0. Note that, however, the X and Y
arguments cannot be omitted at the same time.
2) G02 Draws an arc clockwise.

G03 Draws an arc counterclockwise
G02/G03X_Y_I_J_;
(Specify X, Y, I, and J in incremental mode.)
X, I: –512 to 512, dot–based
Y, J: –384 to 384, dot–based
NOTE
An argument can be omitted. If an argument is omitted, it
is assumed to be 0. Note that, however, the X and Y
arguments cannot be omitted at the same time.
52
3) G204 Displays a rectangular frame.

G204X_Y_;
Specify a rectangular frame with

incremental values relative to the
current position.
NOTE
The current position remains unchanged after a rectangular
frame is drawn.
4) G206 Fill command

G206X_Y_;
With this command, the area enclosed in a closed curve, including
(X, Y), can be filled in. (X, Y) must be located inside the curve.
If (X, Y) lies on the curve, the area cannot be filled in.
Example :
G01X__ Y__ ;
.
Draws a closed curve.
.
.
G02X__ Y__ ; Fills in the area enclosed in the closed curve.
G206X__ Y__ ;
The same color must be used

for the boundary and the inside.
53
NOTE
1 If X or Y is not specified, the current coordinates are
assumed.
2 After the area is filled in, the coordinates immediately before
the specification of G206 are displayed again.
3 The area is filled in with the last color specified.
5) G240 Specifies a color.

G240P_;
Specifies the color of line segments and character strings. If a
negative value is specified for P, characters are displayed in reverse
video.
P = 1: Red, = 2: Green, = 3: Yellow, = 4: Blue,
= 5: Purple, = 6: Light blue, = 7: White
6) G242 Specifies a drawing start point.
G242X_Y_;
Specify a drawing start point with absolute values in the dot
coordinate system.
The next drawing starts at the specified point.
X: 0 to 512, dot–based
Y: 0 to 384, dot–based
7) G243 Displays a character string.
G243P_, ;
Character string (alphanumerics, –, .)
P: Addresses 0 to 1997 at which the character string is to be
displayed
8) G244 Specifies a line type.
G244P_;
Specifies the line type of the straight line or arc to be drawn.
P= 0: Solid line
1: Dotted line
2: Dot–and–dash line
3: Double–dot–and–dash line
9) G245 Enters the character string display mode.
G246 Cancels the character string display mode.
G245 is the continuous–state form of the character string display
command (G243).
G245P_ , Character string ;
P_ , Character string ; Character string display mode
P_ , Character string ;
G246 ;
54
NOTE
1 Be sure to specify G246 in a separate block.
2 G codes other than G240 must not be placed between the
G245 and G246 blocks.
G245P_ , ;
G01X_Y_,_ ; This specification is illegal.
G246 ;
3 G240 (color specification) can be specified between the
G245 and G246 blocks.
G245P_ , ABC ;
G240P_ ; Changes the color of characters
P_ , XYZ ; (XYZ).
G246 ;
4 The following specification is permitted:
G245P_ , ABC;
P_ ;
A character string (ABC) is displayed repeatedly.
(3) Soft keys

The meanings of the soft keys displayed on the screen are as follows:
“CHECK” . . . . . Checks set data. If no error is found, the drawing
screen is displayed for drawing operation.
“NEW” . . . . . . . Pressed when new data is created. If this soft key is
pressed, and the “END” soft key is pressed with no
data entered, the previous data is maintained.
“DELETE” . . . . Deletes the line indicated by the cursor. To erase all
the data, use this soft key, and delete data line by line.
“INSERT” . . . . . Inserts entered data to just above the line indicated by
the cursor. If the keyin buffer line contains no data,
nothing occurs when this soft key is pressed.
“PAGE ´” . . . . . Displays the previous page.
“PAGE ±” . . . . . Displays the next page. There are a maximum of 12
pages.
“CURSOR ´” . . . Moves the cursor backward.
“CURSOR ±” . . . Moves the cursor foreward.
“END” . . . . . . . . Redisplays the SYSTEM DATA SETTING &
OUTPUT/INPUT screen.
1.12.3 When the “CHECK” soft key is pressed on the data setting screen, the
Check Screen drawing screen appears unless any error is found. On this screen, the user
can check the drawing to see if the desired picture is obtained.
The meaning of the soft key displayed on this screen is as follows:
“EDIT SCREEN” Returns the display to the previous edit screen. This
soft key is pressed when the display contents need to be corrected.
55
1.12.4 If entered data is erroneous, one of the following error massages appears:
Error Messages (1) G CODE IS ILLEGAL
Example 1: A G code that cannot be used is specified.
G00X100Y200;
Example 2: A space is placed before a G code.
G01X200;
Space
(2) ILLEGAL DATA FORMAT
Example 1: G code contains a space.
G242X 100Y200;
G242 X100Y200;
Example 2: Decimal point is set in G code.
G242X100.Y200;
Example 3: G code contains more than one sign.
G242X+–100;
Example 4: Arguments are specified in reverse order.
G242Y200X100;
Example 5: An argument is omitted.
G245;
Example 6: An argument that cannot be used is specified.
G204X100Y200P5;
Example 7: An argument value exceeds the maximum.
G204X1234;
G243P2038, ;
When the “INPUT” key is pressed, error checking is performed.
(3) DRAWING IMPOSSIBLE
Example 1: A G code other than G240 is specified between G245 and
G246.
G245;
G01X100; Illegal
G246;
Example 2: G246 is specified alone, without G245.
When the “CHECK” soft key is pressed, these errors are detected.
If an error occurs, the cursor blinks on the illegal line.
(4) NO DATA
If there is no drawing data, this error message appears when the
“CHECK” soft key is pressed.
(5) DATA AREA OVERFLOW
Up to 432 lines of data can be set on the initial screen display data
setting screen. If an attempt is made to insert data beyond 432 lines,
this message appears.
(6) TOO MANY GRAPHIC SPECIFICATIONS
If the work area provided for graphic display overflows, this message
appears.
(7) TOO MANY CHARACTERS
If the work area provided for character display overflows, this message
appears.
56
1.12.5 The following system parameters are provided for this function:
System Parameters (1) System parameter No.670
Explanation: Specifies the color in which input data is to be
displayed on the data setting screen.
1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple,
6: Light blue, 7: White
(2) System parameter No.708
Explanation: To use this function, set bit 3 to ‘1’.
57
1.13
OUTPUTTING NC
DATA IN THE WARNING
The initial values in the MTF (machine tool file) listed below
FS15T/16T FORMAT are different from those used for a production run. Actual
setting values vary with the machine. For details, refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data
values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
For NC data with different formats between the 15T and the 16T, the
values in the following MTF machine file and function tables are
modified before output as NC data.
Only FS16T format NC data can be output for 5700 series of 16–T CAP
II.
1.13.1 (1) Machine file (MTF Nos. in the range 1000 to 1999)
MTF Setting
Parameter 16T/TT 15TFB/TTFB

Format Description
No initial value setting
1262 Integer G code to return to the initial point (*1) –1 –1
1350 Integer Miscellaneous function M code (*2) for rigid tapping 29 –1

preparation
1360 Real Drilling cycle dwell off, front 83. 81.

number
1361 Real Drilling cycle dwell off, side 87. 81.

number
1362 Real Drilling cycle dwell on, front 83. 82.

number
1363 Real Drilling cycle dwell on, side 87. 82.

number
1364 Real Peck drilling cycle (machining type: 3), front 83. 83.
number
1365 Real Real number Peck drilling cycle (machining type: 3), 87. 83.
number side
58
Parameter 16T/TT 15TFB/TTFB

Format Description
No initial value setting
1366 Real Real number High–speed peck drilling cycle 83. 83.1
number (machining type: 2), front
1367 Real High–speed peck drilling cycle (machining type: 2), side 87. 83.1
number
1368 Real Tapping cycle, front 84. 84.

number
1369 Real Tapping cycle, side 88. 84.

number
1370 Real Reverse tapping cycle, front 84. 84.1

number
1371 Real Reverse tapping cycle, side 88. 84.1

number
1372 Real Rigid tapping cycle, front 84. 84.2

number
1373 Real Rigid tapping cycle, side 88. 84.2

number
1374 Real Rigid reverse tapping cycle, front 84. 84.3

number
1375 Real Rigid reverse tapping cycle, side 88. 84.3

number
1380 Real Start/cancellation of cylindrical interpolation 107. 7.1

number
1381 Real Start of polar coordinate interpolation 112. 12.1

number
1382 Real Cancellation of polar coordinate interpolation 113. 13.1

number
1390 Integer Output format of canned cycle R code (*3) 1 0
1391 Single Canned cycle repetitive code K L

character
*1 If MTF No.1260 is 94, the conventional system outputs G98,

assuming G code system B or C. In the new system, MTF No.1262
is newly provided so that an arbitrary value can be output as the initial
point return G code for G code system B/C. Normally, set 98 in MTF
No.1262.
*2 MTF No.1350 is referred at the time of rigid tapping cycle output.
However, it is not required when output is performed in the 15T
format. So, be sure to set MTF No.1321 to –1.
Note that MTF No.1321 is referred for 5700 series of 16–T CAP II.
*3 As the canned cycle reference position (R code), an absolute value is
output if parameter No.1390 is set to 0; an incremental value is output
if the parameter is set to 1.
59
(2) Function tables (MTF Nos. in the range 2000 to 2999)
******** 16–TA/–TTA format initial values ********

<Existing table>
2059 =5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 Tapping cycle command
G98 G84 X Z R F ; block (turning)
G99 G88
2203 =5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503, 0B03
G98 G98 G83 X Z C R P F K
G99 G87
Drilling cycle
command block
2204 =0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
2205 =5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503, 0B03
G98 G98 G83 X Z C R Q F K Peck drilling cycle, or
G99 G87 high–speed peck drilling
cycle command block
2206 =0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
2207 =5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 1505, 0203, 0005
G98 G98 G84 X Z C R M?? S M03 Tapping cycle, or rigid
G99 G88 tapping cycle command
block (C–axis)
2208 =0503, 0B03, 0004, 0000
F K ;
2209 =0102, 5702, 0107, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
G1 G18 W0 H0 ; G107 C ; Cylindrical interpolation
G19 start block
2210 =6402, AA01, 0004, 0000 Cylindrical interpolation

G107 C ; cancel block
* The underlined function codes have been changed for the new function. (See (2) of Section 2.2.)
<New table
2214 =6502, 0004, 0000, 0000 Polar coordinate interpolation start block
G112 ;
2215 =6602, 0004, 0000, 0000

G113 ; Polar coordinate interpolation cancel block
60
*** 15–TFB/–TTFB format settings ***

<Existing table>
2059 =5702, 5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000 Tapping cycle, or reverse
G17 G98 G84 X Z R F ; tapping cycle command
G19 block (turning)
2203 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z C R P F
G19 Drilling cycle command
block
2204 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L ;
2205 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z C R Q F Peck drilling cycle, or
G18 G99 G83.1 high–speed peck drilling
G19 cycle command block
2206 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000

L ;
Tapping cycle, reverse tap-

2207 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503
ping cycle, rigid tapping
G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z C R Q F
cycle, or rigid reverse tap-
G18 G99 G84.1
ping cycle command block
G19 G84.2
(C–axis)
G84.3
2208 =0B03, 0004, 0000

L ;
2209 =0102, 5702, 0107, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
G1 G18 W0 H0 ; G7.1 C ; Cylindrical interpolation
G19 start block
2210 =6402, AA01, 0004, 0000 Cylindrical interpolation

G7.1 C ; cancel block
<New table
2214 =6502, 0004, 0000, 0000
G12.1 ; Polar coordinate interpolation start block
2215 =6602, 0004, 0000, 0000 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel block
G13.1 ;
61
(3) Function codes
Three high–order One low–order

digits, detailed digit, major Function
classification classification
6 0 0 2 Outputs G code set in MTF No.1262.

(15TF/TTF, old 16T/TT CAP II: outputs G98 only when MTF No.1260 = 94.)
6 1 0 2 Outputs G code set in MTF Nos.1360 to 1363.

(15TF/TTF: Outputs G81 or G82. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs G83 or G87.)

(15TF/TTF: Outputs G83 or G83.1. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs G84 or
G88.)

(15TF/TTF: Outputs G84 or G84.1. Old 16T/TT CAP II: DDDD (newly
provided))
6 4 0 2 Outputs G code set in MTF No.1380.

(15TF/TTF: Outputs G7.1. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs G107.)
6 5 0 2 Outputs G code set in MTF No.1381 (newly provided).
6 6 0 2 Outputs G code set in MTF No.1382 (newly provided).
0 9 0 3 Outputs R code in format set in MTF No.1390.

(15TF/TTF, old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs a canned cycle R code)
0 B 0 3 Outputs address set in MTF No.1391. (15TF/TTF: Outputs canned cycle L

code. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs a canned cycle K code)
1 5 0 5 Outputs M code set in MTF No.1321. (15TF/TTF: DDDDD (newly provided)

Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs M code set in MTF No.1321.)
1.13.2 (1) When MTF data in the old system is read into the new system via the
Supplementary floppy cassette or another external storage device, only the MTF data
having the conventional MTF Nos. is rewritten. In this case, change
the settings in the function tables whose contents have been changed
for this new function, by referencing the initial values in the function
tables given previously.
(2) Among the optional processes for machining definition in menu 4, the
following six processes are subject to format conversion:
– Tapping
– C–axis center drilling
– C–axis drilling
– C–axis tapping
– Face milling
– Side milling
62
1.14 This function is used to define the tool change method in NC data so that
the corresponding tool to be used in the next process will be called. This
FUNCTION FOR function is applied to all machining processes except sub cycles.
PREPARING THE This function is an optional function.
NEXT TOOL (1) Programming
Programming is performed in the same way as for normal
programming.
(2) System parameter
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
706 Specificatio 00000000 Bit 5 = 0: The next tool is not called

n of 0 or 1 for turret 1.
1: The next tool is called for
turret 1.
Bit 6 = 0: The next tool is not called
for turret 2.
1: The next tool is called for
turret 2.
(3) MTF
1) MTF1xxx
The following parameters have been added:
Initial
No. Format Description
value
1355 Integer 6 Tool calling M code value
1400 Two–charac BB Next tool calling command address

ters (the same two characters are
specified)
2) MTF function table

The following function table has been added:
2066 (setting the next tool calling block)

1203, 0004, 0A05, 0004, 0103, 0004, 1303, 0004, 0000, 0000
B ; M06 ; T ; B ;
3) Function code
The following function codes have been added:
Higher three
Lowest digit
digits
Major Function
Detailed
classification
classification
1 2 0 3 Outputs the address specified with MTF1400.

(Tool number used in the first block)
1 3 0 3 Outputs the address specified with MTF1400.

(Tool number used in the next process)
0 A 0 5 Outputs the M code (M06) specified with

MTF1355.
(Tool calling)
63
NOTE
The value of MTF1104 (the number of tool number digits)
should be used as the number of digits of the B code for
specifying the next tool.
(4) Example of output NC data block

The following NC data are prepared (when the NC data are prepared
for three processes).
0_ ;
G50X_ Z_ ;
G0X_ Z_ ;
(First process start)
B01 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the first process
M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
T0101 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation
B02 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the next (second) process
G50X_ Z_ ;
.
.
T0100 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation cancel
(First process end)
(Second process start)
M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
B03 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the next (third) process
G05X_ Z_ ;
.
(Second process end)
(Third process start)
M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
G05X_ Z_ ;
.
.
(Third process end)
CAUTION
1 For the first process, the tool number to be used in the
process is output before M06 (tool change).
2 For the last process, no next tool number is output.
64
1.15 In programming for C– or X–axis machining, this function is used to

output those NC data for calling a macro that performs interpolation rigid
OUTPUT FUNCTION tapping. A set of NC data for calling a macro that performs interpolation
FOR rigid tapping is referred to as an interpolation rigid tapping cycle.
INTERPOLATION Those macros that perform interpolation rigid tapping must have already
RIGID TAPPING been registered in the NC.
Example output
G28H0. ;
G50X150. Z150. C0.;
G0T0101;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C45. ;
G384Z80. F1. 5R0. S2000T2M68 ;
G380. ;
G0Z150. ;
X150. ;
T0100 ;
M1 ;
(1) Programming
Programming for outputting an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is
performed in the same way as that for outputting a normal rigid
tapping cycle.
1) Machining type
On the machining definition screen, select C–AXIS TAP. or
Y–AXIS TAP. as the machining type.
2) Tool data
Use the tapping tool for milling.
3) Cutting conditions
On the definition screen, shown below, enter each data item.
TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP=2 The rigid tapping type is specified(*1).

CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . C1 = The initial value is set to the value of
system parameter No.363 for the C-
axis, or the value of system parame-
ter No. 435 for the Y–axis.
C2 = The initial value is set to the value of
system parameter No.364 for the C-
axis, or the value of system parame-
ter No. 436 for the Y–axis.
CUTTING SPEED . . . . N = V*1000/DT*PAI(*2)
(V = cutting speed value set in the
material data, DT = tool diameter val-
ue set in the tool data)
*1 When machining type 1 is selected, a general tapping cycle is

output.
When machining type 2 is selected, a normal rigid tapping cycle or
an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is output, depending on the
system parameter setting (see (2) below).
*2 The value for milling–related tapping set in the material data
should be used as the initial speed value.
65
4) Automatic process determination

The automatic process determination function selects 1 for the
machining type, not 2 (rigid tapping).
5) Animated simulation during NC data preparation
Animated simulation during NC data preparation is performed in
the same way as that for outputting a normal rigid tapping cycle.
To enable this function, set bit 7 of system parameter No. 706 to on.
Bit 7 of system parameter No. 706

0: Outputs a normal rigid tapping cycle.
1: Outputs an interpolation rigid tapping cycle.
(3) MTF
1) MTF1xxx
The following parameters have been added:
Initial
value
1351 Integer 68 C–axis clamping M code
1352 Integer 69 C–axis unclamping M code
1353 Integer 1 X–axis cutting direction for an interpolation rigid

tapping cycle
1354 Integer 2 Z–axis cutting direction for an interpolation rigid

tapping cycle
1383 Integer 384 G code for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1384 Integer 380 G code for canceling an interpolation rigid tapping

cycle
1398 Two FF Pitch command address for an interpolation rigid

characters tapping cycle
1399 Two TT Cutting direction command address for an

characters interpolation rigid tapping cycle
66
2) MTF function table

The following function tables have been added:
2240 (C–axis interpolation tapping cycle block 1)

8002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 1003, 0903, 0203, 1103, 1605, 0004
G384 X Z C F R S T M68 ;
2241 (C–axis interpolation tapping cycle block 2)
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2242 (Block for canceling a C–axis interpolation tapping cycle)
8002, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G380 ;
2243 (Y–axis interpolation tapping cycle block 1)
1605, 0004, 8002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 1003, 0903, 0203, 1103
M68 ; G384 X Z Y F R S T
2244 (Y–axis interpolation tapping cycle block 2)
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
2245 (Block for canceling a Y–axis interpolation tapping cycle)
8102, 0004, 1705, 0004, 0000, 0000
G380 ; M69 ;
3) Function code
The following function codes have been added:
Higher three
Lowest digit
digits
Major Function
Detailed
classification
classification
8 0 0 2 Outputs the G code (G384) specified with

MTF1383.
8 1 0 2 Outputs the G code (G380) specified with

MTF1384.
1 0 0 3 Outputs the address specifies with MTF1398.

(For the pitch when an interpolation rigid tap-
ping cycle is specified)(*1)
1 1 0 3 Outputs the address specifies with MTF1399.

(For the cutting direction when an interpola-
tion rigid tapping cycle is specified) (*2)
1 6 0 5 Outputs the M code (M68) specified with

MTF1351.
1 7 0 5 Outputs the M code (M69) specified with

MTF1352.
*1 The value set in the tool data prepared during machining definition is
output as the pitch value.
*2 TI (value of MTF1353) for the X–axis cutting direction, or T2 (value
of MTF1354) for the Z–axis cutting direction, is output.
67
(4) Example of output NC data block

1) C–axis end tapping
90
78
90°
40
180° 0°
270°
.
.
G28H0. ;
G50X150. Z150. C0. ;
G0T0101 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0. ;
G384Z80. F1.5R0. S2000T2M68 ; G384 . . . . . . Rigid tapping cycle
G384C90. ; F . . . . . . . . . Pitch
G384C180. ; T . . . . . . . . . Cutting direction
G384C270 ; (T1: X–axis direction/T2: Z–axis direction)
G380. ; S . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed
G0Z150. ; M68 . . . . . . . C–axis clamping M code
X150. ; Rigid tapping cancel
T0100 ;
M1 ;
.
.
68
2) Y–axis end tapping
90
78
90°
40
180° 0°
270°
G50X200. Z200. Y0. C0. ;

G0T0101 ;
G17C90. ;
X40. ;
Y0. ;
Z92. ;
M68 ; C–axis clamping M code
G384Z80. F1. 5R0. S2000T2 ; G384 . . . . . . Rigid tapping cycle
G384X0. Y20. ; F . . . . . . . . . Pitch S . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed
G384X–40. Y0. ; T . . . . . . . . . Cutting direction
G384X0. Y–20. ; (T1: X–axis direction/T2: Z–axis direction)
G380. ; Rigid tapping cancel
M69 ; C–axis unclamping M code
G0Z150. ;
X150. ; Y0.
T0100 ;
M1 ;
.
69
2. CAUTIONS FOR USING VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND
2 CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT
70
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND 2. CAUTIONS FOR USING
2.1 If you know by what processing the tool figure and setting method are
defined when tool data were input to the Symbolic FAPT system, you will
TOOL FIGURE AND be able to program these tool more securely.
SETTING METHOD Data employed by the system for checking the cutting direction, cutting
edge angle, and other tool figures are angles indicating the tool nose
directions in the NC data coordinate system.
In the NC data coordinate system, the counterclockwise angle as viewed

from the plus (+) Z direction shows a positive (+) angle, while the
clockwise angle shows a negative (–) angle.
For example, 135° and –225° or 180°

and –180° have the same meanings,
respectively.
Two cutting edges are present normally. They are called major cutting
edge and minor cutting edge. These cutting edge directions are called
major cutting edge direction angle and minor cutting edge direction angle.
In the above figure, the major cutting edge direction angle is 240° or
–120° , while the minor cutting edge direction angle is –165° or 195°.
Now, the process or determining the tool figure and setting methods in the
Symbolic FAPT will be described in regular sequence, referring to the
above description.
71
1st step: Positive direction and negative direction of input data

(1) The turret is mounted on the front side or on the rear side, depending
upon the types of NC lathes. If the turret is mounted on the rear side,
imagine a cutter located at a symmetric position on the front side,
obtained by turning the cutter around the Z axis as the rotation center
by a half turn.
(2) If the cutter is mounted inside out, grip a tool while erecting its shank
so that the cutting edge faces downward, and cutting edge faces
upward in other cases.
Assume a straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just
downward. The following figure shows examples typical figures of
cutters and the straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces
just downward based on the presumption.
72
(3) The major cutting edge angle AC is defined as the angle formed by the
major cutting edge angle and the straight line which passes the tool
nose edge and faces just downward.
Cutting edge angle AN is also defined as the angle formed by the major
cutting edge and minor cutting edge.
The counterclockwise angle is specified as the positive direction angle
as shown in the following figure.
(4) If the straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just
downward is presumed as a straight line which passes the virtual tool
position, you will be able to understand the meanings of the following
question asked on the CRT screen by the system.
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . . . . XN =
ZN =
Input the distance from the virtual tool position to the center of cutting
edge as XN and ZN.
(5) Setting angle AS indicates the setting direction of a tool. Input the
setting angle to the selected drawing format, irrespective of whether
the turret is located on the front side or on the rear side, and presume
that the tool is set on the upper side of the CRT screen if menu number
1 or 2 was selected, or on the lower side of the CRT screen if menu
number 3 or 4 was selected, for drawing format.
The upward direction of the straight line passing the tool nose edge
employed in (2) (direction from the base of the tool to the tool nose)
is employed for indicating the tool direction.
Input the clockwise direction as a negative (–) angle from the right side
of the abscissa of the CRT screen and also input the counterclockwise
direction as a positive (+) angle.
73
2nd step: Calculation of the direction angles of major cutting edge and
minor cutting edge
There are certain items to be input by an operator according to
questions from the CRT screen. The following three factors are used
to determine the cutting edge direction angles.
CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . AC = (Cutting edge angle)
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AN = (Tool nose angle)
SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . AS = (Setting angle)
The following procedure shows the process of calculating the cutting
edge direction angles inside the system based on the above three pieces
of information.
(1) Assume AC be the major cutting edge angle and AN be the tool nose
angle.
(2) Calculate the minor cutting edge angle by AC’ = AC + AN.

(Example) AC’ = 30 + 45 = 75
(3) Convert setting angle AS according to the selected drawing format.
This is because that the system uses the value which is converted in
the first quadrant, irrespective of the specification of drawing format.
If the selected drawing format is 1 or 2, AS is kept unchanged.
If the selected drawing type is 3 or 4, AS is converted into –AS (AS
= –AS).
(4) Calculate the major cutting edge and minor cutting edge direction
angles, respectively.
A = AS – AC (major cutting edge)
A’ = AS – AC’ (minor cutting edge)
74
Let’s confirm, referring to the following examples, that the major

cutting edge direction angle and minor cutting edge direction angle are
obtained as desired, irrespective of the drawing format.
(Example 1) When drawing format is 1 or 2;
Input data; AC = 30, AN = 45, AS = –90
Internal processing; A = AS–AC = –120 ...

. . . . . . Major cutting edge direction angle
A’ = AS–AC’ = AS–(AC+AN) = –165
. . . . . . Minor cutting edge direction angle
Result;
75
(Example 2) When drawing format is 3 or 4;

Input data; AC = 30, AN = 45, AS = 90
Internal processing; AS = –AS = –90

A = AS–AC = –120
. . . . . . Major cutting edge direction angle
A’ = AS–AC’ = AS–(AC+AN) = –165
. . . . . . Minor cutting edge direction angle
Result;
76

2.2 For the cutting direction vector (A) as viewed from the tool tip, and the

cutting edge angle vector of major cutting edge (B) and the cutting edge
CUTTING DIRECTION
angle vector of minor cutting edge (C) as viewed from the tool tip by
AND CUTTING EDGE taking the cutting edge protective angle (standard value: 3°) into
ANGLE consideration,

an error is produced, if the rotating direction from A to B does not meet

the rotating direction from B to C, and also

an error is produced if A meets B.
Example when the cutting direction is ;
When cutting is made at the minor cutting edge, consider the above

explanation by exchanging vectors B and C.
77
2.3 Rough cutting is made by linear cutting (parallel to X axis or parallel to

Z axis). Specify the medium finish cutting several times repeatedly, if an
ROUGH CUTTING output of a profiling mold is desired.
DIRECTION For number of pockets in rough cutting area, ten or less pockets are
present in one machining area.
78
2.4 The pockets to be judged by the Symbolic FAPT are defined as “concaved
parts as viewed from the cutting direction out of them”.
JUDGEMENT OF The same profile may be judged as a pocket or not judged as a pocket,
POCKETS depending upon the cutting directions as shown in the following example.
The concaved portion (indicated by the slanting lines) in the left figure is
judged as a pocket when the cutting direction is and it is not judged
as a pocket when the cutting direction is .

The concaved portion which was not judged as a pocket is not cut in the
corresponding process.
When the above portion is cut in the direction;
When the above portion is cut in the direction;
If a pocket is shallower than the next cutting position in rough cutting

process, it is cut by the rough cutting.
79
If system parameter No.0101 is 0 (no pocket is cut), the pocket is kept

uncut, irrespective of the above condition.
80
2.5 The arrows indicating the division direction are input for specifying the
area based on the following principle.
DIVISION OF
MACHINING AREA Outer diameter side ´
Inner diameter side ±
Edge face side ´ , ± , ³ (selective use)
Refer to the following cautions when specifying the dividing directions

of the machining area.
(1) Dividing direction of area
Specify the dividing direction of the machining area toward the blank
profile.
(2) Dividing direction and part figure

Don’t overlap the dividing direction of the machining area and the part
figure each other.
81
(3) Machining start point and end point coincide

No machining is possible, if the start point of part figure coincides with
the end point and these points are located on a blank profile (blank
figure).
Z axis judges it as the profile figure of a blank.
In case of the above figure, machining becomes possible, if a dummy

figure element of about 0.01 mm in length is inserted.
82
(4) Difference of tool paths according to dividing direction of area

When the end face or outer diameter is continuously machined in the
medium finish cutting or finish cutting process, the cutting method
differs according to the specification of the dividing directions of the
cutting area. (Refer to the following finish cutting as an example.)
NOTE
Fi: Feedrate by the specification of surface roughness
Fj: Feedrate by the specification of standard surface
roughness
(5) Concept of area in semi–finish and finish cutting

In the semi–finish and finish, cutting is made along the part figure
only, while neglecting the blank figure. The profile in the arrow
direction specified when dividing the machining area is regarded as a
part of the part profile.
83
2.6
SURPLUS
THICKNESS
2.6.1 Don’t give any finish allowance (in rough cutting and medium finish
Finish Allowance and cutting) larger than or equivalent to the surplus thickness, otherwise the
blank figure may be deformed to unfavorably affect the subsequent
Surplus Thickness machining.
(Example)
If the surplus thickness is as illustrated in the left figure, for

example, the following finish allowance cannot be given.
Finish allowance in X direction 5 mm
Finish allowance in Z direction 5 mm
2.6.2 Don’t give such a surplus thickness as may exceed a blank dimension in
Surplus Thickness and a special blank. It is recommended to give a relatively large blank
dimension so that the surplus thickness does not exceed the blank figure,
Blank even if it is added to the machining figure.
84
2.6.3 If a special blank with a constant surplus thickness is used, a closed part
Closed Part figure can also be defined.
The constant surplus thickness cannot be defined for 5700 series and
version 1 of 5710 series of 16–T CAP II.
2.6.4 If there is problem as shown in item 2.6.2, define the blank figure as
Definition of Optional mentioned in item 3.2.4 (CHAPTER IV).
Blank Figure
85
2.7
GROOVING
2.7.1 Grooving is made by the following three steps.

Tool Path Apply the tool to the center of the groove.
Drive the tool in such a manner as the groove is cut by the reference
side cutting edge of the tool.
Drive the tool in the opposite direction.
If the groove width is equal to the tool width, the tool is applied to the
groove center once.
86
2.7.2 Refer to item 1.11.3.

Interference Check
2.7.3 If the blank figure at the entrance of the groove is not parallel to the X axis
Blank Figure in or Z axis in case of grooving, give care to the following note.
Grooving Area
WARNING
In the case of grooving tool, interruption is checked at virtual
tool position by the designated nose R.
If a bad tool path is output by this process, designate the
other side of nose R at virtual tool position.
2.7.4 The groove bottom must be flat.

Groove Bottom Figure
The flat portion must be equal to or larger than the flat portion of the tool
nose.
87
2.7.5 If a groove contains two or more concaved portions, it cannot be machined

Concaved Parts in by one process only. However, it can be machined by dividing it into two
or more portions.
Groove
Cannot be grooved. Grooving is possible when the groove is divided into A

and B portions.
(Special example)
AS a special case, grooving becomes impossible when two or more
concaved parts exist in a groove, depending upon the dividing
directions of the groove, even if the groove figure is normal.
If ¾ and ½ are specified as the dividing If ´ is specified as the dividing direction,

directions as illustrated in the above figure, only one concaved part exists, and grooving
threeconcavedparts (1), (2), (3) are produced is possible without any trouble.
in the grooving area, causing the grooving to
be impossible.
88
2.8 The depth of cut is determined in the way that the drill shoulder is
positioned at the place where the drill is driven by depth D from the
DEPTH OF CUT (D) IN intersection of the blank figure profile at that time (Blank figure changes
DRILLING as machining advances) and the tool diameter employed.
No intrusion to part is checked. Judge it, while monitoring the CRT

screen.
89
2.9
THREADING
2.9.1 A tool is driven along an angle to which the minor cutting edge faces in
Threading Direction threading.
If you desire to determine the threading direction, irrespective of the tool

figures, you have only to define it to allow the minor cutting edge to face
the threading direction when defining the tool.
When defining the virtual tool figure, don’t define it in such a way as the
minor cutting edge bites into the major cutting edge side.
The allowable threading is limited up to the direction parallel to the X
axis.

90
2.9.2 D1: First threading depth (Absolute quantity: Material file)

Threading Depth Di: i–th threading depth (Absolute quantity)
Dk: Threading depth once before the last
D: Last threading depth (Incremental quantity: system parameter)
Since Dk is not calculated by the above equation, it is possible that Dk

becomes an increment smaller than D.
2.9.3 When the prompt of the depth of screw is displayed, press the softkey
Depth of Screw Thread “OVER THREAD” or “INNER THREAD”, then the depth of screw is
calculated automatically.
When asking of screw thread depth, automatically calculated contents
which is displayed on CRT can be changed.
(Example)
M20, P: Pitch
Minor diameter of internal
thread is calculated by the
following equation.
Inner dia. = 20 – (P x 0.6495)
CAUTION
Even in the case when the depth of screw thread is input
from keys (not automatically calculated value), recalculation
is executed by inputting multiplier or pitch. In this case, the
required depth of screw thread must be input from keys.
75
2.10 The overhung section can be cut as follows, using system parameter
No.0101.
CUTTING
System parameter No.0101 = 0: No pocketing is carried out.
OVERHUNG 1: Pocketing is carried out.
PORTION 2: The bottom of overhung portion is
machined.
For system parameter No.0101 = 0 or 1
For system parameter No.0101 = 2
However, when system parameter No.0101 = 2, if the following

machining is defined, using a tool with a larger tool nose radius than the
surplus thickness, the portion remaining uncut occurs.
First cut the outer diameter portion. . . . . . . . . (1)
76
Cut the wall portion, using the same tool. . . . . . . . (2)
The tool path is as follows, and the portion remaining uncut occurs.
77
2.11 When the machining is defined (Menu No.4) or NC data is prepared

(Menu No.5), the following error message may be displayed: “I
ERROR WHEN NC CANNOT RUN ANY FARTHER. CHECK THE DEFINED TOOL OR
DATA IS PREPARED CUTTING AREA.” In the following cases, this error may be produced.
(1) When roughing, semi–finishing and finishing:
1) When the designation of dividing direction is not correct in the
designation of machining area:
Example)
2) When the dividing direction such that the area to be cut is not
present as a result in the designation of machining area is
designated:
Example 1)
When the dividing direction was designated, the start and end
points were set to the same position and the same direction was
designated.
Example 2)
The already finished place was designated as a cutting area.
78
Example)
When roughing or semi–finishing, a larger machining allowance
than the surplus thickness was designated.
(2) When thread cutting

1) When the designated threaded position cannot be cut, using the
specified tool.
When an attempt is made to machine the threaded portion as

illustrated, using tool 2, an error is produced.
2) When “THREADING” was designated in defining the machining
although “T” is not specified in the parts figure.
(3) When necking
1) When the specified tool nose is not parallel to the groove bottom:
Example)
2) When “NECKING” was designated in defining the machining

although “N” was not designated in the parts figure:
(4) Grooving
1) When the groove bottom is not flat.
2) When the tool width is larger than the groove width.
(5) When bar feeding
1) When there is inconsistency in setting the system parameter for bar
feed.
79
(6) When cutting off

1) When the nose of tool used is not parallel to X axis.
(7) Others
1) When the right and left positions are confused for the inquiry
(PE=_) of parts position when the figure is defined.
2) When an attempt is made to prepare NC data when the machining
definition is not completed.
Example)
The tool data and machining condition data have undefined data.
Or no machining start position is fixed.
80
2.12
OTHER
PRECAUTIONS
2.12.1 In the Symbolic FAPT, the left side of a blank is chucked as a

Chucking Position precondition.
However, if you set Z axis to execute the counter rotational output by

machine tool file parameters No.1001, NC data output only can be
executed with Z axis – (minus).
2.12.2
Cutting Start Position
and Others WARNING
thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining
(1) Function to skip XS and ZS questions when the turret turning position
is fixed (inputtable), the cutting start position is inputtable, and also
tool lengths XS, ZS are unknown.
System parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0104
Bit 0 0 : Non skip

1 : Skip
NC data to return to the start point at return relief is prepared by

designating “1”. When “1” is specified;
1) The start point cannot be kept undefined.
2) The turret turning position is determined XS, ZS, and start point, if it
is undefined. If both XS and ZS are also undefined, the turret turning
position is obtained, assuming that XS and ZS are zero.
81
(2) Operation required when parameter No.0104 is 0.

(a) If the turret turning position was changed, the cutting start position
of the entire process is recalculated from the previous turret turning
position and tool length (XS, ZS). When “process definition” or
“NC data preparation” is selected, recalculation is executed
actually.
(b) Return either Z axis or X axis only to the turret turning position.
(Example)
When Z axis only is returned to the turret turning position
Keep the X axis undefined at the turret turning position.
Keep the X axis undefined at the cutting start position in the second
and higher process. (Define the X axis in the first process.)
Return the Z axis only to the turret turning position.
If you desire to return the X axis only, read Z as X, while read X as Z in
the above example.
WARNING
If the machine home position is specified when the X axis
start position in the first process is undefined, the machine
home position value is used as the first cutting start X axis
value; provided that the undefinition of the machine home
position causes an error.
NOTE
The start point cannot be undefined, if the software key
“CORRECTION & OUTPUT” of menu No.4 “PROCESS
DEFINITION” is selected.
2.12.3 If the division direction (direction which intersects the Z axis) at the
Method of Stopping the bottom end of the end face is specified downward when the parts figure
is perforated, the tool path is presently prepared up to the position
Tool on Z Axis exceeding the Z axis by a clearance (CX).
82
2.12.4 The tool path has been modified to be output to finish all specified range
Tool Path in Finish including already finished parts in finish cutting and semi–finish cutting,
if there is no interference with tool path. But can not specify the range that
Cutting and all of them already finished.
Semi–finish Cutting
83
VIII. C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1. PART FIGURE DEFINITION
B–61804E–2/05 C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION (MENU 2)
1 PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2)
125
(MENU 2) C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
1.1 NC tape for the following machinings can be prepared by C–axis FAPT
function.
KIND OF MACHINING
1) End face drilling
2) Side drilling
3) End face grooving (C–axis rotation direction)
4) End surface grooving (X direction)
5) Side grooving (Circumference direction)
6) Side grooving (Longitudinal direction)
7) Face milling
8) Cylindrical groove
Three kinds of drilling can be processed.
(a) Center drilling, (b) drilling, (c) tapping
126
1.2 After data of the turning section of a part figure input is completed, the
turning figure input up to now reappears on the CRT screen, and displays
SPECIFICATION OF the message “press the soft key”.
C–AXIS MACHINING
When you press the soft key C–AXIS MENU on this screen, a screen for
C–axis machining appears if the system is equipped with the C–axis
FAPT option.
When you press soft key NEXT PAGE, a screen for menu 3 (HOME
POSITION & INDEX POSITION) appears.
127
1.3
DESIGNATION OF
C–AXIS FIGURE
DATA
Menu screen for C–axis Machining

Input Type No. (1 to 8) of the machined figure when “Figure Type =” is
questioned. Input the number: the graphic data input screen is selected.
NOTE
For the spindle position method (MTF 1306 = 1), the “2.
FACE GROOVE 1”, “6. SIDE GROOVE 2”, “7. FACE
MILLING” and “8. SIDE MILLING” help diagram is not
displayed.
ESCAPE: Returns the mode to the program menu screen.

PART FIGURE: Displays the part figure definition screen for turning.
ALL DELETE: Deletes all data related to C axis figure already defined.
NEW: Press this key when cancelling the data as to C axis figure
already defined and defining C axis figure newly.
CHECK ALL: Draws the figure in accordance with the defined data.
CURSOR ´ : Moves the cursor forward and backward.
CURSOR ±
NEXT PAGE: Selects the data setting screen as the place which the
cursor points to. Adjust the cursor to the place of the
undefined number and press this soft key. The display
will return to the program menu screen.
1.3.1 (1) When inserting:

Inserting or Deleting No. FIGURE TYPE
C–axis Figure Data 01 FACE HOLE
02 SIDE HOLE
03 SIDE GROOVE 1
04
Normally, a new figure type is registered in No.04.
1) Press “CURSOR ±” or “CURSOR ´” to select the point to be
modified.
128
2) Input the figure to be inserted, using Menu No. (1 to 8).

(For example, adjust the cursor to “03” and key in “2” “INPUT”.)
As a result, the figure type is inserted as follows.
No. FIGURE TYPE
01 FACE HOLE
02 SIDE HOLE
03 FACE GROOVE ² Inserted
04 SIDE GROOVE 1
05
(2) When deleting
1) Press “CURSOR ±” or “CURSOR ´” and select the figure to be
deleted.
2) Press “DEL” “INPUT”.
1.3.2
Details of C–axis
Figure Data WARNING
1 After entering part figure data, check the entered data.
CAUTION
machined properly.
129
The graphic data input screen is as shown below except Face Milling and
Side Milling.
ESCAPE: Returns the display to the program menu screen.

BACK PAGE: Returns the display to C axis machining menu screen.
When this key is depressed in the cursor of data setting,
the already input data becomes invalid.
CHECK ALL: Draws the figure according to the input data. (All C axis
figure are drawn.)
CHECK: Draws the figure according to the input data. (Only
patterns defined here are drawn.)
CURSOR ´: Moves the cursor forward and backward.
CURSOR ±:
NEXT PAGE: C axis machining menu screen proceeds.
(1) Insert screen for end face hole machining
POSITION (X–AXIS) . DX = Hole position (X coordinate value)

DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DT = Depth of a hole
HOLE DIAMETER . . . WT = Diameter of a hole
CENTER DRILL . . . . .
CG = 1 to perform the center drilling; 0 not
to perform the center drilling.
THROUGH HOLE . . . . TH = 1 for through hole; 0 for hole with
bottom
130
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT = Tapping pitch

Left undefined if tapping is not done.
INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . AB = When plural holes are drilled, set
interval of hole positions to be fixed
or variable. (0:FIXED 1:VARIABLE)
QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . AC = Number of holes (in case of fixed
interval, up to 100 holes can be
specified.)
For 5700 series of 16–T CAP II, up
to 16 holes can be specified along
fixed interval.
INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . A1 = Position of hole (Angle. Angle of the
first hole in case of plural holes)
ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 = Position of the 2nd hole (in case of
variable interval)
A3 = Position of the 3rd hole (in case of
variable interval)
A4 = Position of the 4th hole (in case of
variable interval)
A5 = Position of the 5th hole (in case of
variable interval)
FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . AE = Angle of the last hole when plural
holes are drilled.
NOTE
Specify the angle with an absolute value. Incremental value
cannot be specified.
Example)
In case of A1 = 30, AE = 210, AB = 0 (fixed interval) and AC = 4, 4
holes are specified at 30 degrees, 90 degrees, 150 degrees and 210
degrees.
131
(2) End surface grooving (C–axis rotation direction) input screen
POSITION (X–AXIS) . DX = Groove position (X coordinate

value)
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Depth of a groove
GROOVING WIDTH . WT = Diameter of a groove
GROOVING ANGLE . AG = Angle of a groove
INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . AB = When plural grooves are drilled, set
interval of groove position to be
fixed or variable. (0: FIXED 1:
VARIABLE)
QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . AC = Number of grooves
(in case of fixed interval, up to 100
holes can be specified.)
Fro 5700 series of 16–T CAP II, up
to 16 holes can be specified along
fixed interval.
INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . A1 = Position of groove (Cutting start
angle. Angle of the first groove in
case of plural grooves)
ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 = Cutting start angle of the 2nd groove
(in case of variable interval)
A3 = Cutting start angle of the 3rd groove
A4 = Cutting start angle of the 4th groove
A5 = Cutting start angle of the 5th groove
FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . AE = Cutting start angle of the last groove
when plural grooves are drilled.
132
(3) End surface grooving (X direction) input screen
GROOVING LENGTH . . . XG = length of the groove

The other items are the same as those for end surface grooving (C–axis
rotation direction).
(4) Insert screen for side hole machining
POSITION (Z–AXIS) . . . LZ = Hole position

(Z coordinate value)
Other questions are the same as for the end face hole.
133
(5) Insert screen for the side face grooving
POSITION (Z–AXIS) . . . LZ = Position of groove (Z coordinate

value)
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Depth of a groove
GROOVING WIDTH . . . WT = Diameter of a groove
GROOVING LENGTH . . ZG = Length of a groove
INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . AB = When plural grooves are drilled,
set interval of grooves to be fixed
or variable.
(0: FIXED 1: VARIABLE)
QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . . . AC = Number of grooves
(in case of fixed interval, up to
100 holes can be specified.)
For 5700 series of 16–T CAP II,
up to 16 holes can be specified
along fixed interval.
INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . . . A1 = Position of groove (Angle. Angle
of the first groove in case of plural
grooves)
ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 = Angle of the 2nd groove
A3 = Angle of the 3rd groove
A4 = Angle of the 4th groove
A5 = Angle of the 5th groove
FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . . . AE = Angle of the last groove when
plural grooves are drilled.
134
(6) Insert screen for the side face grooving
POSITION (Z–AXIS) . . . LZ = Position of groove

(Z coordinate value)
Other question are the same as for the end face grooving.
(7) Face Milling
X–C face view is drawn, and the element symbol request screen is
selected. As in the conventional figure input, here, define a figure,
using a symbolic keys.
The element symbols which can be entered include:
´, ±, ³, ², ½, ¿, ½, ¿, , , R, C
For the value of C in X–C face view, input it in length (radius
designation), not in angle.
Input X value in diameter designation.
Example)
For the face milling figure in Fig.1, input as follows. Assume that
point A is the starting point:
135
“CP” request is displayed only for the 1st element. The PE request asks
which side should be cut for the element moving direction.
For 0, the right side is cut, and for 1, the left side is cut, and for 2, the part
on the line is cut.
(a) Defining figures

1) When defining notching figures, after the first figure has been
defined (definition of a single stroke figure), the following prompt
will be displayed:
ES =
In response, select either INPUT or the NEXT PAGE software key.
The following question will appear on the screen:
DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? (1: YES 0: NO)
When there is only one figure defined as a single stoke figure, press
the “0” (no) key; the C axis menu will reappear on the screen. For
two or more single stroke figures, press the “1” (yes) key; the
prompt for the starting point of the next figure will be displayed.
Normally, the prompt for the starting point is displayed after the
element symbol has been entered, but in this case the starting point
is displayed beforehand.
However, when the end point for the last element has not been
confirmed, even if INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] software key is
selected in response “ES = ”, an error will result; the “THE LAST
FIGURE ELEMENT HAS NOT END POINT” error message will
appear and the next screen will not be displayed.
2) Starting points for figures should be designated as absolute values.
Starting points for the second and subsequent figures cannot be
designated as incremental values that follow the final coordinate of
the previous figure.
3) When defining multiple figures, a period (.) will be displayed
between figures.
136
4) Deleting and inserting figure elements:

(i) Deleting elements
Move the cursor to the element to be deleted and select the
“ELEMENT DELETE” software key. However, it is not
possible to delete the periods between figures. Any attempt to
do this will result in a “THIS IS A NULL AND VOID KEY
NOW” message.
(ii)Inserting elements
Inserting single elements is the same as the normal operation to
define part figures. When inserting another figure between
multiple figures that have already been defined, the procedure
is as follows:
1 Move the cursor to the period between the figures.
2 Select the [INSERT FIGURE] software key.
3 The prompt for the starting point of the next figure will be
displayed; enter the proper data.
Subsequent operation are the same.
(b) Display of element symbols
1) Element symbols
The group of elements that can drawn as a single stroke figure will
be displayed as a single figure, with periods marking the
boundaries between the figures. It is not possible to enter or delete
these periods directly from the keyboard.
2) The starting point of the first element for the first figure will be the
starting point for machining during the NC text creation, so this
should be taken into account when defining part figures.
Workpieces will be machined in the order in which the figures were
defined.
3) When defining the second and subsequent figures, first set the data
for the starting point and then press the key for the element symbol.
This is the only process that is different from defining the first
figure (when defining the first figure, the element symbol is entered
first and then the prompt for the starting point data will appear).
137
4) List mode displays
(c) Notes
NOTE
When defining multiple single stroke figure, the following
limitations are applicable:
(i) It is not possible to change element directions (CP) for
single figures.
(ii) Figures with level differences cannot be defined.
(per one definition)
(iii) It is not possible to program front and rear
simultaneously.
Due to the above, from among the prompts for the starting
point element for the second and subsequent figures, the
following prompts are not mode:
(i) Element direction (CP)
(ii) Z axis value for starting point
(d) Creating NC text

1) NC text is created for machining figures (defined in menu 2) in the
order in which they were defined.
2) When machining of one figure has been completed, the tool will
move away before heading toward the starting point for the next
figure (at fast feed speed). The direction of this initial movement
is as follows:
(i) When cutting elements to the left or right, the tool moves in the
X axis direction.
(ii)When cutting elements, the tool moves in the Z axis direction.
138
(8) Side milling

The expansion diagram of the part face is drawn and the element
symbol question screen appears. Define the figure using the symbolic
key in the same way as milling figure input.
The element symbols that can be input are as follows:
´, ±, ², ³, ¾, ½, ¼, ¿, , , R, C
The circular expansion diagram horizontal axis is the length of the part
figure at Z. The vertical axis is the length of the circle in the cylindrical
diametervalue at C. The value of C is input in degrees (deg). The
expansion diagram vertical horizontal ratio depends on the cylindrical
diameter value. In the case of a new definition the expansion diagram
vertical horizontal ratio initialvalue is 1 to 1 until the numerical value
is set in the cylindrical diameter question. In correction mode, if the
cylindrical diameter is changed the message “EXECUTING” flashes
briefly while the ratio of the expansion diagram is being changed.
An example of a cylindrical figure
Fig. 1.3.2 (a)
139
Expansion diagram)
Fig. 1.3.2 (b)

The Figure 2 cylindrical figure is input as follows.
If point A is made the start point:
Number 1 element ± start point CO = 0. Z = 15.
Cylindrical diameter DX = 30.
(Groove bottom diameter value that
executes inter polation)
End point C = 120.
Number 2 element R Radius R = 10.
Number 3 element ¼ End point Z = 50. C = 240.
Number 5 element ± End point C = 480. (120 + 360)
Number 7 element ¿ End point Z = 15. C = 600. (240 + 360
Number 9 element ± End point C = 720. (360 + 360)
140
Program the center of the groove. When machining, cut having

programmed the element.
NOTE
1 Cylindrical expansion diagram type differs according to the
round cutting figure drawing format.
a) When the drawing format is 1 or 3.
Expansion diagram
141
b) When the drawing format is 2 or 4.
Expansion diagram
NOTE
2 Only one cylindrical groove figure, which is drawn as a
single stroke figure, can be defined; two or more cylindrical
groove figures cannot be defined. However, specifying a C
value of 360 or more (degrees) enables a figure with one or
more turns to be defined.
3 The following are not permitted for cylindrical groove figure
definition:
(1)Incremental input of the C value
(2)Specification of TL (tangent to the last figure) or TN
(tangent to the next figure)
(3)Specification of the radius value for a circular element
(4)Definition in list mode
142
1.4 Milling operations performed in different machining planes can be

programmed. In the following figure, milling is performed in different
MILLING IN machining planes.
MULTIPLE PLANES
(1) Part figure definition

1) Up to 10 different milling figures can be defined.
2) The Z plane (place in which milling is performed) can be set for
each milling figure.
(2) Machining definition
1) For a milling process, a screen for specifying a desired figure to be
milled is provided (cutting area screen).
2) On the cutting area screen, a figure to be milled is selected using
the cursor.
3) In a milling process, multiple figures can be milled successively
with the same tool.
143
1.5 As shown in Fig. 1.5 (a), a program which used C–axis machining to
machine (cut, drill, etc.) the same area of the workpiece twice can be
C–AXIS MACHINING created.
WITH A MACHINING
PLANE SPECIFIED
Fig. 1.5 (a)

To execute this function, the system references the following
parameter:
System parameter 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
309 0 0 0 0 0 0
0: Does not set any machining plane value.

1: Sets a machining plane value.
0: Performs feed operation in the safety

mode (mode 1).
1: Performs feed operation in the efficiency
mode (mode 2).
(2) Part figure definition

1) When a C–axis machining figure is entered, the system prompts the
operator to input the Z or X plane to be machined. In the example
shown in Fig. 1.5 (a), plane Z = a is entered as the machining plane.
2) If no data is input in response to the prompt (Z = undefined), as with
the conventional system, a turning part figure is assumed as the
machining plane, and the C–axis machining figure is created. In
Fig. 1.5 (a), the machining plane is Z = b.
3) The prompt for the machining plane can be skipped by parameter
setting. If it is skipped, the turning part figure is used as the
machining plane.
144
Figure definition screen (example: holes in C–axis end surface)
(3) Machining definition

1) As with the conventional system, a figure to be machined is
specified using the cursor on the cutting area screen.
2) When determining the process sequence, care must be taken. In the
example shown in Fig. 1.5 (a), milling must be performed before
drilling. Suppose that the feed operation is performed in mode 2
(see (4) below). In this case, if drilling is specified before milling,
the resultant NC data causes the tool to move in rapid traverse and
strike against the workpiece.
(4) NC data creation
One of the following two feed modes can be selected by parameter
setting:
1) In mode 1, cutting feed is performed from the blank and surface.
2) In mode 2, the tool moves in rapid traverse until it reaches the
machining plane specified in part figure definition, then cutting
feed is performed.
Mode 2 is valid in the following processes:
a) C–axis center drilling
b) C–axis drilling
c) C–axis tapping
d) C–axis grooving
Mode 1 (safety mode) Mode 2 (efficiency mode)
145
(5) Warnings
WARNING
1 Be careful not to make the setting shown in Fig.1.5(b),
where a C–axis machining figure is on a plane which is not
machined. The system does not regard such setting as
being illegal.
If feed mode 2 is selected, the tool may strike against the
workpiece when holes b, c, and d are cut.
Area cut by milling
b d
Fig. 1.5 (b)
2 If the part figure definitions contain a C–axis part figure for

which a machining plane is entered, the process sequence
of machining definition must be determined carefully. In
Fig. 1.5 (a), for example, drilling must be specified after
milling. Even if drilling is programmed before milling, the
system does not regard this sequence as being illegal.
3 Whenever a machining method (2, 3) including pecking is
selected, and feed mode 1 is used for a C–axis drilling
process, pecking starts from the approach point, regardless
of the value set for the machining plane.
146
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
2 MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4)
147
2.1 In menu 4 “Machining Definition”, press soft key “MILLING

MACHINING”.
SPECIFICATION OF
C–AXIS MACHINING
DEFINITION
2.1.1 When “MILLING MACHINING” button is pressed, the soft key for
Kind of C–axis selecting the kind of C–axis machining is displayed.
Machining
Specification NOTE
For the spindle positioning method (MTF 1306 = 1), the
FACE MILLING and CYLINDRICAL GROOVING software
keys are not displayed.
“C–AXIS C.DRIL” . . . Press this key to perform C–axis center

drilling.
“C–AXIS DRILL” . . . . Press this key to perform C–axis drilling.
“C–AXIS TAP.” . . . . . . Press this key to perform C–axis tapping.
“C–AXIS GROOV.” . . Press this key to perform C–axis grooving.
“C–AXIS F.MILL” . . . Press this key to perform face milling.
“C–AXIS S.MILL” . . . Press this key to perform side milling.
“SUB CYCLE” . . . . . . Press this key to perform a sub cycle.
2.1.2
Tool Data for C–axis
Machining WARNING
After entering tool data, check the entered data. Failure to
enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the
After setting the type of machining, the setting screen of tools to be used
is displayed.
148
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . TL = (Note 1)

TOOL SELECT NO. . . TN =
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM =
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . ID = (Note 2)
NOTE
1 The turret number prompt is displayed if there are more than
1 tool rests. The number of tool rests is to be set in No. MTF
1050.
2 The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been
registered in tool data (see VI–2.1). If a tool ID number (ID)
not registered in tool data is input, a message “This ID is not
registered in tool data.” is displayed. Also if a tool ID number
having a tool type not compatible with the present process
is input, a message “The tool type of this ID is not compatible
with the present process.” is displayed. The registered tool
ID number is deleted from the tooling information if keyed
in as “DEL” “INPUT”.
When using a tool which has already been registered in the tooling
information, the other data is automatically displayed if the tool selection
number (TN) is input.
In new registration, the data of the tool configuration and that of setting
which have been registered in the tool data are displayed if the tool ID
number (ID) is input.
Display of tool figure data (The tool type (TP) and tool material (MT) are
displayed only; they cannot be changed.
(Center Drill)
TOOL TYPE TP; Center drill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . DT =
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . LT =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . AT =
149
(Drill)
TOOL TYPE TP; Drill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . MT;
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . LT =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . AT =
(Tap)
TOOL TYPE TP; Tap (M)
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . LT =
PECK LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . LE =
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
(End mill)
TOOL TYPE TP; End mill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . DT =
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . LT =
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . NT =
Note that the message of tool type (TP) are displayed for 5700 series of
16–T CAP II as follows:
(5700 series)
Center drill (M) C–axis center drill
Drill (M) C–axis drill
Tap (M) C–axis tap
End mill (M) C–axis end mill
NOTE
3 The setting of tool figure data can be disabled, and the data
can be displayed only. To do this, change the following
parameter setting:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Specifies whether tool figure data can be set in m

chining definition.
= 0: Tool figure data cannot be set. (Only the display is enabled.)

= 1: Tool figure data can be set.
Prompts on data of setting (Common to all tool types)

SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: Side machining, 1: End
machining)
SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
ROTATE DIRECTION . . . . . TR = (0: Forwards, 1: Backwards)
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (Note 4)
150
NOTE
4 The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
animation drawing function is available.
5 When a tool registered in the tool data is used, the set data
is registered as tooling information when the user proceeds
to the next screen by pressing the “NEXT PAGE” soft key.
WARNING
When NC data are created, the interference check or offset
calculation is performed for the tool data according to the
tool figure. If tool data is not input correctly, correct NC data
cannot be output.
2.1.3 When all tool data are input, the screen asks the machining start position.
Machining Start MACHINING START POSITION
Position X coordinate values . . . . . DXO =
Z coordinate values . . . . . ZO =
151
2.1.4
Cutting Conditions
WARNING
(1) Center drilling

DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D= Depth of cut (mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance (mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N= Tool rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool rotation
(mm/rev)
(2) Drilling
TYPE 1
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm or inch)
DWELL ON/OFF . . . . DW =Specifies whether to perform
dwell at the bottom of the hole.
(0:Does not performs dwell, 1:
Performs dwell)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool rotation
(mm/rev)
152
TYPE 2
RETURN AMOUNT . U = Return amount (mm or inch)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
(mm/rev)
TYPE 3
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
(mm/rev)
153
TYPE 4 (G85/G89 boring cycle)

CLEARANCE . . . . . C1 = The initial value is set to the
value of system parameter No.
332 (clearance 1 in drilling 1).
C2 = The initial value is set to the
value of system parameter No.
333 (clearance 2 in drilling 2).
DWELL ON/OFF . . DW = When dwell is set to on, the
dwell time set in system
parameter No. 320 is output
during NC data preparation.
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = V*1000/DT*PAI
(V = cutting speed value set in
the material data, DT = tool
diameter value set in the tool
data)
FEED RATE . . . . . . FT = The initial value is set to the
value of feed amount/FT in the
material data.
C1
D
C2
In 16/18–TC and 16i/18i–TA, the return speed in is twice the cutting

speed in D. In 15–TFB and 15–TTFB, the return speed in is the
same as the cutting speed in D. Reverse spindle rotation is not per-
formed at the bottom of the hole.
Note) The machining time is calculated, assuming that the return speed
in is twice the cutting speed in D.
154
(3) Tapping
TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP = Type of tapping
(1: Tapping cycle, 2: Rigid tapping cycle)
CLEARANCE . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
155
(4) Grooving
CLEARANCE . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . FR = Feed amount per machining pass in the tool
radial direction (mm/rev)
FT = Feed amount per machining pass in the tool
axial direction (mm/rev)
D Side (in the Z direction) Side (in the C direction)
C–axis rotation
End surface
C–axis rotation
NOTE
For machining or , FR is subjected to unit conversion
to deg/min, then output to the NC data.
156
(5) Face milling

Two types of face milling can be performed: face milling with in–feed
machining and face milling without in–feed machining.
When C–AXIS F. MILL is selected on the machining type screen, the
cutting condition screen appears with the prompt “DRIVE...DR = (1:
on 0: off)” displayed. To perform in–feed machining, set 1 for DR.
For details of in–feed machining, see Chapter 7, “IN–FEED
MACHINING BY C–AXIS NOTCHING.”
TYPE 1: ROUGH
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
FINISH. ALLOWANCE . TS = Finish allowance at roughing
(mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . FR = Feed amount per blade in the tool
diameter direction (mm/rev)
FT = Feed amount per blade in the tool
axis direction (mm/rev)
APPROACH TYPE . . . . . SM = Approach type (1 or 4) (Note 1)
ESCAPE TYPE . . . . . . . . EM = Escape type (1 or 4) (Note 1)
TYPE 2: FINISH
TYPE 3: ROUGH D > FINISH

FINISH. ALLOWANCE . TS = Finish allowance at roughing
(mm or inch)
For face milling types 1 and 3, roughing is performed around a defined
part figure with a clearance for the finish allowance.
157
CAUTION
Whether to perform contour milling on an outer or inner
surface depends on the specified cutting position (CP) as
viewed in the direction in which the definitions of elements
for the part figure advance.
Outer surface contour milling:
Left–hand side as viewed in the direction in which the
definitions of elements advance
Inner surface contour millimg:
Right–hand side as viewed in the direction in which the
definitions of elements advance
When cutting is performed on the element line,
differentiating between outer surface contour milling and
inner surface contour milling is unnecessary.
NOTE
Approach/escape type
The approach type and escape type for milling can be
selected from the following four patterns:
1) Direct approach (escape)
2) Tangent approach (escape)
3) Normal approach (escape)
4) Circular approach (escape)
When cutting is performed on an element, the system does
not prompt the user to enter the approach and escape
types.
Selection of approach/escape type is not valid for 5700
series of 16–T CAP II.
158
1) Direct approach (escape) SM = 1 (EM = 1)

Cutting is started by moving the tool from the approach point directly
to the machining start position.
2) Tangent approach (escape) SM = 2 (EM = 2)
The following prompt is returned:
LENGTH . . . . . . DT = Distance along the tangent line

(mm or inch)
Offset in FAPT/left–hand side as viewed in the direction in which the

tool moves (CP = 0)
3) Normal approach (escape) SM = 3 (EM = 3)
LENGTH . . . . . . DN = Distance along the normal line

(mm or inch)
Offset in FAPT/right–hand side viewed in the direction in which the

tool moves (CP = 0)
4) Circular approach (escape) SM = 4 (EM = 4)
LENGTH . . . . . . DT = Distance along the tangent line

(mm or inch)
DN = Distance along the normal line
(mm or inch)
159
Offset in FAPT/left–hand side as viewed in the direction in which the

tool moves (CP = 1)
[Additional information]
1) An undefined input for the approach method or retraction method is
not accepted. An undefined input of the DT or DN value is not
accepted, either.
2) If this function is added, approach for notching is always made from
the end face (Z plane). The approach point is obtained by adding a
clearance to the notching start point.
3) If finishing is executed after roughing, the tool is retracted by an
amount equal to the clearance along the Z–axis once roughing has been
completed. Then, finishing is started.
4) If cutter compensation is performed by the NC (bit 0 of MTF 1305 is
set to 1) and if approach or retraction along a tangent line or circle is
specified, linear movement along the tangent is inserted when cutter
compensation is started (G41/G42 is output) and ended (G40 is
output). The extension amount set in system parameter 371 is
referenced when the movement is inserted.
New system parameter
1.0 Extension for approach or retraction

along a tangent line or circle during
371 Real number
C–axis notching or Y–axis contouring
0.1
Unit: mm or inch
*) The parameter affects the Family Program. Always specify a

positive value for this parameter.
The cutter compensation performed by the NC instigates the following
operation, depending on the approach/retraction method:
Direct approach/retraction
The NC does not perform cutter compensation. If an attempt is
made to define 1 (direct) as the approach method (SM) or retraction
method (EM) after bit 0 of MTF 1305 has been set to 1, the
“CORRECT KEYIN” error message is displayed. The attempted
input is not accepted.
If bit 0 of MTF 1305 is set to 1 after direct approach/retraction has
been defined, an error occurs when an attempt is made to create the
NC data. The NC data cannot be created.
160
Tangent approach/retraction
For approach or retraction, a linear movement equal to the
extension is inserted. The following operation is performed. (The
illustration shows the compensation on the right side of the blank
outline.)
SPA : Cut start point

SPA” : Cut start point for starting the compensation
SP : Cutting start point
EP : Cutting end point
EPE : Retraction end point
EPE” : Retraction end point for ending the compensation
Continuous line: Programmed tool path
Dotted line: Actual tool path
Normal approach/retraction
extension amount is not inserted. The operation is shown below:
161
Approach/retraction along a tangent circle

extension is inserted. The following operation is carried out. (The
outline.)
162
5) If cutter compensation is performed by the FAPT (bit 0 of MTF 1305

is set to 0) and if cutting is executed along the contour of a closed blank
outline, the NC data are created so that the cutting end point (EP) meets
the cutting start point (SP) on the actual tool path.
Example: Cutting with normal approach/retraction on the right side of
a blank outline
2.1.5 After the cutting condition screen, the screen to specify the cutting
Specifying the Cutting position appears.
Position for C–axis
Machining
POS = (1: YES 0: NO)

Specify the figure to be cut using the cursor. For a figure that can be cut,
the cursor blinks. The cursor is moved by pressing “CURSOR
FORWRD” or “CURSOR BACK” or by entering 0. After selecting a
desired figure with the cursor, press “NEXT PAGE”, or enter 1.
When a figure to be cut has been specified, the system prompts the user
to specify whether to cut another area with the same tool.
ANOTHER AREA ? . . . . . . . CN = (1: CUTTING 0: NON)
If 1 is entered, the cutting condition screen is displayed again.
If 0 is entered, the machining type selection screen is displayed again.
163
2.2 (1) The blind hole and through hole settings

BLIND HOLE AND The blind hole and through hole settings in the C axis component
shape definition are only used in tapping machining. All other hole
THROUGH HOLE machining is restricted to through holes.
(2) Details of blind hole and through hole settings
The effects of blind hole and through hole settings are shown below
for different hole machining processes.
Indicates the position of the tip of the tool.
1 Center sink machining 2 Drilling
3 Blind hole tapping 4 Through hole tapping
The tool stops with a clearance of C2

before the depth of the hole.
164
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION
B–61804E–2/05 C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION FUNCTION (MENU 6)
3 ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION (MENU 6)
For the 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II, the animated simulation
function has been improved.
When using the above CAP II models, see Part XIII, “ANIMATED
SIMULATION FUNCTION II.”
165
FUNCTION (MENU 6) C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
3.1 Simulation of turning and C–axis machining can be done by selecting

menu No.6 “CHECKING OF NC DATA”.
OUTLINE An X–Z side view is located at the left of the screen and an X–C front view
is located at the right. The manner of machining can be checked to see
the tool movement and the workpiece being cut on the screen.
166
3.2
SPECIFICATION
3.2.1 When the following two conditions are filled, it is possible to display
C–axis FAPT Animated C–axis FAPT screen in place of conventional animated screen.
The screen where an X–Z side view and an X–C front view are located
Screen at the left and the right respectively is called the C–axis FAPT animation
screen.
1. The option of C–axis FAPT is provided.
2. The part figure data for C–axis machining is defined in “Part figure”
definition screen of the menu 2.
When the C–axis FAPT option is not provided or when no C–axis part
figure is defined even if the option is provided, the animation drawing of
only X–Z side view appears.
Even when the C–axis FAPT animation drawing conditions are satisfied,
conventional animation screen can be selected by the setting on the
animation parameter screen.
(1) Screen
1) X–Z side view
The workpiece is painted out for drawing as usual.
The machined contour part by the C–axis is not drawn.
2) X–C front view
The final contour including C–axis machining part is drawn,
similarly on the part figure definition screen in the menu 2.
The workpiece is also painted out.
Fig. 3.2.1 (a)

(2) Animated simulation
a) Turning process
1) X–Z side view
As usual, the tool and the tool path are drawn and the manner
how to the tool cut the painted out workpiece is displayed.
2) X–C front view
Simulation of turning process is not done in the X–C front view.
167
b) C–axis machining
1) X–Z side view
The tool and the tool path are drawn in the same way as the
turning process. However, the machined part is not cut.
2) X–C front view
The C–axis machining is drawn by the tool moving on the
workpiece contour. The outline of the tool is left over in the
machined part.
(Paint drawing is not done for the workpiece. A front view is
not rotated.)
The simulation of the machining of part A in Fig. 3.2.1 (a) is
shown in the Fig. 3.2.1 (c).
Fig. 3.2.1 (b)
Fig. 3.2.1 (c)
168
For vertical lathes, the screens shown in Figs. 3.2.1 (d) and (e) are
displayed.
Fig. 3.2.1 (d)
Fig. 3.2.1 (e)
169
(3) Tool figure for milling machining

The following four patterns are prepared as the shape pattern of the
rotation tool for milling machining.
1) Drawing of a tool holder is done only in X–Z side view.

2) The center drill and the drill tool are drawn by pattern 2 and pattern
4.
Tap and end mill tool are drawn by pattern 1 and pattern 3.
3) The painted out length of the tool tip on the X–Z side view is LT
value set to the tooling data. (In case of tapping tool, the length is
LT + LE.)
3.2.2 The next screen is displayed when the soft key “PARAMETER” is pushed
Parameter Screen for in C–axis FAPT animated screen.
Animated Simulation
The question “Drawing type C =” is displayed, when the condition in

C–axis FAPT animated screen explained in 3.2.1 is filled.
C = 1: C–axis FAPT animated screen
C = 0: Animated screen only by X–Z side view
170
B–61804E–2/05 C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION 4. MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA
4 MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA
171
4. MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
4.1 (1) Cutting condition with high speed tool in milling machining
MATERIAL DATA Feed amount (*)
C tting speed
Cutting
Division FR FT
V (Diameter (Axis
direction) direction)
Center drill –
Drill –
Tap – –
End mill
(*) Set the feed amount per one blade in case of end mill.
(2) Cutting condition with the carbide tool in milling machining.

It is the same as (1).
NOTE
The increment system of the cutting speed is m/min or
feet/min.
The increment system of the feed rate is mm/rev or inch/rev.
The increment system of the infeed amount is mm or inch.
Refer to material data in chapter VI 1. for methods to set and
display the data.
172
4.2
TOOL DATA
4.2.1
Tool Data
The questions of milling machining tool data are as follows.

TOOL ID. NO. . . . . . . . . . NO =
TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . MT = 1: HIGH SPEED 2: CARBIDE 3:
SPECIAL
TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . TP = 1: CENTER DRILL 2: DRILL
3: TAP 4: END MILL
HEAD NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HD = (Not used in 16–TA)
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . HL = Holder No. for animated
simulation
ROTATE DIRECTION . . TR = 0: NORMAL 1: REVERSE
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . DT =
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . DS =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AT =
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . NT = No. of blades of end mill tool
PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . LE = Peck depth of tapping tool
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT = Pitch of tapping tool
SETTING DIRECTION . . CP = 0: SIDE 1: FACE
SETTING POSITION . . . XS =
ZS =
HEAD NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HD = (15–TTF/16–TTA only)
173
4.2.2 It is possible to input and output the tool data and collate it in the
Input and Output of the conventional way. The input and output format of the tool data for milling
machining is as follows.
Tool Data and Collation
CINOOOP ; Tool ID number (ID)
CINOOOP ; Tool type (TP)
CINOOOP ; Cutting diameter (DS)
CINOOOP ; Tool length (LT)
CINOOOP ; Tool tip angle (AT)
CINOOOP ; Tool diameter (DT)
CINOOOP ; Peck length (LE)
CINOOOP ; Pitch (PT)
CINOOOP ; Setting position (Y–axis) (YS)
CINOOOP ; Setting position (X–axis) (XS)
CINOOOP ; Setting position (Z–axis) (ZS)
CINOOOP ; No. of blades (NT)
CINOOOP ; Tool material (MT)
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP ; Holder No. (HL)
CINOOOP ; Tool information 2 (FLAG 2)
Meaning of tool information 2 (FLAG 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 Rotation direction (TR)

0 : Normal rotation
1 : Reverse rotation
Bit 1 Installation direction (CP)
0 : For side machining
1 : For end face machining
174
4.2.3 The display method of the tooling information list screens is as usual. The
Displaying and Setting screen moves to the tooling information setting screen when the soft key
“DATA SETTING” is pushed on this screen. The screens of four kinds
of Tooling Informations are prepared by the tool type.
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM =
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . ID = (Note 1)
NOTE
The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been
registered in tool data. If a number not registered in tool
data is input, a message “This ID is not registered in tool
data.” is displayed. The registered ID is deleted from the
tooling information if keyed in as “DEL” “INPUT”.
When the tool ID number (ID) is input, the tool registered in tool data is
tooled and the data of the tool configuration and that of setting are set.
Display of tool figure data (The tool type (TP) and tool material (MT) are
displayed only; they cannot be changed.)
Note that the messages of the tool type (TP) for 5700 series of 16–T CAP
II are displayed as follows:
(5700 series)
Center drill (M) C–axis center drill
Drill (M) C–axis drill
Tap (M) C–axis tap
End mill (M) C–axis end mill
(Center Drill)
TOOL TYPE TP; Center drill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . DT =
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . DS =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AT =
175
(Drill)
TOOL TYPE TP; Drill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AT =
(Tap)
TOOL TYPE TP; Tap (M)
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
PECK LENGTH . . . . . . . . LE =
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
(End mill)
TOOL TYPE TP; End mill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . DS =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . NT =
Prompts on data setting (Common to all tool types)
SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: Side machining,
1: End machining)
SETTING POSITION . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
ROTATION DIRECTION . . . . TR = (0: Forwards,
1: Backwards)
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (Note)
NOTE
The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
176
Tool figure of milling tool
177
5. MTF C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
5 MTF
WARNING
When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
178
B–61804E–2/05 C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION 5. MTF
5.1 (1) FANUC standard preset value for MTF 2200 (The servo motor control
system is standard)
MTF SETTING WHEN
C–AXIS FAPT MTF 2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004, 4102, 8107, 0004, 0000
FUNCTION IS USED FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; G28 H0 ;
2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000

TXX00 ; M01 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X Z C ; G00 TXXX;
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z C R P F
G18 G99 G82
G19
2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000

L ;
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z C R Q F
G18 G99 G83.1
G19
2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000

L ;
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z C R F L
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000

;
2209 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
(Not used)
2210 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 (Not used)
2211 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
179
(2) Setting precautions

In preparing NC data for C–axis machining, the MTF setting differs,
depending on the C–axis control system.
The modification shown on the following for standard data is required.
(a) Servo control system
MTF 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2003 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2004 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2005 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2006 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2007 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2008 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01,0503, 0004, 0000

G90 G00 X Z C F ;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, AA01,0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X Z C M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2031 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, AA01,0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X Z C M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2032 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, AA01,0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X Z C M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
180
(b) Spindle positioning system (Semifixed angle indexing)

MTF 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2003 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2004 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2005 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2006 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2007 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2008 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0503, 0004, 0000

G90 G00 X Z F ;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2031 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2032 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X Z ; G00 TXXXX ;
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z R P F
G18 G99 G82
G19
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03,0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z R Q F
G18 G99 G83.1
G19
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z R F L
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
2211 = 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000

MXX ;
181
(c) Spindle positioning system (Arbitrary angle indexing)

MTF 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2003 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2004 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2005 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2006 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2007 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2008 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004

FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0503, 0004, 0000

G90 G00 X Z F ;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2031 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2032 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED ; M05 ; MXX ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01,0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X Z C ; G00 TXXXX ;
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z R P F
G99 G82
G18
G19
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03,0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z R Q F
G18 G99 G83.1
G19
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z R F L
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
2211 = AA01,0004, 0000, 0000

C ;
182
5.2 (1) Servo motor control system

NC DATA OUTPUT
Specific Example:
Assume that the MTF has been set as follows.
1300 = CH
1313 = 13
1314 = 14
1315 = 18
1316 = 17
2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; M17 ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; M17 ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; M17 ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G00 X Z C F ;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z C M08 ;
G91 G01
2031 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z C M08 ;
G91 G01
2032 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z C M08 ;
G91 G01
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004, 4102, 8107, 0004, 0000
FEED ; M05 ; M18 ; G28 H0 ;
2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z C R P F
G18 G99 G82
G19
2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L ;
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z C R Q F
G18 G99 G83.1
G19
2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L ;
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z C R F L
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
2003 – 2008 are set to the same as 2002.

The others are standard setting.
System parameter standard setting (Refer to the another sheet)
183
Machining definition
Process 1: Outside diameter roughing
Process 2: Outside diameter finishing
Process 3: C–axis machining (Drilling end face: Center drilling) A
Process 4: C–axis machining (Drilling end face: Drilling) A
Process 5: C–axis machining (Drilling end face: Tapping) A
Process 6: C–axis machining (Grooving end face) B
Process 7: C–axis machining (Drilling side: Drilling) C
Process 8: C–axis machining (Grooving side face) D
Machining shape
184
The outputted NC data becomes as follows.
NOTE
NC data of the process 1 – 2 is omitted.
%; G50X300.Z300.C270. ; X104.;
O01: G00T0404 Z50.C330.;
G50X400.Z400.; G97S2000M13 ; X79.;
X87. ; G01X70.F26
Z92. ; .;
M05; C60 ; Z66.F65.;
M18; Z42. ; G00X79.;
G28H0; G01Z35F26. ; X104.;
G50X300.Z300.C0; C120.F65. ; X300.;
G00T0101; G00Z42. ; Z300.;
G97S2000M13; Z92. ; T0600;
X40.; C240. ; M01;
Z92.; Z42. ; X400.Z400.;
G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.; G01Z35.F26. ; M01;
C90.; C300.F65. ; M05;
C180.; G00Z42. ; M30;
C270.; Z92. ; %
G00Z300.; Z300. ;
X300.; X300. ;
T0100; T0400 ;
M01; M01;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ; G50X300.Z300.C300.;
G00T0202 ; G00T0505;
G97S1393M13 ; G97S1393M13;
X40. ; Z25.;
Z92. ; X104.;
C0 ; C0;
G82Z75.R92.P80.F139. ; G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139.;
C90. ; C180.;
C180. ; G00X300.;
C270. ; Z300.;
G00Z300. ; T0500;
X300. ; M01;
T0200 ; G50X300.Z300.C180.;
M01 ; G00T0606;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ; G97S2000M13;
G00T0303 ; Z50.;
G97S159M13 ; X104.;
X40. ; C90;
Z92. ; X79.;
C0 ; G01X70.F26.;
G84Z76.R92.F318. ; Z66.F65.;
C90. ; G00X79.;
C180. ; X104.;
C270. ; Z50.C210.;
G00Z300. ; X79.;
X300. ; G01X70.F26.;
T0300 ; Z66.F65.;
M01 ; G00X79.;
185
2) Spindle positioning method

a) Half–fixed angle indexing
Definite example
Assume MTF are set as follows:
1300 = CH
1306 = 1
1308 = 0
1313 = 13
1314 = 14
1317 = 50
1318 = 60
1319 = 20
1320 = 45
2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; M60 ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; M60 ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; M60 ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G00 X Z F ;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01
2031 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01
2032 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED ; M05 ; M50 ;
2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X Z ; G00 TXXXX ;
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z R P F
G18 G99 G82
G19
2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L ;
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z R Q F
G18 G99 G83.1
G19
2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L ;
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z R F L
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
2211 = 1205, 0004, 0000, 0000
M2X ;
The system parameters are standard setting.
186
Process 1: Outside diameter roughing
Process 2: Outside diameter finishing
Process 3: C–axis machining A (Drilling end face: Center drilling)
Process 4: C–axis machining A (Drilling end face: Drilling)
Process 5: C–axis machining A (Drilling end face: Tapping)
Process 6: C–axis machining B (Drilling side face: Drilling)
Process 7: C–axis machining C (Grooving side face)
Machining shape
187
NOTE
%; G50X300.Z300. ;
O10: G00T0404 ;
G50X400.Z400.; G97S1393M13 ;
Z25. ;
X104. ;
M05; M22 ;
M50; G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139
G50X300.Z300.; M23 ;
G00T0101; G00X300. ;
G97S2000M13; Z300. ;
X40.; T0400 ;
Z92.; M01 ;
G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.; G50X300.Z300. ;
M21; G00T0505 ;
M21; G97S2587M13 ;
M21; Z50. ;
G00Z300.; X104. ;
X300.; M24 ;
T0100; X79. ;
M01; G01X70.F26. ;
G50X300.Z300.; Z66.F65. ;
G00T0202 ; G00X79.;
G97S1393M13 ; X104.;
X40. ; Z50.;
Z92. ; M24.;
M21 ; X79.;
G82Z75.R92.P80.F139. ; G01X70.F26.;
M21 ; Z66.F65.;
M21 ; G00X79.;
M21 ; X104.;
G00Z300. ; X300.;
X300. ; Z300.;
T0200 ; T0500;
M01 ; M01;
G50X300.Z300. ; X400.Z400.;
G00T0303 ; M01;
G97S1593M13 ; M05;
X40. ; M30;
Z92. ; %
M21 ;
G84Z76.R92.F318. ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
C00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0300 ;
M01 ;
188
3) Arbitrary angle indexing

Definite example
Assume that MTFs are set as follows:
1300 = CH
1306 = 1
1308 = 1
1313 = 13
1314 = 14
1317 = 50
1318 = 60
2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; M60 ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; M60 ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ; M05 ; M60 ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G00 X Z F ;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01
2031 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01
2032 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z M08 ;
G91 G01
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED ; M05 ; M50 ;
2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z R P F
G18 G99 G82
G19
2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L ;
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z R Q F
G18 G99 G83.1
G19
2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L ;
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z R F L
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
2211 = AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
C ;
The system parameters are standard setting.
The machining definition is identical with (2).
189
NOTE
%; G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
O10: G00T0404 ;
G50X400.Z400.; G97S1393M13 ;
Z25. ;
X104. ;
M05; C60 ;
M50; C45 ;
G50X300.Z300.C0; G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139.
G00T0101; C225 ;
G97S2000M13; G00X300. ;
X40.; Z300. ;
Z92.; T0400 ;
G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.; M01 ;
C90.; G50X300.Z300.C225. ;
C180.; G00T0505 ;
C270.; G97S2000M13 ;
G00Z300.; Z50. ;
X300. ; X104.;
T0100 ; C90.;
M01 ; X79.;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ; G01X70.F26.;
G00T0202 ; Z66.F65.;
G97S1393M13 ; G00X79.;
X40. ; X104.;
Z92. ; Z50.;
C0 ; C315.;
G87Z75.R92.P80.F139. ; X79.;
C90. ; G01X70.F26.;
C180. ; Z66.F65.;
C270. ; G00X79.;
G00Z300. ; X104.;
X300. ; X300.;
T0200 ; Z300.;
M01 ; T0500;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ; M01;
G00T0303 ; X400.Z400.;
G97S159M13 ; M01;
X40. ; M05;
Z92. ; M30;
C0 ; %
G84Z76.R92.F318. ;
C90. ;
C180. ;
C270. ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0300 ;
M01 ;
190
C–axis Machining MTF Setting Example
The setting of MTF is described below when creating the NC program for
C–axis machining shown as in the following.
(Example)
%
O100;
:
:
: Lathe turning
: machining process
:
:
M05;
M; C–axis clutch on
G28H0. ;
G50X_ Z_ C_ ;
G00T0101; First C–axis machining
G97S2000M??; process
:
: Approach, machining,
: and escape
T0100;
M01;
:
:
:
G50X_ Z_ C_ ;
G00T0303;
: The i–th C–axis
: machining process
:
T0300;
M01;
:
:
:
G50X_ Z_ C_ ;
G00T0505;
:
: Final C–axis
: machining process
T0500;
M ; C–axis clutch off
M01;
M05;
M30;
%
191
Set the MTF parameters as shown below:

Number Meaning Setting Value
1313 Tool positive rotation M Set the corresponding M code value.

code value
1314 Tool negative rotation M Set the corresponding M code value.

code value
2024 Spindle speed command 0002, 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1002, 0203, 0005, 0004, 0000
block or tool speed G00 M05 ; M?? ; G97 S M03 ;
command block M04
M??
M??
2200 C–axis machining starting 0000, 0000 or less

part
2201 C–axis machining ending 0003, 0004, 0705, 504F, 1F41, 0004
part T??00 ; M98 P 8001 ;
2202 C–axis machining 0705, 504F, 1F40, 0004, 0103, 0004, 4402, 1101, 0001, 0004
coordinate system setting M98 P 8000 ; T??? ; G50 X Z ;
Tool selection T code
command
Actually output NC program is as shown below:
%
O100;
:
:
: Lathe turning
: machining process
:
:
M98P8000;
T0101;
G50X_ Z_ ;
G0;
G97S2000M??; First C–axis
: machining process
: Approach, machining,
: and escape
T0100;
M98P8001;
:
:
:
192
M98P8000;
T0303;
G50X_ Z_ ;
:
:
:
Y0300; The i–th C–axis
M98P8001; machining process
:
:
:
M98P8000;
T0505; First C–axis
G50X_ Z_ ; machining process
:
:
:
T0500;
M98P8001;
M05;
M30;
%
NOTE
No NC programs with program numbers 8000 and 8001 can
be output in the FAPT.
Thus, manually create them beforehand.
O8000;
M05;
M; C–axis clutch on
G28H0. ;
G50C0. ;
M99;
O8001;
M ; C–axis clutch off
M01;
M99;
193
5.3 For both general tapping and rigid tapping processes, select the C–axis
tapping process. Whether general tapping or rigid tapping is to be
RIGID TAPPING NC performed is set in the cutting conditions.
DATA INPUT (1) Cutting conditions
In response to the prompt “TYPE”, set either 1 (general tapping) or 2
(rigid tapping).
(2) Examples of NC data output

TYPE 1: General tapping
G50X150.Z150.CO.
G00T0101
G97S0159M13
X50. (Warning 1)
Z2.
G98G84(G88)Z–13.R0.F239
C90.
C180
TYPE 2: Rigid tapping
G50X150.Z150.CO.
G00T0101
X50.
Z2.
G98G84(G88)Z–13.R0.M29S0159M13F239.
C90. (Warning 2) (Warning 1)
C180
WARNING
1 An M code is output only for forward spindle rotation. So,
the value set in MTF No.1313 is output. In the above
example, MTF No.1313 is set to 13.
2 M code specifying the rigid mode. In the above example,
the value set in MTF No.1350 (MTF No.1321 for 5700 series
of 16–T CAP II) is output.
194
(3) MTF Setting

1) Define the value of the M code for specifying the rigid tapping
mode in MTF No.1350 (MTF No.1321 for 5700 series of 16–T
CAP II).
2) MTF function tables 2207 and 2208 are used for both general
tapping and rigid tapping.
FANUC standard MTF
1350=29 ... (For 5700 series of 16–T CAP II, 1321 = 29)
2207=5802,6602,6302,1101, 0001,AA01, 0903,1505, 0203,0005
G98 G98 G84 X Z C R MXX S Mxx
G99 G88
2208=0503,0B03, 0004, 0000
F K ;
CAUTION
When rigid tapping is to be performed, set an F code after
the S code setting in MTF function table Nos.2207 and
2208. If the F code is specified before the S code, the F
code and its value are not output.
New function code

Three high-order One low-order
Function Preparation
digits digit
Outputs M code M code set in MTF

that specifies rigid No.1350
1 5 0 5 tapping. (MTF No.1321 for
5700 series of
16–T CAP II)
195
5.4
FACE MILLING
Fig. 5.4 (a)

Data for face milling shape in Fig. 5.4 (a) are as follows:
(1) ELEMENT SYMBOL
POSITION Z = 70
START POINT X0 = 80
C0 = 0
CUTTING POS. PE = 0
EBD POINT DX = 40
ANGLE FROM C A = 30
(2) ELEMENT SYMBOL ±
END POINT DX = –40
(3) ELEMENT SYMBOL ¿
C=0
(4) ELEMENT SYMBOL ½
ANGLE FROM C A = 30
(5) Figure element ´
END POINT DX = 40
(6) Figure element ¾
END POINT DX = 80
C=0
196
Set the cutting condition data and tool data as follows:

(1) CUTTING CONDITIONS
RPM N = 689.7
FEED RATE FR = 0.025
FT = 0.035
CLEARANCE C1 = 2
(2) TOOL DATA
TOOL DIAMETER DT = 30
CUT WIDTH DS = 30
CUT LENGTH LT = 30
CUT COUNT NT = 10
SETTING DIRECTION CP = 1
Output NC data becomes as follows:
OXX;
.
.
.
G50X_ Z_ C_ ;
G00T___ ;
G97S0690;
N100 X154.Z70.;
C98.056;
G12.1;
N101 G01 X107.037 F172.;
N102 X70.668C45.135;
N103 X–42.842C53.168;
N104 X–113.51C8.033;
N105 X–70.668C–45.135;
N106 X42.842C–53.168;
N107 X113.51C–8.033;
N108 X107.037C0.;
G13.1;
.
.
.
197
Fig. 5.4 (b) Tool path by output NC data
198
First cutting point and approach point

The cutting point always starts from a point where the tool is offset normal
to the starting element when the right and left of an element is cut.
Fig. 5.4 (c)

Bit 0 of MTF 1305 is used to switch between NC data created with
consideration for cutter compensation at the FAPT side, and NC data
created using the cutter compensation function at the NC side.
MTF1305
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Cutter compensation:
0 : Performed by FAPT (G40/41/42 not output)
1 : Performed by NC (G40/41/42 output)
1) MTF 1305 bit 0 = 0:

NC data with cutter compensation at the FAPT is output when cutting
on the left side of the defined figure as well as when cutting on the right
side. Cutter is not considered when cutting on the element.
199
Example 1:
Cutting on the right of the element
N1 X134. :
N2 Z–5. ;
N3 C52.063 ;
N4 G12.1 ;
N5 G1 X115.015 F78. ;
N6 X28.07 C55.769 ;
N7 X32.703 C64.974 ;
N8 G13.1 ;
N9 G0 Z150. ;
N10 X150. ;
2) MTF 1305 bit 0 = 1:

NC data is created using the cutter compensation start block MTF
2212, but cancel block MTF 2213 is also accessed. With standard
settings, NC data such as the following is created.
Example 2:
When cutting on the right of a defined shape, output the G code (G42)
set in cutter compensation start block MTF 1232 and the G code (G40)
set in cutter compensation cancel block.
N1 X134. :
N2 Z–5. ;
N3 C45. ;
N4 G12.1 ;
N5 G1 G42 X100. F78. ;
N6 X0. C50. ;
N7 G40 C67. ;
N8 G13.1 ;
N9 G0Z150. ;
N10 X150. ;
200
3) When cutting on the element, the result is as shown below, regardless

of the value of MTF 1305 bit 0.
Example 3:
When cutting on the element
N1 X100. :
N2 Z2. ;
N3 C45. ;
N4 G12.1 ;
N5 G1 Z–5. F31. ;
N6 X0. C50. F78. ;
N7 Z2. ;
N8 G13.1 ;
N9 G0 Z150. ;
N10 X150. ;
201
5.5 Example of cylindrical figure

SIDE MILLING
Expansion diagram
Programming of the above cylindrical figure is the following below.

1) Figure element ±
Start point CO = 0 Z = 40
Cylinder diameter DX = 90
End point C = 40
2) Figure element ½
End point Z = 80 C = 140
End point C = 220
4) Figure element ¿
End point Z = 40 C = 320
End point C = 360
202
Tool data and cutting condition data are set as given below.
(Tool data)
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . DT = 10
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS = 10
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . LT = 30
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . NT = 4
SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = 0 (face use)
(Cutting condition)
SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = 4138
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FR = 0.025
FT = 0.01
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 = 2
Sample MTF setting
No.1305 = 00000000
No.1340 = 0
No.1341 = 0
No.2209 = 0102, 5702, 0170, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
G1 G18 W0 H0 ; G7.1 C ;
G19 G107
No.2210 = 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000
G7.1 C ;
G107
The following NC data are output:
G0 T0808;
G97 S2000 M13;
Z–40.;
X104. ;
C0;
G1 G18 W0 H0 ;
Start of cylindrical interpolation
G7.1 C45000 ;
X90. F80. ;
N1 C40. F200.;
N2 X–80. C140. ;
N3 G3 C220. R50.862;
N4 G1 Z–40. C320.;
N5 C360. ;
G7.1 C0; End of cylindrical interpolation
G0 X104.;
203
Parameters for side milling

1) System parameter
(1) Side milling machining process parameter
Bit #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
305
Bit 0 Unused
Bit 1 Coolant
0 : not used
1 : used
Bit 2 Tool compensation cancel
0 : not output
1 : output
Bit 3, 4 Approach (X, Z, C axis)
00: simultaneous 1 axis
01: simultaneous 2 axis
11, 10 : simultaneous 3 axis
Bit 5 Return relief (X, Z axis)
0 : simultaneous 2 axis
1 : simultaneous 1 axis
Bit 7 Transit point setting screen
0 : not displayed
1 : displayed
(2) Side milling machining process single step
Bit #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
315
Bit 0 Process start

Bit 1 Prior to approach
Bit 2 Prior to return relief
(3) Side milling machining process track color
No .585 2
Initial value (green)
204
2) MTF
Initial
value
1305 BIT 00000000 Bit 1: Specifies whether to output the radius

for cylindrical interpolation with or
without a decimal point.
0: Without a decimal point.
1: With a decimal point.
1340 Integer 0 0: The C–axis is parallel to the X–axis.

1: The C–axis is parallel to the Y–axis.
1341 Integer 0 0: Match the number of fractional digits of

the X–axis least input increment in MTF
No.1030.
1: Match the number of fractional digits of
the Z–axis least input increment in MTF
No.1031.
2209 Function table Start of cylindrical interpolation
2210 Function table End of cylindrical interpolation
Function code
Three high-order One low-order

Function
digits digit
Outputs a G code FS15: G7.1

6 4 0 2 for cylindrical FS16: G107
interpolation.
CAUTION
1 If MTF No.1344 is 0 (the C–axis is parallel to the X–axis),
G18 is output as the plane selection command at the start
of circular interpolation. In this case, a left–handed
coordinate system is used. If 1344 is 1 (the C–axis is
parallel to the Y–axis), the plane selection command is G19,
and right–handed coordinate system is used.
2 For the G1 move command at the start of cylindrical
interpolation, dummy values W0 and H0 are a output. This
means that approach takes place before the start of
cylindrical interpolation.
3 The cylinder radius specified in the cylindrical interpolation
command is output in the least input increment for the axis
specified in MTF No.1341.
4 If bit 1 of MTF No.1305 is set to 0, the cylinder radius
specified in the cylindrical interpolation command is output
without a decimal point. If bit 1 of MTF No.1305 is set to 1,
the radius is output with a decimal point. (MTF No.1305 is
also referenced for the C0 value output at the end of
cylindrical interpolation.)
205
5.6 To generate a G85/G89 boring cycle for C–axis machining, select

C–AXIS DRILL for the machining type on the machining definition
G85/G89 BORING screen.
CYCLE Once TYPE 4 is selected on the cutting condition screen, then the cutting
conditions are set, a G85/G89 boring cycle is output during NC data
preparation.
(1) Machine tool file (1xxx)
Parameter Initial value for Initial value for
Format Description
No. 16/18 CAP II 15–TFB/15–TTFB
1376 Real Boring cycle: 85 89

number front face
1377 Real Boring cycle: 89 89

number side face
(2) Function table (2xxx)

The following blocks are referenced during NC data preparation.
1) For 16/18–TC and 16i/18i–TA
2216 =5802, 6002, 6702, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503, 0B03
G98 G98 G85 X Z C R P F K
2217 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 Repeat count

;
Feedrate (feed per revolution)
Dwell time at the bottom of the hole
Distance between the initial point and the reference point
2) For 15–TFB/15–TTFB
2216 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6702, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G89 X Z C R P F
G18 G99
G19 Feedrate (feed per revolution)
2217 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 Dwell time at the bottom of the hole
L ;
Distance between the initial point and the
reference point
Repeat count
NOTE
A new function code, 6702, has been provided to enable
output of a boring cycle G code.
206
B–61804E–2/05 C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION 6. CAUTIONS ON C–AXIS FAPT
6 CAUTIONS ON C–AXIS FAPT
207
6. CAUTIONS ON C–AXIS FAPT C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
6.1
SIMULTANEOUS
AXIS MOVE
CONTROL OF
APPROACH AND
RETURN RELIEF
6.1.1 The setting of the number of simultaneous moving axes in the approach
Setting of Parameter and the return relief can be specified by 0300 – 0304 system parameters.
The simultaneous 1 axis, 2 axes or 3 axes can be specified at the approach.
The simultaneous 1 axis or 2 axes can be specified for X and Z at the return
relief.
6.1.2 1) Simultaneous 1 axis specification

Specification of Move The move order of C–axis always becomes last.
Order at the Time of The order of X–axis and Z–axis is set by MTF 1084.
the Approach 2) Simultaneous 2 axes specifications
i) When MTF 1307 is set to 1, the axes move according to the setting
of MTF 1084. For instance, when MTF 1084 is set to 1, the order
becomes as follows:
Approach in end face: ZC–axis to X–axis
Approach in outside diameter: XC–axis to Z–axis
ii) In case MTF 1307 is 0, the C–axis moves after the move of
XZ–axis.
6.1.3 The meaning of under–mentioned MTF changes because C–axis

Type of NC Data machining is added.
The 2018th: Simultaneous 3 axes approach
The 2031st: First motion in simultaneous 1 axis approach
First motion in simultaneous 2 axes approach
The 2032nd:2nd motion in simultaneous 1 axis approach
3rd motion in simultaneous 1 axis approach
2nd motion in simultaneous 2 axes approach
208
B–61804E–2/05 C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION 6. CAUTIONS ON C–AXIS FAPT
6.2 The approach in C–axis machining should be done in order of

simultaneous one axis and simultaneous 2 axes of XZ to C axis.
SPINDLE
The rotating direction at the half–fixed indexing is determined by + or –
POSITIONING setting the indexing angle.
METHOD If the spindle cannot move by the indexing angle during the half–fixed
indexing, an error is generated.
When the half–fixed indexing is used, set the machine zero point
coordinate value of the C–axis to 0.
209
7. IN–FEED MACHINING IN C–AXIS
FACE MILLING PROCESS C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
7 IN–FEED MACHINING IN C–AXIS FACE MILLING

PROCESS
In–feed machining can be performed toward a face milling with the

cutting width defined in the X axis direction.
In addition, in–feed machining can be performed toward an interpolated
plane with the cutting depth defined in the Z axis direction.
210
B–61804E–2/05 C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION FACE MILLING PROCESS
7.1 A figure can be defined in the same way as a face milling defined in (7)
of Section 1.3.2 of this part, except for the following restrictions:
FIGURE DEFINITION
(1) If multiple face millings are defined in a single definition, this function
is not supported.
(2) If cutting on an entity is defined, this function is not supported.
211
7.2 Machining type

Select C–AXIS F. MILL process from the machining definition
MACHINING screen.
DEFINITION Tool data
Use an end mill tool for milling.
Cutting conditions
The “DRIVE ...DR=” prompt is displayed on the cutting condition
screen before the prompt for the machining method. To perform
in–feed machining, define 1. Otherwise, define 0.
When a cutting condition is newly defined, initial values are defined.
When a family program that has been created using an earlier version
is loaded, 0 is defined.
Select and define one of the following three types of in–feed
machining methods.
DRIVE...DR = (1: on 0: off)

In–feed machining methods ... TP =
Select one of the following machining types. (initial value: 2)
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
3: Roughing → finishing
If in–feed machining is defined, the following prompts are displayed.

Define a value for each prompt.
Cutting allowance ... RX = Cutting allowance in the X axis direction

(initial value: undefined)
RZ = Cutting allowance in the Z axis direction
Cutting width ........... W1 = Depth of a single cut in the X axis direction
(initial value: tool diameter DT * value in
system parameter No. 372)
Cutting depth ........... D1 = Depth of a single cut in the Z axis direction
Finishing allowance ... TX = Finishing allowance in the X axis direction
(initial value: value in system parameter
No. 368)
TZ = Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction
(initial value: value in system parameter
No. 373)
Note the following when defining data for cutting conditions:

(1) If multiple face millings are defined upon figure definition, or if
cutting on the entity of a face milling is defined, in–feed machining
cannot be defined.
If an attempt is made to make such definitions, an error occurs
(correct key input is required) and another input is not accepted.
(2) When in–feed machining is performed with the method specified
by machining type 2 (finishing), the prompts for cutting allowance
(RZ) and cutting depth (D1) are not displayed.
(3) If an attempt is made to input a negative value in any of the prompts
for the cutting width (W1), number of cuts (N1), cutting depth
(D1), and finishing allowance (TX/TZ), an error occurs (correct
input is required) and another input is not accepted.
When defining data other than the above, there is no difference
from the conventional definition.
212
However, note the following points when defining data because they
are not checked upon the creation of an NC format.
CAUTION
1 When cutting a face milling from the outside diameter,
setting too great a cutting allowance results in an excess air
cut.
2 When cutting a pocketed face milling from the inner surface,
setting too great a cutting allowance may result in excessive
cutting of a parts figure.
Automatic process determination

When a face milling is defined using the automatic process
determination function, method 2 without in–feed machining is set.
Therefore, to use this function, modification is required on the cutting
condition screen.
213
7.3 The following system parameters have been added.

SYSTEM No. Format Initial value Description
PARAMETERS 372 Real number 0.2 Rate of cutting along the X
axis upon C–axis notching
(rate to the tool diameter)
373 Real number 0.5 (mm specification) Finishing allowance along the
0.02 (inch specification) Z axis upon C–axis notching
7.4 No MTF parameter is added to this function.

MTF Use conventional MTF parameters.
(Bit 0 of MTF parameter No. 1305 can be used as usual to specify whether
to create NC data with the conversational program by considering cutter
compensation or to create NC data by using the NC cutter compensation
function.)
214
7.5 (1) Roughing

TOOL PATH (a) Tool path viewed from an end face
DRAWING Operation is as follows:

D

Face milling parts

figure
W1 TX+DT/2
(Cutting width) (Finishing allowance along the X axis
direction + tool diameter/2)
1) Performs the operation that is set using approach. . . . . . D

(The above figure shows an example of normal direction
approach.)
2) Performs the first cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At this time, if the tool path is drawn outside a blank, air cut
results.
3) Cuts the figure by the specified cutting width (W1). . . . .
4) Cuts the figure with the finishing allowance (TX) left uncut.
..............
5) Performs the escape operation set using the escape method.
..............
(The above figure shows an example of normal direction
escape.)
215
(b) Cutting order viewed from a side face
TZ (Finishing allowance)
RZ (Cutting allowance)
X
D1 (Cutting depth)
D
W1 (Cutting width) RX
(Cutting allowance)

DT/2 (Cutter radius)
TX (Finishing allowance)
Z
Side view of a face milling
The following operations are performed.

1) Portions D and to be cut off are subject to the machining
explained in “Tool path viewed from an end face.”
At this time, machining cannot be performed in reverse order.
Cutting must always be executed sequentially, in the direction
toward the face milling.
2) When cutting along the Z axis is performed, the approach and
escape methods are the same.
The approach and escape points along the Z axis are determined
by subtracting the Z–axis clearance (C1) from the position of
the blank where the end face has a maximum size before the
figure is cut off by roughing.
3) When a figure is cut along the Z axis, after the final cutting in
the previous stage ends and the tool retracts in the Z axis
direction, polar coordinate interpolation is canceled. Then, the
first approach point is positioned in the next stage by means of
rapid traverse with the Z–axis coordinate unchanged, and polar
coordinate interpolation is restarted.
4) For portions and , then and , machining is performed
in the same way as shown in the tool path for portions D and
.
5) The number of cuts along the X axis is calculated as follows:
Cutting allowance (RX)
Cutting width along the X axis (W1)
The remainder obtained from the above calculation is assumed
as the amount of the final cut along the X axis.
216
6) The number of cuts along the Z axis is calculated as follows:

Cutting allowance (RZ)
Cutting depth along the Z axis (D1)
The remainder obtained from the above calculation is assumed
as the amount of the final cut along the Z axis.
(2) Finishing
Cutting order viewed from a side face
TZ (Finishing allowance)
X

TX
(Finishing
allowance)
Z
Side view of a face milling
The following operations are performed.

1) The finishing allowance along the Z axis (TZ) is cut off in the
order of portions D then .
When the machining defined with machining type 3 is
performed, the cutting width and number of cuts along the X
axis is the same as for roughing.
2) Finally, the finishing allowance along the X axis (TX),
indicated by , is cut off.
3) The approach and escape points along the Z axis are determined
by subtracting the Z–axis clearance (C1) from the position of
the blank where its end face has a maximum size before the
figure is cut off by roughing.
When machining defined with machining type 3 is performed,
the approach and escape methods are the same as for roughing.
217
IX. Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B–61804E–2/05 Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION 1. OVERVIEW
1 OVERVIEW
The Y–axis FAPT function is provided as an option. The following

Y–axis machining can be programmed by using this function.
221
1. OVERVIEW Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
1.1 Center drilling (CENTER DRILL), drilling (THROUGH HOLE), and

tapping (TAP) on a side face and end face can be programmed.
DRILLING
Both on a side face and end face, hole figures can be specified on a
circumference (CIRCLE HOLE), line (LINE HOLE), or at a desired
position (RANDOM HOLE).
222
1.2 The following machining can be programmed:

MILLING 1) Machining a pattern
On a side face and end face, a rectangle with rounded corners, like that
shown below, can be programmed as a pattern.
This pattern can be used to perform the following machining:
223
1. OVERVIEW Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
2) Machining a desired figure

A desired figure can be input by using the arrow keys. The tool path
can be specified on the right side, left side, or center of the input figure.
The following machining can be programmed:
224
1.3 If the C–axis angles (phase) of the desired machining planes are specified,
as well as the figure to be machined, the figure can be machined on the
ROTATING THE specified planes.
MACHINING PLANE The following figure shows holes of identical figures machined on plane
A (0°), plane B (90°), plane C (180°), and plane D (270°). Only a single
hole figure is programmed for this machining.
225
(MENU 2) Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
2 PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2)
226
B–61804E–2/05 Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION (MENU 2)
2.1 After the figure of a part to be turned is input using menu 2, the following
soft keys are displayed on the screen.
SPECIFYING A
Y–AXIS MACHINING
PROFILE
Press the [Y–AXIS MENU] soft key. The menu screen for programming
a Y–axis machining profile is displayed.
Upon the display of the “FIGURE TYPE =” prompt, input the number of
the desired machining profile (1 to 10). The detailed data input screen is
displayed.
NOTE
Up to 10 profiles can be input.
227
Soft keys
PART FIGURE: Displays the figure definition screen for turning.
ALL DELETE: Deletes all defined data for a Y–axis figure.
NEW: Cancels the defined data for a Y–axis figure. Press
this key to define a new Y–axis figure.
CHECK ALL: Draws a figure according to the defined data.
CURSOR´
CURSOR±: Moves the cursor forward and backward.
NEXT PAGE: Displays the data setting screen selected by the cursor.
If this soft key is pressed after the cursor has been
positioned to an undefined number, the program
menu screen is displayed.
228
2.2
SPECIFYING THE
WARNING
Y–AXIS FIGURE 1 After entering part figure data, check the entered data.
DATA Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding
CAUTION
machined properly.
229
The data input screen, featuring a figure for Y–axis machining (excluding
the machining of a figure on a side face or end face) is configured as shown
below:
Soft keys
BACK PAGE: Returns the display to Y axis machining menu screen.
When this key is depressed in the course of data setting,
the already input data becomes invalid.
CHECK: Draws the figure according to the input data.
(Only patterns defined here are drawn.)
CURSOR´
CURSOR±: Moves the cursor forward and backward.
NEXT PAGE: Y axis machining menu screen proceeds.
(1) Screen for specifying holes on a circumference on the end face
Specify the following values:

PLANE (Z–AXIS): PZ = Position of the drilling plane
DEPTH: DT = Hole depth
THREADING DIA: WT = Hole diameter
THROUGH HOLE: TH = 1 for through hole, 0 for blind hole
CENTER DRILL: CG = 1 for center drilling, 0 for other
machining
230
TAPPING: TA = 1 for tapping, 0 for other machining

PITCH: PT = Pitch of tapping
C.CENTER (X–AXIS): CDX = Center of the circumference (diameter)
(Y–AXIS): CY = Center of the circumference (radius)
CIRCLE RADIUS: RD = Radius of the circumference
INTERVAL: AB = Whether multiple holes are drilled at
regular intervals (0 for regular intervals,
1 for irregular intervals)
HOLE QUANTITY: AC = Number of holes (Up to 100 for drilling
at regular intervals, up to 6 for drilling at
irregular intervals)
ANGLE: A1 = Hole position (Angle, the angle of the
first hole if multiple holes are to be
drilled)
A2 = Position of the second hole (for drilling
at irregular intervals)
A3 = Position of the third hole (for drilling at
A4 = Position of the fourth hole (for drilling at
A5 = Position of the fifth hole (for drilling at
AE = Angle of the last hole if multiple holes
are drilled
POS.QUANTITY: NG = Number of phases (up to 6)
POSITION ANGLE: G1 = Position of the first phase (angle)
G2 = Position of the second phase (angle)
G3 = Position of the third phase (angle)
G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle)
G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle)
G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)
231
(2) Screen for specifying holes on a line on the end face

THROUGH HOLE: TH = 1 for through hole, 0 for blind hole
machining
POSITION (Y–AXIS): LY = Position of the line (radius)
HOLE PITCH: PH = Interval between holes when drilled at
regular intervals (radius)
HOLE POSITION: DX1=Hole position (X coordinate, the
position of the first hole when multiple
holes are drilled)
DX2=Position of the second hole (diameter,
for drilling at irregular intervals)
DX3=Position of the third hole (diameter, for
drilling at irregular intervals)
DX4=Position of the fourth hole (diameter, for
DX5=Position of the fifth hole (diameter, for
DX6=Position of the last hole if multiple holes
are drilled (diameter)
SHIFT COUNT: NS = Number of rows of holes to be drilled
SHIFT VALUE: SH= Interval between rows if multiple rows
of holes are drilled (radius)
232

(3) Screen for specifying holes at desired positions on the end face

THROUGH HOLE: TH = 1 for a through hole, 0 for a blind hole
machining
HOLE QUANTITY: AC = Number of holes (Up to 6)
233
HOLE POSITION: DX1=Position of the first hole

(X coordinate, diameter)
Y1 = Position of the first hole
(Y coordinate, radius)
DX2=Position of the second hole
Y2 = Position of the second hole
DX3=Position of the third hole
Y3 = Position of the third hole
DX4=Position of the fourth hole
Y4 = Position of the fourth hole
DX5=Position of the fifth hole
Y5 = Position of the fifth hole
DX6=Position of the sixth hole
Y6 = Position of the sixth hole
234
(4) Screen for specifying holes on a circumference on the side face

PLANE (X–AXIS): PDX=Position of the drilling plane (radius)
machining
C.CENTER (Z–AXIS): CZ = Center of the circumference
(Y–AXIS): CY = Center of the circumference (radius)
CIRCLE RADIUS: RD = Radius of the circumference
ANGLE: A1 = Hole position (Angle, the angle of the
first hole when multiple holes are
drilled)
A2 = Position of the second hole (for drilling
A3 = Position of the third hole (for drilling at
A4 = Position of the fourth hole (for drilling at
A5 = Position of the fifth hole (for drilling at
AE = Angle of the last hole if multiple holes
are drilled
235

(5) Screen for specifying holes on a line on the side face

PLANE (X–AXIS): PDX=Position of the drilling plane (diameter)
machining
POSITION (Y–AXIS): LY = Position of the line (radius)
236
HOLE PITCH: PH = Interval between holes if they are drilled

at regular intervals
HOLE POSITION: Z1 = Hole position (Z–coordinate, the
position of the first hole if multiple holes
are drilled)
Z2 = Position of the second hole (for drilling
Z3 = Position of the third hole (for drilling at
Z4 = Position of the fourth hole (for drilling at
Z5 = Position of the fifth hole (for drilling at
Z6 = Position of the last hole if multiple holes
are drilled
SHIFT COUNT: NS = Number of rows of holes
SHIFT VALUE: SH = Interval between rows if multiple rows
of holes are drilled
237
(6) Screen for specifying the positions of holes on a side face

PLANE (X–AXIS): PDX=Position of the drilling plane (diameter)
machining
HOLE QUANTITY: AC = Number of holes (Up to 6)
HOLE POSITION: Z1 = Position of the first hole (Z coordinate)
Y1 = Position of the first hole
Z2 = Position of the second hole
(Z coordinate)
Y2 = Position of the second hole
Z3 = Position of the third hole (Z coordinate)
Y3 = Position of the third hole
Z4 = Position of the fourth hole (Z coordinate)
Y4 = Position of the fourth hole
Z5 = Position of the fifth hole (Z coordinate)
Y5 = Position of the fifth hole
Z6 = Position of the sixth hole (Z coordinate)
Y6 = Position of the sixth hole
238

239
(7) Screen for specifying a pattern on the end face

PLANE (Z–AXIS): PZ = Position of the cutting plane
DEPTH: DT = Cutting depth
T.CENTER (X–AXIS): SDX=Center of the rectangle (diameter)
(Y–AXIS): SY = Center of the rectangle (radius)
TRACK WIDTH: U = Width of the rectangle (radius)
TRACK LENGTH: V = Length of the rectangle (radius)
ROUNDNESS: R = Radius if the corners are rounded
240
(8) Screen for specifying a pattern on a side face

PLANE (X–AXIS): PDX=Position of the cutting plane (diameter)
DEPTH: DT = Cutting depth
T.CENTER (Z–AXIS): SZ = Center of the rectangle
(Y–AXIS): SY = Center of the rectangle (radius)
TRACK WIDTH: W = Width of the rectangle
TRACK LENGTH: V = Length of the rectangle (radius)
ROUNDNESS: R = Radius of rounding if the corners are
rounded
241
(9) Screen for checking a figure
When the [CHECK] soft key is pressed on the detailed figure data setting
screen, the figure is drawn according to the data set as shown above. If
a figure has been programmed with symbolic keys, the figure is drawn
simultaneously. The screen used for programming a figure does not have
the [CHECK] soft key. (See (12) and (13) below.)
The figure above shows the hole figures on the side face. The side view
on the left shows the hole positions in the YZ plane. The front view, on
the right, shows the position of the drilling plane with a dotted line.
If hole figures on the end face are displayed, the front view, on the right,
indicates the hole positions in the XY plane with circles (D). The side
view, on the left, uses a dotted line to indicate the drilling plane.
(10) Screen for checking an entire figure
When the [CHECK ALL] soft key is pressed on the Y–axis figure
definition menu screen, the figure selected with the cursor is drawn as
shown above.
To draw another programmed figure, press the [LAST FIGURE] or
[NEXT FIGURE] soft key.
242
(11) Screen for specifying a figure on an end face
The XY plane is drawn and the prompts relating to the figure elements and
coordinates are displayed. Input a desired figure, using symbolic keys.
The following figure elements can be specified:
³±²´½¿¼¾ RC
Program a diameter as an X coordinate and a radius as a Y coordinate.
When the first element is specified, the “CP =” prompt is displayed. In
response to the prompt, specify the side to be cut, viewed from the start
point of the element.
CP = 0: On the right side, 1: On the left side, 2: On the element
Two or more single–stroke figures can be input. After a single figure
(single–stroke figure) has been defined, the “ES =” prompt is displayed.
In response to this prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft
key. The “DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE?” prompt is displayed. In
response to this prompt, enter “1, INPUT.” Then, repeat the procedure
used to define the first figure. To abandon the definition of a second
figure, enter “0, INPUT.” Up to ten single–stroke figures can be
programmed. (See additional information 1.)
NOTE
Figures cannot be defined in directory mode.
243
(12) Screen for specifying a figure on a side face
The YZ plane is drawn and prompts relating to figure elements and

coordinates are displayed. Input a figure, using the symbolic keys.
The following figure elements can be specified:
³±²´½¿¼¾ RC
Program a radius as both a Y coordinate and Z coordinate.
The rest of the procedure is the same as that for specifying a figure on an
end face.
When the first element is specified, the prompt “CP =” is displayed. In
response to this prompt, specify the side to be cut, as viewed from the start
point of the element.
CP = 0: On the right side, 1: On the left side, 2: On the element
Two or more single–stroke figures can be input. After a single figure
(single–stroke figure) has been defined, the prompt “ES =” is displayed.
In response to this prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft
key. The “DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE?” prompt is displayed. In
response to this prompt, enter “1, INPUT.” Then, repeat the procedure
used to define the first figure. To abandon the definition of the second
figure, enter “0, INPUT.” Up to ten single–stroke figures can be
programmed. (See additional information 1.)
244
NOTE
A figure cannot be defined in directory mode.
[Additional information 1]
(a) Defining a figure
1) Once a desired figure (single–stroke figure) has been defined, the
following prompt is displayed:
ES =
In response to the prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT
PAGE] soft key. Then, the following prompt is displayed:
DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? (1: YES, 0: NO)
To define only one single–stroke figures, enter 0 (NO). The Y–axis
menu screen is displayed.
To define tow or more single–stroke figures, enter 1 (YES). The
prompt relating to the start point of the next figure is displayed.
(Usually, the prompt relating to the start point is displayed after the
first figure element has been entered. In this case, however, the
prompt is displayed before any figure elements have been entered.)
If the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft key is pressed in
response to the “ES =” prompt, before the end point of the last
element has been determined, the “NO END POINT OF THE
LAST FIGURE” error message is displayed. The subsequent
screen is not displayed.
2) Specify the start point of each figure with an absolute value. The
start point of the second or subsequent figure cannot be specified
with an incremental value relative to the coordinates of the end
point of the previous figure.
3) If multiple figures are defined, a dividing point between figures is
represented by a period (.).
4) Deleting and inserting a figure element
(i) Position the cursor to the element to be deleted and press the
[ELEMENT DELETE] soft key.
A period (.), which is used as the element to divide figures,
cannot be deleted. If an attempt is made to delete a period, the
“THE KEY IS INVALID” message is displayed.
(ii)To insert a figure element, simply follow the procedure for
defining a part figure. To insert a figure between
already–defined figures, follow the steps described below:
(1) Position the cursor to the period (.) dividing the existing
figures.
(2) Press the [FIGURE INSERT] soft key.
(3) A prompt relating to the start point of the next figure is
displayed. In response to this prompt, enter the necessary
data. Then, follow the procedure for defining a part figure.
245
(b) Displaying figure elements

1) Displaying figure elements
A group of figure elements that can be drawn by a single keystroke is

displayed as a single figure and separated by a period.
The period cannot be directly entered nor deleted by using the operation
keys.
2) The start point of the first element of the first figure becomes the
machining start point when the NC data are created. Bearing this
in mind, define the part figure. The figures are machined in the
order in which they are defined.
3) To define a second or subsequent figure, specify the data of the start
point, then key in the figure element. This step differs from the
corresponding step for defining the first figure. (To define the first
figure, enter the figure element. Then, the prompt relating to the
start point is displayed.)
(c) Notes
The following restrictions are imposed on the definition of multiple
single–stroke figures:
NOTE
1 The side to be cut (CP) cannot be changed for each
individual figure.
2 A stepped figure cannot be defined. (For each definition)
246
3. SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX
B–61804E–2/05 Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION POSITIONS (MENU 3)
3 SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS (MENU 3)
On the HOME & INDEX POSITION screen of menu 3, the following

prompts are displayed. Program a diameter as the X coordinate and a
radius as the Y and Z coordinates.
Home position DXH =

ZH =
YH =
Index position DXI =

ZI =
YI =
The initial values can be specified in system parameters 0207 to 0229.

These prompts can be skipped if bit 3 of system parameter 0009 is
specified accordingly.
247
4. DEFINING MACHINING
4 DEFINING MACHINING (MENU 4)
248
4.1
MACHINING
DEFINITION MENU
To select Y–axis machining on menu 4 “MACHINING DEFINITION,”

press the [MILLING] soft key.
The soft keys of (a), below, are displayed. Select the desired type of
Y–axis machining. If the rightmost soft key [ ] is pressed, the
subsequent sets of soft keys are displayed in the following order:
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
(a) Y–axis machining
(b) C–axis machining
(c) Center drilling/drilling
249
(d) Turning
(e) Grooving/threading
NOTE
1 Pattern machining on an end face or side face is defined.
2 Machining of a figure on an end face or side face is defined.
250
4.2 1) Tool data

TOOL DATA
A rotary tool is always used for Y–axis machining.

a. Y–axis center drilling: Use a center drill (M)(Note 1).
b. Y–axis drilling: Use a drill (M).
c. Y–axis tapping: Use a tap (M).
d. Y–axis pattern machining: Use an end mill (M).
e. Y–axis contouring: Use an end mill (M).
NOTE
1 (M) represents a rotary tool for milling
2 Use the same tool data and material data as that used for
C–axis machining. For details, see the chapter on the
C–axis FAPT function.
Enter the following tool figure data:

Center drill
TOOL DIAMETER: DT =
DRILL SIZE: DS =
CUT LENGTH: LT =
NOSE ANGLE: AT =
Drill
TOOL DIAMETER: DT =
CUT LENGTH: LT =
NOSE ANGLE: AT =
Tap
TOOL DIAMETER: DT =
CUT LENGTH: LT =
TECH LENGH: LE =
PITCH: PT =
End mill
TOOL DIAMETER: DT =
CUT WIDTH: DS =
TOOTH LENGTH: LT =
NUMBER OF TEETH: NT =
251
Enter the tool setting position, as follows:

SETTING POSITION XS = (radius)
ZS = (radius)
YS = (radius)
2) Machining start position
Enter the following data:
MACHINING START POSITION
X coordinate DX0 = (diameter)
Z coordinate Z0 = (radius)
Y coordinate Y0 = (radius)
3) Passing points
Enter the following data. Program a diameter as an X coordinate and
a radius as a Y and Z coordinate.
Passing points to start machining
First point XA1 =
ZA1 =
YA1 =
Second point XA 2 =
ZA2 =
YA2 =
Passing points to end machining
First point XE1 =
ZE1 =
YE1 =
Second point XE2 =
ZE2 =
YE2 =
252
4.3
CUTTING AREA
When two or more figures are machined in a single process, the cutting
area definition screen is displayed. On this screen, the target figures are
drawn as shown above. Press the [LAST FIGURE] or [NEXT FIGURE]
soft key to select the desired figure.
253
4.4
CUTTING
CONDITIONS WARNING
1) Cutting conditions
Enter the following cutting conditions for the machining:
a. Y–axis center drilling
DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm)
CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
RPM: N= Tool rotational speed (rpm)
FEEDRATE: FT = Feed amount per revolution of the tool
(mm/rev)
b. Y–axis drilling
b–1. Drilling method 1
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm)
DWELL ON/OFF: DW =1 for dwell at the bottom of the
hole, 0 for no dwell
FEEDRATE: FT = Feed amount per revolution of the
tool (mm/rev)
RETRACTION: U= Retraction distance (mm)
tool (mm/rev)
tool (mm/rev)
254
c. Y–axis tapping
c–1. Tapping method 1
RPM: N = Tool rotational speed (rpm)
c–2. Tapping method 2 (rigid tapping)
c–3. Tapping method 3 (rigid tapping with pecking):
FANUC Series 15–TFB/TTFB only
d. Y–axis pattern machining (grooving/pocketing)
d–1. Machining method 1 (See 2) “Cutting patterns.”)
CUTTING DIRECTION: CD = Cutting direction
(See (*) Cf1 below.)
DIRECTION OF CUT: DR = Direction of cut
FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance
(mm)
ROTATION SPEED: N = Tool rotational speed (rpm)
FEEDRATE: FT = Feed amount for each tooth
in the transverse direction
of the tool (mm/rev)
FR = Feed amount for each tooth
in the longitudinal
direction of the tool
(mm/rev)
d–2. Machining method 2 (See 2) “Cutting patterns.”)
CUTTING DIRECTION: CD = Cutting direction (See (*)
Cf1 below.)
DIRECTION OF CUT: DR = Direction of cut
FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance
(mm)
255
ROTATION SPEED: N= Tool rotational speed (rpm)

in the longitudinal direction
e. Y–axis contouring (machining a desired figure)
MACHINING TYPE: TP = Machining type 1, 2, or 3
(FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance
(mm).
This prompt is
displayed when
machining type 2 is
selected.)
ROTATION SPEED: N= Tool rotational speed (rpm)
in the longitudinal
direction of the tool
(mm/rev)
APPROACH METHOD: SM = Approach type
DT = Length in the tangent
direction (mm)
DN = Length in the normal
direction (mm)
ESCAPE METHOD: EM = Escape type
DT = Length in the tangent
direction (mm)
DN = Length in the normal
direction (mm)
(*) Cf1. CD =, DR =: Set the direction, using an arrow key (´, ±, ³ or ²).
(*) Cf2. TS = 0 or an undefined value: Finishing is not performed.
(*) Cf3. TP = 1: Only roughing is performed.
TP = 2: Only finishing is performed.
TP = 3: Finishing is performed after roughing has been
completed.
(*) Cf4. SE/EM = 1: Direct approach/escape
SE/EM = 2: Tangent approach/escape
SE/EM = 3: Normal approach/escape
SE/EM = 4: Approach/escape along a tangent circle
256
2) Cutting patterns
a. Y–axis center drilling
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
b. Y–axis drilling
257
c. Y–axis tapping
c–1, c–2. Tapping methods 1 and 2
c–3. Tapping method 3 (15–TFB/TTFB only)
258
d. Y–axis pattern machining (grooving/pocketing)

d–1. Machining methods
Machining method 1
Cutting is made in a single direction as shown below. Upon
the completion of this cutting, finishing is performed along
the contour except when the finishing allowance is set to 0
or is not defined. (See d–3 below.)
Machining method 2
Cutting is performed in both directions, as shown below.
Upon the completion of this cutting, finishing is performed
along the contour except if the finishing allowance is set to
0 or is not defined. (See d–3 below.)
259
d–2. Clearance
For machining method 1 or 2, specify the following
clearances:
(1) In safety first mode (when bit 1 of system parameter 309 is
set to 0)
Blank figure
When safety first mode is selected, the tool is moved to a

position determined from the maximum dimension of the
blank outline, plus clearance C1, in rapid traverse mode
during approach/beginning of cutting. From this position,
the tool is moved in cutting feed mode to start cutting.
At the end of cutting/escape, the tool is returned to the
position determined from the maximum dimension of the
blank outline, plus clearance C1, in rapid traverse mode.
260
(2) In efficiency first mode (when bit 1 of system parameter 309

is set to 1)
Blank figure
When efficiency first mode is selected, the tool is moved

through a position determined from the maximum dimension of
the blank outline, plus clearance C1, to a position determined
by the dimension of the cutting plane, plus clearance C1, in
rapid traverse mode at approach/beginning of cutting. From
that position, the tool is moved in the cutting feed mode to start
cutting.
At the end of cutting/escape, the tool is moved back through the
position determined from the dimension of the cutting plane,
plus clearance C1, to the position determined from the
maximum dimension of the blank outline, plus clearance C1, in
rapid traverse mode.
261
Top view
(Machining method 1)
SP: Position of approach/beginning of cutting

EP: Position of end of cutting/escape
TS: Finishing allowance
D1: Depth of cut
C2: Clearance
262
(Machining method 2)
SP: Position of approach/beginning of cutting

EP: Position of end of cutting/escape
TS: Finishing allowance
D1: Depth of cut
263
d–3. Direction of cutting in finishing

Finishing is started from the position at which roughing
(machining method 1 or 2) ended. The tool is manipulated
to cut off the finishing allowance.
The direction of finish cutting is determined from the

shortest of the direction of cut and the direction of cutting.
Direction Direction
of feed of feed
264
d–4. Corner rounding

The position of approach depends on whether the corners are
rounded. (Escape is the reverse of an approach operation.)
e. Y–axis contouring (machining a figure)

Cutting on side face
Cutting on end face
265
e–1. Roughing/finishing
Roughing for contouring of type 1 or 3 is executed to leave
a finishing allowance around the defined part figure.
Position of the tool used

for roughing
Tool path : Left side viewed from Tool path : Right side viewed from
the start point of figure definition the start point of figure definition
Contour produced by roughing
WARNING
The cutting position (CP), viewed from the point at which the
definition of a part figure element is started, represents the
difference between outer surface contouring and inner
surface contouring.
Outer surface contouring:
The cutting position is on the left, viewed from the start
point of figure definition (CP = 1).
Inner surface contouring:
The cutting position is on the right, viewed from the
start point of figure definition (CP = 0).
If cutting is performed for the contour of a defined figure

element, outer surface contouring cannot be differentiated
from inner surface contouring.
e–2. Approach/escape method
The following four approach/escape patterns are supported
for contouring:
(1) Direct approach (escape)
(2) Tangent approach (escape)
(3) Normal approach (escape)
(4) Approach (escape) along a tangent circle
266
The prompt relating to the approach/escape method is not

displayed if cutting is performed for the contour of the defined
figure.
(1) Direct approach (escape): SM = 1 (EM = 1)
A cut is directly made from the approach point to the
machining start position.
(2) Tangent approach (escape): SM = 1 (EM = 1)
The following prompt is added:
LENGTH: DT = Length in the direction of the tangent (mm or inch)
Cutting start point Machining start point
When the tool offset is executed by FAPT: Left side viewed

from the start point (CP = 1)
(3) Normal approach (escape): SM = 3 (EM = 3)
LENGTH: DM = Length in the normal direction (mm or inch)
Part figure
When the tool offset is executed by FAPT: Right side viewed

267
(4) Approach (escape) along a tangent circle: SM = 4 (EM = 4)

LENGTH: DT = Length in the direction of the tangent (mm or inch)

DM = Length in the normal direction (mm or inch)
When the tool offset is executed by FAPT: Left side viewed

[Additional information]
1) An undefined input for the approach or escape method is not accepted.
An undefined input of the DT or DN value is not accepted, either.
2) If finishing is performed after roughing in end facing, the tool is
returned by an amount equal to the distance of the clearance along the
Z–axis at the end of roughing. (In side facing, the tool is returned by
an amount equal to the distance of the clearance along the X–axis.)
Then, finishing is started.
3) If cutter compensation is performed by the NC (bit 0 of MTF1305 is
set to 1) and if approach or escape along a tangent line or circle is
specified, linear movement along the tangent is inserted when cutter
compensation is started (G41/G42 is output) and ended (G40 is
output). The extension amount set in system parameter 371 is
referenced when the movement is inserted.
System parameter
1.0 Extension for approach or escape

along a tangent line or circle during
371 Real number
C–axis notching or Y–axis contouring
0.1
Unit: mm or inch
*) The parameter affects the Family Program. Always specify a positive

value for this parameter.
The cutter compensation performed by the NC instigates the following
operation, depending on the approach/retraction method:
268
3–1) Direct approach/retraction

The NC does not perform cutter compensation. If an attempt is
made to define 1 (direct) as the approach method (SM) or escape
method (EM) after bit 0 of MTF1305 has been set to 1, the
“CORRECT KEYIN” error message is displayed. The attempted
input is not accepted.
If bit 0 of MTF1305 is set to 1 after direct approach/escape has been
defined, an error occurs when an attempt is made to create the NC
data.
The NC data cannot be created.
3–2) Tangent approach/escape
For approach or escape, a linear movement equal to the extension
is inserted. The following operation is performed. (The illustration
shows the compensation on the right side of the blank outline.)
SPA: Cut start point

SPA”: Cut start point for starting the compensation
SP: Cutting start point
EP: Cutting end point
EPE: Escape end point
EPE”: Escape end point for ending the compensation
Continuous line: Programmed tool path
Dotted line: Actual tool path
269
3–3) Normal approach/retraction

amount is not inserted. The operation is shown below:
3–4) Approach/escape along a tangent circle

is inserted. The following operation is carried out. (The
outline.)
270
4) If cutter compensation is performed by the FAPT (bit 0 of MTF1305

is set to 0) and if cutting is executed along the contour of a closed blank
outline, the NC data are created so that the cutting end point (EP) meets
the cutting start point (SP) on the actual tool path.
Example: Cutting with normal approach/escape on the right side of a
blank outline
271
5 ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU 6)
In 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II, the animated simulation function
has been improved.
When using CAP II of the above models, see Part XIII, “Animated
Simulation Function II.”
Y–axis machining is simulated for the YZ and XY planes.
1) The following planes are displayed as the side view and front view for
turning, C–axis machining, and Y–axis machining:
side view Front view
Turning and C–axis machining XZ plane XC plane
Y–axis machining YZ plane XY plane
* The names of the current coordinate systems are displayed on the

screen. (See Figs. 5 (a), (b), and (c).)
2) The blank outline is painted out, in green, in the drawings of the side
face and end face.
3) The tool for Y–axis machining on the end face is drawn as shown in
Fig. 5 (b).
The tool for Y–axis machining on the side face is drawn as shown in
Fig. 5 (c).
4) During machining simulation, the picture of the blank figure can be
refreshed. The following two methods are supported:
a. [REFRESH] soft key
If this soft key is pressed during simulation, the displayed blank
figure, tool path, and machining path are refreshed.
b. Automatic refresh
At the end of each Y–axis machining process, the blank figure, tool
path, and machining path are refreshed. In Y–axis side facing, the
data is refreshed each time the phase angle is changed.
5) To simulate Y–axis machining, set related system parameters. See f,
“Parameters related to animated simulation” in 6, “system
Parameters.”
272
Fig. 5 (a)
Fig. 5 (b) (Y–axis end facing)
273
Fig. 5 (c) (Y–axis side facing)
274
B–61804E–2/05 Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION 6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
6 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
WARNING
a. Parameters to enable the skipping of prompts

Parameter No. Format Initial value Description Remarks
0009 0, 1 00010000 Specify to skip a particular question.

designation Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(8 bits) 0 0 0
Bit 0 Designation of index position

Bit 1 Designation of home position
Bit 2 Designation of machining start point
Bit 3 Designation of Y–axis index position and home
position
Bit 4 Selection of drawing format
Bit 6 Selection of standard surface roughness
0: Non skip
0: Skip
275
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
b. Common parameters for C–axis machining and Y–axis machining

Dwell time in a C–axis or Y–axis drilling process

0320 Real number 0
(unit: seconds)
Cutting speed override for applications using a tool

0321 Integer 80 made of special material (percentage of the cutting
speed for a carbide tool)
Feed amount override for applications using a tool

0322 Integer 80 made of special material (percentage of the feed
amount for a carbide tool)
Maximum spindle speed for C–axis or Y–axis

0370 Real number 2000
machining tool (unit: rpm)
1.0 Extension amount for approach/escape along a

tangent line or circle in C–axis notching or Y–axis
0371 Real number
contouring
0.1 Unit: mm or inches
c. Y coordinates of home and inde to positions

Parameter No. Format Initial value Description
Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of the home position (for head

0222 Real number 4–axis
1 with the 4 axis lathe)
Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch
Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of the home position (for head

Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of the index position (for head

Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of the index position (for head

Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of the home position on back

side machining (for head 1 with the 4 axis lathe)
Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of the home position on back

Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of the index position on back

Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of the index position on back

276
d. System parameters related to a process (for Y–axis machining)

0400 0, 1 00100100 Y–axis center drilling process parameter For Y–axis

designation Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 machining
(8 bits) 0
Bit 1 Coolant
0: Not used
1: Used
Bit 2 Cancellation of tool compensation
0: Not output
1: Output
Bit 3, 4 Approach
00: Simultaneous 1 axis
Bit 5, 6 Return relief
11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axis
Bit 7 The prompt relating to the passing point is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
0, 1 Y–axis drilling process parameter (refer to the

0401 designation 00100100 parameter No.400)
(8 bits)
0, 1 Y–axis tapping process parameter (refer to the

(8 bits)
0, 1 Y–axis pattern machining process parameter (refer to

0403 designation 00100100 the parameter No.400)
(8 bits)
0, 1 Y–axis contouring process parameter (refer to the For Y–axis

0404 designation 00100100 parameter No.400) machining
(8 bits)
0, 1 Can’t use.
0405 to 0409 designation 00000000 (Don’t change the data.)
(8 bits)
0, 1 Single step of Y–axis center drilling process

designation Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(8 bits) 0 0 0 0 0
0410 00000000 Bit 0 Process start

Bit 1 Just before approach
Bit 2 Just before escape
0: Not stopped
1: Stopped
0, 1 Single step of Y–axis drilling process (refer to the

(8 bits)
277
0, 1 Single step of Y–axis tapping process (refer to the

(8 bits)
0, 1 Single step of Y–axis pattern machining process (refer

0413 designation 00000000 to the parameter No.410)
(8 bits)
0, 1 Single step of Y–axis contouring process (refer to the

(8 bits)
0, 1 Can’t use.
0415 to 0419 designation 00000000 (Don’t change the data.)
(8 bits)
2. mm specification Clearance amount (C1) of Y–axis

0420 Real number center drilling
0.08 inch specification Unit: mm or inch
Can’t use.
0421 Real number Undefined
(Don’t change the data.)

0422 Real number drilling (machining method 1)

Can’t use.


2. mm specification Cutting depth (D1) of Y–axis

2. mm specification Return relief amount (U) of

C–axis drilling (machining
0428 Real number
method 2)
0.08 inch specification
Unit: mm or inch
Can’t use.


278


Can’t use.

0435 Real number tapping
ta ing

0436 Real number drilling

tapping (machining method 3:
0437 Real number
Rigid tapping with pecking)
Unit: mm or inch
Can’t use.
2. mm specification Clearance (C1) of Y–axis pattern

0439 Real number machining (machining method 1)

2. mm specification Finishing allowance (TS) of

Y–axis pattern machining
0441 Real number
(machining method 1)
Unit: mm or inch
Cutting depth D1
0442 Integer 80
(Percentage of the tool diameter)
Can’t use.


2. mm specification Finishing allowance (TS) of

Y–axis pattern machining
0446 Real number
(machining method 2)
Unit: mm or inch
Cutting depth D1
0447 Integer 80
(Percentage of the tool diameter)
279
Can’t use.
mm specification Clearance (CD) in the

2. longitudinal direction of the tool
and clearance (C1) in the
0449 Real number
circumferential direction of the
inch specification
0.08 tool for Y–axis contouring
Unit: mm or inch
0.5 mm specification Finishing allowance (TS) of

0450 Real number Y–axis
Y axis contouring
Can’t use.
0451 to 0459 Real number Undefined
e. System parameters related to color display (for Y–axis machining)

Standard setting value
No
Parameter No. Description
Value Color
0570 2 Green Machining path of Y–axis machining (center drilling)
0571 2 Green Machining path of Y–axis machining (drilling)
0572 2 Green Machining path of Y–axis machining (tapping)
0573 2 Green Machining path of Y–axis machining (pattern machining)
0574 2 Green Machining path of Y–axis machining (contouring)
0575 to 0578 Undefined Undefined Not used
0579 6 Light blue Y–axis machining parts figure
f. Parameters related to animated simulation

0733 Integer Undefind Value of the M code used for starting Y–axis machining
0734 Integer Undefind Value of the M code used for ending Y–axis machining
0771 Character Undefind Axis names and their order (Specify axis names in the
order in which they are programmed on the NC.
Example: XZCY)
280
B–61804E–2/05 Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION 7. NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF)
7 NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF)
WARNING
The initial values in the MTF (machine tool file) listed below
are different from those used for a production run. Actual
setting values vary with the machine. For details, refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data
values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
a. MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 1000 to 1999
0.001 mm specification Y–axis minimum setting unit

1022 Real number Unit: mm or inch
3 mm specification Number of decimal digits of the Y–axis minimum

1032 Integer setting unit
4 inch specification
Y–axis command address

2
1048 YV 1st character: absolute command
characters
2nd character: incremental command
2 Circular center address (designate 2 same characters) in Y–axis

1049 JJ
characters direction
Method of specifying the X and Y coordinates

0: Radius for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate
1: Diameter for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate
1081 Integer 1
(standard setting)
2: Radius for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate
3: Diameter for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate
Circular interpolation function

0: Two or more quadrants (Note 1)
1: One quadrant only (Note 1)
1082 Integer 2 2: Specifying radius R
3: Specifying radius R (one quadrant only)
(Note 1) The addresses specified in 1042, 1043, and 1049 become
the addresses of the center on the axes.
281
7. NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF) Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
Movement sequence of sequential approach and escape along one or

two axes if the Y–axis FAPT function is used (valid only when
simultaneous approach or escape along one or two axes is specified in
system parameters 0400 to 0405)
0: Approach is always started from the XY plane.
Retraction is always started from the Z–axis.
1: End face
Approach: Tool axis (Z–axis)
Tool path (XY plane)
1084 Integer 2 Escape: Tool path (XY plane)
Tool axis (Z–axis)
Side face
Approach: Tool axis (X–axis)
Tool path (ZY plane)
Escape: Tool path (ZY plane)
Tool axis (X–axis)
2: Reverse movement sequence of 1 above (standard setting)
3: Approach is always started from the Z–axis.
Escape is always started from the XY plane.
4000. mm specification Y–axis rapid traverse rate

1093 Integer Unit:
U it mm or iinch
h
160. inch specification
In each process, the specifications of a canned drilling cycle

(C–axis or Y–axis) are:
0: Not used.
0, 1 1: Used.
1304 designation 00000011 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(8 bits)
Center drilling
Drilling
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0
0, 1
1305 designation 00000000 Bit 0 For face milling (polar coordinate interpolation), finishing of
(8 bits) Y–axis pattern machining, and contouring, cutter compensation
is:
0: Carried out by the FAPT. (G40, G41, or G42 is not output.)
1: Carried out by the NC. (G40, G41, and G42 are output.)
Integer M code of the miscellaneous function for preparing for rigid tapping
1350 29
(3 bits)
282
b. Function table (MTF2000 to MTF2999)
Parameter
Description Remarks
No.
Outputs the block of move commands for Rapid traverse

simultaneous approach along two axes. command,
2018 Outputs the block of move commands for coolant on, etc.
simultaneous approach along four axes (with
Y–axis FAPT).
Outputs the block of move commands for Rapid traverse

simultaneous retraction along two axes. command,
2019 Outputs the block of move commands for coolant off, etc.
simultaneous retraction along three axes (with
Y–axis FAPT).
First motion of approach along an axis.

2031 First motion of simultaneous approach along
one, two, or three axes as the same time (Y–axis)
Second motion of approach along an axis.

2032 Second or subsequent motion in simultaneous
approach along one, two, or three axes (Y–axis).
First motion of retraction along an axis.

2033 First motion of simultaneous retraction along one
or two axes (Y–axis).
Second motion of retraction along an axis.

2034 Second or subsequent motion of simultaneous
retraction along one or two axes (Y–axis)
2070 Beginning part of Y–axis machining (Note 1)
2071 Beginning part of Y–axis center drilling
2072 Beginning part of Y–axis drilling
2073 Beginning part of Y–axis tapping
2074 Beginning of Y–axis pattern
2075 Beginning of Y–axis contouring
2080 Not used
2081 End part of Y–axis center drilling
2082 End part of Y–axis drilling
2083 End part of Y–axis tapping
2084 End of Y–axis pattern
2085 End of Y–axis contouring
2110 Beginning of a turning process (Note 2)
2111 Beginning of a milling process (Note 3)
Block in which cutter compensation for face Valid when bit 7

2212 milling (polar coordinate interpolation), finishing of MTF1305 is
of Y–axis pattern, or Y–axis contouring is started. set to 1
Block in which cutter compensation for face

milling (polar coordinate interpolation), finishing
2213
of Y–axis pattern, or Y–axis contouring is
canceled.
283
NOTE
1 Data is referenced at the beginning of Y–axis machining.
If two or more Y–axis machining processes are defined
continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or
subsequent processes.
2 The data is referenced at the beginning of a turning process.
If two or more turning processes are defined continuously,
the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
processes.
3 The data is referenced at the beginning of a milling process.
If two or more milling processes are defined continuously,
processes. The milling process can be a C–axis machining
process or Y–axis machining process.
c. Function codes
High–order Low–order
Function Remarks
three digits one digit
3rd axis output (Y axis) Address specified in

2 2 0 1
MTF1048
3rd axis auxiliary output Address specified in

5 5 0 1
(circular center Y axis) MTF1049
Output of V0 Output when approach

or retraction is
simultaneously
E E 0 1 performed along two
axes or when
movement is performed
along the Y–axis only
Output of Y0 Address of the first

2 0 0 7
character in MTF1048
Output of Y0 Address of the second

2 1 0 7
Output of J0 Address of the first

5 0 0 7
Output of J0 Address of the second

5 1 0 7
284
d. Referring to a function table in a Y–axis machining process
Example) Y–axis drilling
Point to be Parameter
Description
referenced No.
(1) Home position 2000 Feed, EOB, program number

(beginning of a
program) 2016 G50X_Z_Y_;
(2) Home position 2017 Movement to the tool–change point

Tool–change G0X_Z_Y_;
point
(3) Tool–change 2111 Beginning of a milling process (Note 1)

oint
point
(beginning of a 2070 Beginning of a Y–axis machining process
process) (Note 2)
2071 Beginning of a Y–axis machining process:

to 2072 for a drilling process
2075
2202 Coordinate system setting, tool selection

G50X_Z_Y_C_S_;
GOT;
2024 Specifying spindle speed

G97S_Mxx;
285
Description
referenced No.
(4) Approach Servo motor control method

First movement
from the 2018 Simultaneous approach along four axes
tool–change or
point, coolant 2031 Simultaneous approach along one, two, or
on 2032 three axes
The number of axes along which
movement is performed is determined
by bits 3 and 4 of system parameters
400 to 404.
Spindle positioning method
2031 Simultaneous approach along one, two, or

2032 three axes (Warning 1) (Warning 2)
2211 Specifying spindle indexing (Warning 3)
(5) to (9) When bit 1 of MTF1304 is set to 0 (canned drilling cycle

Command of is not used)
linear
movement or Servo motor control method
rotation
2017 Specifying rapid traverse or cutting feed
(linear movement or rotation)
2017 Specifying rapid traverse or cutting feed

2211 (linear movement)
Specifying spindle indexing
When bit 1 of MTF1304 is set to 1 (canned drilling cycle

is used)
Servo motor control method
2203 Specifying a canned drilling cycle

to (linear movement or rotation)
2206
2203 Specifying a canned drilling cycle

to (linear movement)
2206 Specifying spindle indexing
2211
WARNING
1 Specify whether the approach is simultaneously performed
along one, two, or three axes.
2 Do not specify the function code of AA01 (C–axis move
command).
3 A C–axis move command is executed.
286
NOTE
1 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
process of continuous (C–axis/Y–axis) milling processes.
process of continuous Y–axis processes.
Description
referenced No.
(10) Escape 2019 Simultaneous escape along three axes

Movement to or
the tool–change 2033 Simultaneous escape along one or two
point, coolant off 2034 axes
The number of axes along which the
400 to 404.
(11) Tool–change 2081 End part of the process:

point to 2082 for a drilling process
(End of the 2085 Txx00;
process) M1;
(12) Tool–change 2017 Movement to the home position

point G0X_Z_Y_;
machine zero
point
(13) Home position 2001 Trailing section

(end of the Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program
program) stop, EOR
287
Example) Y–axis pattern machining
Description
referenced No.
(1) Home position 2000 Feed, EOB, program number

(beginning of a
program) 2016 G50X_Z_Y_;
(2) Home position 2017 Movement to the tool–change point

Tool–change GOX_Z_Y_;
point
(3) Tool–change 2111 Beginning of a milling process (Note 1)

point
(beginning of a 2070 Beginning of a Y–axis machining process
process) (Note 2)
2071 Beginning of a Y–axis machining process:

to 2074 for a drilling process
2075
2202 Coordinate system setting, tool selection

G50X_Z_Y_C_S_;
G0T;
2024 Specifying spindle speed

G97S–Mxx;
288
Description
referenced No.
(4) Approach Servo motor control method

First movement
from the 2018 Simultaneous approach along four axes
tool–change or
point, coolant 2031 Simultaneous approach along one, two, or
on 2032 three axes
400 to 404.
2031 Simultaneous approach along one, two, or

2032 three axes (Warning 1) (Warning 2)
2211 Specifying spindle indexing (Warning 3)
(5) to (15) 2017 Specifying rapid traverse or cutting feed

Command of (linear movement or rotation)
linear 2020
movement or or Specifying a movement with circular
rotation 2221 interpolation
MTF1084 = 0, 1 (Specifying I, J, K)
MTF1084 = 2, 3 (Specifying radius R)
(16) Escape 2019 Simultaneous escape along three axes

Movement to or
the tool–change 2033 Simultaneous escape along one or two
point, coolant off 2034 axes
400 to 404.
(17) Tool–change 2081 End part of a process: 2084 for a pattern

point to machining process
(End of the 2085 Txx00;
process) M1;
(18) Tool–change 2017 Movement to home position

point G0X_Z_Y_;
home
posision
(19) Home position 2001 Trailing section

(end of Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program
program) stop, EOR
NOTE
process of continuous (C–axis/Y–axis) milling processes.
process of continuous Y–axis processes.
3 Specify whether the simultaneous approach is performed
along one, tow, or three axes.
4 Do not specify the function code of AA01 (C–axis move
command).
5 A C–axis move command is executed.
289
7.1 Example of setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to
2999 (servo motor control method)
SETTING MTF
PARAMETERS WHEN To use the Y–axis FAPT function, change MTF parameters, with numbers
ranging from 2000 to 2999, as shown below. (For other MTF parameters,
THE Y–AXIS FAPT specify standard FANUC values.)
FUNCTION IS
SUPPORTED MTF 2016 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004
G50 X Z Smax ; G0 Txxx ;
MTF 2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0503, 0004
G90 G0 X Z Y C F ;
G91 G1
MTF 2018 = 5702, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000
G17 G90 G0 X Z Y C M08 ;
G18 G91 G1
G19
MTF 2019 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G0 X Z Y M09 ;
G91 G1
MTF 2020 = 5202, 5102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 4401, 000E, 1700
G90 G0 X Z Y C I MTF 2300
G91 G3
MTF 2021 = 5202, 5102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 000E, 1701
G90 G2 X Z Y C MTF 2301
G91 G3
MTF 2031 = 5702, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000
G17 G90 G0 X Z Y C M08 ;
G18 G91 G1
G19
MTF 2032 = 5702, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000
G17 G90 G0 X Z Y C M08 ;
G18 G91 G1
G19
MTF 2033 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G0 X Z Y M09 ;
G91 G1
MTF 2034 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G0 X Z Y M09 ;
G91 G1
MTF 2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000
G50 X Z Y C ; G0 Txxx ;
MTF 2203 = 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G98 G98 G81 X Z Y C R P F
G99 G82
MTF 2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000

L ;
K
MTF 2205 = 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G98 G98 G81 X Z Y C R Q F
G99 G82
290
MTF 2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000

L ;
K
MTF 2207 = 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0903, 1505, 0203
G98 G98 G84 X Z Y C R Mxx S
G99 G84.1
MTF 2208 = 0005, 0503, 0B03, 0004

M03 F L ;
M04 K
MTF 2212 = 5202, 5002, 5302, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G0 G41 X Z Y C F ;
G91 G1 G42
MTF 2213 = 5202, 5002, 2002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G0 G40 X Z Y C F ;
G91 G1
MTF 2300 = 3301, 5501, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
K J F ;
MTF 2301 = 9901, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
R F ;
291
Machining profile
Process 1: Y–axis drilling, 10 mm diameter, 30 mm deep
Process 2: Y–axis pattern machining (pocketing), 16 mm diameter,
8 mm depth of cut, 2 mm finishing allowance, compensation
by the FAPT
The following NC data is output:
%;
O1000 ;
G50X200Z200YO. ;
G0X150.Z150.Y0. ;
G50X150.Z150.Y0.C0.S2000 ;
G0T0101 ;
G97SxxxxM03 ;
M08 ;
G17C90. ;
X40.Z102.Y–10. ;
G98G83Z68.R0.Fxxx ;
Y10. ;
G0C270. ;
Y–10. ;
G83Z68.R0. ;
Y10. ;
G0X150.Z150.Y0. ;
T0100 ;
M1 ;
292
G50X150.Z150.Y0.C270. ;
G0T0202 ;
G07SxxxxM03 ;
M08 ;
G19C0. ;
X84.Z30.Y8. ;
G1X40. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y0. ;
Z30. ;
Y–10. ;
Z60. ;
Y–12. ;
G3Z62.Y–10.K2. ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z60.Y12.J–2 ;
G1Z30. ;
G3Z28.Y10.K–2 ;
G1Y–10. ;
G3Z30.Y–12.J2. ;
G1Z60. ;
Y–10. ;
G0X84. ;
C180. ;
Z30.Y8. ;
G1X40. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y0. ;
Z30. ;
Y–10. ;
Z60. ;
Y–12. ;
G3Z62.Y–10.K2. ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z60.Y12.J–2. ;
G1Z30. ;
G3Z28.Y10.K–2 ;
G1Y–10. ;
G3Z30.Y–12.J2. ;
G1Z60. ;
Y–10. ;
G0X84. ;
Z150.X150.Y0. ;
T0200 ;
M1 ;
X200.Z200.Y0. ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
293
8. NOTES Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
8 NOTES
This function does not support the following:

1) Automatic process determination
2) Back machining
3) Machining with a vertical lathe
4) Machining with a four–axis lathe
294
X. BACK MACHINING FAPT
B–61804E–2/05 BACK MACHINING FAPT 1. OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
Diagram for machine tools with 2 spindles and 1 turret.
297
2. SPECIFICATIONS BACK MACHINING FAPT B–61804E–2/05
2 SPECIFICATIONS
298
B–61804E–2/05 BACK MACHINING FAPT 2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
PROGRAMMING
2.1.1 Input back machining base line ZP2 as well as primary machining base
Material Data Input line ZP.
(Menu No.1) In case of drawing format 2:
2.1.2 (1) Part figure input for turning

Part Figure Input This is the same as standard input method. Define the final part figure
(Menu No.2) without primary machining and/or back machining.
(2) Part figure input for C axis machining
When defining figures of end face hole, end face groove, and front face
milling, the following question is displayed.
POSITION . . . . . FS = (0: FRONT FACE, 1:REAR FACE)
This question indicates a face where the part figure exists.

Input FS = 0 in case of front face, input FS = 1 in case of rear face.
If you input FS = 0, input figure data as an image viewed from the front
face.
If you input FS = 1, input figure data as an image viewed from the rear
face.
For front view, draw an image viewed from the front side and express
front side figure with full lines and rear side figure with dotted lines.
299
2.1.3 Input the home position (DXH, ZH) and the turret index position (DXI,
Home Position and ZI) for back machining as well as those for primary machining. If those
for back machining are the same as those for primary machining, input the
Turret Index Position same values. If a position is in the second quadrant as shown in the figure
(Menu No.3) below, input a minus value for ZH or ZI.
For those questions, initial values can be set system parameters No.206
to 221. These can be skipped based on the value of system parameter
No.0009.
2.1.4 Machining except cutting off and bar feed machining can be performed
Machining Definition on the rear side.
(Menu No.4) (1) Machining type selection
Specify a machining type without discrimination of primary
machining/back machining. For work regrasping on moving from
primary machining to back machining, use “Sub cycle”.
(2) Spindle number
The question for a spindle to be used appears on the tool data screen.
SPINDLE NO ... SN = (1: 1ST SPINDLE, 2: 2ND SPINDLE)
Input SN = 1 in case of primary machining; input SN = 2 in case of
back machining. This question is used to decide an M code for
commanding spindle rotation direction.
300
WARNING
That SN = 2 in any process before sub cycle for work
regrasping and SN = 1 after this process can be input but
proper machine function cannot be guaranteed.
(3) Tool data

Designate tool data for back machining as follows:
a) Center drilling/drilling
AS=0
(AS=180 in Primary machining)
b) OD cutting
Same as tool data for primary machining. A reversible tool may
be used frequently.
c) ID cutting
d) OD grooving
Same as tool data for primary machining.
301
e) ID grooving
f) End face grooving
g) OD necking
Designate –45 degrees as tool mounting angle for OD grooving
(AS) or designate –45 degrees as that for end face grooving.
h) ID necking
Designate –45 degrees as tool mounting angle for ID grooving
(AS) or designate 45 degrees as that for end face grooving (AS).
i) OD threading
Same as tool data for primary machining
j) ID threading
AN’ is used if cutting is made along the groove center.
302
k) Face threading
Designate 0 degree as tool mounting angle for primary machining
(AS).
l) C axis machining
The following question regarding mounting direction is displayed.
SETTING DIRECTION . . . . CP = (0: SIDE, 1: FRONT
FACE, 2: REAR FACE)
For machining of rear end face, select 2.
WARNING
Machining start position
This is automatically calculated using the turret turning
position and tool mounting position. To change this value,
note the following conditions.
The path of approach or escape varies with the relation
between the work position and machining start position. In
simultaneous two axis movement, approach or escape is
performed ad shown in Fig. A unless no interference
between a work and tool exists. If interference with a work
exists, the tool bypasses the work as shown in Fig. B.
(4) Cutting direction and cutting data

Input direction is the same sa standard one.
Select CP = 2 for C axis machining of rear end face, as milling tool data
to move the cursor to machining position.
(5) Cutting condition
Input method is the same as standard one.
303
2.1.5 Primary machining NC data are prepared in primary machining

NC Data Preparation coordinate system, and back machining NC data, in back machining
coordinate system.
(Menu No.5) X2 axis is not drawn.
Primary machining coordinate Back machining coordinate
Prepared back machining NC data require use of geometry offset. A tool

is selected at the machining start position in primary machining
coordinate system, geometry offset is applied at the time of approach, and
work coordinate system is shifted. When machining is completed, offset
is canceled at the time of escape, and the tool returns to the machining start
position in primary machining coordinate system. NC data to shift
coordinate system using G50 cannot be prepared.
Example
G00 X200. Z300. ;

G50 S4500 M75 ;
T100;
G96 S200 M3 ;
X104. Z–5. T0101 ; *
X100. ;
G01 X97. Z–2 F0.65 ;
.
.
.
G00 X200. Z300. T0000 ;
M01 ;
.
.
.
.
.
* A block which approach is not made directly from the machining start
position (X200. Z300.) to approach point (X100. Z–5.) and which a
work is bypassed, is output.
304
2.1.6 The layout of screen is the same as before. Milling front view is a drawing
Animation Drawing viewed from the front side. On this screen, any figure on the rear side is
drawn with dotted lines.
(Menu No.6) In back machining FAPT, any shuck figure is not drawn.
Work regrasping from primary machining to back machining is not
drawn.
Designate an M code in MTF No.1145 with which FAPT perceives the
start of back machining. When the M code designated here is executed,
FAPT animation drawing changes into back machining mode.
305
2.2
PARAMETERS, ETC.
2.2.1 Bit 7 for system parameter No.708 indicates whether or not back
System Parameters machining is performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
708
Bit 7 0 : Back machining is not performed.

1 : Back machining is performed.
If 708#7 = 0,
Machining is the same as former FAPT.
If 708#7 = 1,
D A question for indicating the end face position, FS = _ is added on
the figure definition screen for end face hole, end face groove, and
front face milling.
D A question for indicating a spindle to be used, SN = _ is added on
the tool data screen for machining definition.
D A question for indicating mounting angle, AS = _ is added on the
tool screen for drill and center drill.
D To the question of mounting position, CP = _ on the milling tool
data screen 2 (rear end face) can be input.
D If M code that has been designated in MTF No.1145 is executed in
animation drawing, the screen changes into back machining mode.
No.214: designates the X coordinate value of home position on the turret
1 back machining.
No.215: designates the Z coordinate value of home position on the turret
1 back machining.
No.216: designates the X coordinate value of home position on the turret
2 back machining.
No.217: designates the Z coordinate value of home position on the turret
2 back machining.
No.218: designates the X coordinate value of turret Index position on the
turret 1 back machining.
No.219: designates the Z coordinate value of turret Index position on the
No.220: designates the X coordinate value of turret Index position on the
No.221: designates the Z coordinate value of turret Index position on the
306
2.2.2 (1) Back machining start M code

MTF This M code is used to start animated simulation for back machining.
Set the M code value in MTF1145. Animated simulation for back
machining is started when an M code having the set value is specified
in the NC program.
(2) MTF related to workpiece coordinate system setting G codes
1) MTF1xxx
Set the following parameters for workpiece coordinate system
selection G codes.
No. Format Initial Value Description
1252 Integer 54 Workpiece coordinate system selection G code

for the first spindle (for back machining)
1253 Integer 55 Workpiece coordinate system selection G code

for the second spindle (for back machining)
D If –1 is specified, the corresponding G code is not output.

D During the creation of NC data, whether G54 or G55 will be
output is determined from the spindle number (SN), defined
using the tool data screen for machining definition.
2) MTF2xxx (function tables)
Set the following function tables:
Coordinate system setting and tool selection T code output for turning
(for back machining)
2068=4402, 1101, 0001, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X Z Smax ; G0 Txx ;
Coordinate system setting and tool selection T code output for milling
2069=4402, 1101, 0001, AA01,0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X Z C ; G0 Txx ;
These function tables are referenced during back machining. To
output a coordinate system selection G code, modify the setting as
required.
3) Function code
The following function code has been added:
Upper three Lowest Function
digits digit
Detailed Major
classification classification
4 C 0 2 Outputs the G code specified with

MTF1252 or MTF1253. This G code is
not subject to modal control.
(Workpiece coordinate system selection
G code)
307
(3) MTF related to additional M codes for the second spindle

1) MTF1xxx
Set the following M codes for the second spindle:
Initial
Value
1410 Integer –1 Forward rotation M code for the second spindle

1411 Integer –1 Reverse rotation M code for the second spindle

1412 Integer 5 Spindle stop M code for the second spindle

1413 Integer –1 C–axis connection M code for the second spindle

1414 Integer –1 C–axis disconnection M code for the second spindle

1415 Integer 68 C–axis clamping M code for the second spindle

1416 Integer 69 C–axis unclamping M code for the second spindle

D An M code for which the corresponding parameter is set to –1

is not output.
D During the creation of NC data, whether the M code for the first
spindle or that for the second spindle will be output is
determined from the spindle number (SN), defined using the
tool data screen for machining definition.
D Three–digit integers can be used for the above M codes.
D Conventionally, the forward/reverse rotation M codes for the
second spindle have been specified using MTF1142 and
MTF1143. These MTF parameters can, however, specify only
two–digit integers. To enable the specification of three–digit
integers, MTF1410 and MTF1411 have been added. MTF1142
and MTF1143 can no longer be used.
308
2) Function codes
The following function codes are referenced. These function codes
are the same as those used conventionally to output M codes for the
first spindle. No additional function code need be defined for the
second spindle.
Upper three Lowest digit Function
digits Major
Detailed classification
classification
0 0 0 5 Outputs the spindle forward/reverse rotation M

code.
(Outputs the M code specified with MTF1410 or
MTF1411.)
0 1 0 5 Outputs the spindle stop M code when

reversing the spindle rotation.
(Outputs the M code specified with MTF1412.)
0 2 0 5 Outputs the spindle stop M code.

1 0 0 5 Outputs the C–axis connection/disconnection

M code.
(Outputs the M code specified with MTF1413 or
MTF1414.)
1 6 0 5 Outputs the C–axis clamping M code.

1 7 0 5 Outputs the C–axis unclamping M code.

2.2.3 2 (rear end face) can be designated as mounting direction of tool data for
Tool Data milling (CP).
CP = _ (1: SIDE, 1: FRONT FACE, 2: REAR FACE)
In this case, tool information 2 in tool data (FLAG2) means as follows:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 Rotation direction (TR)

0 : Positive rotation
1 : Inverse rotation
Bit 1, 2 Mounting direction (CP)
00: Side
01: Front face
11: Rear face
309
2.3
WARNINGS AND
CAUTION
WARNING
1 C axis end face machining
In a section to which part figure is defined on the rear side, C axis end face machining cannot
be performed in primary machining.
Although rear end face machining before sub cycle with work regrasping can be defined in
machining definition, machining cannot be performed in proper position using prepared NC
data.
#1: Defined machining position

#2: Machining position in case #1 machined in primary machining
In a section to which part figure is defined on the front side, C axis end face machining cannot
be performed in back machining.
2 C axis side machining
Be sure to perform C axis side machining in primary machining. Although side face machining
before auxiliary machining with work regrasping can be defined in machining definition,
machining cannot be performed in proper position using prepared NC data similarly to 3.1.
3 Machining sequence
Define the machining sequence as follows regardless of axis machining or turning:
(1) Primary machining, (2) Sub cycle (work regrasping), (3) Back machining
4 Spindle number
The question of spindle number on the tool data screen, SN = _ is used to decide an M code
for indicating spindle rotation direction. Although, SN = 2 in any process before auxiliary
machining with work regrasping or SN = 1 after this process can be defined, machine operation
is not guaranteed.
5 Workpiece coordinate system setting G code
Before attempting to run an NC program created using this function, ensure that the workpiece
origin offset for the workpiece coordinate system to be used has been set in the NC parameter
correctly. Failure to set the correct offset may cause damage to the blank or tool.
310
B–61804E–2/05 BACK MACHINING FAPT 3. EXAMPLE OF NC DATA
3 EXAMPLE OF NC DATA
This section shows an example output block when MTF2068 is set as

follows:
Coordinate system setting and tool selection T code output for turning (for
back machining)
2068 = 5002, 4C02, 0103, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G0 G54 Txx M8 ;
Example output
0100(BACK–FAPT) ;
N001(ROUGH OF OUT.) ; . . . . . Start machining for the first spindle.
G0G54T0101M8 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Output the block specified with MTF2068.
G96S1500M3 ;
X85. ;
Z2. ;
G1X5.F0.65 ;
.
.
<Reholding of workpiece by means of miscellaneous function>

N006(ROUGH OF OUT.) ; . . . . . Start machining for the second spindle.
G0G55T0606M8 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Output the block specified with MTF2068.
G96S2000M203 ;
X65.5 ;
Z–2. ;
Z0. ;
G1X1.5.F0.2 ;
.
.
311
XI. AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B–61804E–2/05 DETERMINATION FUNCTION 1. OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
WARNING
For those machining processes that have been
automatically created, check the machining sequence. If
the machining sequence is invalid, the tool may collide with
the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may
occur, possibly causing damage to the machine or tool itself,
The automatic process determination function enables the operator to

create NC data by simply entering the material figure and part figure and
pressing soft keys.
This function eliminates or greatly reduces the number of data entering
operations for menu item 4 (machining definition).
This function uses tooling information, tool data, and setting data. Set
these data before using this function.
The following processes can be specified using the automatic process
determination function:
1) Turning process
– Center drilling
– Drilling
– Outer surface roughing
– Inner surface roughing
– Outer surface semifinishing
– Inner surface semifinishing
– Outer surface finishing
– Inner surface finishing
– Grooving or residual machining
– Cutting–off (B option for the automatic process determination
function)
– Threading
– Bar feeding (B option for the automatic process determination
function)
2) C–axis process
– C–axis center drilling
– C–axis drilling
– C–axis tapping
– C–axis grooving
– Face milling
– Cylindrical grooving
315
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
1. OUTLINE DETERMINATION FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
CAUTION
The tools to be used are determined from tooling data and
tool data.
NOTE
1 The end surface and outer surface can be machined in
separate processes for outer surface machining.
2 For the outer and inner surface machining processes,
inverse processes can also be automatically determined (B
option for the automatic process determination function).
3 The following processes cannot be automatically
determined. Enter data manually.
– Reaming
– Tapping
4 Auxiliary machining processes cannot be automatically
determined.
5 Multiple processes can be specified for drilling (only for
turning) to create multitiered parts (B option for the
automatic process determination function).
6 The cutting–off process cannot be determined when system
parameter 140 is 0.
316
AUTOMATIC PROCESS 2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC
B–61804E–2/05 DETERMINATION FUNCTION PROCESS DETERMINATION
2 EXECUTING AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION
317
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC PROCESS
PROCESS DETERMINATION DETERMINATION FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
2.1 If the soft key for defining machining (menu item 4) is pressed when no
process is defined yet, the “KINDS OF MACHINING” screen appears.
DEFINING A NEW On this screen the automatic process determination function is enabled.
PROCESS
Pressing the right–most soft Key changes the soft key menu. Pressing
the AUTO soft key starts (executes) the automatic process determination
function. Pressing the AUTO PROC. soft key displays the PROCESS
SETTING screen (see Chapter 3, “Setting the Machining Procedure” for
setting machining procedure data).
CAUTION
Pressing the AUTO soft key starts the automatic process
determination immediately without displaying the
PROCESS SETTING screen. Set machining procedure
data beforehand.
318
AUTOMATIC PROCESS 2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC
B–61804E–2/05 DETERMINATION FUNCTION PROCESS DETERMINATION
(1) Executing automatic process determination

When automatic process determination starts, the processes, tools, and
cutting areas are automatically determined from the machining
procedure data, tooling information, tool data, and material data.
(Automatic screen transition)
The automatic screen transition function can display how the material
figure changes on the screen during automatic determination. To
enable automatic screen transition, change the following system
parameter:
No.708: 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0
Speed of automatic process determination
0 : High speed (Automatic screen transition is disabled.)

1 : Low speed (Automatic screen transition is enabled.)
For C–axis processes, the change of the material figure is not displayed
but the position of the machined area is indicated by the cursor.
(2) Suspending automatic process determination
If the manual input flag is on or a necessary data item cannot be
automatically determined during automatic process determination,
processing stops at the screen displayed when a problem occurs. In
that case, enter necessary data and press the NEXT PAGE soft key to
resume processing.
(3) Ending automatic process determination
When all processes are created, processing stops displaying the tool
list on the screen. To create NC data, press the NEXT PAGE soft key
to return to the menu, then press the soft key for menu item 5. To check
or modify processes, press the CORRECTION soft key, press the
CURSOR or CURSOR soft key to position the cursor at the desired
process, then press the NEXT PAGE soft key.
319
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC PROCESS
PROCESS DETERMINATION DETERMINATION FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
2.2 If the soft key for defining machining (menu item 4) is pressed when
processes are already defined, the “MACHINING PLAN” screen
MODIFYING A appears. On this screen the operator can modify or add processes.
DEFINED PROCESS Pressing the NEW soft key on this screen displays the “KINDS OF
MACHINING” screen. On that screen, the automatic process
determination function is enabled.
NOTE
Note that pressing the NEW soft key deletes all existing
processes.
320
AUTOMATIC PROCESS 3. SETTING THE MACHINING
B–61804E–2/05 DETERMINATION FUNCTION PROCEDURE
3 SETTING THE MACHINING PROCEDURE
Pressing the AUTO PROC. soft key displays the “PROCESS SETTING”
screen for setting the machining procedure. After the setting is
completed, pressing the EXEC soft key starts automatic process
determination. Manual input flags can also be set on this screen.
The “PROCESS SETTING” screen displays the setting data for the
machining method group number (No.000) and the machining procedure
data for the group (No.100 to 129, No.200 to 229, or No.300 to 329).
If the machining method group number is not defined, the group number
is determined by the material figure and the machining procedure data for
that group is displayed.
Round bar: Machining method group 1
(data in No.100 to 129)
Perforated round bar: Machining method group 2
Special material: Machining method group 3
321
3. SETTING THE MACHINING AUTOMATIC PROCESS
PROCEDURE DETERMINATION FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
The function of each soft key is as follows:

ESCAPE: Returns to the execution procedure menu for FAPT.
REGST.: Registers the set data in submemory.
INSERT: Inserts a process immediately before the process
pointed to by the cursor. Pressing this soft key
displays the soft key menu for selecting a process.
PROC. DELETE: Deletes the process pointed to by the cursor.
MANUAL FLAG: Displays the soft key menu for setting the manual
input flag for the process pointed to by the cursor.
ORIGIN PROC.: Restores the data for the edited group (returns the data
to the state before editing).
CURSOR´: Moves the cursor to delete or insert a process.
CURSOR±: Moves the cursor to delete or insert a process.
SELECT GROUP: Selects the machining method group (1 to 3).
EXEC: Starts automatic process determination.
(1) Changing the machining method group
Pressing the SELECT GROUP soft key switches the machining
method group from 1 to 2, 2 to 3, or 3 to 1.
(2) Inserting a process
Move the cursor to the desired position using the CURSOR ´ or
CURSOR ± soft key and press the INSERT soft key. The soft keys for
selecting the process type are displayed.
Pressing the soft key displays other process type soft keys. Pressing
the soft key for the desired process type inserts the new process
immediately before the process pointed to by the cursor.
Pressing the soft key exits the insert mode and returns the display
to the first soft key menu.
322
AUTOMATIC PROCESS 3. SETTING THE MACHINING
B–61804E–2/05 DETERMINATION FUNCTION PROCEDURE
NOTE
When using a cutting–off process, set the following system
parameter to 1:
No. 140: Whether a cutting–off process is defined

Initial value: 0
0 : No cutting–off process is defined

1 : A cutting–off process is defined
323
3. SETTING THE MACHINING AUTOMATIC PROCESS
PROCEDURE DETERMINATION FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
(3) Setting a manual input flag

Pressing the MANUAL FLAG soft key changes the soft key menu as
shown below to enable the operator to set the manual input flag for the
process pointed to by the blinking cursor.
Manual input flags are setting data No.130 to 166, No.230 to 266, and
No.330 to 366. When a manual input flag is on, automatic process
determination stops at the screen for which the flag is set, enabling data
to be input manually.
Pressing a soft key toggles it between AUTO and MANUAL.
* AUTO soft keys are displayed in reverse video.
The function of each soft key is as follows:

: Returns the display to the automatic procedure setting
screen.
xxx AREA: Toggles between automatic and manual for
specifying the machining area, cutting area, or cutting
position.
xxx TOOL: Toggles between automatic and manual for
specifying the tool data, start point, or passing point.
xxx COND.: Toggles between automatic and manual for
specifying the cutting conditions.
CURSOR´: Moves the cursor to set a manual input flag.
CURSOR±: Moves the cursor to set a manual input flag.
NOTE
Machining procedure data can also be set on the setting
screen.
324
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROCESS PROCESS DETERMINATION
B–61804E–2/05 DETERMINATION FUNCTION AND NOTES ON ITS USE
4 DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION

AND NOTES ON ITS USE
325
PROCESS DETERMINATION AUTOMATIC PROCESS
AND NOTES ON ITS USE DETERMINATION FUNCTION B–61804E–2/05
4.1 In automatic process determination, the tool to be used is selected from

tooling information and tool data. First the tooling information is
AUTOMATIC searched to select the tool. If the tool is not found in tooling information,
SELECTION OF A the tool is then selected from tool data.
TOOL In tool selection, the process type (KP) is referenced for a turning tool and
the tool type (TP) is referenced for a milling tool. KP or TP is registered
for each tool in tooling information or tool data. Set the value of KP for
turning tools and TP for milling tools before executing the automatic
process determination function.
If the tool is not found in either tooling information or tool data,
processing stops on the tool setting screen so the operator can manually
select the tool.
326
CAUTION
1 For drilling, grooving, and residual machining, both tooling
information and tool data are searched for the tool, and the
optimum tool (the largest tool which can be used) is
selected. For other processes, the tool which is found first
is used. If the selected tool is not a desired one, turn the
manual flag on and select the tool manually, or change the
tool after all processes are determined.
2 If the tool is selected from tool data, the tool is automatically
added to tooling information. The data items for the added
tool are automatically set as follows: The tool selection
number (TN) is set to the smallest unused number. The tool
compensation number (TM) is set to the same number as
the tool selection number. For the other data related to
mounting, the same data as that in tool data is used.
Automatic process determination therefore cannot operate
correctly if the tool data related to mounting is incorrect.
3 When the tool is selected from tooling information, the turret
to be used is automatically selected from tooling data if
there are two or more turrets. When the tool is selected from
tool data, the turret number is normally set to 1. To set the
turret number to 2, turn on the manual input flag and
manually enter the turret number or change the turret
number after all processes are determined. When balance
cutting is performed, the turret number for the second tool
is automatically set to 2 even when the tool is selected from
tool data.
4 The tool can be selected only from tooling information or
from tool data by changing the following setting data:
No.72: Data searched to select the tool

0 0 0 0 0 0 x x
Tooling information
Tool data
0 : searched
1 : Not searched
327
4.2 The use of inverse tools can be set in automatic process determination for
the following processes:
DETERMINING
– End surface roughing
INVERSE
PROCESSES
(AUTOMATIC – End surface semifinishing
PROCESS – Outer surface semifinishing
DETERMINATION – Inner surface semifinishing
FUNCTION B – End surface finishing
OPTION) – Outer surface finishing
– Inner surface finishing
When determining inverse processes, set the following setting data:
No.71: Whether inverse processes are determined

00000xxx
For end surface machining

For outer surface machining
For inner surface machining
0 : Does not determine inverse processes.

1 : Determines inverse processes.
When machining procedure data is set in the following order, the
processes are determined as described below:
Machining procedure data
– End surface roughing
Conditions
1) There are areas to be cut with inverse tools on the end surface, outer
surface, and inner surface.
2) The tooling information and tool data for the tools which cut the end
surface and the tooling information and tool data for the tools which
cut the outer surface are separately set.
Determined processes
Process 01 Outer surface roughing
(on the end surface with a normal tool)
(on the outer surface with a normal tool)
(on the end surface with an inverse tool)
(on the outer surface with an inverse tool)
Process 05 Inner surface roughing
(on the inner surface with a normal tool)
Process 06 Inner surface roughing
(on the inner surface with an inverse tool)
* The processes are determined so that the end surface and outer surface
are cut first with a normal tool then with an inverse tool.
328
CAUTION
To determine processes automatically, set a value other
than 2 (machinig below an overhang) in system parameter
101. If 2 is specified, the correct cutting area for an
overhang is not automatically determined.
No.101: Data related to turning method

Initial value: 1
0 : Does not perform pocketing.

1 : Performs pocketing.
2 : Machines beneath overhang.
NOTE
1 For residual machining, the processes for sections a and b
in the figure below can be determined but processes using
inverse tools, such as the processes for sections c and d,
cannot be determined. Such processes should be manually
added after all processes are automatically determined.
329
NOTE
2 When a very small pocket is machined using a normal tool
during end, outer, or inner surface machining, an error
occurs when the inverse process is determined in the
following case: When an area is left uncut after tool angle
check is performed (Fig. a) but there is no area to be cut with
the inverse tool as a result of applying offset (Fig. b).
Shaded area:
Area left uncut after tool angle
check is performed
(area to be cut with the inverse tool)
Fig. a
Shaded area:
Area to be cut with the normal
tool after tool angle check is
performed and offset is applied
±
There is no area to be cut with ³Error!
the inverse tool.
Fig. b
NOTE
3 When the back of the area to be cut with the inverse tool
intersects with the material figure as shown below, the
process using the inverse tool is not determined.
Area to be cut
with the normal
tool
Shaded area:
Area left uncut
(area to be cut
with theinverse
tool)
Intersects with the material

figure at this point.
330
NOTE
4 If an area is still left uncut after the machining with the
inverse tool, no additional process for cutting that area
(shaded area in the figure below) can be automatically
determined.
Area (1) :
Cut with the normal tool
Area (2):
Cut with the inverse tool Shaded area: Left uncut
NOTE
5 The inverse process for balance cutting cannot be
automatically determined.
331
4.3 (1) Always from +X to –X along the end surface (from –X to +X for the
inverse process)
CUTTING DIRECTION
(2) If outer surface machining is set in machining procedure data without

setting end surface machining, the end surface is cut in the same way
as for the outer surface machining.
(3) When the machining procedure data is set as shown below for outer
surface finishing, the end surface is cut from the outside to the center,
then the outer surface is cut with the same tool, if there is no inner
surface (Fig. a). If there is an inner surface, the end surface and outer
surface are cut in one continuous operation (Fig. b).
Setting of machining procedure data
– End surface finishing
– Outer surface finishing
Fig. a When there is no inner surface Fig. b When there is an inner surface
332
To cut the end surface from the outside to the center and then cut the outer
surface with the same tool as shown in Fig.a even when there is an inner
surface, change the following setting data:
No.71: x 0000000
Method of outer surface finishing
0 : Cuts as shown in Fig.a or b depending on whether there is an inner

surface.
1 : Cuts as shown in Fig.a regardless of whether there is an inner surface.
333
4.4 (1) Division direction for end surface machining (normal process)
AREA DIVISION The area is divided as shown in Fig.a when there is no inner surface
and as shown in Fig.b when there is an inner surface.
Fig. a Division direction when Fig. b Division direction when

there is no inner surface there is an inner surface
(2) Division direction for outer surface machining (normal process)

If the end surface is cut at the same time, the area is divided as shown
in Fig.a when there is no inner surface and as shown in Fig.b when
there is an inner surface. If the end surface is separately cut, the area
is divided as shown in Fig.c regardless of whether there is an inner
surface.
Fig.a Division direction when Fig.b Division direction when

there is no inner surface there is an inner surface
Fig. c When only the outer surface is cut
334
(3) Division direction for inner surface machining (normal process)

The area is divided as shown in Fig. a and Fig. b regardless of whether
an element of the part intersects with the Z–axis.
Fig. a Division direction when an element Fig. b Division direction when no element
of the part intersects with the Z–axis of the part intersects with the Z–axis
(4) Division direction for grooving

The area is divided into the groove on the end surface (Fig. a), groove
on the outer surface (Fig. b), and groove on the inner surface (Fig. c).
Fig. a Groove on the end surface Fig. b Groove on the outer surface
Note) DS and DE depend on the tool figure.
Fig. c Groove on the inner surface
335
(5) Cutting start point for a cutting–off process (B option for the automatic
process determination function)
The cutting start point for a cutting–off process is determined as shown
in Fig.a when there is no C/R (chamfer/corner R) at the cut–off section
and as shown in Fig.b when there is a C/R at the cut–off section.
Fig. a Cutting start point when Fig. b Cutting start point when
there is no C/R at the cut–off section there is a C/R at the cut–off section
(6) Division direction for inverse processes (B option for the automatic
process determination function)
The division direction at division point DS for an inverse process is
one of the following three types (outer surface machining is taken as
an example):
[Type 1]
Division starts at point D, proceeds toward

the subedge of the inverse tool, and inter-
sects first with the part figure
[Type 2]
Division starts at point D, proceeds toward the

subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects with
the material figure at two or more points
[Type 3]
Division starts at point D, proceeds toward the

subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects with
the material figure at less than two points
336
4.5 In residual machining and threading, two or more sections can be

machined using the same tool.
RESIDUAL
MACHINING AND
THREADING
4.6 If a center drilling process or bar feeding process is set in machining

procedure data, that process is always determined regardless of the part
CENTER DRILLING figure. However, the process is not determined when no center drilling
AND BAR FEEDING tool or bar feeding tool is registered in tooling information or tool data.
When not using a center drilling process or bar feeding process, do not set
the process in machining procedure data, or delete the process after all
processes are determined.
The bar feeding type is automatically determined based on the setting in
the following system parameters:
Pull–out Pull–out Slide–stop Slide–stop
method 1 method 2 method 1 method 2
No.152 (CAX) Undefined Set Undefined Undefined
No.153 (CAZ) Set Undefined Set Undefined
No.154 (WG) Set Set Undefined Undefined
No.155 (CEZ) Undefined Undefined Set Undefined
No.152: Clearance when the tool approaches for bar feeding (CAX)
No.153: Clearance when the tool approaches for bar feeding (CAZ)
No.154: Position at which the fingers pinch the workpiece during bar
feeding (WG)
No.155: Amount of tool retraction during bar feeding (CEZ)
NOTE
The B option for the automatic process determination
function is necessary for automatically determining the bar
feeding process.
337
4.7 When the inner surface is machined with the automatic process
determination function, multitier drilling can be performed using drills
MULTITIER DRILLING with different diameters.
(B OPTION FOR THE When performing multitier drilling, set the following setting data:
AUTOMATIC
No.50: Minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the
PROCESS inner surface tool (unit: mm)
DETERMINATION Initial value: Undefined
FUNCTION)
Set the minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the prepared
inner surface machining tool. The automatic process determination
function determines the process so that a diameter less than the set value
is machined with drills.
Fig. 1
WARNING
1 The automatic process determination function always
machines a diameter less than the set value with drills
regardless of the values in setting data No.52 and 53.
2 If the value is undefined, the automatic process
determination function determines the process so that all
inner surface are machined with the inner surface tool.
3 The automatic process determination function specifies
cutting areas so that machining for a diameter less than the
set value does not require an inner surface tool.
No.51: Maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills

(unit: mm)
Initial value: Undefined
Set the maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills. The
automatic process determination function machines a diameter less than
the set value with drills. Multitier drilling can be performed for a diameter
less than the set value.
338
Fig. 2
WARNING
If the value is undefined, the automatic process
determination function determines the process so that all
inner surfaces are machined with drills.
Setting data Nos.52 and 53 determine whether drills are used for
machining the inner surface with a diameter greater than the value in
setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with
the inner surface tool) and less than the value in setting data No.51
(maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills).
The inner surface with a diameter less than the value in setting data No.50
is always machined with drills regardless of the values in setting data
No.52 and 53.
No.52 and 53 are

effective.
No.52 and 53 are

not effective.
Fig. 3
No.52: Minimum allowance for drilling (unit: mm)

Set the minimum allowance on the inner surface to be drilled. The inner
surface is drilled when the allowance is more than the set value.
339
Drilled when more

than the set value
Fig. 4
WARNING
If the value is undefined, drilling is not performed.
No.53: Minimum length–to–diameter ratio of the inner surface to

be drilled (unit: mm)
The inner surface is drilled when the length–to–diameter ratio is more

than the set value.
Set value < 1

D
Fig. 5
Drilling is performed when 1/D is more than the set value.
WARNING
1 If the value is undefined, drilling is not performed.
2 Drilling is performed only when the conditions for both
setting data No.52 and 53 are satisfied.
340
No.70: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Specifies how to machine the inner surface with two

or more steps using drills.
Specifies the tool selection method.
How to machine the inner surface with two or more steps using drills
0 : Performs two or more drilling steps in ascending order of drill
diameter.
1 : Performs two or more drilling steps in descending order of drill
diameter.
Specify ascending or descending order of drill diameter when machining
the inner surface in two or more drilling steps.
Tool selection method
0 : Creates the drilling process using the machinable tool selected by the
automatic process determination function.
1 : Prompts the operator to enter the tool figure on the tool data screen if a
drill suitable for the drilled diameter does not exist information or tool
data.
Set the method of selecting the tool if a drill suitable for the drilled
diameter does not exist in the tooling information or tool data when the
automatic process determination function creates a drilling process.
If a drill suitable for the diameter to be drilled does not exist when this
setting data is set to 0 (creates the drilling process using the machinable
tool selected by the automatic process determination function), an uncut
area may remain after drilling.
Uncut area may remain

if a drill suitable for the
drilled diameter does
not exist
Fig. 6
* Examples of machining
The following examples show how the drilling process or inner
surface machining process is automatically determined, depending on
the values in setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can
be machined with the inner surface tool) and No.51 (maximum inner
diameter which can be machined with drills).
341
(1) When the value in No.50 is smaller than the value in No.51
No.51(maximum
inner diameter
which can be ma-
chined with drills)
No.50 (minimum inner di-
ameter which can be ma-
chined with the inner sur-
face tool)
Fig. 7
When setting data Nos.50 and 51 are set as shown in Fig.7, the following
processes are created:
Process 01 Drilling
Drills area (1) in Fig.8.
Fig. 8
Checks setting data Nos.52 and 53 for the second area to be drilled.
Value in No.52 < d
Value in No.53 < 1

D
Fig. 9
No.52 (minimum allowance for drilling)
No.53 (minimum length–to–diameter ratio of the inner surface to be
drilled)
342
When the conditions in Fig.9 are satisfied

Process 02 Drilling
Fig. 10
When the conditions in Fig.9 are not satisfied

Drilling is not performed.
Fig. 11
Checks setting data Nos.52 and 53 for the third area to be drilled.
Value in No.52 < d
Value in No.53 < 1

D
Fig. 12
No.52 (minimum allowance for drilling)

No.53 (minimum length–to–diameter ratio of the inner surface to be
drilled)
343
When the conditions in Fig.12 are satisfied When the conditions in Fig.12 are not satisfied

Process 03 Drilling
Drills area (3) in Fig.13. Drilling is not performed.
Fig. 13 Fig. 14

Process 04 Inner surface machining Process 02 Inner surface machining
Fig. 15 Fig. 16
(2) When the value in No.50 is larger than the value in No.51
No.50 (maximum inner diameter

which can be machined with the inner surface tool)
No.51 (minimum inner diameter

which can be machined with drills)
Fig. 17
344
When setting data Nos.50 and 51 are set as shown in Fig.17, the following
Process 01 Drilling
Fig. 18
Checks the conditions shown in Fig. 9 for the second area to be drilled.
When the conditions in Fig. 9 are satisfied When the conditions in Fig. 9 are not satisfied
Fig. 19 Fig. 20
Process 03 Inner surface machining Process 02 Inner surface machining
Uncut area
Fig. 21 Fig. 22
345
(3) When a value is set in No.50 but No.51 is undefined
No. 50 (minimum inner

diameter which can be
machined with the inner
surface tool)
Fig. 23
When setting data No. 50 is set as shown in Fig. 23, the following
Process 01 Drilling
Fig. 24
Process 02 Drilling
Fig. 25
346
Checks the conditions shown in Fig.12 for the third area to be drilled.
When the conditions in Fig.12 are satisfied When the conditions in Fig.12 are not satisfied

Process 03 Drilling Drilling is not performed.
(4) When a value is set in No.51 but No.50 is undefined
No. 51 (minimum inner diameter

which can be machined with drills)
Fig.30
No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the
inner surface tool): Undefined
347
When setting data No.51 is set as shown in Fig.30, the following

Process 01 Drilling
Fig. 31

Process 02 Drilling
Fig. 32

Process 03 Drilling
Fig. 33

Process 04 Inner
surface machining
Fig. 34
348
(5) When both No.50 and No.51 are undefined
Fig.35
No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner
surface tool): Undefined
No.51 (maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills):
Undefined
The following processes are created:
Process 01 Drilling
Fig.36
Process 02 Inner surface machining
Fig.37
349
[Warnings and Note]
WARNING
1 Setting data No.52 (minimum allowance for drilling) and
No.53 (minimum length–to–diameter ratio of the inner
surface to be drilled) are effective for machining a diameter
greater than the value in setting data No.50 (minimum inner
diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool)
and less than the value in setting data No.51 (maximum
inner diameter which can be machined with drills).
2 If setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be
machined with the inner surface tool) is set to a value larger
than that set in setting data No.51 (maximum inner diameter
which can be machined with drills), an uncut area may as
shown in Figs.21 and 22.
NOTE
If an uncut area remains after machining using a drill with a
tip, that area is not cut in later processes that are
automatically determined.
Not cut with automatic process determination
Fig.38
350
4.8 If the part figure is closed, the automatic process determination function
may not correctly operate.
AUTOMATIC
Example 1)
PROCESS When the start point of the part figure has a larger X coordinate than
DETERMINATION the end surface
FOR A CLOSED
FIGURE
If the part figure starts from F, the outer surface

machining process is not correctly determined.
Example 2)
When the start point of the part figure is the same as the cutting–off
start point
If the part figure starts from the cutting–off start point,

the cutting–off process is not correctly determined.
351
4.9 The automatic process determination function cannot be used when

machining includes the following:
MACHINING FOR
– Comb–shaped turret
WHICH AUTOMATIC
– Backward machining
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
CANNOT BE USED
352
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B–61804E–2/05 DETERMINATION FUNCTION 5. SETTING DATA
5 SETTING DATA
See Section 1, “Setting Data List” in Appendix 1.
353
XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING
B–61804E–2/05 DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING
The double side machining function enables to prepare two NC programs

by only one editing operation so that the front–side NC program has been
executed, and then the direction of blank is changed and then the
rear–side NC program is executed.
i. The definition of blank figure and part figure is same as the ordinary
way of standard system. When you do the work reversing, switch it
according to the parameter.
ii. The part figure is defined by the final part figure with the single stroke
drawing by using symbolic key.
iii. To rotate the part figure to X axis and to process the back side from the
front, the process definition and NC data preparation are done.
iv. Automatic processing decision can be used.
v. NC data output only of the front side or the back side can be done.
357
1. SYSTEM PARAMETER DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING B–61804E–2/05
1 SYSTEM PARAMETER
The work reversing processing becomes effective by setting an

undermentioned parameter.
System parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
104
Bit 2 Parameter bit concerning work reversing

0 : The conversation system becomes two axis lathes usually.
1 : The work reversing processing definition becomes possible.
D Back Machining FAPT cannot be used.
358
B–61804E–2/05 DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING 2. DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE
2 DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE
Position ZP of reference line of the first processing. And position ZP2

of the reference line of a second processing are inputs.
In the help screen, it is drawn to the guide chart like Fig. 2.
[For drawing format 2]
Fig. 2
359
3. DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING B–61804E–2/05
3 DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE
The method of defining part figure with the single stroke drawing by
using symbolic key is the same as standard system. There are following
remarks and a restriction matters.
a. Do not define it as shown in the figure below.
D The line crosses. (Fig. 3. (a))
D There are same lines on one line. (Fig. 3 (b))
D One point comes in contact. (Fig. 3 (c))
Fig. 3 (a)
Fig. 3 (b)
Fig. 3 (c)
b. Please define the figure to become the end point as same place the start
point.
c. Please make a head and the last element an arrow element. Do not
specify Chamfer or Round element for a head or last element.
d. The position of start point and the end point exerts the effect on the
definition of the processing area. The position of start point and the
end point becomes the division point of the processing area division
in Automatic process decision. Therefore, it is necessary to specify
start point and the end point after previous is foreseen to some degree.
(Please refer to 5.2.5 and 5.3.4)
360
B–61804E–2/05 DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING 4. HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS
4 HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS
Home and index positions of the First process and the second process can
be set.
361
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING B–61804E–2/05
5 PROCESSING DEFINITION
362
B–61804E–2/05 DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING 5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
5.1 i. The definition of the processing assumes the definition of a Secondary

processing after the end First processing to be a principle.
OUTLINE
ii. The First processing and Secondary processing are switched with the
softkey.
363
5.2 The definition of the First processing side is as it is. In the definition of
the Secondary processing side, blank figure and the part figure draw in
DEFINITION BY shape that the reverse to X axis symmetry for draw on the First processing
MANUAL side. Definition method on the Secondary processing side is shown as
follows. When the “ ” part part finishes defining for First processing.
(Refer to Fig. 5.2 (a))
The process list screen is displayed as shown in Fig. 5.2 (b).
Fig. 5.2 (a)
Fig. 5.2 (b)
It will change into soft key like the under figure, if softkey “´” of a right
edge is pushed.
Fig. 5.2 (c)
364
If “2’ND CHCK” is pushed, it will become the following screen.
Fig. 5.2 (d)
The process for a Secondary processing is defined from this state.

Definition method is same as the First processing. In the following
explanations, outside rough cutting process is advanced to the example.
5.2.1 Define the tool data by means of the ordinary way.

Tool Data Screen
Fig. 5.2.1
365
5.2.2 The coordinate value of the point which the cursor shows displays the
Cutting Area Screen coordinate value in the coordinate system of Secondary processing.
Fig.5.2.2
Do not specify the cutting area by stepping over the start and end points
of the part figure.
Example
For instance, the shaded portion cannot be specified for a cutting area
when the part figure started from “a” point.
5.2.3 Define the cutting condition by the same way of standard system.
Cutting Condition
Screen
366
5.3
AUTOMATIC
WARNING
PROCESSING For those machining processes that have been
DECISION FUNCTION automatically created, check the machining sequence. If
the machining sequence is invalid, the tool may collide with
the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may
occur, possibly causing damage to the machine or tool itself,
First of all, the cutting area of the First processing and Secondary
processing are divided. Next time, the process for the First processing is
decided automatically according to the processing procedure data. The
process on a Secondary side is continuously decided.
5.3.1 When soft key “AUTO PROC” is pushed, on the “kinds of machining”
Processing Area screen, the screen is switched to decide the first and second processing
area used for automatic process definition function.
Division Screen
Fig. 5.3.1 (a)
367
Specify the first and second processing areas using the cursor and arrow
keys on the “MACHINING AREA DIVISION” screen as same way as the
“CUTTING AREA DEFINE” screen. The arrows of °, ³, ±, ² can be
used on this screen.
Fig. 5.3.1 (b)
The position of DC1 becomes the starting point of the part figure
definition. The dividing direction of DC1 can be changed. However, the
position cannot be changed. DC2 can change both positions and
directions of division.
When the specifies dividing point as shown in Fig. 5.3.1 (b).
The area of the First processing and a Secondary processing will divided
as shown in Fig. 5.3.1 (c).
First
Secondary processing
processing area
area
Fig. 5.3.1 (c)
If the “NEXT PAGE” is pushed in Fig. 5.3.1 (b), the screen switches to
the PROCESS SETTING screen.
368
5.3.2
Process Setting Screen
D The processing procedure data becomes common to the First

processing and a Secondary processing.
D When “BACK PAGE” is pushed, it will return to the screen of Fig.
5.3.1 (b).
5.3.3 The machining list screen is displayed while Automatic processing

Automatic Processing decision.
The display of “EXECUTING” blinks while processing. Each data input
Decision screen of the processing definition is not displayed. However, the screen
is displayed and the processing stops temporarily in the screen specified
to be going to input data with the manual and the screen where the
undefined data exists. Can be display each screen of the processing
definition by setting system parameter.
System parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
708
Bit 6 Each screen of Automatic process decision

1 : Displays.
0 : Does not display.
369
5.3.4 i. Part figure definition and relation of DC1

Process Area Division Automatic processing decision judges that DC1 to DC2 in the
clockwise area for the First processing and DC2 to DC1 in the area for
Secondary processing.
First
proces-
sing area
Secondary
process
area
Fig. 5.3.4 (a)
It is necessary to specify start point on the drawing upper. At the part

figure definition to make the process without uselessness.
ii. Definition method of DC1 and DC2
The division as shown below cannot be defined.
EXAMPLE A.
The direction of division is same as that of element.
Fig. 5.3.4 (b)
370
EXAMPLE B.
Secondary processing area is overhang.
Fig. 5.3.4 (c)
371
6. NC DATA PREPARATION DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING B–61804E–2/05
6 NC DATA PREPARATION
WARNING
Even when the tool path and machining processes
specified in NC data are verified by machining simulation or
tool path check, if the data relating to the actual tool offset
and workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the
The distribution of the program number is as four–axis lathe system.

(Odd number: First processing. Even number: Secondary processing)
After when the First processing (Fig. 6 (a)) ends, being drawn to the
material and the part figure again, animation on the Secondary processing
side will start. (Fig. 6 (b))
Fig. 6 (a) (First processing)
372
B–61804E–2/05 DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING 6. NC DATA PREPARATION
Fig. 6 (b) (Secondary processing)
373
7. MACHINING TIME
DISPLAY SCREEN DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING B–61804E–2/05
7 MACHINING TIME DISPLAY SCREEN
After preparing NC data, the soft key will change as follows so that the
machining time can be checked.
Fig. 7 (a)
When “MACHN. TIME” softkey is pressed, the “MACHINING TIME”

screen is displayed as follows.
Fig. 7 (b)
These kinds of machining time can be checked: first processing,

secondary processing, and sum of first and secondary processing time.
374
B–61804E–2/05 DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING 8. SYSTEM PARAMETER
8 SYSTEM PARAMETER
The initial values of home and index positions are set the system
parameters.
No.206: X coordinate of first processing home position
No.207: Z coordinate of first processing home position
No.210: X coordinate of first processing index position
No.211: Z coordinate of first processing index position
No.214: X coordinate of secondary processing home position
No.215: Z coordinate of secondary processing home position
No.218: X coordinate of secondary processing index position
No.219: Z coordinate of secondary processing index position
375
9. NOTES DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING B–61804E–2/05
9 NOTES
376
B–61804E–2/05 DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING 9. NOTES
9.1 The tool data used for this function is the same as that of standard system.
TOOL DATA
9.2 The tooling information used for this function is the same as that of
standard system.
TOOLING
INFORMATION
9.3 If parameter for the double–sided machining function is valid, the

back–sided machining function cannot be performed.
RELATION WITH While the double–sided machining function is valid the family program
BACK–SIDE which has been made using the back–sided machining function cannot be
MACHINING FAPT used.
If this family program is used, define the machining processing newly.
9.4 If MTF parameter Nos.1050, 1055 are set to “2–axis lath”, the double
sided machining function can be performed. If these MTF parameter are
RELATION WITH “4–axis lath”, this function cannot be used.
4–AXIS LATH
The functions described in this part is not available when using

16–TA CAP II, 16–TTA CAP II, 16–TB CAP II, 15–TFB, or
15–TTFB.
377
XIII. ANIMATED SIMULATION
FUNCTION II
B–61804E–2/05 ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II 1. OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
The animated simulation function is used to execute actual machining

simulation by displaying blanks, chuck figures, tailstock figures, and tool
figures on the CRT screen.
When the user selects the screen used for animated simulation and starts
operation of the NC in machine lock mode, the user can view a blank
being cut by the tools that are changed each time a T code is issued.
In addition, the animated simulation function II has the following features
to perform further real simulation.
(1) Turning can be simulated with gradation.
(2) Simulation can be performed by expanding the C–axis cylindrical
grooving.
(3) The screen is divided into four parts each time the phase angle is
changed during machining of a Y–axis side face. The results of the
previous machining simulation are scrolled.
(4) The user can check the machining path for all the processes from
C–axis machining to Y–axis machining with the three–dimensional
wire frame display.
3
2. FLOW OF ANIMATED
SIMULATION ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II B–61804E–2/05
2 FLOW OF ANIMATED SIMULATION
Main menu screen
6 (INPUT)
Animated simulation screen Executing an M code automatically switches

between the following screens:
Turning screen
C–axis screen
C–axis cylindrical grooving screen
Y–axis screen
Animated simulation Sets the gradation to on or off.

parameter screen
Chuck Tailstock Tool holder
Standard chuck Standard tailstock Tool holder number

data screen data screen list screen
Special chuck Special tailstock Tool holder

data screen data screen data screen
D With any of the above screens, pressing the [END] soft key returns
control to the previous screen.
D Regardless of which screen is currently displayed, pressing the
[MENU SCREEN] soft key returns control to the main menu screen.
For details of how to set a chuck, tailstock, tool holder, and

animated simulation parameters, see Section 3.6, “Checking
NC Data.”
4
3. OPERATION PROCEDURE
B–61804E–2/05 ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION
3 OPERATION PROCEDURE FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION
Select 6 from the main menu screen.

A blank is drawn on the screen. The blank is automatically scaled up or
down such that the entire figure can be safely displayed on the screen.
NOTE
When the value of system parameter 750 is 1, the blank is
displayed in the full screen.
As blank data, data for D and L input from menu 1, “SELECTION OF

MATERIAL & SETTING OF BLANK SIZE” is used.
(1) Adjust machine conditions.
D Set the coordinate system so that the correct workpiece coordinate
of a tool can be given when starting the program. Alternatively,
move the tool to the start point of the program.
D Search for the beginning of the NC program.
D Set machine lock mode.
(2) Press the [CHECK START] soft key.
“START” is displayed at the bottom right of the screen.
(3) Start NC operation.
When a T code is issued, an image of the tool is displayed and the user
can view a blank being cut.
5
SCREENS ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II B–61804E–2/05
4 ANIMATED SIMULATION SCREENS
6
B–61804E–2/05 ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II SCREENS
4.1
ANIMATED
SIMULATION OF
TURNING
(1) When menu 6 is selected, a blank viewed on the XZ plane is drawn.

Drawing based on the XC plane is not performed.
(2) Either the interference check function or tool path plotting function is
enabled. To use the interference check function, the [INTER CHECK]
soft key must be set to on before executing animated simulation.
(3) This screen is used only for drawing animated simulation of turning.
When C– or Y–axis animated simulation begins, this screen is
switched to another screen.
(4) Up to 160 tools, consisting of 128 turning tools and 32 milling tools,
can be used for the animated simulation of turning.
7
4.2
ANIMATED
SIMULATION WITH
GRADATION
(1) When gradation is set to on with the parameter screen, animated

simulation with gradation is performed. Only drawing based on the
XZ plane is performed.
(Valid only for a single–path lathe)
(2) Half of the blank is drawn with gradation and the other half is filled
in.
(When the drawing format is reversed, the display is reversed.)
(3) For drawing with gradation, the drawn image cannot be enlarged or
shrunk, and the tool path display is disabled.
(4) Drawing with gradation is enabled for a bar, tube, and special blank.
(5) When the [INTER CHECK] soft key has been set to on before
executing animated simulation, an interference check is performed
during animated simulation.
(6) This screen is used only for drawing animated simulation of turning.
When C– or Y–axis animated simulation begins, this screen is
switched to another screen.
8
4.3
C–AXIS ANIMATED
SIMULATION
(1) After executing an M code set in system parameter No. 741, executing
the tool selection T code switches to the C–axis machining screen.
(For cylindrical grooving, an M code set in system parameter No. 742
is referenced.)
This screen is displayed in the same way for animated simulation with
gradation.
(2) The right half of the screen is used to display C–axis cylindrical
grooving, the lower left quarter is used to display C–axis end face
machining and C–axis side face machining other than cylindrical
grooving, and the upper left quarter is used for three–dimensional
display.
(3) Cutting is represented with a filled–in cross section (a circle) of the
tool tip. Rapid traverse drawing is represented with a dotted line,
regardless of whether the tool path is set to on or off.
(4) Even when a portrait–mode lathe is being used, drawing is displayed
in landscape mode.
9
4.4
Y–AXIS ANIMATED
SIMULATION
(1) After executing an M code set in system parameter No. 741, executing
the tool selection T code causes switching to the Y–axis machining
screen. This screen is displayed in the same way for animated
simulation with gradation.
(Y–axis side face drawing is updated when the phase angle is
changed.)
(2) The right half of the screen is used to display Y–axis side face
machining, the lower left quarter is used to display Y–axis end face
machining, and the upper left quarter is used to display
three–dimensional line drawing.
(3) For Y–axis side face machining, the screen is further divided into four
pieces. Each time the phase angle is updated, machining display is
scrolled.
(The latest machining result is always displayed at the bottom of the
screen.)
(4) Cutting is represented with a filled–in cross section of the tool tip.
Rapid traverse drawing is represented with a dotted line, regardless of
whether the tool path is set to on or off.
10
4.5
INTERFERENCE
CHECK FUNCTION
(1) The interference check is performed only while animated simulation

of turning is being executed.
(2) If a tool tip and a chuck or tailstock interfere with each other during
simulation, an interference alarm is issued.
(3) Set the interference check to on or off with the [INTER CHECK] soft
key before executing animated simulation. This soft key is
automatically locked when animated simulation starts. When the
interference check is set to on, the [TOOL PATH] soft key is
automatically set to off and locked even if it has been set to on.
11
4.6
ANIMATED
SIMULATION FOR
TWO–PATH LATHE
(1) Animated simulation is performed for the first and second turrets. (For
a two–path lathe, animated simulation with gradation is not
supported.)
(2) Normally, the first turret is displayed at the top of the screen and the
second turret is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Setting bit 1 of
system parameter No. 705 to 1 enables the position of the turrets to be
reversed.
(3) When the interference check function is on, interference between the
first and second turrets is checked, as well as interference between a
turret and a chuck or tailstock.
(4) For C–axis animated simulation, drawing is performed in the same
way as for a single–path lathe.
12
4.7 The following soft keys are displayed on the animated simulation screen.
SOFT KEYS When gradation is turned off
CHECK ORIGI- PARAM- TOOL DRAWING INTER END

START NAL ETER PATH RANGE CHECK
When gradation is turned on
CHECK ORIGI- ROTATE AROUND SECTI- PARAM- INTER END

START NAL ON ETER CHECK
[CHECK START] . . . . . . . Starts the animated simulation function.

[ORIGINAL] . . . . . . . . . . . Restores the blank to the pre–machining
figure.
[PARAMETER] . . . . . . . . . Enables to set parameters related to
animated simulation.
[TOOL PATH] . . . . . . . . . . Enables or disables the tool path display.
[DRAWING RANGE] . . . . Enlarges or shrinks a figure.
[INTER CHECK] . . . . . . . Enables or disables the interference check
function.
(This key is not displayed when bit 5 of
system parameter No. 701 is set to 0 so that
the interference check is not performed.)
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the main menu screen.
[ROTATE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotates a figure.
[AROUND] . . . . . . . . . . . . Applies gradation to an entire figure.
[SECTION] . . . . . . . . . . . . Applies gradation to half of a figure and
draws a cross section of the other half of the
figure.
NOTE
The [ROTATE], [AROUND], and [SECTION] soft keys are
disabled during C– or Y–axis animated simulation.
13
5. SYSTEM PARAMETERS ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II B–61804E–2/05
5 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
System parameters used for animated simulation are as listed below.

These system parameters are used to set M codes for switching between
animated simulation mode for turning and animation simulation mode for
C– or Y–axis machining.
By specifying the M codes that are set using these parameters, before the
tool change command in the NC program, animated simulation mode can
be switched automatically.
740 Integer Undefined Value of the M code for turning (NOTE)
741 Integer Undefined Value of the M code for C–axis machining

excluding cylindrical grooving (for switching
to the C–axis animated simulation screen)
742 Integer Undefined Value of the M code for cylindrical grooving

(for switching to the animated simulation
screen for cylindrical grooving)
743 Integer Undefined Value of the M code for Y–axis machining (for
switching to the Y–axis animated simulation
screen)
771 Character Undefined Axis name list (must be set when Y–axis
animated simulation is performed)
NOTE
The setting of this parameter can be omitted when only
turning is performed. However, it cannot be omitted when
turning is performed after C– or Y–axis machining.
14
B–61804E–2/05 ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II 6. SUPPLEMENT
6 SUPPLEMENT
(1) Outputting an M code for switching between C– and Y–axis

machining screens
When using the new animated simulation function with 16–TC CAP
II and 16i–TA CAP II, M codes are required to switch between the
animated simulation screens for turning, C–axis machining, C–axis
cylindrical grooving, and Y–axis machining.
Define an MTF function table so that the M codes are output before
the tool change command for each machining process.
Specify function codes in those MTF function tables to be referenced
at the start or end of each C–axis–related process, as described below,
such that the M code indicated by the M code number for the start of
C–axis machining or cylindrical grooving, which is set using system
parameters, is output.
For turning and Y–axis machining, define each existing function table
at the start of machining, such that the corresponding M codes are
output.
Examples
Assume that an M code for switching to the C–axis animated
simulation screen is to be output at the start of C–axis machining.
1. Set system parameter No. 741 to 22.
2. When C–axis machining is executed at one time, specify the
following function codes in MTF No. 2200. To switch to the
C–axis animated simulation screen for each C–axis machining
process, specify the following function code in MTF Nos. 2220 to
2224.
Start of C–axis center drilling
NO.2220 = 0168, 0100, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
M22 FEED;
This setting outputs an M code block, ‘M22,’ used to switch to the
C–axis animated screen at the start of C–axis center drilling.
15
6. SUPPLEMENT ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II B–61804E–2/05
MTF
Parameter No. Description Remarks
2220 Start of C–axis center drilling Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2221 Start of C–axis drilling Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2222 Start of C–axis tapping Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2223 Start of C–axis grooving Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2224 Start of C–axis notching Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2225 Start of C–axis cylindrical grooving Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2230 End of C–axis center drilling Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2231 End of C–axis drilling Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2232 End of C–axis tapping Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2233 End of C–axis grooving Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2234 End of C–axis notching Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2235 End of C–axis cylindrical grooving Only for 16–TC CAP II and 16i–TA CAP II
2070 Start of Y–axis process
2071 Start of Y–axis center drilling
2072 Start of Y–axis drilling
2073 Start of Y–axis tapping
2074 Start of Y–axis grooving/pocketing
2075 Start of Y–axis optional figure
(2) Drawing of a tool tip figure using animated simulation is performed

within a rectangle having the following size:
Vertical size: approximately 45 mm
Horizontal size:approximately 36 mm
(3) If two or more of the following conditions overlap, animated
simulation may not follow the operation of the NC program.
D Simultaneous machining has been performed using balance cut.
D The holder displayed on the screen is too large.
D An extremely high feedrate is set for NC program operation.
In this case, the following symptoms can be observed.
D The tool path is not displayed correctly.
D Part of a figure can not be cut.
In such cases, correct the setting as follows:
D Make the size of the holder figure smaller.
D Scale down the drawing.
D Make the feedrate in the NC program operation slower.
16
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA,
B–61804E–2/05 APPENDIX SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
A SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
WARNING
3
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF APPENDIX B–61804E–2/05
A.1 (1) Auto process setting data

SETTING DATA Automatic process setting means that processes are determined by
setting data.
TABLE To specify setting data, press the DATA SET soft key on the initial
screen, enter 2, then press the INPUT key. Data items (except data 900
to data 902) are used to determine processes automatically. The
following table describes the setting data.
Data No. Format Initial value Description Remarks
0000 Integer Selects a machining group (1 to 3).

1: Data items 100 to 166 in the 1st group are used.
2: Data items 200 to 266 in the 2nd group are used.
3: Data items 300 to 366 in the 3rd group are used.
If this value is not defined, one of the following groups is specified
according to the blank figure.
Round bar: Group 1
Drilled round bar: Group 2
Special blank: Group 3
0001 Real number Not defined Not used
0002 Real number Not defined Not used
0003 Real number 1 Drilling coefficient 1

When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) does not exceed the value of
data 3, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 1.
0004 Real number 101 Drilling coefficient 2

When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater than the value of data
3 and does not exceed the value of data 4, a workpiece is machined in
drilling method 2. When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater
than the value of data 4, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 3.
0005 Integer Not defined Not used
0010 Real number 3. Center drilling depth (D)
0011 Real number 0. Finishing width allowance for grooving (TW)
0012 Real number 0. Finishing depth allowance for grooving (TB)
0020 Real number 1. Coefficient 1 of C–axis drilling

When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) does not exceed the value of
0021 Real number 101 Coefficient 2 of C–axis drilling When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter)
is greater than the value of data 20 and does not exceed the value of
When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater than the value of data
21, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 3.
0022 Real number Not defined C–axis center drilling depth (D1)
0023 Real number 100. % of upper–limit for a prepared hole for C–axis tapping
0024 Real number 80. % of lower–limit for a prepared hole for C–axis tapping
0030 to Integer Not defined Not used

0049
0050 Real number Not defined Minimum inner surface diameter that can be machined Option B
0051 Real number Not defined Maximum diameter of a workpiece that can drilled Option B
4
A. SETTING DATA,
0052 Real number Not defined Minimum drilling allowance Option B
0053 Real number Not defined Length–to–diameter ratio for the section to be drilled Option B
0054 Real number Not defined Coefficient for calculating the diameter of a prepared hole for C–axis
tapping (thread catch rate)
If this value is not defined, 1.082532 is specified.
Maximum prepared hole diameter
= D – P ´ C ´ (value of data 22/100)
Minimum prepared hole diameter
= D – P ´ C ´ (value of data 22/100)
D: Nominal diameter, P:
Pitch, C: Value of data 54
0055 to Real number Not defined Not defined

0069
0070 Eight–digit 00000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Option B

binary 0 0 0 0 0 0
Flags for multi–tier drilling

Bit 0 Method for drilling a hole having two or more tiers
0 : Multiple drilling in the order: minor diameter to major diameter
1 : Multiple drilling in the order: major diameter to minor diameter
Bit 1 Change of the tool selection method
0 : The effective tool selected by automatic process setting is used
for drilling.
1 : When the drill suitable for a machining diameter is not found in
tooling information or tool file, the input of the tool data is
requested on the tool data screen.

binary 0 0 0 0
Flag for automatic setting of mirror–image machining Bit 0 End facing

Bit 1 Outer surface machining
Bit 2 Inner surface machining
0 : No mirror–image machining is specified.
1 : Mirror–image machining is specified.
Flag for outer surface finishing
Bit 7 When the following order is specified for the machining
procedure data: 1) End face finishing 2)
Outer surface finishing,
0 : Machining continues from end face to the outer surface when
the workpiece has an inner surface.
1 : The end face and outer surface are machined in separate
cycles when the workpiece has an inner surface.

binary 0 0 0 0 0 0
Flag for automatic tool setting

Bit 0 Tooling information
Bit 1 Tool file
0 : Retrieved
1 : Not retrieved
0073 to Eight–digit 00000000 Not used

0099 binary
5
A. SETTING DATA,
Machining procedure data

0100 0200 0300 Integer Not defined Specifies the 1st machining process.
0101 0201 0301 2 Specifies the 2nd machining process. Drilling
0102 0202 0302 3 Specifies the 3rd machining process. End face roughing
0103 0203 0303 4 Specifies the 4th machining process. Outer surface roughing
0104 0204 0304 5 Specifies the 5th machining process. Inner surface roughing
0105 0205 0305 9 Specifies the 6th machining process. End face finishing
0106 0206 0306 10 Specifies the 7th machining process. Outer surface finishing
0107 0207 0307 11 Specifies the 8th machining process. Inner surface finishing
0108 0208 0308 12 Specifies the 9th machining process. End face grooving
0109 0209 0309 13 Specifies the 10th machining process. Outer surface grooving
0110 0210 0310 14 Specifies the 11th machining process. Inner surface grooving
0112 0212 0312 15 Specifies the 12th machining process. Residual outer surface machining
0111 0211 0311 16 Specifies the 13th machining process. Residual inner surface machining
0113 0213 0313 17 Specifies the 14th machining process. Front face threading
0114 0214 0314 18 Specifies the 15th machining process. Outer surface threading
0115 0215 0315 19 Specifies the 16th machining process. Inner surface threading
0116 0216 0316 30 Specifies the 17th machining process. End face center drilling
0117 0217 0317 32 Specifies the 18th machining process. End face drilling
0118 0218 0318 34 Specifies the 19th machining process. End face tapping
0119 0219 0319 36 Specifies the 20th machining process. C–axis end face grooving
0120 0220 0320 31 Specifies the 21st machining process. Side face center drilling
0121 0221 0321 33 Specifies the 22nd machining process. Side face tapping
0122 0222 0322 35 Specifies the 23rd machining process. Side face drilling
0123 0223 0323 37 Specifies the 24th machining process. C–axis side face grooving
0124 0224 0324 Not defined Specifies from the 25th to the 30th
to to to machining processes.
0129 0229 0329
6
A. SETTING DATA,
Correspondence between settings and machining

Fro turning
1: Center drilling 2: Drilling
2: Drilling
3: End facing roughing
4: Outer surface roughing
5: Inner surface roughing
6: End face semifinishing
7: Outer surface semifinishing
8: Inner surface semifinishing
9: End face finishing
10 : Outer surface finishing
11 : Inner surface finishing
12 : End face grooving
13 : Outer surface grooving
14 : Inner surface grooving
15 : Residual outer surface machining
16 : Residual inner surface machining
17 : Front face threading
18 : Outer surface threading
19 : Inner surface threading
20 : Cutting–off
21 : Bar feed
For C–axis machining
30 : End face center drilling
31 : Side face center drilling
32 : End face drilling
33 : Side face drilling
34 : End face tapping
35 : Side face tapping
36 : C–axis end face grooving
37 : C–axis side face grooving
38 : Front face milling
39 : Cylindrical grooving
NOTE
Be sure to specify that C–axis machining is executed after
turning finishing.
7
A. SETTING DATA,
Manual input data flags
0130 0230 0330 Eight–digit 00000000 For center drilling

binary
0131 0231 0331 00000000 For drilling
0132 0232 0332 00000000 For end face roughing
0133 0233 0333 00000000 For outer surface roughing
0134 0234 0334 00000000 For inner surface roughing
0135 0235 0335 00000000 For end face semifinishing
0136 0236 0336 00000000 For outer surface semifinishing
0137 0237 0337 00000000 For inner surface semifinishing
0138 0238 0338 00000000 For end face finishing
0139 0239 0339 00000000 For outer surface finishing
0140 0240 0340 00000000 For inner surface finishing
0142 0242 0342 00000000 For end face grooving
0141 0241 0341 00000000 For outer surface grooving
0143 0243 0343 00000000 For inner surface grooving
0144 0244 0344 00000000 For residual outer surface machining
0145 0245 0345 00000000 For residual inner surface machining
0146 0246 0346 00000000 For front face threading
0147 0247 0347 00000000 For outer surface threading
0148 0248 0348 00000000 For inner surface threading
0149 0249 0349 00000000 For cutting–off
0150 0250 0350 00000000 For bar feed
0151 0251 0351 00000000 Not used

to to to
0156 0256 0356 00000000
0157 0257 0357 00000000 For front face milling
0158 0258 0358 00000000 For cylindrical grooving
0159 0259 0359 00000000 For end face center drilling
0160 0260 0360 00000000 For side face center drilling
0161 0261 0361 00000000 For end face drilling
0162 0262 0362 00000000 For side face drilling
0163 0263 0363 00000000 For end face tapping
0164 0264 0364 00000000 For side face tapping
0165 0265 0365 00000000 For C–axis end face grooving
0166 0266 0366 00000000 For C–axis side face grooving
8
A. SETTING DATA,
Meaning of each flag
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 0 Specifies whether a tool is manually selected and whether the machining
start point and passing point are manually specified.
0 : The correct tool is automatically selected from the tooling
information.
1 : A tool is manually selected. The cursor temporarily stops moving
automatically to each field on the tool data screen, so the operator can
manually enter a tool number, machining start point, and passing
point.
Bit 1 Specifies whether cutting conditions are manually entered.
0 : Cutting conditions are automatically set.
1 : The cursor temporarily stops moving automatically to each field on
the cutting condition screen, so the operator can manually enter
cutting conditions.
Bit 2 Specifies whether a cutting direction and cutting area are manually
specified.
0 : A cutting direction and cutting area are automatically specified.
1 : The cursor temporarily stops moving automatically to each field on
the cutting direction and area screen, so the operator can manually
enter a cutting direction and cutting area.
(2) FAPT I/O interface data

0900 Integer 1 Reader/punch interface number (1 to 3)
0901 Integer 10 Specifies a baud rate. Option B

Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6
Baud rate 50 100 110 150 200 300
Setting 7 8 9 10 11
Baud rate 600 1200 2400 4800 9600
0902 Integer 2 Specifies the number of stop bits and the use of the DC code.
1: One stop bit and the DC code is used.
2: Two stop bits and the DC code is used.
5: One stop bit and the DC code is not used.
6: Two stop bits and the DC code is not used.
9
A. SETTING DATA,
A.2
SYSTEM
PARAMETER TABLE
Parameter Initial
Format Description Remarks
No. value
0000 Integer 0 Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
0001 Integer 1 Sets output code of system parameter, MTF and setting data. Only
1: ISO 2: EIA 15–TF/
15–TTF
0002 Integer 0 Sets sequence number output of NC tape

–1 : Sequence number is not output.
0 : Output every process.
1 or over : Output every block (increment)
0003 Integer 1 Increment every process (If this value exceeds the increment
in a process, the initial value of the next process is set to be
larger than the final value of the previous process.)
0004 0, 1 01100000 Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)

designation (8 bits)
0005 to Character Not Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)

0007 defined
0008 Integer –1 Waiting time until going to the next screen after entering the
answers to all questions.
–1 : No waiting time
0 : Until the soft key “NEXT PAGE” is pressed.
N : n second
0009 0, 1 00010000 Specify to skip a particular question.

designation (8 bits) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0
Bit 0 Designation of index position

Bit 1 Designation of home position
Bit 2 Designation of machining start point
Bit 3 Designation of Y–axis index and home positions
Bit 4 Selection of drawing format
Bit 6 Selection of standard surface roughness
0 : Non skip
1 : Skip
00010 0, 1 00011110 Skip of question on surface rughness

designation (8 bits) 0 : Non skip
1 : Skipped
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0
Bit 0 All surface roughness

Bit 1 Surface roughness to C
Bit 2 Surface roughness to G
Bit 3 Surface roughness to N
Bit 4 Surface roughness to R
0011 Real number 1. mm specification System variable (Do not change the setting
by yourself.)
yourself )
10
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0012 Real number 1000. mm specification System variable (Do not change the setting
by yourself.)
yourself )
0013 Real number 0 Setting of display time of initial graphic

0 : Initial graphic display is always displayed.
n : Initial graphic display is cleared, if its display lasts n second.
0014 Real number 6.4 Move amount of cursor at a time when expansion or
contraction is done by DRAWING RANGE key. This value is
specified by a multiplier of 1.6 mm inclusive.
0015 0, 1 00010001 Set the I/O unit of family program, material file, and tooling file.
0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 0 Input unit

Bit 4 Output unit
0 : Memory cassette
1 : Submemory
0016 Character Undefined Set the name of material file to be automatically loaded. Within 15
characters.
0017 Character Undefined Set the name of tooling information to be automatically loaded. Within 15
characters.
0018 Character Undefined Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
0019 0, 1 00000000 Setting of CRT when a figure is drawn vertically

designation (8 bits) 0 : Horizontal drawing display.
1 : Vertical drawing display.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 0 Setting for menu No.4, 5 and 6.

Bit 1 Setting for menu No.1, 2, 4, 5 and 6

0049 0, 1 00000000 Single step of bar feed process

designation (8 bits) 0 : Not stopped
1 : Stopped
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0
Bit 0 Process start

0050 0, 1 00000000 Single step of center drilling process

designation (8 bits) (Refer to parameter No.49)
0051 0, 1 00000000 Single step of drill process, reamer process and tapping
designation (8 bits) process
(Refer to parameter No.49)
0052 0, 1 00000000 Single step of rough cutting process

11
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0053 0, 1 00000000 Single step of semi–finish cutting process

0054 0, 1 00000000 Single step of finish cutting process

0055 0, 1 00000000 Single step of grooving process

0056 0, 1 00000000 Single step of Threading process

0057 0, 1 00000000 Single step of cutting off process

0100 Integer 0 0 : Absolute command NC data

1 : Incremental command NC data
0101 Integer 1 0 : Pocketing is not performed.

1 : Pocketing is performed.
2 : Lower part of overhang is machined.
0102 Integer 1 0 : Tool nose angle is not checked.

1 : Tool nose angle is checked.
0103 Integer 3 0 : Nose R is not compensated.

1 : Nose R is compensated.
2 : Nose R is compensated, and overshoot check is done.
0104 0, 1 00000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

designation (8 bits) 0 0
Bit 0 Questions of XS and ZS is

0 : Skipped
1 : Not skipped
Bit 1 Questions of first–time override of rough cutting is
0 : Skipped
1 : Not skipped
Bit 2 Double–sided machining function
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Bit 5 At rough machining
0 : Machining is performed under an overhanging
portion.
1 : Machining is not performed under an overhanging
portion.
Bit 6 At semifinish and finish machining
0 : Machining is performed under an overhanging
portion.
1 : Machining is not performed under an overhanging
portion
Bit 7 Regarding data display
0 : 1µ or 1/10000 in unit
1 : 0.1µ or 1/100000 in unit
12
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0105 0, 1 01011100 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0 Constant surface speed control

0 : Not used
1 : Used
Bit 1 Coolant
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Bit 2 Cutter compensation cancel
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 3 Approach
0 : Simultaneous 2 axes
1 : Simultaneous 1 axis
Bit 4 Escape
Bit 5 Rotating direction of spindle when cutting is made by
the turret on the front side.
Bit 6 Rotating direction of spindle when cutting is made by
the turret on the opposite side.
0 : By MTF No.1130.
1 : By MTF No.1131.
Bit 7 Setting screen for passing point
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
0106 0, 1 01011100 Tapping process parameter

0107 0, 1 01011100 Bar feed process parameter

0108 0, 1 01011100 Center drilling process parameter

0109 0, 1 01011100 Drilling process parameter

0110 0, 1 01011101 Roughing process parameter

0111 0, 1 01011101 Semi–finishing process parameter

0112 0, 1 01011101 Finishing process parameter

0113 0, 1 01011101 Grooving process parameter

0114 0, 1 00011100 Threading process parameter

0115 0, 1 01011101 Cutting off process parameter

0116 Real number 2. mm specification Overrun in drilling a penetration hole in the

automatic process
rocess sspecification
ecification
13
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0117 Real number 0.5 mm specification Finishing allowance in X axis of roughing

Unit: mm or inch
0118 Real number 0.1 mm specification Allowance in X axis of semi–finishing

Unit: mm or inch
0119 Real number 0.01 mm specification Final cutting depth of threading

Unit: mm or inch
0120 Real number 1. mm specification Return relief of roughing and drilling

Unit: mm or inch
0121 Real number 2. Cutting depth D1 (multiple of the drilling diameter) of one drilling
process (machining methods 2 and 3)
0122 Real number 5. Drawing depth D2 (multiple of the drilling diameter of drilling
(machining) method 3)
0123 Real number 0. Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
0124 Real number 1. mm specification Stub rate of drilling (machining method 3)

and feed rate of return relief during necking
0.04 inch specification Unit: mm/rev or inch/rev
0125 Real number 0.6495 Inner threading

Constant to obtain threading depth from pitch
(Threading depth) = (Pitch) ´ (Parameter No.0125)
0126 Real number 45. Threading

Boundary value of ordinary thread/face thread
0127 Real number 3. Cutting edge protection angle (degree)
0128 Real number 2000. Maximum spindle speed (rpm)
0129 Real number 1.5 Grooving dwell time (rev)
0130 Real number 0.0005 mm specification System constant (R4TOLR) (Do not
change the setting by yourself.)
yourself )
0131 Real number 0.0005 mm specification System constant (R4TOLR) (Do not
yourself )
0132 Real number 0.01 mm specification System constant (R4TOLT) (Do not
yourself )
0133 Real number 0.001 System constant 4 (R4 TOLP) (Don’t change this setting at
random.)
14
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0134 Real number 0.000573 System constant 5 (R4 TOLA) (Don’t change this setting at
random.)
0135 Real number 3. Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
0140 Integer 0 Specification of cutting–off process.

0 : Cutting–off process is not defined.
1 : Cutting–off process is defined.
0141 Real number 0. mm specification Cutting–off point of cutting–off machining

(CO).
Specify
S ecify the distance from the inner
0. inch specification diameter of the part
Unit: mm or inch
0142 Real number 5. mm specification Machining condition change point (CR) of

cutting–off machining.
Specify
S cutting–off
ecify the distance from the cutting off
0.2 inch specification point.
Unit: mm or inch
0143 Real number 1. mm specification Drawing amount (RA) of cutting–off

machining.
Specify
S ecify the distance from the machining
0.04 inch specification condition change point.
Unit: mm or inch
0144 Real number 0. mm specification Outer diameter beveling amount on the

blank side cutting
cutting–off.
off.
0. inch specification Unit: mm or inch
0150 Integer Undefined Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
0152 Real number 10. mm specification Clearance amount (CAX) at the time of bar
approach.
feed tool a roach.
0153 Real number 10. mm specification Clearance amount (CAZ) at the time of bar
approach.
feed tool a roach.
0154 Real number 20. mm specification Position at which the fingers grip the work
by bar feed (WG).
0155 Real number 20 mm specification Bar feed return amount (CEZ) of the tool
Unit: mm or inch
0156 Real number 100 Spindle speed at bar feed (S1)
0157 Real number 1000. mm specification Feed rate (F1) for putting fingers on the
work by bar feed.
40. inch specification Unit: mm/min or inch/min
15
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0158 Real number 3000. mm specification Feed rate (F2) for positioning on the work
by bar feed.
0159 Real number 1000. mm specification Feed rate (F3) of tool after positioning on
the work by bar feed.
0160 Real number 3. Dwell time when the chuck is opened or closed in bar feed.
(Second)
0170 Real number 2. mm specification Cutting depth per cut of machining a

groove by the pecking
ecking motion D
0171 Real number 1. mm specification Return relief amount during machining of a

groove by the pecking
ecking motion U
0172 Real number 0.5 mm specification Z–axis finishing allowance at roughing

Unit: mm or inch
0173 Real number 0.1 mm specification Z–axis allowance at intermediate finishing
0174 Real number 0.7578 Constant for obtaining the depth of a thread from the pitch of
outer surface threading
(Depth) = (pitch) ´ (parameter No.174)
0175 to Real number Undefined Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
0179
0180 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of center drilling C

Unit: mm or inch
0181 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of Drilling (machining

methods 1, 2, and 3) C.
0182 Real number 2. mm specification Secondary clearance amount of drilling

(machining method 3) C1.
0183 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of roughing in the

X–axis
X axis direction CX
0184 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of roughing in the

Z–axis
Z axis direction CZ
0185 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of semi–finishing in the

X–axis
X axis direction CX.
16
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0186 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of semi–finishing in the

X–axis
X axis direction CZ.
0187 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of finishing in the

X–axis
X axis direction CX.
0188 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of finishing in the

Z–axis
Z axis direction CZ.
0189 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of grooving or necking

C
0190 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of threading CT

Unit: mm or inch
0191 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of threading CS

Unit: mm or inch
0192 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of threading CE

Unit: mm or inch
0193 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of cutting off C1

Unit: mm or inch
0194 Real number 2. mm specification Second clearance for inner surface

machining CZ2
0195 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount (C1) of tapping
0196 Real number 5. Speed override at return of reaming (1.0–10.0)
0197 to Real number Undefined Unusable (Data unchangeable)

0199
0200 Integer 2 Set the drawing type.
0202 Real number Undefined Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
17
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0204 Integer 1 Sets the position of parts as viewed from the advancing
direction of the definition of parts figure.
(1)
1 : Right side
–1 : Left side
(when drawing format is 1 or 2)
(2)
–1 : Right side
1 : Left side
(when drawing format is 3 or 4)
However, if vertical drawing display is available, right and left

should be reversed.
0205 Integer 2 Set the standard surface roughness by the number of the finish
symbols.
0206 Real number Undefined mm specification X–coordinate value of the machine datum
(for head 1 with the 4–axis lathe). (1st
process in double–sided machining)
Undefined inch specification
Unit: mm or inch
0207 Real number Undefined mm specification Z–coordinate value of the machine datum
(for head 1 with the 4–axis lathe). (1st
process in double–sided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
0208 Real number Undefined mm specification X–coordinate value of the machine datum
4–axis
(for head 2 with the 4 axis lathe).
0209 Real number Undefined mm specification Z–coordinate value of the machine datum
(for head 2 with the 4
4–axis
axis lathe).
lathe)
0210 Real number Undefined mm specification X–coordinate value of the turret turn
position (for head 1 with the 4–axis lathe).
(1st process in double–sided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
0211 Real number Undefined mm specification Z–coordinate value of the turret turn
position (for head 1 with the 4–axis lathe).
(1st process in double–sided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
0212 Real number Undefined mm specification X–coordinate value of the turret turn
position 4–axis
osition (for head 2 with the 4 axis lathe).
position 4–axis
position 4–axis
18
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0214 Real number Undefined mm specification X–coordinate value of machine origin on

back working side (for tool rest 1 in 4–axis
lathe) (2nd process double–sided
rocess in double sided
Undefined inch specification machining)
Unit: mm or inch
0215 Real number Undefined mm specification Z–coordinate value of machine origin on

lathe) (2nd process
rocess in double
double–sided
sided
Undefined inch specification machining)
Unit: mm or inch
0216 Real number Undefined mm specification X–coordinate value of machine origin on

lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
0217 Real number Undefined mm specification Z–coordinate value of machine origin on

back working side(for tool rest 2 in 4–axis
lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
0218 Real number Undefined mm specification X–coordinate value of turret turning

position on back working side (for tool rest
1 in 4–axis
4 axis lathe) (2nd process
rocess in
Undefined inch specification double–sided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
0219 Real number Undefined mm specification Z–coordinate value of turret turning

1 in 4–axis
4 axis lathe) (2nd process
rocess in
Undefined inch specification double–sided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
0220 Real number Undefined mm specification X–coordinate value of turret turning

2 in 4–axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
0221 Real number Undefined mm specification Z–coordinate value of turret turning

2 in 4–axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
0222 Real number Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of machine origin (for
head 1 in 4
4–axis
axis lathe)
0223 Real number Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of machine origin (for
head 2 in 4
4–axis
axis lathe)
0224 Real number Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of turret turning

position 4–axis
osition (for tool rest 1 in 4 axis lathe)

osition (for head 2 in 4
position 4–axis
axis lathe)
19
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0226 Real number Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of machine origin on

back working side (for head 1 in 4–axis
lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
0227 Real number Undefined mm specification Y–coordinate value of machine origin on

back working side (for head 2 in 4–axis
lathe)
Unit: mm or inch

position on back working side (for head 1
in 4–axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch

position on back working side (for head 2
in 4–axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
0230 Integer 1 Number of times final finishing is repeated in a multiple thread

cutting cycle (valid for the Series 16)
0231 Integer 0 Length of incomplete thread in a multiple thread cutting cycle

(valid for the Series 16)
0300 0, 1 00100100 C–axis center drilling process parameter For C–axis

designation (8 bits) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 machining
0 0
Bit 1 Coolant
0 : Not used
1 : Used
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 3,4 Approach
11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axes
Bit 5 Return relief (X, Z axis)
Bit 7 Passing point setting screen
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
Process parameter on center drilling
0301 0, 1 00100100 C–axis drill processing process parameter

designation (8 bits) (Refer to the parameter 300)
0302 0, 1 00100100 C–axis tapping processing process parameter

0303 0, 1 00100100 C–axis groove processing process parameter

0304 0, 1 00100100 C–axis face milling process parameter

20
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0305 0, 1 00100100 C–axis drill working process parameter

designation (8 bits) (see parameter 300)
0306 to 0, 1 00000000 Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)

0308 designation (8 bits)
0309 0, 1 00000000 Parameter for C–axis/Y–axis machining For C–axis/

designation (8 bits) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Y–axis
0 0 0 0 0 0 machining
Bit 0 Specifies whether the values for a machining plane are

specified.
0 : Not specified
1 : Specified
Bit 1 Feed mode
0 : Safe feed mode
1 : Effective feed mode
Note) Bit 0 is valid only C–axis.Bit
0310 0, 1 00000000 Single step process for C–axis center drilling For C–axis
0 0 0 0 0
Bit 0 Head of process

Bit 1 Before approach
Bit 2 Before escape
0 : Not stop
1 : Stop
0311 0, 1 00000000 Single step process for C–axis drilling process

designation (8 bits) (Refer to parameter 310)
0312 0, 1 00000000 Single step process for C–axis tapping

0313 0, 1 00000000 Single step process for C–axis grooving

0314 0, 1 00000000 Single step process for C–axis face milling

0315 0, 1 00000000 Single step process for C–axis drill process

designation (8 bits) (see parameter 310)

0320 Real number 0. Dwell time (sec) of drill processing C–axis/

Y–axis
0321 Integer 80 Cutting speed override (% to special tool) when the tool C–axis/
material is “Special”. Y–axis
0322 Integer 80 Feed amount override (% to special tool) when the tool material C–axis/
is “Special” Y–axis
0323 Real number 0. Coordinates values at C–axis zero point
0330 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of C–axis center drilling

C1.
21
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0332 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of C–axis drilling




0338 Real number 2. mm specification Cutting depth of C–axis drilling (machining

method 2) D1.
0339 Real number 1. mm specification Return relief amount of C–axis drilling

(machining method 2) U.



0343 Real number 2. mm specification Cutting depth of C–axis drilling (machining

method 3) D1.
0362
0363 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of C–axis tapping C1.

Unit: mm or inch
0364 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of C–axis tapping C2.

Unit: mm or inch
0365 Real number 2. mm specification Depth of cut for C–axis tapping (machining
method 3: Containing peckeck rigid ta
tapping)
ing)
0.08 inch specification Unit: mm or inches
22
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0367 Real number 2. mm specification Tool direction clearance of C–axis

grooving CD and notching clearance of
C–axis grooving C1.
Unit: mm or inch
0368 Real number 0.5 mm specification Finishing allowance in C–axis front

notching
inch specification Unit: mm or inch
0370 Real number 2000. Max. rpm of tool (rpm) C–axis/

Y–axis
0371 Real number 1.0 Extension amount for approach/escape along a tangent line or
circle in C–axis milling or Y–axis contouring
0.1
0372 Real number 0.2 Cutting rate toward a diameter for C–axis face milling For C–axis
machining
0373 Real number 0.5 mm specification Finishing allowance of C–axis face milling
(in the Z axis direction)
0400 0, 1 00100100 Y–axis center drilling process parameter For Y–axis

0
Bit 1 Coolant
0 : Not used
1 : Used
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 3,4 Approach
Bit 5,6 Return relief
11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axis
Bit 7 The prompt relating to the passing point is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
0401 0, 1 00100100 Y–axis drilling process parameter

designation (8 bits) (refer to the parameter No.400)
0402 0, 1 00100100 Y–axis tapping process parameter

0403 0, 1 00100100 Y–axis pattern machining process parameter

0404 0, 1 00100100 Y–axis contouring process parameter

23
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0405 to 0, 1 00000000 Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.) For Y–axis
0409 designation (8 bits) machining
0410 0, 1 00000000 Single step of Y–axis center drilling process

0 0 0 0 0
Bit 0 Process start

0 : Not stopped
1 : StoppedBit
0411 0, 1 00000000 Single step of Y–axis drilling process

0412 0, 1 00000000 Single step of Y–axis tapping process

0413 0, 1 00000000 Single step of Y–axis pattern machining process

0414 0, 1 00000000 Single step of Y–axis contouring process


0420 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of Y–axis center drilling

C1
0422 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of Y–axis drilling

(machining method 1) C1



0427 Real number 2. mm specification Cutting depth of Y–axis drilling (machining

method 2) D1
0428 Real number 2. mm specification Return relief amount of C–axis drilling

(machining method 2) U
24
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value



0433 Real number 2. mm specification Cutting depth of Y–axis drilling (machining

method 3) D1
0435 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of Y–axis tapping C1

Unit: mm or inches
0436 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance amount of Y–axis drilling C2

Unit: mm or inches
0437 Real number 2. mm specification Cutting depth of Y–axis tapping

(machining method 3: Rigid tapping with
pecking) D1
Unit: mm or inches
0439 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance of Y–axis pattern machining


0441 Real number 0.5 mm specification Finishing allowance of Y–axis pattern

machining TS (machining method 1)
0442 Integer 80 Cutting depth D1 (Percentage of the tool diameter)


0446 Real number 0.5 mm specification Finishing allowance of Y–axis pattern

machining TS (machining method 2)
25
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0447 Integer 80 Cutting depth D1 (Percentage of the tool diameter)
0449 Real number 2. mm specification Clearance CD in the longitudinal direction

and clearance C1 in the circumferential
direction of the tool for Y–axis contouring
Unit: mm or inches
0450 Real number 0.5 mm specification Finishing allowance of Y–axis contouring

TS
0459

0701 0, 1 00000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Parameter

designation (8 bits) 0 0 for
animation
Bit 2 When interference alarm sounded: drawing
0 : Stop drawing
1 : Continue drawing
Bit 3 Animation drawing in manual operation mode
0 : Disable
1 : Enable
Bit 4 Center line is
0 : Drawn
1 : Not drawn
Bit 5 Interference check is
0 : Executed
1 : Not executed
Bit 6 By executing M30, blank is
0 : Not redrawn
1 : Redrawn
Bit 7 The setting of parameters for drawing is
0: Possible
1: Prohibited
26
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0702 0, 1 00001000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0 Questioning for maximum spindle speed

0 : is not performed
1 : is performed (for each process)
Bit 1 The direction of spindle revolution for each tool
0 : can not be set (The spindle rotating direction
follows the system parameters
(No.107 to 115) per process.)
1 : can be set (Ignore the system parameter
No.107 to 115 setting.)
Bit 2 Initial value of maximum spindle speed
(Valid it bit 0 is 1)
0 : become the value of system parameter No.128
1 : become undefined data
Bit 3 In machining definition, the tool figure data:
0 : Cannot be set.
1 : can be set.
Bit 4 Special threading is:
0 : Not carried out. (A conventional triangular thread is
formed.)
1 : Carried out. (A square or trapezoidal thread is
formed.)
Bit 5 The second clearance specified for inner surface
machining is rendered:
0 : Invalid.
1 : Valid.
Bit 6 The depth of center drilling is measured from:
0 : The tool shoulder.
1 : The tool tip.
Bit 7 The method of cutting depth of drilling
0 : Cutting depth is specified by incremental
programming
1 : Cutting depth is specified by absolute programming
0703 0, 1 00000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

designation (8 bits) 0 0 0 0
Bit 2 One process end, return point of turret

0 : Return to next machining start point
1 : Return to this machining start point
Bit 4 Prompting order for input of blank figure dimensions
0 : D, D0, and L
1 : L, D, and D0
Bit 5 Input of surface roughness ‘0’ is
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
Bit 7 When the function to determine processes
automatically is used, a drill having the same diameter
as the inner surface:
0 : Cannot be used
1 : Can be used.
27
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0704 0, 1 00000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

designation (8 bits) 0
Bit 0 When operating both turrets simultaneously using the

process editing function, the waiting
0 : not output before T code cancel
1 : output before T code cancel
Bit 1 At the start of new process when the spindle revolution
direction is different between new and old processes,
the spindle stop M code is
0 : not output
1 : output
Bit 2 Auto collision avoidance function is
0 : used repeatedly
1 : used once
Bit 3 For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool offset
is:
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 4 Before cutting with a minor cutting edge is started for
grooving, the T code of the second tool offset number
is:
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 6 Specifies whether a blank figure (BWF) is filled in on the
machining definition screen.
0 : Not filled in
1 : Filled in
(For the 5900 and 5F00 systems, a blank is not filled in
regardless of the setting of bit 6.)
Bit 7 Specifies whether a machining area (CAF) is
line–drawn.
0 : Not line–drawn
1 : Line–drawn
0705 0, 1 00000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

designation (8 bits) 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 1 In the animation drawing,

0 : Upper tool is turret 1
1 : Lower tool is turret 1
Bit 5 Specifies the following when the T code cancellation
command is executed during foreground simulated
animation.
0 : The pictorial tool stops.
1 : The pictorial tool continues moving.
Bit 6 When another module requests the right to use
graphics exclusively during simulated machining,
0 : The right is not released.
1 : The right is released.
28
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0706 0, 1 00000000 Next tool and rigid tapping parameter

designation
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0
Bit 5 Calling the next tool from turret 1

0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
Bit 6 Calling the next tool from turret 2
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
Bit 7 Format of the rigid tapping cycle
0 : A normal rigid tapping cycle is output.
1 : An interpolation rigid tapping cycle is output.
0707 0, 1 00000000 Designation of balance cutting process TT only

0 0
Bit 0 Outside diameter roughing

Bit 1 Outside diameter semi–finishing
Bit 2 Outside diameter finishing
0 : Not made to the balanced cutting process.
1 : If the condition is satisfied, it can be made to the
balanced cutting process.
Bit 5 Setting of surface speed control for balance cut B during
outer surface rough machining
0 : Constant surface speed control is not used. (G97)
1 : Constant surface speed control is used. (G96)
Bit 6 Setting of balance cut approach during outer surface
rough machining
0 : The waiting M code is not output before approach.
1 : The waiting M code is output before approach
(waiting for spindle rotation to be reached).
Bit 7 Balanced cutting type of outside diameter roughing
0 : Set the initial value of the prompt on the tool data
screen to the value of system parameter No.755 so
that type B is selected.
1 : Set the initial value of the prompt on the tool data
screen to 0 so that type A is selected.Bit
29
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0708 0, 1 00000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

designation (8 bits) 0
Bit 0 Common data to be restored when the power is turned

on
0 : System parameters
1 : Family data
Bit 2 Specifies whether process names are automatically
inserted for each process when an NC data is created.
0 : No process name is automatically inserted.
1 : Process names are automatically inserted.
Bit 3 Specifies whether the initial screen display function is
used.
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Bit 4 Input/output format of material data and tooling
information
0 : Binary
1 : ISO/EIA
Bit 5 Initial screen at Power up.
0 : FAPT side
1 : NC side
Bit 6 Automatic process setting screen display
0 : High–speed type (The screen is skipped.)
1 : Conventional type (The screen is not skipped.)
Bit 7 Specify whether back machining is performed.
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
0709 0, 1 10000000 Bit 4 When the cutting end point is on a blank

designation (8 bits) 0 : The tool retracts to the minimum diameter of the
blank.
1 : The tool retracts in the Z axis direction.
Bit 5 Prompt for “CUTTING ANOTHER AREA BY SAME
TOOL? ... CN=”
0 : Displayed on the cutting condition setting screen.
1 : Displayed on the CN setting screen.
Bit 7 On the machining procedure setting screen,
0 : The machining procedure data cannot be
registered in sub–memory.
1 : The machining procedure data can be registered n
sub–memory.
0710 Integer 0 Defined priority on turret during automatic collision prevention 15–TTF
function only
0 : Defined by the operator
1 : The turret 1 always has the priority
2 : The turret 2 always has the priority
0711 Integer 100 One time override value during outer diameter rough
machining
0712 Integer 1 Magnification of the cutting feedrate when the constant surface
speed is set for balance cut B (Setting range: 1 to 100) If the
value set for the parameter falls outside the setting range, it is
clamped to magnification 1).
0713 to Integer Undefined Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)

0728
30
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0729 Integer 2 Display language switching parameter The

optional
1: Japanese 2: English 3: German ROM is
4: French 5: Swedish 6: Finnish required for
7: Norwegian 8: Danish 9: Chinese Swedish
10: Dutch 11: Italian 12: Spanish and the
languages
(Otherwise English display) beyond it.
0730 Integer 100 Initial value of waiting M code 15–TTF

only
0731 Integer 200 Initial value of waiting M code which is inserted automatically
in ACA
0732 Real number Undefined Value of the M code for inverting a workpiece
Value of the M code for starting Y–axis machining
0733 Real number Undefined Value of the M code for ending Y–axis machining Only for the
5710 and
5800 and
5E00
0734 Real number Undefined Value of the M code for ending Y–axis machining Only for the
5710 and
5800 and
5E00
0735 Real number 500 Initial value of the waiting M code for each machining path Only for TT
when using balance cut B.

0738
0739 Integer Undefined Password for protecting a file
0740 Integer Undefined M code number for the start of turning Only for the
Setting of this parameter can be omitted when only turning is 5900 and
performed. However, it cannot be omitted when turning is 5F00
performed after C– or Y–axis machining. systems
0741 Integer Undefined M code number for the start of C–axis machining (switching to Only for the
the C–axis animated simulation screen) 5900 and
5F00
systems
0742 Integer Undefined M code number for the start of cylindrical grooving (switching Only for the
to the cylindrical groove animated simulation screen) 5900 and
5F00
systems
0743 Integer Undefined M code number for the start of Y–axis machining (switching to Only for the
the Y–axis animated simulation screen) 5900 and
5F00
systems

0748
0750 Real number 1 Graphic scale constant
31
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
No. value
0751 Real number 3. mm specification Tip width of the drilling tool.

Unit: mm or inch
0752 Real number 3. mm specification Tip width of the grooving tool. Parameters
Unit: mm or inch for
0.1 inch specification animated
drawing
0753 Real number 2. mm specification Tip width of the threading tool.
Unit: mm or inch
0754 Real number 5. mm specification Tip width of the general–purpose tool.

Unit: mm or inch
0755 Real number 0.2 mm specification Initial value of the fine chamfering amount.
Unit: mm or inch
0756 Real number 120 Max. angle in which fine chamferring is performed. (Setting
range 0°< Angle to 180°)
0757 Real number 1.5 Delay amount of tool 2 with respect to tool 1 during balance 15–TTFB
cutting (type B), Unit: rev only
0758 to 0, 1 Undefined Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)

0769 Real number 0.8 Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
0770 Character Undefined File name of the sub cycle file using the automatic loading Max. 15
characters.
0771 Character Undefined Axis names and their order (Specify the axis names in the order
in which they are programmed on the NC. Example: XZCY)
0771 to 0, 1 Undefined Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)

NOTE
The undefined character parameter is indicated with the “D”
code. To return to undefined data after setting data at the
undefined parameter No.0016, 0017, input two or more SP
codes. In this case, instead of the “D” code, a space is
displayed on the CRT. To change the undefined parameter
to undefined data, input DEL and INPUT .
32
A. SETTING DATA,
System Parameter Table Concerning Color Display

Parameter
Initial value Color Details Format
No.
0500 6 Light blue Fixed picture for drawing format setting.
0501 6 Light blue Fixed picture for blank figure and base line setting.
0502 3 Yellow Not used.
0550 7 White Axis.
0551 4 Blue Lines that indicate blank figure.
0552 1 Red Lines that indicate machining figure.
0553 7 White Threading area when machining is defined by menu No.4.
0554 4 Blue Center drilling tool path.
0555 4 Blue Drilling, reaming or tapping path.
0556 2 Green Outside–diameter rough machining tool path.
0557 2 Green Inside–diameter rough machining tool path.
0558 2 Green Outside–diameter semi–finish machining tool path.
0559 2 Green Inside–diameter semi–finish machining tool path.
0560 6 Light blue Outside–diameter finish machining tool path.
0561 6 Light blue Inside–diameter finish machining tool path.
0562 5 Violet Grooving and necking tool path.
0563 3 Yellow Threading tool path.
0570 2 Green Machining path for Y–axis machining (center drilling)
0571 2 Green Machining path for Y–axis machining (drilling)
0572 2 Green Machining path for Y–axis machining (tapping)
0573 2 Green Machining path for Y–axis machining (patten machining)
0574 2 Green Machining path for Y–axis machining (contouring)
0575 to Undefined Undefined Not used.

0578
0579 6 Sea blue Y–axis machining parts figure
0580 2 Green Machining path for C–axis machining (center drilling)
0581 2 Green Machining path for C–axis machining (drill)
0582 2 Green Machining path for C–axis machining (tap)
0583 2 Green Machining path for C–axis machining (groove)
0584 2 Green Machining path for C–axis machining (notching)
0585 2 Green Machining path for C–axis machining cylindrical groove
0586 3 Yellow Line representing a pending machining profile (pending mode)
33
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
0587 to Not defined Not defined Not used

0589
0590 6 Sea blue C–axis machining parts figure.
0600 1 Red Edition No. display at initial screen.
0601 2 Green Not used.
0602 1 Red JCL message (input message displayed when “AUXILIARY” key is
pressed at initial screen and data is input upon request).
0603 2 Green Message from system.
0604 3 Yellow Mount message concerning BC, EF, etc.
0605 2 Green File name displayed at input/output of family program.
0606 2 Green Menu display.
0607 1 Red Misinput data display.
0608 1 Red “(1: KILL 0: CONT)” message.
0609 3 Yellow Wink 1 (wink of menu No. at menu display and of symbol name at
request picture).
0610 6 Light blue Wink 2 (wink of “EXECUTING”).
0611 –7 *White Wink 3 (wink of parameter No. during parameter setting).
0612 3 Yellow Wink 4 (wink of process No. at menu No.4 aprocess list).
0613 3 Yellow Cursor that indicates range of machining area and enlargement.
0614 1 Red Error message.
0615 3 Yellow Lowest question symbol name.
0616 7 White Symbols of messages other than that currently under question at
question message (key word).
0617 7 White Key–in data (data displayed at right to key word).
0618 5 Violet 1st–line main title and page No.
0619 7 White 1st–line sub–title and message currently under question

(principally main question).
0620 2 Green 2nd–line message.
0621 2 Green Fixed messages (messages other than questions that invariably
appear on that page and their accompanying messages).
(Example) “1. CYLINDER” display at material select picture.
0622 2 Green Fixed messages for one page (groups of messages that appear
several times on one page, such as process list).
0623 2 Green Question message.
0624 6 Light green Not used.
0625 3 Yellow Question key word and relevant data.
34
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
0626 5 Violet “PRESS SOFT KEY” message (with picture fixed).
0627 6 Light blue Messages accompanying the message currently under question.
(Example) Accompanying message displayed when EE data is

entered at groove shape input: “(0: LAST 1: NEXT)”
0628 6 Light blue Already keyed–in data and numeric data

(Example 1) Color of element symbol displayed on the 2nd line
at machining figure definition picture.
(Example 2) Parameter data and coordinate data display.
0629 5 Violet Main title with no page No.

(Example) “PARAMETER & DATA SET” when “DATA SET” key
is pressed at initial picture.
0650 2 Green Not used.
0651 2 Green Scale value display ‘S =’
0652 7 White T code display ‘T’
0653 1 Red O No. display “O”
0654 3 Yellow NC data.
0655 7 White Coordinate display ‘X’, ‘Y’.
0656 3 Yellow Cutting time display ‘CUTTING =’.
0657 3 Yellow Rapid feed time display ‘RAPID =’.
0660 2 Green Color of blank of animated simulation Do not change Integer

(For the 5900 and 5F00, the colors used for the setting
animated simulation cannot be changed.)
0661 4 Blue Color of chuck of animated simulation Integer

(For the 5900 and 5F00, the colors used for
0662 4 Blue Color of tail stock of animated simulation Integer

0663 5 Purple Color of center line of animated simulation Integer

0664 7 White Color of tool holder of animated simulation Integer

0665 1 Red Color of tip of turret 1 Integer

0666 1 Red Color of tip of turret 2 (TTF only) Integer

35
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
0667 to Undefined Undefined Not used Do not change

0669 7 White the data
0670 7 White Color of the data programmed on the initial Do not change
screen data setting screen the data
0671 7 White CAF (Machining area) drawing color
0672 to Undefined Undefined Not used

0689
Color Red Green Yellow Blue Violet Light Blue White
Setting value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NOTE
Negative symbol (–) means inverted display.
36
A. SETTING DATA,
A.3
MACHINE TOOL FILE
(MTF) TABLE
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
1000 8 F16 File name (NC name)

Characters
1001 Integer 1 Z–axis command inversion

1 : Normal output
–1 : Inverted output of Z–axis command value
1002 Integer 0 Reference to the NC data output format corresponding to the case when
there is no move at approach or return relief.
0 : Not referred.
1 : Referred.
1010 Real number 9999.999 mm specification Maximum command radius of arc interpolation
Unit: mm or inch
1020 Real number 0.001 mm specification Z axis minimum setting unit.

Unit: mm or inch
1021 Real number 0.001 mm specification X axis minimum setting unit

Unit: mm or inch
1022 Real number 0.001 mm specification Y–axis minimum setting unit

Unit: mm or inches
1023 Real number 0.0001 mm specification Feed per revolution and screw lead (F code)
Minimum setting unit: mm/rev or inch/rev
1024 Real number 0.0001 mm specification High–precision screw lead (E code)

Minimum setting unit: mm/rev or inch/rev
1025 Real number 0.001 Least input increment of dwell time (sec)
1030 Integer 3 mm specification Number of decimal digits of the Z axis minimum setting
unit
1031 Integer 3 mm specification Number of decimal digits of the X axis minimum setting
unit
1032 Real number 3 mm specification Number of decimal digits of the Y–axis minimum setting
unit
1033 Integer 4 mm specification Number of decimal digits of the minimum setting unit of
feed per
er revolution and screw lead (F code)
37
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
high–precision
high– recision screw lead (E code)
1035 Integer 3 Number of digits below decimal point of dwell time
1036 Integer 0 Setting of the number of digits below decimal point of S code. Applicable to
S 3–digit and S 4–digit output.
1040 2 ZW Z–axis command address

Characters 1st character: Absolute command
2nd character: Incremental command
1041 2 XU Z–axis command address

Characters 1st character: Absolute command
1042 2 KK Circular center address (Designate 2 same characters) in Z–axis direction

Characters
1043 2 II Circular center address (Designate 2 same characters) in X–axis direction

Characters
1044 2 FF Feedrate and thread lead command address (Designate 2 same characters)
Characters
1045 2 EE High–precision thread lead command address

Characters 1st character: For normal screw
2nd character: For face screw
1046 2 UU Dwell command address (Designate 2 same characters)

Characters
1047 2 RR Circular radius R specification address (Designate 2 same characters)

Characters
1048 2 YV Y–axis command address

Characters 1st character: absolute command
2nd character: incremental command
1049 2 JJ Circular center address in Y–axis direction (designate 2 same characters)

Characters
1050 Integer 1 Number of turrets (1 or 2)

1 : 2–spindle lathe
2 : 4–spindle lathe (1 spindle/2 turrets)
1051 Integer 1 No.1 turret position

1 : Turret on this side
–1 : Turret on the counter side
1052 Integer 1 No.2 turret position

1 : Turret on this side
–1 : Turret on the counter side
1053 Integer –1 No.1 turret selection M code (–1 is set, if not used)
1054 Integer –1 No.2 turret selection M code (–1 is set, if not used)
38
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
1055 Integer 0 Setting of turret types

0 : Normal 2–spindle lathe
1 : 2–spindle lathe with reversible
X–axis (Chasing tool type turret, etc.)
2 : 4–spindle lathe
1060 0, 1 10000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

designation (8 bits) 0 0
Bit 0 Specifies whether or not to output G50 at home position.

0 : Output
1 : Not output
Bit 1 Specifies whether or not to output the shift from home position to
index position.
0 : Output
1 : Not output
Bit 2 Specifies whether or not to output the shift from index position to
home position.
0 : Output
1 : Not output
Bit 3 Specifies whether the value is output for each axis during approach.
0 : Not output when there is no travel.
1 : Output even when there is no travel, for all axes.
Bit 6 In a threading process, the G code of multiple thread cutting cycle is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
Bit 7 Specifies whether or not to use G code for fixed cycle at tapping in
turning.
0 : Not use
1 : Use
1064
1073
1080 Integer 1. Program number

1 : Provided
2 : Output with main program and sub–program format.
1081 Integer 1 Method of specifying the X and Y coordinates

0 : Radius for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate
1 : Diameter for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate
(standard setting)
2 : Radius for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate
3 : Diameter for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate
1082 Integer 2 Circular interpolation function

0 : Two or more quadrants
1 : One quadrant only
2 : Specifying radius R
3 : Specifying radius R (one quadrant only)
The addresses specified in 1042, 1043, and 1049 become the addresses of
the center on the axes.
1083 Integer 1 Specification of threading cycle (canned cycle G92)

–1 : None
0 : Straight threading only
1 : Taper threading is possible
39
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
1084 Integer 2 Simultaneous one–axis moving sequence (Effective when simultaneous

one axis is specified by system parameters No.0107 to 0115.)
0 : X–axis moves first in approach, while the
Z–axis moves first in escape at all times.
1 : Inner diameter, end face
Approach: Z–axis → X–axis
Escape: X–axis → Z–axis
Outer diameter
Approach: X–axis → Z–axis
Escape: Z–axis → X–axis
2 : Reverse procedure of set values in 1 (Standard setting)
3 : Z–axis moves first in approach, while X–axis moves first in escape at
all times.
Movement sequence of sequential approach and escape along one or two

axes if the Y–axis FAPT function is used (valid only when simultaneous
approach or escape along one or two axes is specified in system parameters
0400 to 0405)
0 : Approach is always started from the XY axes. Escape is always
started from the Z–axis.
1 : End face
Approach: Tool axis (Z–axis) →
Tool path (XY plane)
Escape: Tool path (XY plane) →
Tool axis (Z–axis)
Side face
Approach: Tool axis (X–axis) →
Tool path (ZY plane)
Escape: Tool path (ZY plane) →
Tool axis (X–axis)
2 : Reverse movement sequence of 1 (standard setting)
3 : Approach is always started from the Z–axis. Escape is always started
from the X, Y axes.
1085 Integer 1 Constant surface speed control

0 : Not provided
1 : Provided (G96 directly output)
2 : Provided (G97 output, then
G96 output)
G50X_ Z_ S_ ;
G97S_M03; (Dummy rotation)
G00X_ Z_ ; (Approach)
G96SX_ ; (Constant surface speed)
1090 Real number 4000. mm specification Z–axis rapid feed rate

Unit: mm/min or inch/min
1091 Real number 4000. mm specification X–axis rapid feed rate (radius value)
Unit: mm/min or inch/min
1092 Real number –1. mm specification Maximum value of high–precision screw lead (E code)
((–1.0
1.0 when no E code is sspecified)
ecified)
–1. inch specification Unit: mm or inch
1093 Real number 4000. mm specification Y–axis rapid traverse rate

Unit: mm or inch
40
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
1100 Integer 4 Number of digits of sequence number (N) command
1101 Integer 0 Specification of zero suppress of F code

0 : Zero suppress is done (Leading zero are not output.)
n : F code is output in n digits at all times.
1102 Integer 4 Number of digits of S code command number
1103 Integer 4 Not used
1104 Integer 2 Number of digits of T code tool selection number
1105 Integer 2 Number of digits of T code tool offset number
1106 Integer –1 T code value to be output after all process ends (Required for returning to a
specified tool number.
This parameter is set to –1, if this function is not required.)
1107 Integer 1 Decimal point input function

0 : Not provided
1 : Provided
(If this parameter is set to 1, address P is not assignable to parameter
No.1046.)
1110 Integer –1 1st stage selection M code in spindle revolution (–1, if not used)
1111 Integer –1 2nd stage selection M code in spindle revolution (–1, if not used)
1112 Integer –1 3rd stage selection M code in spindle revolution (–1, if not used)
1113 Integer –1 4th stage selection M code in spindle revolution (–1, if not used)
1114 Real number 50 Minimum spindle speed of 1st stage (rpm) (–1, if not used)
1115 Real number 5000 Maximum spindle speed of 1st stage (rpm) (–1, if not used)
1116 Real number –1.0 Minimum spindle speed of 2nd stage (rpm) (–1, if not used)
1117 Real number –1.0 Maximum spindle speed of 2nd stage (rpm) (–1, if not used)
1118 Real number –1.0 Minimum spindle speed of 3rd stage (rpm) (–1, if not used)
1119 Real number –1.0 Maximum spindle speed of 3rd stage (rpm) (–1, if not used)
1120 Real number –1.0 Minimum spindle speed of 4th stage (rpm) (–1, if not used)
1121 Real number –1.0 Maximum spindle speed of 4th stage (rpm) (–1, if not used)
1122 Real number 0.01 Change ratio of S code output
1130 Integer 3 M code value in normal revolution of spindle (–1, if not used)
1131 Integer 4 M code value in reverse revolution of spindle (–1, if not used)
1132 Integer 5 M code value in spindle stop (–1, if not used)
1133 Integer 8 M code value with coolant on (–1, if not used)
1134 Integer 9 M code value with coolant off (–1, if not used)
1135 Integer 30 M code value in program end (–1, if not used)
1136 Integer 1 Output M01 at completing a process. When “–1” is set, it is not output.
41
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
1137 Integer 98 M code for subprogram call (–1, if not used)
1138 Integer 99 M code for subprogram end (–1, if not used)
1139 Integer –1 Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
1140 Integer value –1 M code for override cancel ON (for the balance cut FAPT, type B) (When not
in use: 1)
1141 Integer value –1 M code for override cancel ON (for the balance cut FAPT, type B) (When not
in use: 1)
1142 Integer –1 M code for clockwise rotation of the 2nd spindle (for back machining)
(Not used: –1)
1143 Integer –1 M code for counterclockwise rotation of the 2nd spindle (for back machining)
(Not used: –1)
1144 Integer –1 Cannot be used. (Do not change the data.)
1145 Integer –1 M code for starting back machining (Not used: –1)
1146 to Integer –1 Cannot be used. (Do not change the data.)

1149
1200 Integer 0 Rapid traverse G code
1201 Integer 1 Cutting feed G code
1202 Integer 2 Circular interpolation (CW) G code
1203 Integer 3 Circular interpolation (CCW) G code
1204 Integer 32 Threading G code
1205 Integer 92 Canned cycle G code
1210 Integer 97 Constant surface speed control off G code
1211 Integer 96 Constant surface speed control on G code
1220 Integer –1 Absolute command mode G code
1221 Integer –1 Incremental command mode G code
1222 Integer –1 G code for metric input
1223 Integer –1 G code for inch input
1224 Integer –1 Not used
1225 Integer –1 Not used
1230 Integer 40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel G code
1231 Integer 41 Tool nose radius compensation (left side) start G code
1232 Integer 42 Tool nose radius compensation (right side) start G code
42
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
1240 Integer 4 Dwell G code
1244 Integer 50 Coordinate system setting G code
1252 Integer 54 First spindle side workpiece coordinate system select G code
1253 Integer 55 Second spindle side workpiece coordinate system select G code
1260 Integer 98 Per minute feed G code
1261 Integer 99 Per revolution feed G code
1262 Integer –1 G code for return to the initial point (only for 5E00, 5710 series)
1300 Two characters CH C–axis command address

1st character: Absolute command
1301 Real number 0.001 C–axis lease input increment (Deg)
1302 Integer 3 No. of digits to the right of decimal point of C–axis least input increment.
1303 Real number 4000. C–axis rapid traverse rate (Deg/min)
1304 0, 1 00000011 Drilling canned cycle in each process (C–axis/Y–axis)

designation (8 bits) 0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
Drilling
Center drilling
1305 Specified with 0 or 00000000 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 (8 bits) 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 0 IN front notching, finishing of Y–axis pattern machining, and

contouring, cutter compensation is carried out by:
0 : FAPT (G40, G41, and G42 are not output.)
1 : NC (G40, G41, and G42 are output.)
Bit 1 Specifies whether the radius command for cylindrical interpolation is
output with a decimal point.
0 : No decimal point
1 : With a decimal point
43
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
1306 Integer 0 Method of C–axis control

0 : Servo motor control method
1 : Spindle positioning method
1307 Integer 0 When controlled axes are simultaneous 2 axes.

0 : XZ axes are simultaneous 2 axes.
1 : XC–axis or ZC–axis are simultaneous 2 axes.
1308 Integer 0 Command method at the time of spindle positioning

0 : Half fixation angle indexing
1 : Arbitrary angle indexing
1309 Real number 1. mm specification Feed rate (feed per minute)

Minimum setting unit: mm or inch
feed rate per
er minute
1311 Real number 0.01 No use
1312 Integer –1 No use
1313 Integer –1 M code of forward tool rotation
1314 Integer –1 M code of reverse tool rotation
1315 Integer –1 Milling start M code
1316 Integer –1 Cutting start M code
1317 Integer –1 Orientation M code
1318 Integer –1 Spindle positioning release M code
1319 Integer –1 Spindle indexing M code
1320 Real Undefined Indexing angle
1321 Real number 29 M code for preparation of rigid tapping (Only 5700 series. –1 for other series)
1322 to Integer –1 Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)

1339
1340 Integer 0 Specifies whether the C–axis is parallel to the X– or Y–axis.

0 : X–axis
1 : Y–axis
1341 Integer 0 Specifies the number of decimal places of data specified for the C–axis.
0 : That specified in the least input increment for the X–axis in MTF 1030
1 : That specified in the least input increment for the Z–axis in MTF 1031

designation (8 bit)
1343 Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)
1344 to Integer 0 Can’t use. (Don’t change the data.)

1349
1350 Integer 29 M code of the miscellaneous function for preparing for rigid tapping (valid for
(8 digit) series except 5700 series)
44
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter Initial
Format Description
No. value
1351 Integer 68 C–axis clamping M code
1352 Integer 69 C–axis unclamping M code
1353 Integer 1 Cutting along the X axis in the interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1354 Integer 2 Cutting along the Y axis in the interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1355 Integer 6 Tool calling M code
1360 Integer 83. Drilling cycle dwell off Front face
1376 Integer 85. Boring cycle Front face
1377 Integer 89. Boring cycle Side face
1380 Integer 107. Cylindrical interpolation start/cancel
1381 Integer 112. Polar coordinate interpolation start
1382 Integer 113. Polar coordinate interpolation cancel
1383 Integer 384 G code for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1384 Integer 380 G code for canceling an interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1390 Integer 1 Output format of canned cycle R code

0 : absolute,
1 : incremental
1391 1 K Canned cycle repetitive code

characters
1392 2 RR Address specifying the difference in radius of the thread for a multiple thread
characters II cutting cycle (High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1393 2 PP Address specifying the thread height for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High
characters KK order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1394 2 QQ Address specifying the depth of the first cut for a multiple thread cutting cycle
characters DD (High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1395 2 PP Address specifying a tool angle for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High order:
characters AA 5710, low order 5E00)
1396 2 PP Address specifying the cutting method for a multiple thread cutting cycle
characters PP (High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1397 2 RR Address specifying a finishing allowance for a multiple thread cutting cycle
characters RR (High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
NOTE
Parameter numbers other than listed above may also
appear on the CRT. These parameters are employed the
system.
Don’t change them.
45
A. SETTING DATA,
A.4 The parameter numbers 2000s of the MTF (Machine Tool File) are used
as a function table to be referred to when NC data is prepared by the
FUNCTION TABLE Symbolic FAPT. When a parameter number of 2000s is referred to, NC
(MTF 2000S) data of the format in accordance with the function code set therein is
prepared. The format of NC data can be altered by changing the function
code to be set in and after the parameter number 2000.
A.4.1 Each parameter in and after the MTF parameter number 2000 is provided
Outline with the following meaning:
NOTE
For details of the parameters to be referenced by the Y–axis
FAPT function, see Part IX.
Parameter No. Meaning Remarks
2000 The leader part of NC data is prepared. FEED, EOR, program No., etc.
2001 The trailer part of NC data is prepared. M30, EOR, etc.
2002 The beginning part of center drilling process
2003 The beginning part of drilling process
2004 The beginning part of rough machining process
2005 The beginning part of medium finish machining process
2006 The beginning part of finish machining process
2007 The beginning part of grooving process
2008 The beginning part of threading process
2009 The end part of center drilling process Tool offset cancel, M01, etc.
2010 The end part of drilling process Tool offset cancel, M01, etc.
2011 The end part of rough machining process Tool offset cancel, M01, etc.
2012 The end part of medium finish machining process Tool offset cancel, M01, etc.
2013 The end part of finish machining process Tool offset cancel, M01, etc.
2014 The end part of grooving process Tool offset cancel, M01, etc.
2015 The end part of threading process Tool offset cancel, M01, etc.
2016 Setting of coordinate system and output of tool selection T code G50, Txxxx, etc.
2017 Output of rapid traverse, cutting feed move command block G01 X_ Z_ F_ ;
2018 Output of approach two axes at a time move command block Rapid traverse move command,
coolant ON, etc.
2019 Output of relief two axes at a time move command block Rapid traverse move command,
coolant OFF, etc.
2020 Output of circular interpolation move command block In case of I or K command.
46
A. SETTING DATA,
2021 Output of circular interpolation move command block In case of radius R command.
2022 Threading command block output Tapping process retapping command

when threading cycle is not used and
MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 0
2023 Output of threading cycle command block In case of the threading cycle used.
2024 Output of spindle speed command block rpm command
2025 Output of spindle range changeover block The spindle range is changed over.
2026 Output of a threading command block When no threading cycle is used
2027 Output of dwell command block
2028 Constant surface speed control ON
2029 Unused.
2030 Output of spindle maximum speed clamp value command block G50S_ ;
2031 1st motion for approach in one axis at a time
2032 2nd motion for approach in one axis at a time
2033 1st motion for return relief in one axis at a time
2034 2nd motion for return relief in one axis at a time
2035 Starting part of cutting–off processing
2036 Starting part of bar feed processing
2040 End section of cutting–off processing Tool offset cancel, MDI, etc.
2041 End section of bar feed processing Tool offset cancel, MDI, etc.
2045 Output of a specific cedeFor model TT only For model TT only
2046 Simultaneous 2–axis approach move command of bar feed M05;

G00X_ Z_ ; etc.
2047 Simultaneous 1–axis approach 1st motion M05;

G00X_ ; etc.
2048 Simultaneous 1–axis approach 2nd motion M05;

G00Z_ ; etc.
2049 Move command to the work gripping position in bar feed G98G01Z_ F_ ; or
G98G01X_ F_ ;
2050 Dwell command when the chuck of bar feed is to be opened. M_ ;

G04U_ ; etc.
2051 Move command for work feeding in bar feed. G01Z_ F_ ; etc.
2052 Dwell command when the chuck of bar feed is to be closed. M_ ;

G04U_ ;
2053 Move command 1 after work feeding in bar feed. G01Z_F_ ; or

G01X_ F_ ;
2054 Move command 2 after work feeding in bar feed G00Z_ ;
47
A. SETTING DATA,
2055 Starting section for reaming
2056 Starting section for tapping
2057 Ending section for reaming
2058 Ending section for tapping
2059 Command block outputs for tapping cycle (G84) and reverse Tapping process relief cutting
tapping cycle (G84.1) command when canned cycle is used
and MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 1
2060 Command block 1 for a multiple thread cutting cycle
2061 Command block 2 for a multiple thread cutting cycle
2065 Outputs the T code specifying tool offset for each cutting area. TXXXX;
Outputs the T code specifying the second tool offset for grooving
2066 Block for preparing the next tool
2067 Block for cutting with balance cut B
2068 Setting of the coordinate system for turning and T code output (Back machining)
2069 Setting of the coordinate system for milling and T code output (Back machining)
2070 Beginning part of Y–axis machining (CAUTION 1)
2071 Beginning part of Y–axis center drilling
2072 Beginning part of Y–axis drilling
2073 Beginning part of Y–axis tapping
2074 Beginning of Y–axis pattern
2075 Beginning of Y–axis contouring
2080 Not used
2081 End part of Y–axis center drilling
2082 End part of Y–axis drilling
2083 End part of Y–axis tapping
2084 End of Y–axis pattern
2085 End of Y–axis contouring
2100 Start of main program
2101 End of main program
2102 Start of subprogram FEED, O_ , etc.
2103 End of subprogram M99, M30, FEED, etc.
2104 Subprogram call block M98P_ ;
2110 Beginning of a turning process (CAUTION 2)
2111 Beginning of a milling process (CAUTION 3)
48
A. SETTING DATA,
2200 Start part of C–axis machining
2201 End part of C–axis machining
2202 Setting of coordinate system for C–axis machining, Tool selection

T code output
2203 Drill cycle (G81, G82) G81 is output when the dwell time is 0
Command block output – Part 1
2204 Drill cycle (G81, G82) G82 is output when the dwell time is
Command block output – Part 2 other than 0
2205 Peck drilling cycle (G83), Machining type

High–speed peck drilling cycle (G83.1), 2: G83.1
Command block output – Part 1 3: G83
2206 Peck drilling cycle (G83),

High–speed peck drilling cycle (G83.1),
2207 Tapping cycle (G84), In the case of reverse screw: G84.1 is

Reverse tapping cycle (G84.1), output
2208 Tapping cycle (G84),

Reverse tapping cycle (G84.1),
2209 Start of cylindrical interpolation
2210 End of cylindrical interpolation
2211 Spindle indexing command block output
2212 Block in which cutter compensation for front milling (polar Valid when bit 7 of MTF 1305 is set to
coordinate interpolation) or finishing of Y–axis pattern/contouring 1
is started
2213 Block in which cutter compensation for front milling (polar

coordinate interpolation) or finishing of Y–axis pattern/contouring
is canceled
2214 Cylindrical interpolation start block
2215 Cylindrical interpolation cancellation block
2216 Boring cycle block (G85, G89) 1
2217 Boring cycle block 2
2220 Start of C–axis center drilling (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2221 Start of C–axis drilling (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2222 Start of C–axis tapping (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2223 Start of C–axis grooving (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2224 Start of C–axis notching (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2225 Start of C–axis cylindrical grooving (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
49
A. SETTING DATA,
2230 End of C–axis center drilling (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2231 End of C–axis drilling (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2232 End of C–axis tapping (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2233 End of C–axis grooving (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2234 End of C–axis notching (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2235 End of C–axis cylindrical grooving (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2240 C–axis interpolation tapping cycle block (1)
2241 C–axis interpolation tapping cycle block (2)
2242 Block for canceling a C–axis interpolation tapping cycle
2243 Y–axis interpolation tapping cycle block (1)
2244 Y–axis interpolation tapping cycle block (2)
2245 Block for canceling a Y–axis interpolation tapping cycle
2300 Output of the special function code Number of codes that can be set: 10
CAUTION
1 Data is referenced at the beginning of Y–axis machining.
If two or more Y–axis machining processes are defined
continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or
subsequent processes.
2 The data is referenced at the beginning of a turning process.
If two or more turning processes are defined continuously,
processes.
3 The data is referenced at the beginning of a milling process.
If two or more milling processes are defined continuously,
processes. The milling process can be a C–axis machining
process or Y–axis machining process.
50
A. SETTING DATA,
A.4.2 Hexadecimal number of 4 digits set to the MTF 2000s is called a function
Function Code code, which represents the format of NC data to be output when each
function table is referred to.
(1) Structure of Function Code
The function code of 4 digits is divided into the least significant one
digit, and the most significant three digits; the function represented by
that code is roughly classified by the least significant three digits; the
function represented by that code is roughly classified by the least
significant one digit, and the details of that function are specified by
the most significant three digits.
1 2 3 4
Function code of 4 digits
Least significant 1 digit

(major classification)
Most significant 3 digits
(detailed classification)
(2) Major Classification of Function Codes

Least significant 1 digit
Function
of function code
0 Special function
1 Output of move command
2 Output of G code
3 Output of F, S, or T code, etc.
4 Output of special code
5 Output of M code (set to MTF 1130s)
6 Output of special M code

(range selection or turret selection)
7 Output of code of value 0
8 Output of optional M code

(M code other than major classification 5, and 6)
9 Output of optional S code
A Output of optional T code
E Referencing of an optional function table
F Canned word output
51
A. SETTING DATA,
(3) Detailed classification of function code

The detailed classification of function code is as follows:
(a) Special function
When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 0 ...
***0;
Most significant 3 Least significant

digits (detailed 1 digit (major Function Remarks
classification) classification)
0 0 0 0 No operation
other than 0 0 Feed output Output a x 20 feeds

(= a)
(b) Output of move command

***1;
Most significant Least significant

3 digits (detailed 1 digit (major Function Remarks
0 0 0 1 First axis output (Z axis) Address set to MTF 1040
1 1 0 1 Second axis output (X axis) Address set to MTF 1041
3 3 0 1 First auxiliary output Address set to MTF 1042

(circular center Z axis)
4 4 0 1 Second auxiliary output Address set to MTF 1043

(circular center X axis)
6 6 0 1 Screw lead output Address set to MTF 1044. However, if the setting
(F code) value of MTF 1092 is not exceeded, the output is
made with lead (E code)
7 7 0 1 High–precision screw lead Address set to MTF 1045

(E code)
8 8 0 1 Dwell command output Address set to MTF 1046
9 9 0 1 Circular radius value output Address set to MTF 1047
A A 0 1 Third axis output Address set to MTF 1300
C C 0 1 Output of W0 Output is made only in the case of Z direction of

simultaneous 2 axes or simultaneous 1 axis in
approach and escape
D D 0 1 Output of U0 Output is made only in the case of X direction of

simultaneous 2 axes or simultaneous 1 axis in
approach and escape
E 1 0 1 Outputs the address specified in MTF 1392. Thread radius
E 2 0 1 Outputs the address specified in MTF 1393. Thread height
E 3 0 1 Outputs the address specified in MTF 1394. Depth of the first cut
E 4 0 1 Outputs the address specified in MTF 1397. Finishing allowance
52
A. SETTING DATA,
(c) Output of G code

***2;

0 0 0 2 G code output (G00) set to Output of G code of MTF 1200 – 1207

MTF 1200
CAUTION
0 1 0 2 G code output (G01) set to The G code of MTF 1200 – 1207, MTF 1210 –
MTF 1201 1211, MTF 1220 – 1225, and MTF 1230 – 1232 is
model
d l managedd for
f each h group. Thus,
Th when
h theth
0 2 0 2 G code output (G02) set to function code specifying these G code is referred
MTF 1202 to, the G code is output only when it is different
f
from th
the G code
d output.
t t Al
Also, thi
this G code
d iis nott
0 3 0 2 G code output (G03) set to
output when –1 is set to MTF 1200 – 1251.
MTF 1203

MTF 1204

MTF 1205

MTF 1206

MTF 1207
1 0 0 2 G code output (G97) set to G code output of MTF 1210 – 1211

MTF 1210

MTF 1211

MTF 1230

MTF 1231

MTF 1232
3 0 0 2 G code output set to MTF G code output of MTF 1220 – 1225

1220
3 1 0 2 G code output set to MTF

1221

1222

1223

1224

1225
53
A. SETTING DATA,


MTF 1240
CAUTION
4 1 0 2 G code output (G28) set to The G code of MTF 1240 – 1251 is not modal
MTF 1241 managed. Thus, when the function code
specifying
if i these
th G code
d isi referred
f d to,
t the
th G code
d
4 2 0 2 G code output (G29) set to is always output. Also, this G code is not output
MTF 1242 when –1 is set to MTF 1240 – 1251.
MTF 1243

MTF 1244

MTF 1245

MTF 1246

MTF 1247

MTF 1248

MTF 1249
4 A 0 2 G code output (G75) set to

MTF 1250
4 B 0 2 G code output (G76) set to

MTF 1251
4 C 0 2 G code set to MTF1252 or G code for selecting a back machining coordinate

MTF1253 is output system
5 0 0 2 MTF 1200 (G00) or 1201 The G code of MTF 1200 and 1201 are output in the
(G01) is output case of rapid traverse move and cutting feed (line),
respectively.
5 1 0 2 MTF 1202 (G02) or 1203 The G code of MTF 1202 and 1203 are output in the
(G03) is output case of CW circular and CCW circular, respectively.
5 2 0 2 G codes of MTF 1220 and The G codes of MTF 1220 and 1221 are output in the
1221 are output case of absolute command and incremental
command, respectively.
5 3 0 2 Output MTF 1231 (G41) or MTF 1231 for left side cutter compensation MTF 1232
1232 (G42) for right side cutter compensation
5 5 0 2 G codes of MTF 1202 and The G codes of MTF 1203 and 1202 output in the
1203 are output case of CW circular and CCW circular, respectively.
5 6 0 2 G codes of MTF 1222 and The G codes of MTF 1222 and 1223 are output in the
1223 are output case of mm input and inch input, respectively.
54
A. SETTING DATA,

5 7 0 2 The selected G code is XC plane: G17

output. ZX plane: G18
CZ plane: G19
5 8 0 2 G codes of MTF 1260 and MTF 1260 at every minute feed, MTF 1261 at every
1261 are output revolution feed
6 0 0 2 Initial point return G code is The G98 is output only in the case of B, C of G code
output system
6 1 0 2 G81 or G82 is output
6 2 0 2 G83 or G83.1 is output
6 3 0 2 G84 or G84.1 is output
6 4 0 2 G7.1 is output. The G code for cylindrical interpolation is output.
6 5 0 2 The G code set in MTF

1381 is output.

1382 is output.

1376 and 1377 is output.
7 0 0 2 The G code (G98) set to G codes of MTF 1260 – 1261 are output.
MTF 1260 is output
CAUTION
The G codes of MTF 1260 – 1261 are modal
7 1 0 2 The G code (G99) set to managed. Thus, when the function code
MTF 1261 is output specifying these G code output. Also, this G code
is not output when –1 is set to MTF 1260 – 1261.
8 0 0 2 The G code (G384) set to

MTF 1383 is output
8 0 0 2 The G code (G380) set to

MTF 1384 is output
(d) Output of F, S, and T codes

***3;

0 0 0 3 Tool offset cancel T code It depends on the setting of process parameter of

output system parameter whether the T code is actually
output.
0 1 0 3 T code output Tool offset start
0 2 0 3 S code (rpm) output It is output only when the change rate from the speed
output immediately before exceeded the setting
value of MTF 1122.
55
A. SETTING DATA,

0 3 0 3 Maximum speed clamp It is output only when the MTF 1085 has the constant
value S code output surface speed control function and the constant
surface speed control function is used in the process
parameter (system parameter 0108 – 0114).
0 4 0 3 Surface speed command S

code output
0 5 0 3 F code output It is output only in the case of cutting feed. It is

compared with the modal value and is output only
when it is a different value.
0 6 0 3 Output of program number It is not output when 0 is set to MTF 1080.
0 7 0 3 Final T code output The T code set to the MTF 1106 is output. No output
is made when –1 has been set.
0 8 0 3 Output of subprogram call The subprogram number (PXXXX) is output by the

P code subprogram call program (M98PXXXX).
0 9 0 3 R code output For canned cycle
0 A 0 3 Q code output For canned cycle
0 B 0 3 L code output For canned cycle
0 C 0 3 P code output For canned cycle
0 D 0 3 Outputs the address specified in MTF 1395. Tool angle (valid for the Series 15 only)
0 E 0 3 Outputs the address specified in MTF 1395. Tool angle (valid for the Series 16 only)
0 F 0 3 Outputs the address specified in MTF 1396. Specified cut method (valid for the
Series 15 only)
1 0 0 3 F code output Interpolation rigid tapping cycle
Outputs the address

specified in MTF1398
1 1 0 3 T code output Interpolation rigid tapping cycle
Outputs the address

specified in MTF1399
1 2 0 3 B code output Preparing the tool used in the first process.
Outputs the address

specified in MTF1400.
1 3 0 3 B code output Preparing the tool used in the next process.
Outputs the address

specified in MTF1400.
1 4 0 3 T code output Output the tool number (TN).
1 5 0 3 T code output Output the tool offset number (TM).
56
A. SETTING DATA,
(e) Output of special code

***4;
0 0 0 4 EOB output (;) One block of NC data is output. However, the block
with EOB only is not output.
0 1 0 4 EOR output (%) The EOR (%) is output.
0 2 0 4 /..... EOB output One block of NC data with/(optional skip) is output.
0 3 0 4 NC data output Valid for an address indicating other than the

amount of travel
0 4 0 4 NC data output cancel Valid for an address indicating other than the
amount of travel
(f) M code output (set at the MTF 1130 – 1139)

***5;
0 0 0 5 Spindle forward revolution The M codes of MTF 1130 or 1131 are output
M code output (M03 or corresponding to the spindle revolution direction set
M04) by the process parameter (system parameter 0108 –
0113) and turret position MTF 1051.
0 1 0 5 The spindle stop M code When the spindle revolution direction is reversed the
(M05) is output on spindle M05 (MTF 1132) is output. Nothing is output when the
reverse revolution direction of revolution does not change.
0 2 0 5 Spindle stop M code output The M code set to the MTF 1132 is output. Also, the
(M05) M03 – M05 are modal managed and the M code
which is the same as the modal value is not output.
0 3 0 5 Coolant on M code output The M code of MTF 1133 is output. However, this
(M08) applies to the coolant use process only (by
designation of process parameter).
0 4 0 5 Coolant off M code output The M code of MTF 1134 is output. Also, the M08 and
(M09) M09 are modal managed and it is output only when
it is different from the modal value.
0 5 0 5 Program end M code The M code set to the MTF 1135

output (M30)
0 6 0 5 Optional stop M code The M code set to the MTF 1136

output (M01)
0 7 0 5 Subprogram call M code The M code set to the MTF 1137

output (M98)
0 8 0 5 Subprogram return M code The M code set to the MTF 1138

output (M99)
0 9 0 5 MTF 1139 (unused) Cautions) When “–1” is set to the MTF 1130 – 1139,
its M code is not output.
57
A. SETTING DATA,

0 A 0 5 Tool calling M code M code specified in MTF1355
1 0 0 5 Milling machining M code The M code set to the MTF 1315 and 1316. It is
or turning machining M selected by machining type.
code output
1 1 0 5 Spindle stop M code output The M code set to the MTF 1132. It is output when the
milling machining is executed from the turning
machining or the turning machining is executed from
the milling machining.
1 2 0 5 Spindle indexing M code The M code set to the MTF 1319

output
1 3 0 5 Orientation M code output The M code set to the MTF 1317
1 4 0 5 Spindle positioning release The M code set to the MTF 1318

M code output
1 5 0 5 The M code set in MTF

1321 is output.
1 6 0 5 Outputs the C–axis M code specified in MTF1351

clamping M code (M68).
1 7 0 5 Outputs the C–axis M code specified in MTF1352

unclamping M code (M69).
(g) Output of special M code (range selection, turret selection)

***6;
0 0 0 6 Spindle range selection M The M code (MTF 1110 – 1113) corresponding to the
code selected range is output. Also, the M code of MTF
1110 – 1113 is modal managed.
0 0 0 6 Turret selection M code The M code of MTF 1054 – 1056 is output. Currently
output (unused) it is not used.
58
A. SETTING DATA,
(h) Value 0 code output

***7;
0 0 0 7 Z0 output The first character

address of MTF 1040
0 1 0 7 W0 output The second character

address of MTF 1040
1 0 0 7 X0 The first character

address of MTF 1041
1 1 0 7 U0 The second character

address of MTF 1041
3 0 0 7 R0 The first character

address of MTF 1042
3 1 0 7 R0 The second character

address of MTF 1042
4 0 0 7 R0 The first character

address of MTF 1043
4 1 0 7 R0 The second character

address of MTF 1043
6 0 0 7 F0 The first character

address of MTF 1044
6 1 0 7 F0 The second character

address of MTF 1044
7 0 0 7 F0 The first character

address of MTF 1045
7 1 0 7 F0 The second character

address of MTF 1045
8 0 0 7 C0 output The first character

address of MTF 1300
8 1 0 7 H0 output The second character

address of MTF 1300
59
A. SETTING DATA,
(i) Arbitrary M, S, T code output

When the significant 1 digit (major classification) is 8, 9, A.
M code value 8 M code output
S code value 9 S code output
T code value A T code output
NOTE
With the function codes of major classes 8, 9 and A, the M,
S, T code specified by the first 3 digits of the function code
is output. The value of the M, S, T code to be output is
specified by a 3–digit hexadecimal number.
8: M code
9: S code
0: T code
output M, S, T code value

(hexadecimal number)
Example)
The function code to output S100 is specified as follows.
0 6 4 9
Indicateds that the address to be

output is S.
Expresses the value to be output

100 in a hexadecimal number.
60
A. SETTING DATA,
(j) Fixed word output

The least significant 1 digit (major classification) is F ... ***F
0 0 0 F Only address characters are output a: ASCII code of output address
to 1 F Subsequent to address characters, the

to following 1–word value is output.
F F 7
b: Output digit number
(a) (b)
8 F Subsequent to address characters, the

to following 2–word value is output.
F
b: Total output digit number
(b) b–8: No. of digits past the decimal point
Example 1)
If the function code is set to 503F, 0064, the following is output as NC
data output.
P100
Example 2)
Set No. MTF 2200 as follows.
2200 = 0705, 504F, 1F40, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
NC data at the C–axis machining head part is output as follows.
M98P8000;
CAUTION
1 Any other function code than those listed in this table is
undefined. Any other code than them must not be set to the
function table.
2 Difference between CC01 and 0107, between DD01 and
1107.
If the latter parameter is referred to, W0 and U0 are output
always. Besides, for the former parameter, W0 and U0 are
output only when it is the symmetry axis resulting from
division.
61
A. SETTING DATA,
A.4.3 The function table of MTF 2000s is fixed in size, that is, the number of
Size of Function Table function codes which can be set for each parameter number is fixed.
The number of the function codes which can be set to MTF 2000s is equal
to the number of those displayed on the picture, and a larger number of
function codes cannot be specified any longer. When all of the allowable
number of function codes are not used, 0000 should be set to the
remaining ones.
The number of function codes which can be set to MTF 2000s is listed in
the following table.
Parameter Number of Parameter Number of Parameter Number of
No. function No. function No. function
2000 10 2030 4 2100 10

2001 10 2031 10 2101 10
2002 6 2032 10 2102 10
2003 6 2033 10 2103 10
2004 6 2034 10 2104 10
2005 6 2035 6
2006 6 2036 6 2110 10
2007 6 2111 10
2008 6 2040 6
2009 6 2041 6 2200 10
2010 6 2201 6
2011 6 2045 10 2202 10
2012 6 2046 10 2203 10
2013 6 2047 10 2204 4
2014 6 2048 10 2205 10
2015 6 2049 10 2206 4
2016 8 2050 10 2207 10
2017 8 2051 10 2208 4
2018 10 2052 10 2209 10
2019 10 2053 10 2210 4
2020 9 2054 10 2211 4
2021 8 2055 6 2212 10
2022 7 2056 6 2213 10
2023 7 2057 6 2214 10
2024 10 2058 6 2215 10
2025 8 2059 10
2026 7 2060 10 2300 10
2027 4 2061 10 2301 10
2028 10 2065 6 2302 10
2029 7 2303 10
2304 10
2305 10
2306 10
2307 10
2308 10
2309 10
(Example)
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z C R P F
G18 G99 G82
G19
62
A. SETTING DATA,
Example of Setting
2000 = 0300, 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED % ; 0 ;
2001 = 0205, 0004, 0703, 0004, 0505, 0004, 0104, 0004, 0300, 0000
M05 ; TXXXX ; M30 ; % ; FEED
2002 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2003 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2004 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2005 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2006 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2007 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2008 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2009 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2010 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2011 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2012 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2013 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2014 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2015 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2016 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004
G50 X Z Smax ; G00 TXXXX ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G00 X Z C F ;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z C M08 ;
G91 G01
2019 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z M09 ;
G91 G01
2020 = 5202, 5102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 4401, 3301, 0503, 0004
G90 G02 X Z C I K F ;
G91 G03
2021 = 5202, 5102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 9901, 0503, 0004
G90 G92 X Z C R F ;
G91 G03
2022 = 5802, 5202, 0402, 1101, 0001, 6601, 0004
G98 G90 G32 X Z F ;
G99 G91 E
2023 = 0502, 1101, 0001, 4401, 6601, 0004, 0000
G92 X Z I F ;
E
63
A. SETTING DATA,
2024 = 0002, 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1002, 0203, 0005, 0004, 0000
G00 M05 ; MXX ; G97 S M03 ;
M04
2025 = 0002, 0205, 0004, 0006, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G00 M05 ; MXX ;
2026 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2027 = 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000
G04 U ;
2028 = 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1102, 0403, 0005, 0004, 0000, 0000
M05 ; MXX ; G96 S M03 ;
M04
2029 = 1002, 0203, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G97 S ;
2030 = 4402, 0303, 0004, 0000
G50 Smax ;
2031 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z C M08 ;
G91 G01
2032 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z C M08 ;
G91 G01
2033 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z M09 ;
G91 G01
2034 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z M09 ;
G91 G01
2035 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2036 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2040 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2041 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2045 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2046 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z ;
G91 G01
2047 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z ;
G91 G01
2048 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 X Z ;
G91 G01
2049 = 7002, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G98 G90 G00 X Z F ;
G91 G01
2050 = 0000, 0000, 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G04 U ;
2051 = 7002, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G98 G90 G00 X Z F ;
G91 G01
2052 = 0000, 0000, 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G04 U ;
64
A. SETTING DATA,
2053 = 7002, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G98 G90 G00 X Z F ;
G91 G01
2054 = 7102, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G99 G90 G00 X Z F ;
G91 G01
2055 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2056 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2057 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2058 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2059 = 5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G98 G84 X Z R F ;
G99 G84.1
FS15 format
2060 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2061 = 4B02, 1101, 0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0D03, 0F03, 0004
G76 X Z I K D F A P ;
FS16 format
2060 = 4B02, 0E03, 0E401 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G76 P R ;
2061 = 4B02, 1101, 0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0004, 0000, 0000
G76 X Z R P Q F ;
2065 = 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
TXXXX ;
2100 = 0603, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0 ;
2101 = 0703, 0004, 0505, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
TXXX ; M30 ;
2102 = 0100, 0603, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED 0 ;
2103 = 0205, 0004, 0805, 0204, 0505, 0004, 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000
M05 ; M99 /; M30 ; FEED
2104 = 0705, 0803, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M98 P ;
2110 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
Not used
2111 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
Not used
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004, 4102, 8107, 0004, 0000
FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; G28 H0 ;
2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ; M01 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
2203 = 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503, 0B03
G98 G98 G81 X Z C R P F L
G99 G82 K
2204 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
65
A. SETTING DATA,
2205 = 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503, 0B03
G98 G98 G83 X Z C R Q F L
G99 G83.1 K
2206 = 0004, 0000, 0000
;
2207 = 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 1505, 0203, 0005
G98 G98 G84 X Z C R Mxx S M03
G99 G84.1 M04
2208 = 0503, 0B03, 0004, 0000
F L ;
K
2209 = 0102, 5702, 0107, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
G1 G17 W0 M0 ; G107 C ;
G18 G7.1
G19
2210 = 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000
G107 C ;
G7.1
2211 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2212 = 5202, 5002, 5302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G41 X Z C F ;
G91 G01 G42
2213 = 5202, 5002, 2002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000, 000
G90 G00 G40 X Z C F ;
G91 G01
2214 = 6502, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G112 ;
G12.1
2215 = 6602, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G11.3 ;
G13.1
2300 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2301 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2302 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2303 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2304 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2305 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2306 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2307 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2308 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2309 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
66
A. SETTING DATA,
A.4.4
Reference of Function
Table
In the process of making up the NC data which commands the machinings

of (1) to (19), the parameters 2000s are referred to as follows:
Point to be Referred to Parameter
Description
No.
(1) Home position (start of program) 2000 Feed, EOR, program No.
2016 G50X_ Z_ ;
(2) Home position 2017 Move to the tool exchange point

→ Exchange point of tool G00X_ Z_ ;
(3) Tool change point (start of process) 2002 to In case of the beginning part of process, or rough machining of
2008 outer diameter, 2004 is referred to.
or
2035
or
2036
2016 G50X_ Z_ S;
G00T_ ;
2024 Output of spindle speed G97S_M03;

or
2028 Constant surface speed ON
G97S_ M03;
67
A. SETTING DATA,
Point to be Referred to Parameter

Description
No.
The first move from the tool exchange point.

Coolant ON
(4) Approach 2018 In case the machining process except for the bar feed process
or 2018 is referred to for 2 axes at–a–time, 2031 and 2032 are
2031 referred to for 1 axis at–a–time. At the same time whether it is axis
2032 2 or axis 1, it is according to the system parameter setting No.108
– 115 of bit 3.
2046 In case of bar feed process 2046 is referred to for 2 axes

or at–a–time, 2047 and 2048 are referred to for 1 axis at–a–time.
2047 At the same time whether it is axis 2 or axis 1, it is according to
2048 the system parameter setting No.107 of bit 3.
(5) – (11) (13) – (15) 2017 Rapid traverse, cutting feed (linear) move command.
Linear move
(5), (10) When constant surface speed control is not performed:

Spindle range switch 2025 Spindle range switch
2024 No. of spindle revolution output
When constant surface speed control is performed

2030 Spindle max. speed clamp
2025 Spindle range switch
2028 Constant surface speed ON
According to MTF 1110 to 1121 setting
(12) Circular move 2020 Circular interpolation move command. 2020 is referred to when
2021 MTF 1082 = 0, 1 (I, K command) and 2021 is referred to when
MTF 1082 = 2, 3 (radius R command).
(16) Escape 2019 Move command to tool exchange point. Coolant OFF. 2019 is
2033 referred to for 2 axes at–a–time, 2033 and 2034 are referred to
2034 for 1 axis at–a–time. At the same time whether it is axis 2 or axis
1, it is according to the system parameter setting No.107 – 115 of
bit 4.
(17) Tool change point (end of process) 2009 to The end part of process.
2015 In case of outer diameter rough machining, 2011 is referred to.
or TXX00; M01;
2040
or
2041
(18) Tool change point 2017 Move to home position G00 X_ Z_ ;

→ Machine datum
(19) Home position (end of program) 2001 Trailer part Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program stop, EOR
68
A. SETTING DATA,
Reference of Function Table in Bar Feed Process

(Example) In the case of bar feed
1) Pull–out system – 1
Parameter
Point referenced Descriptions
No.
(1) Home position (start of program) 2000 Feed, EOR, and program number
2016 G50 X_ Z_ ;
(2) Home position 2017 Movement to the tool exchange point

→Tool exchange point G0 X_ Z_ ;
(3) Tool exchange point (start of process) 2036 Start part of bar feed process
2016 Coordinate system setting and tool selection

G50 X_ Z_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
(4) Approach First movement from the tool exchange point Coolant on
2046 or Simultaneous 2 axes
2047 and Simultaneous 1 axis

2048
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 3 of system parameter No.107.
(5) Linear move 2049 Shift command to the position for grasping workpiece
G98 G1 Z_ F_ ; or
G98 G1 X_ F_ ;
69
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
(6) Dwell 2050 Dwell command on opening chuck
(7) Linear move 2051 Shift command of work feed

G1 Z_ F_ ;
(8) Dwell 2052 Dwell command on closing chuck
(9) Linear move 2053 Shift command–1 after work feed

G1 Z_ F_ ;
or
G1 X_ F_ ;

G0 Z_ ;
(11) Escape Shift command to tool exchange point Coolant off

2034
(12) Tool exchange point (end of process) 2041 End part of bar feed process
TXX00 ;
M1 ;
(13) Tool exchange point 2017 Shift to the home position

→ Home position G0 X_ Z_ ;
(14) Home position (end of program) 2001 Trailer part

Spindle stop and tool offset cancel
Program stop and EOR
70
A. SETTING DATA,
2) Pull–out system – 2
Parameter
Point reference Descriptions
No.
2016 G50 X_ Z_ ;

→ Tool exchange point G0 X_ Z_ ;

G50 X_ Z_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;

2048
(5) Linear move 2049 Shift command to the position for grasping workpiece
G98 G1 Z_ F_ ;
or
G98 G1 X_ F_ ;
71
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
(6) Dwell 2050 Dwell command on opening chuck
(7) Linear move 2051 Shift command of work feed

G1 Z_ F_ ;
(8) Dwell 2052 Dwell command on closing chuck

G1 Z_ F_ ;
or
G1 X_ F_ ;

2034
TXX00 ;
M1 ;


72
A. SETTING DATA,
3) Slide stop system – 1
Parameter
No.
2016 G50 X_ Z_ ;


G50 X_ Z_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
2024 When constant surface speed control is not performed:

or G97 S_ M03 ;
2028 When constant surface speed control is performed: G96 S M3;
It follows the setting of bit 0 of system parameter number 107.
73
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.

2028
(5) Point referenced 2050 Dwell command when opening chuck
(6) Linear move 2051 Shift command to work feed

G1 Z_ F_ ;
(7) Dwell 2952 Dwell command when closing chuck
(8) Linear move 2054 Shift command after work feed – 2

G0 Z_ ;

2034
TXX00 ;
M1 ;


74
A. SETTING DATA,
4) Slide stop system – 2
Parameter
No.
2016 G50 X_ Z_ ;


G50 X_ Z_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
2024 When constant surface speed control is not performed:

or G97 S_ M3 ;
2028 When constant surface speed control is performed:
G96 S_ M3;
It follows the setting of bit 0 of system parameter number 107.

2028
75
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
(5) Dwell 2050 Dwell command when opening chuck
(6) Dwell 2052 Dwell command when closing chuck

2034
TXX00 ;
M1 ;


Reference of Function Table in C–axis Machining Process
(Example) In the case of C axis drilling
76
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
2016 G50 X_ Z_ ;

(3) Tool exchange point (start of process) 2200 Start part of process (NOTE 1)

G50 X_ Z_ C_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
2024 Tool speed command

G97 S_ M?? ;
In the case of servo motor control system
2031 and Simultaneous 2 axes, Simultaneous 1 axis

2032
Select the Simultaneous 3 axes, 2 axes, or 1 axis depending on
the setting of bit 3 and 4 of system parameter numbers 300 to 304.
In the case of spindle positioning system
2031 Simultaneous 2 axes and Simultaneous 1 axis (CAUTION 1) and

2032 (CAUTION 2)
2211 Spindle identification command (NOTE 2)
CAUTION
1 Set the simultaneous 1 axis or simultaneous 2 axes (XZ →
C).
2 Never set the function code of AA01 (C–axis shift
command).
NOTE
1 If the C–axis machining process has been defines
continuously, the second process and thereafter cannot be
referenced.
2 Perform the shift command of C–axis.
77
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
(5) – (9) In the case of MTF No.1304 bit 1 = 0 (when no drilling canned cycle is used)
Line or rotation shift
2017 Rapid traverse and cutting feed (line or rotation) shift commands
2017 Rapid traverse and cutting feed (line) shift commands. Spindle
identification comman
2211
In the case of MTF No.1304 bit 1 = (the drilling canned cycle is used)
2203 to Drilling canned cycle command (line or rotation shift)

2206
2203 to Drilling canned cycle command (Linear move)

2206
2211 Spindle identify command

2034
setting of bit 5 of system parameter No.300 to 304.
(11) Tool exchange point (end of process) 2201 End part of process
TXX00 ;
M1 ;

→ Home position G0 _ Z ;

78
A. SETTING DATA,
(Example) In the case of face milling
Parameter
No.
2016 G50 X_ Z_ ;

(3) Tool exchange point (start of process) 2200 Start part of process (NOTE 1)

G50 X_ Z_ C_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
2024 Spindle speed command

G97 S_ M?? ;
(4) Approach First move from the tool exchange point Coolant on
2031 and Simultaneous 2 axes, Simultaneous 1 axis

2032
Select the Simultaneous 3 axes, 2 axes, or 1 axis depending on
the setting of bit 3 and 4 of system parameter No.304.
(5), (7), (10), and (12) 2017 Rapid traverse and cutting feed (line) shift commands (NOTE 2)
Linear move
79
A. SETTING DATA,
NOTE
1 When the C–axis machining process has been continuously
defined, the second process and thereafter are not
referenced.
2 The polar coordinate interpolation is started before the point
(5) of line shift.
Parameter
Point referenced Description
No.
(6), (8), (9), and (10) 2020 or Circular interpolation shift command (NOTE 3)
Circular move 2021 MTF 1082 = 0, 1 (I and J commands)
MTF 1082 = 2, 3 (Radius R command)

2034
(14) Tool exchange point (end of process) 2201 End part of process
TXX00 ;
M1 ;


NOTE
3 Cancel the polar coordinate interpolation after the point (11)
of circular shift
80
A. SETTING DATA,
Output of NC data for use in tapping processing

1) When MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 1, an NC format with the G codes for
a canned cycle is output.
1060 1 or 0
1 0 0 0 0 x x x
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
In this case the NC format output will conform to the settings of MTF
2059.
2059=5702, 5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000
G17 G98 G84 X Z R F ;
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
With the above setting the tapping processing NC format output would
be G17 G99 G84 Z_ R_ F_ ;
2) When MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 0, an NC format with the G codes for
a threading processing is output.
1060 1 or 0
0 0 0 0 0 x x x
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
In this case the NC format output will conform to the settings of MTF
2022 for retapping and MTF 2059 for relief cutting.
2022=5802, 5202, 0402, 1101, 0001, 6601, 0004
G98 G90 G32 X Z F ;
G99 G91 E
2059=0205, 0004, 0001, 0005, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M05 ; Z M04 ;
M03
With the above settings the tapping operation NC format output would be
either:
(1) Where “spindle rotation direction ... SD = 0 (forward rotation)”
G97 S_ M03;
.
.
G99 G32 Z_ F_ ; . . . . . retapping
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stop spindle
Z_ M04; . . . . . . . . . . . . return relief
In contrast,
(2) Where “spindle rotation direction ... SD = 1 (reverse rotation)”
G97 S_ M04;
.
.
G99 G32 Z_ F_ ; . . . . . retapping
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stop spindle
Z_ M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . return relief
81
A. SETTING DATA,
A.4.5 Parameters MTF 2300 to MTF 2399 are listed in the function table
Referencing an specifying special function codes. Special NC data items can be output
to any block according to the table.
Optional Function
(1) Function table specifying special function codes
Table
2300 Output of special Maximum number of the codes that can

function codes be specified: 10
2301 Same as above Same as above
(2) Function code

The following function code is added to reference the optional
function table:
(a) Referencing the optional function table
3 high–order 1 low–order
digits digit
Function Remarks
(detailed (major
0 0 0 E The function table specified by

the 1–word hexadecimal number
listed in the following table is
referenced to output NC data.
82
A. SETTING DATA,
When the low–order digit (major classification) of the function code is E,

the subsequent 1–word hexadecimal numbers correspond to the
parameters in the function table as follows:
No. of parameter in 2002 to 2009 to 2017 and 2020 and
2000 2001 2016 2019
the function table 2008 2015 2018 2021
1–word High order 00 01 02 03 04 05 05 06

setting
Low order 00 00 00 to 06 00 to 06 00 04 00 and 01
No. of parameter in 2024 and 2028 to 2031 and 2033 and

2002 2023 2026 2027
the function table 2025 2030 2032 2034
1–word High order 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 05 05

setting
Low order 00 00 00 and 01 00 00 00 to 02 02 and 03 05 and 06
No. of parameter in 2035 and 2040 and 2045 to 2055 and 2057 and 2100 to
2059 2200
the function table 2036 2041 2054 2056 2058 2104
1–word High order 0E 0F 10 02 03 16 0D 11

setting
Low order 00 to 02 00 to 02 00 to 09 07 and 08 07 and 08 00 00 to 04 00
No. of parameter in 2203 to 2212 to 2300 to

2201 2202 2211
the function table 2210 2213 2309
1–word High order 12 13 14 15 05 17

setting
Low order 00 00 00 to 07 00 07 and 08 00 to 09
83
A. SETTING DATA,
The meanings of the high–orders bits of the specified word for referencing
the optional function table are as follows.
00: LEADER PART
01: TRAILER PART
02: PROCESS START
03: PROCESS END
04: FROM
05: LINEAR INTERPOLATION
06: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
07: THREAD CUTTING
08: THREAD CUTTING CYCLE
09: SPINDLE
0A: TURRET
0B: DWELL
0C: CSS CONTROL (spindle control)
0D: SUB PROGRAM (start and end of a subprogram)
0E: SPECIAL PROC. START
0F: SPECIAL PROC. END
10: BAR FEED MOTION
11: C–AXIS PROCESS START
12: C–AXIS PROCESS END
13: C–AXIS PROCESS FROM
14: C–AXIS PROCESS FIXED CYCLE
15: SPINDLE OPERATION
16: FIXED CYCLE FOR LATHE
17: OPTIONAL BLOCK OUTPUT ← Newly added
(3) Setting example
Example 1) G65P1000L1;
M1;
Assume that the above NC data for a miscellaneous machining call and
optional stop is output to the next block after block number 0.
Specify the following for the MTF function table:
MTF 2000= 0300, 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED % ; 0 : MTF2300
MTF 2300= 472F, 0041, 504F, 03E8, 4C1F, 0001, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000
G 65 P 1000 L 1 ; M1 ;
The following special NC data be output:
%××××;
O
G65P1000L1;
M1;
84
A. SETTING DATA,
Example 2
When the following is specified, another function table can be
referenced from the referenced function table.
MTF 2000= 0300, 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED % ; 0 : MTF2300
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,0000
M01 ; MTF2301
MTF 2301= 000A, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
T0000 ;
(4) Notes
NOTE
Do not have a table reference itself. Also, do not reference
the referencing table again from the referenced table.
If a table is referenced in this way, the output of the same
function table continues until memory is full, then the
following message is output and processing stops.
WARNING! CHECK INPUT DATA
When this message is displayed, check and correct the
function table and output the NC data again.
Example 1)
Setting in which a table references itself
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M01 ; MTF2300
The table references itself.
Example 2)
Setting in which a referencing table is referenced again from the
referenced table
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M01 ; MTF2301
MTF 2301= 0028, 0004, 000E, 1702, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M02 ; MTF2302
MTF 2302= 0038, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M03 ; MTF2300
The referencing table is referenced
again from the referenced table.
85
A. SETTING DATA,
A.5
ERROR MESSAGES
A.5.1
Errors Common to All
Screens
Message Meaning Remedy
CAN NOT USE THIS A certain function can not be used because
FUNCTION of incorrect using condition.
DATA IS NOT CORRECT An error is included in any one of input data. The data indicated by the cursor includes an
error. Input correct data.
KEY IN AGAIN Input data is wrong. Input correct data for each question.
KEY IN DATA Necessary data is not entered. Input correct data for each question.
LACK OF NECESSARY DATA Necessary data is not set. Set necessary data.
SYSTEM PROGRAM ERROR Program fails due to any reason. Re–examine the program.
THIS IS A NULL AND VOID Invalid soft key is pressed.

KEY NOW. (Example) “ELEMENT DELETE” soft key is
pressed to delete the start point element
during setting of multiple face milling figure.
(The start point element can not be deleted
according to the specification.)
WARNING! CHECK INPUT 1) Incremental command is continued for 1) Specify an absolute value halfway not to
DATA over 50 elements at defining a part figure. continue an incremental value for over 50
2) Program fails due to any reason. elements.
2) Re–examine the program.
86
A. SETTING DATA,
A.5.2
Errors at Defining
Figures (Menu 2)
END POINT OR GROOVE At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Check the end point or the groove direction.
DIRECTION IS NOT an error exists at the end point or in the
CORRECT! groove direction and the figure can be
correctly defined.
END POINT OR NECK At the entry of neck corner, an error exists Check the end point value or neck width.
WIDTH IS NOT CORRECT! and in the end point value specification or the
neck width and the figure can not be correctly
defined.
END POINT, PITCH OR At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Check the end point, pitch or quantity
QUANTITY IS NOT any one of the end point, pitch or quantity is
CORRECT! incorrect.
GROOVE WIDTH OR PITCH At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Increase the pitch value to larger than the
IS NOT CORRECT! the pitch value is smaller than the groove groove width.
width.
KEY IN REPEAT NO. Figure elements are tried to copy without Input the repetition number.
entering the repetition number.
LAST ELEMENT IS NOT At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove,

ARROW! the last element is not the arrowed element.
LAST END POINT IS Pattern figure is tried to enter before the end Set the end point of the last element.
UNDEFINED! point value of the last element is defined.
THE LAST FIGURE At setting multiple face milling figures, the Define the end point value of the last figure,
ELEMENT HAS NO END end point value of the last figure is not then input the next figure data.
POINT. defined.
TOO MANY ELEMENT 1) At the entry of part figure, the number of Decrese the number of elements.
SYMBOL external elements exceeds the limited
number.
2) At the entry of part figure, the number of
internal elements exceeds the limited
number.
87
A. SETTING DATA,
A.5.3
Errors at Machining
Definition (Menu 4) and
NC Data Preparation
(Menu 5)
ERROR!! I CAN’T RUN ANY Normal machining fails because of incorrect Re–examine the machining definition.
FURTHER. definition of cutting area, tool to be used, etc.
CHECK THE DEFINED TOOL (Refer to CHAPTER VII, 2.11 “Error when NC
OR CUTTING AREA. data is prepared”.)
ERROR!! NOT EDIT Machining process is not edited on TTF

process edit screen.
FINISH ALLOWANCE IS NOT Zero or a negative value is ontered as a Input a positive value.
CORRECT. finishing allowance in face milling.
INPUT A POSITIVE DATA.
REGISTER PROGRAM NC data cannot be stored in the NC

ERROR machining memory because of any one of
the following reasons.
1) The program No. is already stored in the 1) Delete the program No. (NC data) stored
NC machining memory. in the machining memory, or change the
2) The NC machining memory capacity is program No.
insufficient. 2) Delete unnecessary programs to make a
3) Key signal does not go up. (Protected) space.
4) Background edit function is used by the 3) Go up the key signal.
system other than FAPT. 4) Stop the other system’s use of
background edit function, or wait until that
system ends using the background edit
function.
A.5.4
Errors at Animation
Drawing (Menu 6)
INTERFERENCE ALARM During checking NC data by using the Re–check the NC data.
(HD1 & CHUCK/TAIL STOCK) animation drawing function, interference
occurs between the turret 1 and the chuck or
tail stock.
INTERFERENCE ALARM During checking NC data by using the Re–check the NC data.
(HD2 & CHUCK/TAIL STOCK) animation drawing function in FS15–TTF,
interference occurs between the turret 1 and
the chuck or tail stock.
INTERFERENCE ALARM During checking NC data by using the Re–check the NC data, or modify the NC
(HD1 & HD2) animation drawing function in FS15–TTF, data, by using the automatic collision
interference occurs between the tools of the preventive function (option).
turrets 1 and 2.
88
A. SETTING DATA,
A.5.5
Errors at Accessing
the Sub–memory
FILE MEMBER OVERFLOW Files are tried to store exceeding the Delete unnecessary files, then store
sub–memory capacity. necessary files.
FILE OVERFLOW 1) The sub–memory is used over 100%. 1) Delete the files stored in the
2) One program becomes too large to store sub–memory, then store necessary files.
in the main memory file area. 2) Delete the figure elements and
machining processes to make the
program small.
IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE Protected file is tried to delete. Contact the machine tool builder.
THIS FILE, KEY IN
PASSWARD PLEASE.
IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE Protected file is tried to replace. Contact the machine tool builder.
THIS FILE, KEY IN
PASSWARD PLEASE.
NOT FOUND FILE Specified file is not found in calling the file
name from the sub–memory.
SAME FILE ALREADY The file name tried to store in the Change the file name, or delete the same
REGISTERED sub–memory has already been stored. name file.
SUB MEMORY NOT Sub–memory is disturbed. Initialize the sub–memory.

INITIALIZED
89
A. SETTING DATA,
A.5.6
Others
COLLATING ERROR The data read from an external unit is

(M: MEMORY I: INPUT) collated with the data on the main memory,
but not matched.
ILLEGAL FORMAT DATA The data input from an external unit is

DETECTED different from the specified format.
I/O NOT READY Input/output unit is not prepared. The

following reasons are considerable.
1) The unit is not powered.
2) Baud rate is incorrect.
3) In the case of reading from a cassette
tape, a reading file is not recorded on the
tape.
LOCKED PARAMETER Data is tried to enter a locked parameter.
NOT FOUND ID. NO. When the tool information contents are Check the tool ID No.
copied, the tool ID No. specified as a copy
source is not found.
THIS TOOL HAS ALREADY At tooling one by one on the tooling data
REGISTERED screen, the tool ID No. already tooled is
specified.
TV ERROR INCLUDING TV error is included in the read tape.
90
B–61804E–2/05 APPENDIX B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM
B RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM
The following tables list the functions and parameters not supported by
the models/series.
Model Series
FANUC Series 16–TA CAP II

5700
FANUC Series 16–TTA CAP II
(1) Unsupported functions

Heading Unsupported function
III 3.2.2 Part figure input (Input method with Trapezoidal groove definition
figure)
III 3.2.6 Batch input functions for chamfering Corner R batch input
and corner R
III 3.2.7 Pattern figure input function Corner necking (*1)
III 3.2.8 Function for defining the center of an All functions

arc according to a given single
coordinate
III 3.4 Machining Definition All functions (*2)
III 3.5.6 Outputting the NC data of a multiple All functions

thread cutting cycle
III 5.1 Balance Cutting Process Tool specification method (*3)
IV 2.5 File Data Input/Output Function All functions
VII 1.13 Outputting NC data in the FS 15/16 All functions

Format
VIII 1.4 Milling in Multiple Planes All functions
VIII 1.5 C–Axis Machining with a Machining All functions

Plane Specified
VIII 2. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4) All functions (*2)
X AUTOMATIC PROCESS All functions (*4)

DETERMINATION FUNCTION
IX Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION All functions
*1 The automatic thread depth specification function for corner type 3 cut
by necking (necking for threads) is not supported.
*2 Menu 4 (machining definition) has a different definition screen layout.
See Appendix B.1 for details.
91
B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM APPENDIX B–61804E–2/05
*3 Balance cutting uses different tool specification methods. See

Appendix B.1 for details.
*4 Details of the automatic process determination function vary. See
Appendix B.1 for details.
(2) Setting data
The setting data has been changed because the automatic process
determination function has been improved. See Appendix B.2 for
details.
(3) System parameters
It is impossible to use the parameters that cannot be specified under
“Data setting” and the parameters listed below, although they are
described in the manual.
Parameter No. Data type Description
0671 Integer Machining area (CAF) drawing color
0702 0, 1 Bit 5 2nd clearance of inner process is

designation (8 bits) 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
0703 0, 1 Bit 7 For the automatic process determination function, use of a drill bit with the
designation (8 bits) same diameter as the bore is
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
0704 0, 1 Bit 3 Tool offset T code on each cutting area

designation (8 bits) 0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 4 2nd tool offset T code before sub cutting of grooving
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 6 On the machining definition screen, a blank figure (BWP) is
0 : Not filled in
1 : Filled in
Bit 7 On the machining definition screen, a machining area (CAF) is
0 : Not filled in
1 : Filled in
0705 0, 1 Bit 6 When another module requests the right to use graphics exclusively
designation (8 bits) during simulated machining, the right is
0 : Not relinquished
1 : Relinquished
0708 0, 1 Bit 4 The material and tooling information input/output format is

designation (8 bits) 0 : Binary
1 : ISO/EIA
92
(4) It is impossible to use the MTFs that cannot be specified under “Data
setting,” the MTFs described in VII 1.13, and the MTFs listed below,
although they are described in the manual.
Parameter numbers 2000 to 2999
Parameter No. Description
2209 Beginning of cylindrical interpolation
2210 End of cylindrical interpolation
2214 Polar coordinate interpolation start block
2215 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel block
Function code
Function
Function Remark
code
6 4 0 2 G7.1 is output. G code for cylindrical interpolation is output.
93
B.1
MACHINING
DEFINITION FOR
5700 SERIES
B.1.1 Following is the configuration which defines the machining process.

Machining Definition of
Turning
94
B.1.1.1 soft key “4” in the menu screen.

Selection of kinds of
machining
Fig. B.1.1.1 (a)

The major types of machining required for machining are displayed on the
soft keys below the screen as shown above.
Press “CENTER HOLE”: the soft key display changes to the menu for
center hole drilling. (See Fig. B.1.1.1 (b)).
Press ”TURN”: the soft key display changes to the menu for turning. See
Fig. B.1.1.1 (c).
Press “GROOV THREAD”: the soft key display changes to the menu for
grooving and thread cutting. See Fig. B.1.1.1 (d).
Press “C–AXIS”: the soft key display changes to the menu for C–axis
machining. See Fig. B.1.1.1 (e).
Press key at the leftmost end under the conditions shown in Fig.
B.1.1.1 (b) to (e) above, and the soft key display shown in Fig. B.1.1.1
(a) above is selected.
Press key at the rightmost end: the soft key display changes in the
following sequence:
(b)→(c)→(d)→(e)→(b)→ ....
Fig. B.1.1.1 (b)

[CENTER DRILL] . . . Press this key for center drilling
[DRILLING] . . . . . . . . Press this key for drilling
[REAMER] . . . . . . . . . Select to perform reaming
[TAP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select to perform tapping
95
Fig. B.1.1.1 (c)

[ROUGH O.D.] . . . . Press this key for roughing of outer figure
[S–FIN O.D.] . . . . . . Press this key for semi–finishing of outer figure
[FIN O.D.] . . . . . . . . Press this key for finishing of outer figure
[ROUGH I.D.] . . . . . Press this key for roughing of inner figure
[S–FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . Press this key for semi–finishing of inner figure
[FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . . . Press this key for finishing of inner figure
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . Press this key for sub cycle
Fig. B.1.1.1 (d)

[GROOVE NECK] . . . Press this key for grooving (rough grooving or
rough grooving and finishing are carried out by
a single tool) or necking.
[ROUGH GROOVE] . . Press this key for rough grooving
[FIN GROOVE] . . . . . Press this key for grooving finishing
[CUT OFF] . . . . . . . . . Press this key for corner cutting (When the
system parameter No.140 is 0, this soft key is
not displayed.)
[THREADING] . . . . . . Press this key for thread cutting
Fig. B.1.1.1 (e)

[C–AXIS C.DRIL] . . . Press this key for C–axis center drilling
[C–AXIS DRILL] . . . . Press this key for C–axis drilling
[C–AXIS TAP.] . . . . . . Press this key for C–axis tapping
[C–AXIS GROOV.] . . . Press this key for C–axis grooving
[C–AXIS F.MILL] . . . . Press this key for face milling
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . . Press this key for sub sycle
[C–AXIS S.MILL] . . . Press this key for cylindrical grooving
For example, press “Rough O.D.” when the soft key in Fig. B.1.1.1 (c)
is displayed; “Roughing of outer figure” will have been selected in
process No.1.
96
B.1.1.2
Process change and
correction
Fig. B.1.1.2 (a)

When Menu No.4 is selected again after completion of machining
definition, the screen shown above will appear.
[NEW] . . . . . . . . . . . Press this key when re–instructing the process
from the start after all processes are cancelled.
[CORRECTION] . . . Press this key to modify or change part of the
process.
When “CORRECTION” is depressed, following screen appears.
Fig. B.1.1.2 (b)

Each time “Cursor ±” or “Cursor °” is depressed when the above screen
appears, the position of the cursor of the process No. on the process table
moves up and down.
Press “Cursor ±” or “Cursor °” to select an arbitrary Process No., and
correct the machining contents.
Also in this screen, the process can be inserted, deleted and replaced.
(Sample Insertion)
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 04:
97
(1) Press “Cursor ±” or “Cursor °” to select the Process No. to be inserted.

(For example, select process 03).
(2) Select the machining contents to be inserted (for example, press
“TURN” and press “ROUGH I.D.”).
The results are as follows.
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 03: ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE ← (INSERTION)
PROC 05:
(Sample Deletion)
(1) Press “CURSOR ±” or “CURSOR °” to select the process No. to be
deleted.
(2) Press “PROC DELETE”.
(Replacement)
(1) Insert a new machining process, then delete the old one, or
(2) Delete the old one, then insert a new machining process.
B.1.1.3 Only one process can be corrected if required after all processes are
Output of only single prepared, and only NC data of its process can be output.
Press “CORR. & OUT” when the screen in Fig. B.1.1.2 (a) appears: the
process
screen as shown in Fig. B.1.1.2 (b) will appear.
Select the process to be output independently as NC data, using “Cursor
*” or “Cursor *”, and press “NEXT PAGE”.
B.1.1.4 If the working process is specified on the process chart screen, the screen
Tool data changes and the tool information required for working definition is
prompted.
Tool data is displayed on the left–hand side of the screen and the tool
picture is displayed on the right–hand side of it. (The tool picture is
displayed if the optional animation–drawing function is available. To
display the tool picture, press the soft key “CHECK”.)
98
The following prompts are displayed.

Turret No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TL = (NOTE 1)
Tool selection number . . . . . . TN = (NOTE 2)
Tool offset number . . . . . . . . . TM =
Tool management number . . . ID = (NOTE 3)
NOTE
1 The turret No. prompt is displayed if there are more than 1
tool resets. The number of tool rests is to be set in No.MTF
1050.
2 Input an integer consisting of up to two digits as TN and TM.
3 The tool management number (ID) to be input must have
been registered in the tool data (see VI–2.1). If a tool
management number (ID) not registered in the tool data is
input, a message “No tool management number is found.”
is displayed. if “DEL”, “INPUT” is keyed in, the registered
tool management number is deleted from the tooling
information.
When using a tool already registered in the tooling information, the other
data is automatically displayed if the tool selection number (TN) is input.
At new registration, the tool configuration data and setting data registered
in the tool data are displayed if the tool management number (ID) is input.
(1) Turning Tools
Tool Configuration Data Display (Display Only; Not Alterable)
(Center drill)
Tool type TP; center drill
Tool tip angle AN;
Drill diameter DD;
(Drill)
Tool type TP; drill
Tool tip angle AN;
Drill diameter DD;
(Reamer)
Tool type TP; reamer
Tool diameter DT;
Cutter length LT;
Biting length LE;
(Tap)
Tool type TP; tap
Tool diameter DT;
Cutter length LT;
Biting length LE;
Pitch PT;
99
(Groove/Neck/Cut off)
Tool type TP; grooving/necking
Tool tip radius RN;
Cutter angle AC;
Tool tip angle AN;
Tool tip width WN;
ZN;
(Thread)
Tool type TP; thread
Cutter angle AC;
Tool tip angle AN;
ZN;
(General)
Tool type TP; general
Tool tip radius RN;
Cutter angle AC;
Tool tip angle AN;
Cutter protective angle AP;
ZN;
(Finger)
Tool type TP; finger
Setting Data Prompts (Settable/Alterable)
Setting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS = (NOTE 1)
Setting position . . . . . . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
Spindle rotating direction . . . . SD = (0 = CW, 1 = CCW) (NOTE 2)
Holder number . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (NOTE 3)
NOTE
1 The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter
No.200 drawing format. Not displayed if the center drill, drill,
finger tool.
2 The spindle rotating direction prompt is displayed when
system parameter No.702 bit 1 = 1.
3 The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
animation–drawing function is available. Set the
animation–drawing tool holder number.
100
(2) C–Axis Tools

Tool Configuration Data Display (Display Only; Not Alterable)
(Center drill)
Tool type TP; C–axis center drill
Tool material MT;
Tool diameter DT;
Cutting diameter DS;
Cutter length LT;
Tool tip angle AT;
(Drill)
Tool type TP; C–axis drill
Tool material MT;
Tool diameter DT;
Cutter length LT;
Tool tip angle AT;
(Tap)
Tool type TP; C–axis tap
Tool material MT;
Tool diameter DT;
Cutter length LT;
Biting length LE;
Pitch PT;
(End mill)
Tool type TP; C–axis end mill
Tool material MT;
Tool diameter DT;
Cutting diameter DS;
Cutter length LT;
Number of tools NT;
Setting Data Prompts (Settable/Alterable)
Setting direction . . . . . . CP = (0: side working; 1: end working)
Setting position . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
Rotation direction . . . . . TR = (0: clockwise; 1: counterclockwise)
Holder number . . . . . . . HL = (NOTE)
NOTE
The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
animation–drawing function is available.
When creating an NC data, interference is checked or offset is calculated

according to the tool configuration. Note that a correct NC data is not
output unless tool data is input accurately.
If tooling information has already been created, the other data is
automatically displayed when the tool management number (TN) is
input. If there are no changes, press “NEXT PAGE” to proceed to the next
screen.
101
To add or change data, move the cursor with “CURSOR X”, “CURSOR
Y” and input the data.
For tool configuration data, just the tool data of the set tool management
number (ID) is displayed, so it is impossible to change data directly.
When proceeding to the next screen by pressing “NEXT PAGE”, the set
data is registered as tooling information. Also if a tool management
number having a tool type not compatible with the current process has
been input, a message “This tool does not fit the current process.” is
displayed.
“ESCAPE” . . . . . . . . . . Return to the menu screen.
“PAGE BACK” . . . . . . Return to the last screen (working process
list screen).
“CHECK” . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed if the optional animation–
drawing function is available. The tool
picture is displayed according to the
currently displayed data. If this key is
pressed after changing tooling information,
the tool picture is displayed anew according
to the changed data.
“TOOL DATA” . . . . . . A tool data list is displayed.
“TOLING INFOR.” . . . A tooling information list is displayed.
“NEXT ID” . . . . . . . . . . Displayed if the optional automatic process
decision function is available. Select the
tool of the next ID number in which the
working process type (KP) is set.
“NEXT PAGE” . . . . . . . Proceed to the next page.
In the 2–tool rest type, the tool configuration picture is inverted if the
turret number is changed. Also the following screen is displayed in the
balance cut process.
In the diagram, the upper picture is the tool for cutter No.1 and the lower
picture is the tool for cutter No.2.
(Cautions about Tool Picture)
1. The chip only is displayed if the holder has not been defined for the
tool.
2. It is impossible to change the chip or holder scale value.
102
B.1.1.5 When all tool data are input, the system asks you the machining start
Machining start position position as follows.
X–AXIS . . . . . . . DXO =
Z–AXIS . . . . . . . ZO =
NOTE
By the establishment of system parameter (No.0009), the
questions on the machining start position can be skipped.
B.1.1.6 (1) This function designates the passing point of a tool when approaching
Passing point to the work from the machining start position, and the passing point
of a tool when returning to the next machining start position after
completion of the machining.
Fig. B.1.1.6 (a)

PASSING POINT FOR APPROACH:
1’ST POINT . . . . . . . . . XA1 =
ZA1 =
2’ND POINT . . . . . . . . XA2 =
ZA2 =
Designate the passing point of tool when approaching to the work from
the machining start position at the time of machining start.
PASSING POINT FOR ESCAPE:
1’ST POINT . . . . . . . . . XE1 =
ZE1 =
2’ND POINT . . . . . . . . XE2 =
ZE2 =
Designate the passing point of tool when escaping from the work up to
the next machining start position upon completion of machining.
When no data is defined, the axis in question does not move.
For example, in the absence of input on Z–axis coordinate value after
inputting some data to X–axis coordinate value, the tool moves to the
specified position only for X–axis, and Z–axis does not move.
103
Fig. B.1.1.6 (b) Designation of passing point
Set the number of simultaneous moving axes in a motion from the

machining start position to (XA1, ZA1) and the number of simultaneous
moving axes in a motion from (XE2, ZE2) to the next machining start
position using system parameter Nos.107 to 115 bits 3, 4.
NOTE
The conversation screen of the established passing point
can be skipped by each type of machining. (By setting
system parameter No.107 to 115)
104
B.1.1.7
Cutting direction
When the OD cutting or ID machining process is specified, you are

requested to enter the cutting direction.
Specify the direction to the question regarding the cutting direction “CD
=”.
At this time, it can be entered not only from the ten key pad but also from
the Software key.
Cutting direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD =
± Negative direction of X axis
° Positive direction of X axis
² Negative direction of Z axis
³ Positive direction of Z axis
When the “X axis negative direction” is selected in OD cutting, the cutting

conditions for facing are automatically set. Also, the facing part is
automatically selected for the machining area. When the direction other
than the “X axis negative direction” is selected, cutting conditions for OD
machining are set.
In the case of ID machining, cutting conditions for ID cutting are set
whatever direction nay be selected.
105
B.1.1.8 The cutting conditions are automatically set and displayed according to
Cutting conditions the kinds of selected materials. Change only the desired items, while
monitoring the CRT screen. If you want to change the feedrate to 75%
of the displayed value, for example, multiply the displayed value by 0.75
as follows.
(Examples) F1 = 3 * 0 . 7 5 INPUT
The cutting conditions and meanings of the system questions are

described below according to machining data.
(1) Center drilling conditions
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance quantity (mm)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev)
(2) Drilling conditions

Cutting conditions for drilling comprise type 1, 2 and 3 according to
the movement of a drill.
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
702 is 1)
or
702 is 0)
SPINDLE ROTATION . . . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
106
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
702 is 1)
or
702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = Secondary drilling clearance
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point (mm or
inch)
702 is 1)
or
702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D2 = Secondary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
107

FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feed rate for second pass
CAUTION
D1 and D2 in Machining method 2 and Machining method
3
As shown in figure 7 and figure 8, “D1” and “D2” in
machining method 2 and machining method 3 are input as
positive values.
Associated parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
702
Bit 7 Specification of depth of cut

0 : Specifies with an incremental value
1 : Specifies with an absolute value
108
(3) Reaming
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Amount of clearance (mm or inches)
181 [same as drilling])
(CAUTION 1)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feed rate (mm/rev)
Workpiece face
Where LE value is either 0

or undefined
F2 = F1×(value contained in system parameter No.196)
Where LE value is significant
(4) Tapping
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Speed of rotation (rpm)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Amount of clearance (mm or inches)
195)
(CAUTION 1)
109
CAUTION
1 A value is assigned to Z in accordance with the system of
coordinates on this screen. Where the Z axis is plotted as
shown in the figure on the right the value of Z will always be
negative.
Whatever the drawing format the right hand end of the Z axis
is always positive on the “Machining definition” screen of
menu No.4. Specifications of the machining start points and
intermediate points are all made in accordance with this
system of coordinates. The cutting points are also therefore
specified in accordance with the same coordinate system.
(5) Roughing conditions of inner figure

(6) Roughing conditions of inner figure
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
FINISH ALLOWANCE . . . . . . . . TX = Finish allowance in X–axis
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Return Amount quantity
(mm or inch)
(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
(CAUTION 2)
1ST OVERRIDE . . . . . . . % = Displayed in case of outside
diameter roughing.
Refer to the item (11).
110
(7) Semi–finishing conditions of outer figure

(8) Semi–finishing conditions of inner figure
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
(CAUTION 2)
(9) Finishing conditions of outer figure

(10) Finishing conditions of inner figure
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate for (mm/rev or inch/rev
(CAUTION 2)
111
(11) Grooving/necking machining conditions

PECKING ON/OFF . . . . . PE = Yes/No of pecking 1 machining
(Yes = 1, No = 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Cutting amount per cutting on
pecking 1 machining
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Return escape amount per cutting
on pecking 1 machining
(mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance amount (mm or inch)
FINISH ALLOWANCE . . TW = Finish amount in width direction
(mm or inch)
TB = Finish amount in depth direction
(mm or inch)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting feed rate
(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Rough machining feed rate
F2 = Finish machining feed rate
Pecking machining operation

The pecking operation on grooving rough machining is as follows:
112
NOTE
There are no questions, TW, TB, or F2 in the case of
necking. There are no questions on pecking 1 machining
in grooving finish machining and necking machining.
(12) Threading conditions

CLEARANCE . . . . . . . CT = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
CS = Clearance quantity (mm or inch
CE = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
DL = Final depth of cut (mm or inch)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min)
CAUTION
2 Whether the inquiry of MAXIMUM RPM is made or not
depends on the status of bit 0 of system parameter No.702.
0 : The inquiry is not made.
(The maximum spindle speed depends on the value set
in parameter No.128.)
1 : The maximum spindle speed is set every process.
Setting of system parameter No.128 is neglected.
However, the system does not ask this maximum spindle
speed if the process is set in such a way as the constant
surface speed function is not used in system parameters
No.107 – 115.
A value of system parameter No.128 is output in these
processes. Also, the question of the maximum spindle
speed is omitted when cutting another position by using
the same tool.
(13) 1st override for outside diameter roughing

For outside diameter roughing, override can be applied to the 1st depth
of cut and feed rate.
In the machining definition of outside diameter roughing, the system
asks the override value on the cutting condition screen. Answer this
question, key in the override value. It is possible to omit the question
on the override value on the cutting condition screen by advance
setting to skip the override value and question on the override value
in the system parameter.
113
(a) Parameter
(i) System parameter No.104 (Initial value = 0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 1 Designation of 1st override value question skipping for 1st override value
for outside diameter roughing depth of cut
0 : Skip
1 : No skip
(ii)System parameter No.711 (Initial value = 100)
Set the 1st override for outside diameter roughing depth of cut.
Not defined: 100%
n: n%
CAUTION
However, the override setting is up to 10 to 100%.
When other values than this range are set, the override
value is 100%.
(b) Explanation of operation

(i) When skipping the question on the override value:
Set bit 1 of system parameter No.104 to 0 and the override value
to No.711.
In this setting, the system does not ask the override value on the
cutting condition screen for the outside diameter roughing
definition but with the system parameter No.711 value as the
override value, the 1st override processing for outside diameter
roughing is carried out automatically.
(ii)When no skipping the question on the override value:
Set bit 1 of system parameter No.104 to 1: the system asks the
following on the cutting condition screen for the outside
diameter roughing definition.
1st override ... % =
NOTE
For “New”, the system parameter No.711 value is set as the
initial value.
For “Modifications”, the value set so far is displayed.
Answer this question, key in the override value.

When the value on the display is acceptable, key in “INPUT”
only.
NOTE
Even when the 1st override value for outside diameter
roughing depth of cut is changed, the system parameter
No.711 value remains unchanged.
114
B.1.1.9 The cursors (D) are displayed along the parts figure to specify the cutting
Cutting area definitions area.
A blank figure (dotted line) and machining figure (solid line) will be
drawn on the CRT screen, the system asks you the dividing directions.
(1) Machining area
Designate the cutting area of parts figure from the start point to end
point by flickering cursors on the CRT screen. One cursor shows the
start point, while the other shows the end point of the cutting area.
shift the cursor along the parts figure for selecting the start point and
end point.
(2) Movement of cursor
Depress CURSOR
FORWRD or CURSOR
BACK key.
The cursor shifts along the parts figure, each time the above key is
pressed.
(3) Division
After designating the start point and end point, input the dividing
direction of the blank to define the cutting point.
Depress arrow key when the system asks you the following questions.
DIVIDING DIRECTION ... DS = Dividing direction at start point

DIVIDING DIRECTION ... DE = Dividing direction at end point
115
(4) Example of division

Assume a line is drawn in the arrow direction from the flickering
cursor when each arrow key is depressed. The portion bounded by the
lines in these arrow directions, blank figure, and parts figure are
machined. A residual blank figure, which may be kept unmachined
after the cutting area has been lathed out, will be displayed, on the CRT
screen. Since Symbolic FAPT can display drawings of these residual
blank figures one by one, you can check the remaining cutting quantity
very easily.
It is possible that a part of blank cannot be machined by any means
because of tool figures. In such a case, the system automatically
checks the relation between tool figure and parts figure, and displays
such an unmachined pocket on the CRT screen. Accordingly, you can
machine the pocket by using another tool.
116
(5) Designation of cutting of residual pocket
A pocket may be produced, depending upon parts figure and tool figure
as illustrated above. In such a case, designate the area to cut such a pocket
only by using a reversible tool.
It should be carefully noted that if a reversed tool is not properly

positioned or if tool figure data is not appropriate, the pocket area cannot
always be input.
After the cutting area has been designated, the designated cutting area is
lathed out from the blank figure by the tool. The, the system asks you to
check if another portion is to be cut by the same tool or not.
CUTTING ANOTHER AREA
BY SAME TOOL? . . . CN =
(1: YES 0: NO)
117
Answer this question by one of the following operations.

. . . . In case of “YES”.
1 INPUT
(Another position is cut by the same tool)
. . . . In case of “NO”.
0 INPUT
(Not cut by the same tool)
After answering all questions, the CRT screen returns to the process list
which asks you the kind of machining.
If you want to prepare NC data after defining the kind of machining,
depress [NEXT PAGE] key in response to the system question about the
kind of machining.
[NEXT PAGE]
B.1.2
Cut off Machining, Bar
Feed
B.1.2.1
Cut off machining
Setting of tool data When the system parameter No.140 is defined as Definition for cut off
machining, on the screen which defines the type of machining, by
displaying as “cut off”, the cut off machining can be selected.
Fig. B.1.2.1 (a)

Input the tool data. Use the grooving tool.
CAUTION
When defining cut off machining tool, set the data so that the
cutting direction is in the minus X axis direction.
118
Definition of cutting
conditions
Fig. B.1.2.1 (b)

CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 = . (mm or inch)
Specify the clearance in X axis direction from the blank figure.
FINISH ALLOWANCE: . . . . . . . TZ = . (mm or inch)
Specify the finish allowance at the parts side during cutting–off
operation.
CUT OFF POS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CO = . (mm or inch)
Specify the cut–off position with the work inner diameter or the
distance from the work center.
COND.RESET POS: . . . . . . . . . . CR = . (mm or inch)
Specify the position for changing the machining conditions with the
distance from the cut–off position.
RETURN AMOUNT: . . . . . . . . . RA = . (mm or inch)
Specify the pull–out amount of a tool in X axis direction from the
machining condition change position.
CUTTING SPEED: . . . . . . . . . . . V1 = . (m/min or feet/min)
V2 = . (m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = . (mm/rev or inch/rev)
V2 = . (mm/rev or inch/rev)
119
Designate the cutting speed for a – b and b – c in Fig. B.1.2.1 (c) below
with V1, the feed rate with F1, c – d cutting speed with V2 and the
feedrate with F2.
Fig. B.1.2.1 (c)

The value of CO, CR, RA is designated in system parameter as Number
141, 142 and 143 respectively.
Definition of cutting start

position
Fig. B.1.2.1 (d)
120
STARTING POINT OF CUTTING OFF: SP

Designate the cutting–off start position, using the cursor on the screen.
The cursor moves every time soft keys “CURSOR °” and “CURSOR ±”
are depressed.
The cursor moves forward or backward along the parts figure. If the
cutting start position is designated, using the cursor, press “INPUT” key
or soft key “NEXT PAGE”, and define its point as the cutting start
position.
The cursor just after this screen is displayed is blinking where
X–coordinate value on the figure element at the leftmost side of part
figure is maximum. The tool path for cutting off when the cutting start
position is designated at this point is illustrated below. (Fig. B.1.2.1 (e))
Fig. B.1.2.1 (e)

Further, the cutting path when one previous element figure is designated
as the cutting start position with the cursor moved is illustrated below.
(Fig. B.1.2.1 (f))
Fig. B.1.2.1 (f)
121
Designate the chamfering of outer diameter at the cut–off (blank) side,

using system parameter No.144. When the blank side chamfering is
designated, the blank side chamfer is inserted after cutting–off. (Fig.
B.1.2.1 (g))
Fig. B.1.2.1 (g)
B.1.2.2 (1) On the KINDS OF MACHINING screen, press TURN to display the
Bar feed software keys for defining the bar feed process.
(2) The bar feed amount is the distance between the work edge left after
cutting–off and the work edge defined by the blank figure. This
amount is automatically calculated by the system.
Work end face after cutting off
Fig. B.1.2.2 (a)
NOTE
The bar feed process cannot be seen by the animation
drawing.
122
Tool data setting
Fig. B.1.2.2 (b)

VIRTUAL TOOL POS: . . . . . . . . . . XN =
SETTING POSITION: . . . . . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
Input the virtual tool position and the setting position. For the virtual tool
position setting, refer to the following figures.
Fig. B.1.2.2 (c) Fig. B.1.2.2 (d) Fig. B.1.2.2 (e)
Setting of cutting The cutting condition screen initially asks you to input the type of
conditions machining.
Type . . . . . . . . BT =
Type 1: Pull–out method 1
Type 2: Pull–out method 2
Type 3: Slide–stop method 1
Type 4: Slide–stop method 2
Changing the type value alters the contents of the prompt accordingly.
123
(1) Pull–out method 1

Clearance . . . . . . CAZ=approach clearance (mm)
Grip position . . . . WG = work grip position (mm)
Recess amount . . CEZ= tool recess amount (mm)
Feed rate . . . . . . . F1 = feed rate (for gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = feed rate (for pulling or positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = feed rate (for relief) (mm/min)
(2) Pull–out method 2

Clearance . . . . . . CAX=approach clearance (mm)
Grip position . . . . WG = work grip position (mm)
Feed rate . . . . . . . F1 = feed rate (for gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = feed rate (for pulling or positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = feed rate (for relief) (mm/min)
124
(3) Slide–stop method 1

Clearance . . . . . . CAZ=approach clearance (mm)
Recess amount . . CEZ= tool recess amount (mm)
Speed . . . . . . . . . S1 = spindle speed (rpm)
Feed rate . . . . . . . F2 = feed rate (for feeding) (mm/min)
(4) Slide–stop method 2

Speed . . . . . . . . . S1 = spindle speed (rpm)
125
B.1.3
Machining Definition of
C–axis Machining
B.1.3.1 In menu 4 “Machining Definition”, press soft key “C–AXIS

Specification of C–axis MACHINING”.
machining definition 1) Kind of C–axis machining specification
When “C–AXIS MACHINING” button is pressed, the soft key for
selecting the kind of C–axis machining is displayed.
NOTE
For the spindle positioning method (MTF1306 = 1), the
FACE MILLING and CYLINDRICAL GROOVING software
keys are not displayed.
2) Tool data for C–axis machining

After setting the type of machining, the setting screen of tools to be
used is displayed.
Tool data and the tool picture are displayed respectively on the left and
right of the screen. (The tool picture is displayed if the optional
animation drawing function is available. To display the tool picture,
press the soft key “CHECK”.)
The following prompts will be displayed.
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . TL = (NOTE 1)
TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . TN =
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM =
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . ID = (NOTE 2)
126
NOTE
1 The turret number prompt is displayed if there are more than
1 tool rests. The number of tool rests is to be set in
No.MTF1050.
2 The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been
registered in tool data. If a tool ID number (ID) not registered
in tool data is input, a message “This ID is not registered in
tool data.” is displayed. Also if a tool ID number having a tool
type not compatible with the present process is input, a
message “The tool type of this ID is not compatible with the
present process.” is displayed. The registered tool ID
number is deleted from the tooling information if keyed in as
“DEL” “INPUT”.
When using a tool which has already been registered in the tooling
information, the other data is automatically displayed if the tool selection
number (TN) is input.
In new registration, the data of the tool configuration and that of setting
which have been registered in the tool data are displayed if the tool ID
number (ID) is input.
(Center Drill)
TOOL TYPE TP; C–axis center drill
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
TOOL DIAMETER DT;
CUT WIDTH DS;
CUT LENGTH LT;
NOSE ANGLE AT;
(Drill)
TOOL TYPE TP; C–axis drill
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
TOOL DIAMETER DT;
CUT LENGTH LT;
NOSE ANGLE AT;
(Tap)
TOOL TYPE TP; C–axis Tap
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
TOOL DIAMETER DT;
CUT LENGTH LT;
PECK LENGTH LE;
PITCH PT;
(End mill)
TOOL TYPE TP; C–axis End mill
TOOL MATERIAL MT;
TOOL DIAMETER DT;
CUT WIDTH DS;
CUT LENGTH LT;
CUT COUNT NT;
127
Prompts on data of setting (Settable/Alterable)

SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: Side machining,
1: End machining)
SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
ROTATE DIRECTION . . . . . TR = (0: Forwards, 1: Backwards)
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HL =
(NOTE)
NOTE
The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
3) Machining start position

When all tool data are input, the screen asks the machining start
position.
X coordinate values . . . . . . DXO =
Z coordinate values . . . . . . ZO =
4) Cutting conditions for C–axis machining
The cutting conditions required for a particular type of machining are
requested according to the type of machining selected.
(a) Center sink conditions
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool revolution
(mm/rev)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Infeed amount (mm)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance quantity 1 (mm)
(b) Drilling conditions (Machining method 1)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
Tool speed (rpm)
(mm/rev)
DWELL ON/OFF . . . . DW =1 with dwell at hole bottom, 0
without dwell
(c) Drilling conditions (Machining method 2)
(mm/rev)
RETURN AMOUNT . U = Return amount (mm)
128
(d) Drilling conditions (Machining method 3)

(mm/rev)
(e) Tapping conditions
(f) Grooving, milling and cylindrical groove conditions
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FR = Feed amount per blade in the tool
diameter revolution (mm/rev)
FEED RATA . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool revolution
(mm/rev)
(g) Face milling conditions
(1) Screen and questions
i) There are no particular changes to “Part figure definition” on menu
2. Use a symbolic key to define the part figure shape in the same
way as before. If CP = 2 (on the line) is given in response to “Cut
on which side (relative to the direction of the element)? (CP)”, then
the same machining will result, regardless of whether “roughing”
or “finishing” is selected. (Machining on the line.)
ii) If “Face milling” is selected at “Machining definition” on menu 4,
(1) Machining type “TP” and (2) Finishing allowance “TS” are
added to the question about cutting conditions.
(2) Cutting conditions
i) Machining type
Select the required machining type in response to
TP = (1: ROUGH 2: FINISH 3: ROUGH → FINISH)
on the cutting conditions screen.
TP = 1: Roughing only
TP = 2: Finishing only
TP = 3: Roughing, then Finishing
If 1 or 3 is keyed in for TP, a further question will appear to ask for
the finishing allowance (TS).
ii) Finishing allowance
In response to TS =
enter a number representing the allowance for finishing that the
roughing process needs to leave. This must always be a positive
number. The following error message is displayed if a negative
number is input.
“INCORRECT FINISHING ALLOWANCE.
ENTER A POSITIVE NUMBER”
129
The default value for finishing allowance “TS” is set by system

parameter 368.
Finishing allowance for C–axis face milling
Default: 0.5 mm or 0.02 inch

(3) Machining method
i) The machining position is offset from the defined component
shape by an amount equivalent to the finishing allowance.
TS
Defined
component
shape TS
TS
Part
removed by
roughing TS
Tool
position for
roughing
TS
ii) Finishing (TP = 2)

Machining proceeds as before.
iii)Roughing then finishing (TP = 3)
After roughing, the machine returns in the X axis before starting
finishing.
5) Specification of cutting position for C–axis machining
The cutting position is specified next after completing the
specifications on the cutting condition screen.
POS = (1: Yes, 0: No)
Use the cursor to specify the shape to be cut.
The cursor flashes to indicate shapes which can be cut.
Press CURSOR ↑ or CURSOR ↓, or key in “0” to move the cursor.
When the cursor indicates the shape that you wish to cut, press NEXT
PAGE or key in “1” to specify this shape.
When the shape has been specified, you will be asked whether the
same tool is to be used for cuts at other positions.
Use this tool to cut at another position tool . . . . . . CN =
(1: Yes, 0: No)
If you key in “1” in response, the cutting conditions screen reappears.
If you key in “0” in response, you return to the screen for selecting the
type of machining.
130
B.1.3.2 1) Center drilling

Explanatory drawing of
cutting conditions
Dotted line: Rapid

traverse
Solid line: Cutting
feed
2) Drilling
a) Machining method 1
b) Machining method 2
131
c) Machining method 3
3) Diagram showing conditions for C–axis tap machining

a) Blind hole
b) Through hole
132
4) Grooving
a) Side (Z–axis direction)
b) Side (C–axis direction)
c) End face
133
B.1.3.3 (1) The blind hole and through hole settings

Blind hole and through The blind hole and through hole settings in the C axis component
hole shape definition are only used in tapping machining. All other hole
machining is restricted to through holes.
(2) Details of blind hole and through hole settings
The effects of blind hole and through hole settings are shown below
for different hole machining processes.
Indicates the position of the tip of the tool.
(1) Center sink machining (2) Drilling
(3) Blind hole tapping (4) Through hole tapping
The tool stops with a clearance of C2

before the depth of the hole.
134
B.2
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
SPECIFICATION FOR
5700 SERIES
B.2.1 The automatic process specification is a function in which NC data are

Outline prepared just by inputting the blank figure and parts figure.
The function was named so because the specification of machining
process in menu number 4, “Machining definition”, or cutting direction
or cutting area are decided automatically in the given order. With this
function, inputs in menu number 4 are decreased greatly.
Processing with this function are done based on tooling information or
setting data, so these data must be set in advance.
Processes prepared with this function can, of course, be checked or
corrected by manual operation.
The C–axis machining process is also automatically processed, (10T–F
only).
B.2.2 (1) The screen “MACHINING DEFINITION (type of machining)” is

Operation displayed and the software key “AUTO” is displayed on the screen
when the menu number 4 is selected. Press this software key to start
the automatic process setting function.
Also, if a process has already been prepared, select the menu number
4 and then the screen for “MACHINING DEFINITION (machining
plan)” appears.
Press the software key “NEW” and then the software key “AUTO” is
displayed.
[AUTO]
135
(2) Press the “AUTO” and then the “PROCESS SETTING” screen is
displayed. The data being displayed at this point includes the
machining method group number (No.000) and the description of
machining procedure data of that group (No.100 – 130, No.200 – 230,
No.300 – 330).
If the machining method group number of setting data is undefined at
this time, the machining procedure data of group number set by blank
figure is displayed.
(3) Press the software key “EXEC” if the machining method group and
machining procedure data displayed on the screen are proper.
(4) Input the machining group number for the “MG =” question when
modifying the machining method group.
(5) Move the cursor by the software key “CURSOR ↓” to modify the
description of machining procedure data when modifying the
description of machining procedure data.
The meaning of software key used for modifying operation is as follows:

[CURSOR °] [CURSOR ±] . . Set the cursor to the position where
machining procedure is deleted or
inserted.
[PROC DELETE] . . . . . . . . . It deletes the process where the cursor is
blinking.
[INSERT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert a new process before the process
where a cursor is blinking.
i) When this software key is pressed, the software key for setting the
type of process appears.
ii) The software key for setting the type of process changes cyclicly
by pressing the software key “ ”.
iii) Press the software key of process type inserted to allow a new
process to be inserted.
iv) Press the software key “ ” to allow the insertion mode to be
released.
136
[ESCAPE] . . . Press this key to return to the menu screen. At this time,
the details where correction has been made remain on the
main memory but are not registered on the sub memory.
[EXEC] . . . . . Automatically create the process according to the
machining procedure data displayed.
137
(6) When the processing begins, various data and tooling information,
material data set in the setting data will automatically decide
machining processes, tools, and machining area. The screen will
display how the material shape changes according to the automatic
specification. (The screen proceeds automatically.)
For the C–axis processing, the change of blank material being cut
is not displayed, but the machining area is indicated by the cursor.
(7) After preparing all machining process, the screen will display the
list of the process, and stops. Press the [NEXT PAGE] soft key to
continue it to NC data preparation. To check or to correct data,
select correction mode in menu number 4, press the [CURSOR
FORWRD] or [CURSOR BACK] soft keys to the necessary
machining process, and press the [INPUT] key or the [NEXT
PAGE] soft key.
138
B.2.3
Setting
B.2.3.1 Preset the data used in automatic process specification, via the setting
Setting data screen. To display the setting screen, first press the “DATA SET” soft key,
and then key in 2 “INPUT”.
(1) Machining order data (100 – 129, 200 – 229, 300 – 329)
Set data to indicate what order the machining is to be done.
The setting of the machining process is done with numbers. The
numbers and the machining processes correspond as follows:
1. CENTER DRILLING
2. DRILLING
3. ROUGH FACING
4. ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE
5. ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE
6. SEMI–FINISHING FACING
7. SEMI–FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
8. SEMI–FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
9. FINISHING FACING
10. FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
11. FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
12. GROOVING FACING
13. GROOVING OF OUTER FIGURE
14. GROOVING OF INNER FIGURE
15. NECKING OF OUTER FIGURE
16. NECKING OF INNER GIGURE
17. THREADING FACING
18. THREADING OF OUTER FIGURE
19. THREADING OF INNER FIGURE
Above are turning processes.
20 to 29 are not used.
30. FACE CENTER DRILLING
31. SIDE CENTER DRILLING
32. FACE DRILLING
33. SIDE DRILLING
34. FACE TAPPING
35. SIDE TAPPING
36. C–AXIS FACE GROOVING
37. C–AXIS SIDE GROOVING
Above are C–axis machining.
FAPT performs automatic specification of machining process according
to the order set here. Machining processes not set here cannot
automatically be prepared.
139
Table B.2.3.1(a) Machining order data
No. Format Initial value Descriptions Remarks
100 200 300 Integer Undefined 1st machining process setting
101 201 301 Integer 2 2nd machining process setting
102 202 302 Integer 3 3rd machining process setting
103 203 303 Integer 4 4th machining process setting

(NOTE)
107 207 307 Integer 11 8th machining process setting Turning

(NOTE)
119 219 319 Integer 36 20th machining process setting C–axis
machining
120 220 320 Integer 31 21st machining process setting
121 221 321 Integer 33 22nd machining process setting
122 222 322 Integer 35 23rd machining process setting
124 224 324 Integer Undefined 25th machining process setting
140
NOTE
Set the initial value and machining procedure
correspondence described on the previous page.
(2) Manual input flag data (Nos.130 – 166, 230 – 266, 330 – 366)
These data will have no meaning unless the machining process is set
in the machining procedure data.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MPP MCD MCC MTS
MTS Set whether or not to perform manual tool selection

1 : Tool selection is done manually.
The automatic proceeding of the tool data question screen will halt, so
tool number must be input manually.
0 : Tool selection is done automatically.
The appropriate tool will be selected from the tooling information.
MCC Set whether or not to manually input cutting conditions.
1 : Cutting conditions are input manually.
The automatic proceeding of cutting conditions question screen will
halt, so input cutting conditions manually.
0 : Cutting conditions are set automatically.
MCD Set whether or not to manually set cutting direction and area.
1 : Cutting direction and area are set manually.
0 : Cutting direction and area are decided automatically.
MPP Set whether or not to input the passing point manually
1 : Automatic processing of the passing point screen will halt, so passing
point can be input manually.
0 : Processings are automatically prepared without the passing point
defined.
141
Table 3.1(b) Manual input flag data
No. Format Initial Value Remarks
130 230 330 Bit specification 00000000 CENTER DRILL
131 231 331 Bit specification 00000000 DRILLING
132 232 332 Bit specification 00000000 ROUGH FACING
133 233 333 Bit specification 00000000 ROUGH OF OUTER FIG
134 234 334 Bit specification 00000000 ROUGH OF INNER FIG
135 235 335 Bit specification 00000000 SEMI–FINISH OF FACING
136 236 336 Bit specification 00000000 SEMI–FINISH OF OUTER

FIG
137 237 337 Bit specification 00000000 SEMI–FINISH OF INNER

FIG
138 238 338 Bit specification 00000000 FINISH FACING
139 239 339 Bit specification 00000000 FINISH OF OUTER FIG
140 240 340 Bit specification 00000000 FINISH OF INNER FIG
141 241 341 Bit specification 00000000 GROOVE FACING
142 242 342 Bit specification 00000000 GROOVE OF INNER FIG
143 243 343 Bit specification 00000000 GROOVE OF OUTER FIG
144 244 344 Bit specification 00000000 NECK OF INNER FIG
145 245 345 Bit specification 00000000 NECK OF OUTER FIG
146 246 346 Bit specification 00000000 THREAD FACING
147 247 347 Bit specification 00000000 THREAD OF INNER FIG
148 248 348 Bit specification 00000000 THREAD OF OUTER FIG
149 249 349 Unused

to to to
158 258 358
159 259 359 Bit specification 00000000 FACE CENTER DRILLING
160 260 360 Bit specification 00000000 SIDE CENTER DRILLING
161 261 361 Bit specification 00000000 FACE DRILLING
162 262 362 Bit specification 00000000 SIDE DRILLING
163 263 363 Bit specification 00000000 FACE TAPPING
164 264 364 Bit specification 00000000 SIDE TAPPING
165 265 365 Bit specification 00000000 C–AXIS FACE GROOVING
166 266 366 Bit specification 00000000 C–AXIS SIDE MACHINING
142
The above setting data are divided into three groups.

1st group: Uses data of number 100 – 166.
2nd group: Uses data of number 200 – 266.
3rd group: Uses data of number 300 – 366.
This means that three types of machining processes can be preset. The
value of setting number 0 decides data of which group are to be used.
(3) Machining method decision data
No.0 Group selection (1 – 3)
Initial value 1 (Setting data of the 1st group is used.)
When this value is undefined, the group is decided from
the blank shape. When the blank is a bar, grout 1 is
selected, when it is a pipe, group 2 is selected, and when
it is of special blank, group 3 is selected.
No.1 Not used
No.2 Not used
No.3 Coefficient 1 for drilling
Initial value: 1
If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is equal to or less
than the setting value of No.3, machining is done by
method 1.
No.4 Coefficient 2 for drilling
Initial value: 101
If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is larger than
number 3 and equal to or less than the setting value of
No.4, machining is done by method 2. If larger than
No.4, machining is done by method 3.
No.5 Unused.
No.10 Presetting of center boring depth D
No.11 Presetting of finishing margin TW of the grooving width
No.12 Presetting of finishing margin TB of the grooving width
No.20 Coefficient 1 on C–axis drilling
Initial value 1
If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is less than the
value of setting value No.2, cutting method 1 is used.
No.21 Coefficient 2 on C–axis drilling
Initial value 1
If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is larger than the
value of No.20 and less than the value of No.21, cutting
method 2 is used. If it is larger than the value of No.21,
cutting method 3 is used.
No.22 Preset value of D1 in C–axis center drilling
143
B.2.3.2 The tool to be used is automatically selected from the tool data. As a
Tool data and tooling means of selection, the process type (KP) registered in the tool data per
tool is referred to. The value of KP of each tool must always be set before
information
executing the automatic process decision function. It is possible to set 3
types of KP per tool.
KP Process type
1 Center boring
2 Drilling
3 End roughing
4 Outside diameter roughing
5 Inside diameter roughing
6 End intermediate finishing
7 Outside diameter intermediate finishing
8 Inside diameter intermediate finishing
9 End finishing
10 Outside diameter finishing
11 Inside diameter finishing
12 End grooving
13 Outside diameter grooving
14 Inside diameter grooving
15 Outside diameter necking
16 Inside diameter necking
17 Front threading
18 Outside diameter threading
19 Inside diameter threading
Tooling information is automatically created anew if the tool is
automatically selected. All the previously created tooling information is
deleted.
As the tool selection number (TN) and the tool offset number (TM) of the
data of the tooling information created anew, the executed–process
number is set as it is. For example, the tool selection number of the tool
used in process 01 becomes 01. As other setting data, the data existing
in the tool data is used as it is. The automatic process decision is not
executed well, therefore, unless setting data is set accurately in the tool
data.
The turret number is not automatically set if there are more than 1 tool
rests. It is to be set manually by the operator.
144
B.2.4
Cautions and Notes
NOTE
Facing is always done from the +X direction to the –X
direction.
Rough machining Finishing
CAUTION
If outer figure machining is set to the machining procedure
data without setting the facing, machining will be done
regarding the face as the outer figure.
Rough machining Finishing
145
CAUTION
Finishing of Outer Figure
If machining processes are set in the machining procedure
data in the order of “FINISHING FACING” and “FINISHING
OF OUTER FIGURE”, the outer diameter part is cut by using
the same tool after cutting the end face from the outside to
the center as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (a) when there exists no
inner diameter part.
When an inner diameter part exists, cutting is done
continuously at the end face part through outer diameter
part as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (b)
Fig. B.2.4 (a) Fig. B.2.4 (b)
CAUTION
If the pocket machining leaves some remainder, tool is
automatically changed, and the remainder will not be cut.
The remainder must be cut later, preparing the machining
process manually by monitoring the screen.
146
NOTE
1 Multiple neckings and threadings can be done, if the same
tool is used.
2 In necking, (a) and (b) of the following figure can be
machined, but (c) or (d) where back handed tools are
required, cannot be machined. In these cases, add
machining process manually, after automatic machining
process decision.
Fig. B.2.4 (c)
NOTE
Cannot be used for chaser turret.
CAUTION
If a center drilling process is set as a machining procedure
data, a center drilling process is always prepared
irrespective of the part shape. However, the center drilling
process is not generated, if the center drilling tool is not
loaded into tooling data, even if center drilling is included in
”Machining procedure data” of setting data. When the
center drilling process is not required, do not set a center
drilling process on the machining procedure data. Or delete
the center drilling process as required after preparing all the
processes.
147
NOTE
When a drilling tool with the diameter equal to the inside
diameter width is used, no inside diameter machining is
performed even when inside diameter machining operation
has been set in the machining procedure setting.
In Fig. B.2.4 (d) example, no inside diameter machining
process itself is generated.
In Fig. B.2.4 (e) example, inside diameter machining is
generated, but it is only in the region where the starting point
is A and the end point is B.
Fig. B.2.4 (d) Fig. B.2.4 (e)
NOTE
When the starting point of inside diameter cutting is on the
outside diameter of meterial as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (f) below,
the operation is as follows.
(a)When Drill → I.D is set in the machining procedure data,
drilling process is prepared, but no inside diameter
machining is prepared.
(b)If drilling is not set in the machining procedure data,
inside diameter machining is executed.
Fig. B.2.4 (f)
148
Revision Record
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE

(Series 15–MODEL B, Series 16 CAP II) OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B–61804E–2)
Addition of Series 16–TB

04 Aug., ’94 Addition of “IX. Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION”
Addition of “XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING”
Addition of “APPENDIX B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH

03 Dec., ’93
SYSTEM”
Addition of 16–TC CAP II, 18–TC CAP II, 16i–TA CAP II,
and 18i–TA CAP II
Addition of “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”
02 Sep., ’93 Total revision Addition of WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE
Addition of Following functions
D Function for automatically setting area division points
D Function for preparing the next tool
05 Aprr., ’98
A 98
D Output function for interpolation rigid tapping
D G85/G89 boring cycle
D In–feed machining in C–axis face milling process
01 Dec., ’90 D Back machining FAPT
D Double sided machining
D Animated simulation function II
Alteration of MTF parameters
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

Conversational Automatic Programming Function Ii For Lathe Operator's Manual (B-61804e-2 - 05) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Conversational Automatic Programming Function Ii For Lathe Operator's Manual (B-61804e-2 - 05) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Convertional Automatic Programming

Function II for Lathe

2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

3. NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

II. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN FAPT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT

2. START OF SYMBOLIC FAPT PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3. EXECUTION OF SYMBOLIC FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3.4.4 Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION (2–PATH LATHE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

6. AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15–TTFB ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

IV. VARIOUS FILE AND DATA

2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

V. SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA

2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

3. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

VI. AUXILIARY JOBS

2. CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT (MM/INCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

3. CHANGING THE NUMBER OF REGISTERED TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

VII. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT

1.11 INTERFERENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

2. CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

VIII. C–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION

2. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

3. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION (MENU 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

4. MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

6. CAUTIONS ON C–AXIS FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

7. IN–FEED MACHINING IN C–AXIS FACE MILLING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

IX. Y–AXIS FAPT FUNCTION

2. PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

3. SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS (MENU 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

4. DEFINING MACHINING (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

5. ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

7. NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

X. BACK MACHINING FAPT

2.2 PARAMETERS, ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

3. EXAMPLE OF NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

XI. AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION

2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

3. SETTING THE MACHINING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION AND

5. SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING

2. DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

3. DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

4. HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

5. PROCESSING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

6. NC DATA PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

7. MACHINING TIME DISPLAY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

8. SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

XIII. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II

2. FLOW OF ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

3. OPERATION PROCEDURE FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

4. ANIMATED SIMULATION SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

5. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

D Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

This manual is for conversational automatic programming function.

Chapter III describes the programming and operation by Symbolic FAPT.